THE 

WILLIAM  R.  PERKINS 
LIBRARY 

OF 

DUKE  UNIVERSITY 


RIFLE 


AND 


INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


REVISED  AND  IMPROVED 


BY 


BRIO.  GEN.  W.  J,  HARDEE,  C.  S.  ARMY 


Fublhhed  by  crcW  I  KM?  for  the  u*c  of  the  North  Cnrnlint  TrOO^ft. 


RALEIGH,  N 

.'(•UN  siki.may  RDI 

m 


RIFLE  AND  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLK    F]  RST 


AUTICLK  FIRST. 

Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  ord  r  of  Ualllc. 

1.  A  Hi:tv'\;  1  of  ten  companies,  which  will  habitual!  I  from 

to  le  t,  in  the  following  order:  first,  aixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third,  eighth,  fifth, 

teath,  ?  vn,'  '.linn. 

v.     '  ■   niei  ill''  same  principle  will  be  observed,  vis 

:iptain  will  command  t  mpany,  the  second  captain  the  left  eompaojr, 

li/'  tlii;  1  captain  the  right  9  panv,  and  so  on. 

S.  The  compai  I  from  right  to  left,  /?>-<,'  company, 

ttamd  companj,  ki  .     This  di  signation  will  be  obserred  in  the  manoeuvre*. 
4.  Thi-  hr«-t  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever  their  denomination,  will  form  the 

,./  divine*  ;  ami  so  on,  to  the  1'  it. 
.">.  Kach  companj  will  he  divide  1  in*  i  two  equal  pai '-.  which  will  be  designn' 
the  first  on,  counting  right;  ami  each  platoon,  in  like 

mtatter,  will  b  subdivided  Into  t* 

i  manoeuvre  part  of  a  regiment,  comp 

<  '  two  or  more  com)..',  ,n. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  guard  i 

ompany.    Tl  v.  ami  all  on  its  right,  will  1 

nominated  the  right  wing  of  the  battalion  ;   the  remaining  companies  the  left  rring. 

irmation  of  ..  mJcs  :  and  each  company  will  b*  foi 

Into  two  ranks,  iu  the  following  manner:  tb 
rank,  and  on  the  i  Ighf  and  left  of  platoons,  sc<  ordiag  to  height :  th 

lest  man  will  form  the  first  file.  th<  len  will  fori    I 

.  «  hicfa  will  :  •'!  tnd  th< 

■  rnan. 

I,  Theoddan<  ■  iny,fromrhj 

■ 

|SJU  Th«  distant  *•  from  one  rank  to  nsotlstr  will  b  from 

ti,.  i  -  to  the  b.if  k-  oi  lei  the  front  i 

II.  ivriag,  tbe  ilion  will  slwavi  I 

■ 

/'"       of 

■ 

"owing  mann<  t  : 
IS. 

■ 

IS.  The  i 

inf. 

17.  1 ' 

-eonnd  pi  stows. 


I  FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

1ft.  The  miij  «rr7.-anf,  opposite  the  second  lilo  from  the  left  of  the  company.  In 
the  manauvres  he  will  be  designated  Uft  tjuulc  of  the  company. 

20.  Tlir  tkird  -"-ryrnii/,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the  lecond  1 

2).  Th'' /•mrtk  ttrgeamtf  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

'.'.'.   Tin.-  fifth  wtrgeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  t'.ie  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  battalion,  the  second  sergeant  will  be  posted 
in  the  front  rank,  and  on  the  left  of  the  battr.lion. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  as  prescribed  in  No,  8, 

85.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — officers  by  sergeant;;,  ami  ser- 
geants l.'v  corporals.  The  colonel  may  detach  a  first  lieutenant  Iron  one  company  to 
command  another,  of  which  both  the  captain  and  first  lieut  r»  it  ar  absent  :  bu1  th.s 
authority  will  give  no  right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  so  detached. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  are  supposed  to  be 
mounted,  and  on  active  service  shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adjutant,  When  the  bat- 
talion is  manoeuvring,  will  be  ou  foot. 

27.  The  colonel  will  take  po.-t  thirty  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  file  closers,  and  oppo- 
site the  centre  of  the  battalion.  This  distance  will  be_reduced  whenever  there  is  a 
reduction  in  the  front  of  the  battalion. 

2--.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  be  opposite  the  centres  of  the  right 
and  lefknrings  respectively,  and  twelve  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  op|  o-.ite  the  right  and  left  of  the  bat- 
talion, respectively,  and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  re- 
spectively, in  the  manoeuvres. 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  latter 
bv  the  major.  If  all  the  field  officers  be  absent,  the  senior  captain  will  command  the 
battalion  ;  but  if  either  be  present,  he  will  not  call  the  senior  captain  to  act  U  field 
officer,  except  in  case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  staff  officers,  in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of 
the  colonel,  and  three  paces  in  his  rear. 

33.  The  quarter-master  sergeant,  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank  of  the  field  music, 
and  two  paces  on  the  right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band, 

34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks,  and  posted  twelve  paeoi  in  rear  of 
the  file  closers— the  left  opposite  the  centre  of  the  left  centre  company,  The  senior 
principal  musician  will  be  two  paces  in  front  of  the  field  muiic,  and  th  *  other  two 
paces  in  the  rear. 

35  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be  drawn  up  in  two  or  four  ranks, 
according  to  its  numbers,  and  posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  music,  having  one 
of  the  principal  musicians  at  its  head. 

Color-guard. 

3G.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be  composed  of  eight  corporals,  and  posted 
on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  company,  of  which  company,  for  the  time  being,  the 
guard  will  make  a  part. 

37.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  sergeant,  to  be  selected  by  the  colonel, 
who  will  be  called,  for  the  time,  color4tearer,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals,  respec- 
tively, on  his  right  and  left ;  the  rear  rank  will  be  composed  of  the  three  corporals 
next  in  rank  ;  and  the  three  remaining  corporals  will  be  posted  in  their  rear,  and  on 
the  line  of  the  file  closers.  The  left  guide  of  the  color  company,  when  these  three 
last  named  corporals  are  in  the  rauk  of  file  closers,  will  be  immediately  on  their  left. 

38.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies  present,  there  will  be  no  color-guard, 
and  no  display  of  colors,  except  it  may  be  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  be  selected  from  those  most  distinguished 
for  regularitv  and  precision,  as  well  in  their  position*  under  arms  as  in  their  marching. 
The  latter  advantage,  and  a  just  carriage  of  the  person,  arc  to  be  more  particularly 
sought  for  in  the  selection  of  the  color-bearer. 


INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION.  5 

General  Gui> iee. 

40.  There  will  be  two  general  guides  in  each  battalion,  (elected,  for  th"  time,  by  the 

colonel,  from  among  the  servants  (other  than  first  sergeants)  the  most  distinguished 
for  carriage  under  arms,  and  accuracy  in  mareliw-,;. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  he  respectively  denominated,  in  the  tnanCBUTO  right 
general  guide,  and  left  general  guide,  and  be  posted  in  the  line  of  til.  closer*  ;  ths  liist 
in  rear  of  the  right,  and  the  second  in  rear  of  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion. 

ARTICLE   FECOND. 

/      ruction  of  the  Battalion. 

42.  Everv  eosnmauding  cilieer  is  responsible  for  the  instruction  of  hi-  mmand. 
I!    vrill  assemble  the  i  ether  for  theoreUoal  and  practical  instrncl 

a*  be  may  judge  necessary,  and  when   unable  to  attend  to  this  duty  in  person,  it  will 
be  discharged  by  t  r  next  in  rank. 

43.  Captain?  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and  practicaHnstruction 
of  the  non-commissioned  officers,  and  the  adjutant  for  the  instruction  of  the  non-com- 
missiontd  staff     To  this  end,  they  will  require  these  tactics  to  be  studied  and  recited 

D  by  lesson  ;  and  when  instruction  isgiren  on  the  ground,  each  non-coi   I 
officer,  as  he  explains  a  movement,  should  be  required  to  put  it  into  practical  operation. 

44.  The  non-commissioned  officers  should  also  be  practised  in  giving  commands. 
Each  ooaunaad,  in  a  lesson,  at  the  theoretical  instruction,  should  first  be  giv<  n  by  the 
instructor,  and  thi  a  repeated,  in  succession,  bv  the  non-comroissiom  •  that 
while  they  become  habituated  to  the  commands,  uniformity  may  be  established  in  the 
mann<r  of  giving  them. 

45.  In  the  school  or  the  soldier,  the  company  officers  will  be  the  instructors  of  the 
squads:  but  if  thi  re  •<  a  sufficient  number  of  company  officers  itdli- 
gent  sergeants  mi  Muted;  and  two  or  tin  ind  r  sergeant  instruc- 
tors, be  superinteri''                    MUM  time,  by  an  ofl 

46.  In  the  scho  rnpany,  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  maj,,r.  Tir.der  the 
Colonel,  will  be  the  priii  >al  instructors,  substituting  frequently  he  captain  of  the 
company,  and  sometime  one  of  the  lieutenants;  the  substitute,  I  far  as  practicable, 
being  superintended  by  one  of  the  principals. 

47.  In  the  school  of  '  ■  battalion,  the  brigadier  general  may  nstitute  himself  the 
principal  instructor,  frequently  substituting  the  colonel  of  tn  taHon,  sometimes 
the  lieutenant  colonel                        id  twice  or  thi  ice,  in  the  sanr 

each  of  the  three  senior  ca  >tains.     In  this  school,  also,  the  i       '.tut'1  will  alv 
if  practicable,  be  SUporint  ■•    •    I   by  the  brigadier  general   Of   t  I  met,  • 

of  a  captain  being  the  li  by  the  lieutenant 

4f>.  Individual  Instruction  b  tag  the  basis  of  the  instruction  ol     impanl  s,  ot  which 
that  of  the  regiment  depen'  '.  and  the  first   principles   baring 
Upon  this  individual  inetruc    i  n,  classes  of  recruits  should  b    ..  ,  with  the  gn 

care. 

4f).   In-tructors  will  explain,  ;r)  a  few  dear  and  ]  '  movement  I 

BXMUted;   and  not   to  d  the  memory  of  the  men,  will  alu 

■  ms  to  explain  the  satr.e  prim 
60.  Thoy  should  often  job  r  the 

men  by  an  animal  .  as  soon  as 

that  which  they  command  ha-  i  oen  ex.  rated  in 

M.  Tl  hould  onli   l'i  fixed  wl  tack  or 

•  ■  will  be  <  s<  cutcd  w i"l  out  I 

t.ibr>n  will  cause  tbi  signal  I  • 

mmand,  sm  •  ;>lacc-  th^p  .         •  posifioa 

thry  ware  before  the  signal. 

/       rucl  rs. 

e  instruct 
The  colonel  will  often  practice  them  in   matching  sr,d  i 

will   carefully   ei  ;•»  equal   in   length,  and   s«  illness. 

Th"y  will  mlso  be  exercised  in  the  '!  -'.able  quick  step . 


t)  INST] 

M.  Tli^  in-tn ■'  ill  include  all  the  Title*  in  toll  system  of  drill,  and 

latiet  in  peace  ami  war. 
II  make  1  <  i  -  |uainted  %v  i  t !  1  the  bug] 

a:, 'I  should,  by  practice,  be  anabli  try,  to  sound  them.     This  knowle 

of  vital  importance  on  actaal  service  in 

- 

Ipline  :i n-1  efl 
and  n  ith  care,  and  properly  in- 

■  !  in  ai!  the  duties  appertaining  to  their  i 
57.  Their  theon  tical  in- 1 1  notion  should  include  ill  ■  School  of  •' 
of  the  Company,  and  the  Drill  for  Skirmish)  hould  likewise  know  all  the 

.  and  the  regulations  prescribing  I  arrison  and  in 

aign. 

ts  from  t lie  corporals  in  h'^  company  those  wlmm  hejudg* 
Imittod  to  the  theoretical  instruction  oi  the  sergeants. 

Instruction  of  fj< 

Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the  Sohool  ofth  iS  such 

their  duties  in  garrison  and  In  i 

The  captain  selects  from  1  is  con  pany"  ■  few  privat  s,  who  muj 
the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  corporals. 

61.    I  ants  and  corporals  is  intended  principally  to  qualify 

them  for  the  instruction  of  the  privates,  they  Bbould  be  taught  nol  only  to  execute, 
but  to  explain  intelligibly  everything  they  may  be  required  I  1 1 

Commands. 

There  an  r. 

C'2.  The  connnand  caution,  which  is  attention. 

urn/,  which  indicates  the  movement  which  u  to  be 
l  ted. 
1  i.  The  command  of  •  tecution,  such  as  ntareA,  or  halt,  or,  in  the  manual  of  arms, 
the  part  of  command  which  causes  an  execution. 

86.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a  loudness  propor- 
tioned to  the  number  of  men  nnder  instruction. 

The  command  attention   is  pronounced  at  the   top  of  the  voice,   dwelling  on  the 
last  syllable. 
I  ,".  The  command  of  •  ■>■  ittion  will  he  pronounced  in  a  tone  firm  and  brief. 

The  commands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory  commands  are  herein  distin- 
guished by  italic*,  those  of  i  aecuUontfby  oara  lu. 
6  ■    Fl    ■•■  preparatory  onmmands  which,  from  their  Length,  are  difficult  to  be  pro- 
■  ■•  d  at  once,  must  Do  divided  into  two  or  three  part-,  with  an  ascending  progres- 
sion in  the  tone  of  command,  but  always  in  mch  ■  manner  thai  the  tone  of  execution 
may  be  more  energetic  and  elevated  :  the  divisions  are  indicate  d  by  a  hyphen.    The 
;  which  are  placed  in  a  parenthesis,  are  nol  pronounced. 


II.   OF   THE  SOLDIER 

TITLE  SECOND. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 

General  Rules  and  division  of  tl      5         '  of  the  Soldu  r, 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  Being  the  individual  and  progressive  instruction  ol 
recruit-,  the  instructor  never  requires  B  movement  to  be  ex<  cut<  '1  unl  il  be  b 

•  explanation  of  it  :  and  be  executes,  himself,  the  movement  which  he< 
so  as  to  jnin  example  to  precept     He  ■  lit  to  take,  by  b 

position  which  is  explained—  teaches  him  to  rectify  it  only  when  required  by  liis  want 
of  intelligence— and  sees  that  all  the  movements  arf  performed  without  precipitation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before  passing  to  another.   After  the' 
been  properly  executed  in  the  order  laid  down  in  each  lesson,  t! 

confines  himself  to  that  order;  on  the  contrary,  he  should  change  it,  that  he  may 
judge  the  intelligence  of  the  nun. 

72.  The  Instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the  <  nd  of  each  part  of  the  lesson*,  ard 
oftener,  if  lie  thinks  ]  '  ially  at  the  commencement }  for  this  purpose  he 
commands  Rest. 

73.  At  the  command  Rest,  the  soldier  is  no  longer  required  to  preserve  immobility" 
or  to  remain  in  his  place.  ]|'  the  instructor  «  Iahes  merely  to  relieve  the  attention  of 
the  recruit,  he  commands,  in  place — Rest  :  the  soldier  tl  tnen  not  required  to  preserve 
his  immobility,  hut  he  ;>  or  his  fleet  in  it-  i  I 

71.  When  the  instructor"  immence  the  instruction,  he  command? — At- 

tfnt:  ;i,  remains  motionless,  and 

tix(«  Us  attention. 

7.">.  The  School  of  the  Soldier  will  be  divided  into  three  part? :  the  first,  compre- 
hending what  onght  to  be  taught  to  recruits  without  are  uiual 
of  arms,  the  loadings  and  firings;  the  third,  the  principles  of  alignment,  the  march 
by  tbe front,  the  diffi  i                  the   march  by  the  Hank. 

and  those  of  change  of  direction;  also,  long  marches   in  double  quick  time  ai.  I 
run. 

Kach  part  will  be  divided  into  lessons,  as  follows : 
part  I 
1.  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms;  Evan  right,  left  and  front. 
/  ■   ".n  2.    Facings. 
Lr.'inn  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common  and  quick  time. 

iples  of  the  direct  r\>  p  in  doable  quick  time  and  the  run. 

TAl    • 

■  on  i.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms, 

'.  in  f'nir  t,  •  n  ill. 

I.rtton  l.   i  -ank. 

/ ' 

■  c.  Bayot 

r  Ti;mn. 

alignment. 

/  "■    .  . . 

/'<"/n  3.  The  maroh  by  the  ^ 

• 


8  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 

PART  FIRST. 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one  recruit,  at  a  time;  but  three  or  four  „ 
may  be  united,  when  the  number   he  gnat,  compared   with  that  of  the  instructors. 
In  this  case,  the  recruits  will  be  placed  in  a  single  rank,  at  one  pace  from  each  other. 
In  this  part,  the  recruits  will  be  without  arms. 

Lbmoi  i. 
Position  of  the  Soldier. 

78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as  the  conformation  of  the  man  will 
permit ; 

The  bet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  ea  b  other  something  less  than  a 
r i _" 1 1 1  angle  ; 

The  knees  straight  without  rtiffhi 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  forward  ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally  ; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally ; 

The  elbows  near  the  body; 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front,  the  little  finger  behind  the  seam 
of  the  pantaloons  ; 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without  constrain; ; 
The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it  ; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  and  striking  the  ground  about  the  distance  of 
fifteen  paces. 

Remarks  on  the  Position  of  (he  Soldier. 

Jleeh  on  the  name  line  ; 

79.  Because,  if  one  were  in  rear  of  the  other,  the  shoulder  on  that  side  would  be 
thrown  back,  or  the  position  of  the  soldier  would  be  constrained. 

J/reli  m<>re  or  hi»  rbi.,,1  ; 

Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  hare  legs  with  large  calres,  cannot 

without  constraint,  uiukc  their  heels  touch  while  standi ug. 

The  feel  equally  turned  out,  and  not  forming  too  large  an  angle. 
Because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more  than   th  i  other,  a  shoulder  would  be 
deranged,  and  if  both  fat  he  ton  much  turned  out,  it  would  Dot  be  practicable  to 
incline   the   upper  part  of  the  body   forward    without    rende  ing    the   whole   position 
unsteady. 

h'uf*   e.rt/ndul    irithont  ntijfntit; 

Because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue  would  be  unavoidable. 
The  body  erect  on  the  hij>*  ; 

bV  MHJO,  it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  petition.  The  instructor  will  observe  that  many 
recruits  have  the  bad  habit  of  dropping  a  shoulder,  of  drawing  in  a  side,  or  of  advan- 
cing a  hip,  particularly  the  right,  when  under  arms.  These  are  defects  he  will  labor 
to  correct. 

The   ii],j:cr  purl  of  the  body   inclining  forward  ; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposed  to  do  the  reverse,  tn  project  the  belly, 
and  to  throw  back  the  shoulders,  when  they  wish  to  hold  thcmsiives  erect,  from  which 
re.uh   great  inconveniences  in  marching.  '  The  habit  of  inclining  forward  the  apper 

Cart  of  the  bodf  is  to  Important  to  contract,  that  the  instructor  must  enforce  it  at  the 
aginoing,  particularly  with  reoruits  who  have  naturally  the  opposite  habit. 

Shoulder*  "jtiore. 
Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the  line  of  the  breast,  and  the  back 
arched  (the  defect  called  round  ikoultlerod,  not  uncommon  among  recruits),  the  man 
cannot  align  himself,  nor  use  his  piece  with  address.  It  is  Important,  then,  to  correct 
this  defect,  and  necessary  to  that  end  that  the  coat  should  set  easv  about  the  shoulders 
and  arm  pits;  but  In  correcting  this  defect,  the  instructor  will  take  care  that  the 
shoulders  be  not  thrown  too  much  to  the  rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to  project, 
and  the  small  of  the  back  to  bo  curved. 


BOTOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.  9 

The  armt  hanging  naturally,  e'lioir*  near  the  hotly,  the  palm  of  the.  hand  a  little  turned 

to  the  front,  the  little  jinyer  behind  the  team  of  the  pantaloons  ; 

Because,  these  position?  arc  equally  important  to  the  »houhlcr-arm*,  and  to  prevent 

tlio  man  from  occupying  more  space  'n  a  rank  than  is  necessary  to  a  free  use  of  the 

piece  ;   they  haye,  moreover,  the  advantage  of  keeping  in  the  shoulders. 

T  he  fa<-c  ttraight  to  the  front,  and  irithont  rutrnint  ; 

Became,  if  there  be  itiffnoH  in  the  latter  position,  it  would  communicate  itself  to 
the  whole  of  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  embarrass  its  movements,  and  give  pain 
and  fatigue. 

Eye*  dircrt  to  the  front  f 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  mi  nns  of  maintaining  the  shoulders  in  line — an  Mf  ntial 
cbject,  to  be  insisted  on  and  attained. 

80.   The  instructor  having  p-iven  the  recruit  the  position  of  the  soldier,  without 
arms,  will  now  teach  him  the  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes.     He  will  command  : 
1.   Eye*—  RionT.     2.   Front. 

II,   At  the  word  right,  the  recruit  will  turn   tlie  head  gently,  so  as  to  bring 
inn'r  corner  of  tli  •■  left  eye  in   a  line  with  the  buttons  of  th-  coat,  the  •  yes  fixed  on 
the  iine  of  the  eye.-  of  the  men  In,  ot  supposed  to  be  in,  the  same  rank. 

82.  At  the  second  Command,  the  head  will  resume  the  direct  or  habitual  position. 

83.  The  movement  of  Eye* — Left  will  be  executed  by  inverse  means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that  the  movement  of  the  head  does 
not  dc-ange  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders,  which  will  happen  if  the  bkitcid'  nt  of 
the  foimer  be  ton  sudden. 

Vhen  th"  instructor  shall  wish  the  recruit  to  pass  from  the  state  of  attention 
to  thatof  ease,  ho  will  command: 

86.  T«,  cause  a  resumption  of  the  habitual  position,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.    Attcntiun.      2.    BQOAO. 

it.  At  the  firs*  word,  the  reeruit  will  fix  his  attention  ;  at  the  second,  he  will 
resume  th»  prescrib  <!  position  and  steadiness. 

s   II. 

Faring*. 

■ad  left  will  be  executed  in  one  time,  or  pause.     The  in- 
struetnr  iriU command: 

1.    8f*4&     2.    Right  for  /'//]— Facr. 

immand,  raise  the  right   fool  slightly,   turn  rn  the  lefl  heel, 
raising  th<   I 
on  the  same  li-.<-. 

10.  The  full  It  i  rear  (af  front)  will  ba*a  •  or  pauses. 
The  ins'                                 and  : 

1.   S'/und.     1.  Anon— Face. 

11.  Atl  at***,  the  raarait  will  turnonthi   left 
th<'  I                                 earn  th"  righl  loot  t>.  the 

full  !•  1.  the  feet  square  t"  <  *<\\  tH 

92.  t  will  turn  • 

fid  the  hams,  (.ice  t«.  the  rear,  brii  j 
heel  by  the  ■.,■]■   .  f  \ >,,   | 

•  /I  tak"  car        it  these  i 
dr. 

rJL 

Pr. 

rnon   time,  will   1 
the  recruit  confirmed  la  bis  position,  will  mjiaim  to  biso 


10  Bl  HOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  f. 

the  principle  and  mechanism  of  this  step— placing  himself  mv  or  terra  pares  from, 
.iiid  racing  to,  the  recruit.  Ha  will  himself  execnte  slon  ly  tin'  step  In  the  n  ay  of  illus- 
tration, ami  then  command  : 

itl./uricard.      2.    Common   timr.      3.    Mahch. 

At  the  Ri  1,  the  recruit  will  throw  the  ireight  of  the  body  on  the 

right  leg,  without  bending  the  left  Inane. 

'•'.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  bat  without  a, jerk,  carry  straight  for- 
ward the  lefl  foot  twenty-eight  Inches  from  the  right,  the  sofc  near  the  ground,  the 
ham  extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed,  and,  as  also  the  knee,  slightly  turned  oul  •. 
II,  at  theaame  time,  threw  the  weight  of  tin-  body  forward, and  plant  ll.it  the 
left  foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at  the  distance  where  it  finds  Itself  from  the  right 
when  the  weight  of  the  body  is   brought   forward,  the  whole  of  which  will  now 

on  the  advanced  foot.    The  recruit  will  next,  in  like  manner,  advai the  right 

Hiul  plant  it  ai  above,  the  heel  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  bee!  of  the  lit  foot,  and 
thus  continue  to  march  without  crossing  thelegs,  or  striking  the  one  against  the  other, 
without  turning  the  shoulders,  and  preserving  always  the  face  direct  to  the  front 
96,   Whi  d  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  march,  he  will  command  : 
1.  Sfumi,     2.   Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  when  either  foot  i; 
coming  to  the  ground,  the  foot  in  the  rear  will  he  brought  up,  and  planted  bytha  side 

Of  the  other,  w  ithout  shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  indicate,  from  time  to  time,  to  the  recruit,  the  cad  ncc  of 

the  - 1 « - j >  by  giving  the  command  mis  at  the  Instant  of  raising  a  foot,  and  its*  at  the 
instant  it  ought  to  be  planted,  observing  the  cadence  of  ninety  steps  in  a  oinute. 
Thi<  method  will  contribute  greatly  to  impress  upon  the  mind  the  two  motims  into 
which  the  Step  is  naturally  divided. 

101.  Common  time  will  be  employed  only  in  the  firsl  and  second  parts  of  the  School 
of  the  Soldier.  As  soon  as  the  recruit  has  acquired  steadiness,  has  become  established 
in  the  principles  of  shoulder  arms,  and  in  the  mechanism,  length  and  swifts  M  of  tho 
step  in  common  time,  he  will  be  practised  only  in  quick  time,  the  double  qsick  time, 
ana  the  run. 

102.  The  principles  of  the  step  In  quick  time  are  the  tame  ns  for  oommoa  time,  but 
it-  swiftness  is  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per  minute. 

103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in  quick  time,  will  command: 

1.  Squad, forward,    2.  Mumi. 

I   I  V. 

Principles  of  the  Double  Quick  Step, 

in).  Tie1  length  of  the  double  quick  step  la  thirty-three  inches,  and  ts  swiftness  at 
the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  step-  per  minute. 

106.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teaeh  the  recruits  the  principles  ani  mechanism  of 

the  double  (juick  step,  will  command: 

].     DoStUs  Quick  Slrp.      2.    Mu'.rii. 

106.  At  the  lii  s- 1  command,  the  recruit  will  raise  hi>  hands  to  a  le'el  with  his  hips, 

the-  hands  closed,  the  naili  towards  the  body,  the  i  Ibowa  to  the  rear 

107.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the  front  his  left  1.  j  bent.  In  order  to 
give  to  the  knee  the  grt  atect  elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  between  the  knee  and  the 

instep  vertical,  the  t<  e  depress!  d  ;    he  will  then  replace  his  foot  in  its  former  position  ; 

with  the  right  leg  be  will  execute  what  hat  Jus!  been  prescribed  for  the  left,  and  the 

alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  be  continued  until  the  eommind  : 
1.   Sftmd.     2.  Halt. 
10ft.   At  the  seeond  command,  the  recruit  will  bring  the  foot  <rhlch  is  raised  by  the 

side  of  the  other,  and  dropping  at  the  tame  time  hi.-  bands  bj  bfa  side,  will  resume  the 
position  of  the  soldier  without  arms. 

109.  The  instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight  paces  from,  and  facing  the  re- 
cruit, will  indicate  the  cadence  bv  the  commands,  on*  and  two,  given  alternately  at 
the  instant  each  loot  should  be  brought  to  the  ground,  which  it  Brit  will  be  in  oom- 
!  ut  its  rapidity  will  be  gradually  augmented. 


i  HOOI  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  IT.  11 

110.  The  rccre.it  beii  tly  established  in  the  principles  of  tbis  stop,  the  in- 
structor will  cum:'  i 

1.  Squad, forward.     '2.    /'  [).  Ma, 

ill.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the  weight  of  his  body  on  the 

112.  At  the  second  command,  lie  will  place  his  arm?  M indicated  No.  100. 

L13.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  carrj  forward   tli"  I  -lightly 

bent,  the  knee  somewhat  raised— will  plant  1  •  i  ~  left  foot,  Irst,  thirty  I 

i  from  the  right,  and  with  the  right  foot  will  then  execute  what  ba 

I  for  the  left.    This  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  taki  throw- 

ing tli"  weight  of  the  body  on  the  toot  that  is  planted,  and  1  y  allowing  a  nataral 
latory  motion  to  tli"  arm?. 

111.  The  doable  quick  step  may  >  with  different  degrees  of  swiftness. 
Under  argent  circuinstenoi  liun- 

md  eighty  per  minute.     \t  thi    rate  a  distanoe  of  four  thousand  yards  would 
about  twenty-five  minu) 

11.'.  The  recruits  will  be  ezel  in  running. 

116.  Tlie  principles  are  Ihe  same  as  for  the  double  quick  step,  the.  only  difference 
consisting  in  a  gi 

117.  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double  quick  time,  or  tli"  run.  tlmt  the  men 
should  hi'  -  through  the  nose,  keeping  the  month  closed.     Bx- 

■    '1  that,  !i.  i  i  this  principle,  a  man  can  passoYer  a  much 

longer  distance,  and  with  leas  Catig 

PABT  81  i  "M). 

BIX   I'.ILES. 

IK  tor  will  not  pas?  the  men  to  this  second  part  until  they  -Sail  be  wr  11 

and  in  the  manner  of  marching  at  the  di'- 

119.  IT"  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  he  will  place  in   the  SUM  rink,  elbow  to 
elbow,  and  instruct  them  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arm-,  as  fol 

i|  i. 

Principle   <•/  Should*  r  Arms. 

120.  The  rrernit  b^in^  plaeed  .ie  explained   in  the  first   lesson  of  the  fir't  part,  the 

■  ii  )•>  bend  •  m  slightly,  and  place  t  ,t,  in 

lowing  manner  : 

121.  Tl  vertical  and 


122.    B  th  nadir;.! 

i  this  wits 

- 
II 


VI  ,0L  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 

low,  the  files  would  b  i,  the  soldier  would  not  hire  the  necessary 

space  to  handle  bis  pit  <<■  with  facility,  t  b<    ii;:ht  .inn  wuld  become  too  much  btlgMO, 

sld  drau  down  the  shoulder. 

e  instructor,  bef<  end  lesson,  wiD  cause  to  be  repeated 

I    SJfOS   ri'jht,  left,  acd/ronf,  aud  tbc/acimjt. 


126.  'II, 

the  moTem 


\  11. 

Manual  of  Arm*. 


127.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  tanght  to  four  nun,  placed,  at  first,  in  one  rank: 
elbow  t.. .  ibow,  and  sib  rwarda  in  two  ranks. 

128.  Bach  coma  and  v.  ill  be  executed  in  one  tim*  (<>r  pause;,  but  this  time  will  bo 

tor  to  make  known  the  n 
12'.t.  Therate  f  or  ewil   I    m]  of  each  notion,  in  the  manual  of  arms,  with  the  excep- 
tions herein  indi  -l  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute;  but,  in  order  not  to 

fatigue  the  attenl  tructor  will,  at  first,  look  more  particularly  to  theexecn- 

tion  ol  ros,  without  requiring  a  nici  i  of  the  cadaaoe,  to  which 

|  brine  lita   progressively,  and  after  they  shall  hare  become  a  little 

famili  ili'  handling  of  tbc  pi, 

150.  A-  il  otioni  relative  to  the  cartridge,  t.»  tin-  summer,  and  to  the  fixing  and 
unfixi:  g  "'■  ■  bayonet,  cannot  be  executed  at  the  rate  prescribed,  nor  eTen  with  a 
uniform  bi  ftneas,  they  will  not  be  subjected  to  that  cadence.  The  instructor  will, 
bow,  eaute  theee  motioni  to  bo  executed  withpromptness,  and,  above  all, 
with  regularitj . 

151.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  decide  the  hii.-k  execution  of  the  Brat 
motioa  oi  each  time  (or  pause.)  The  commands  two,  three,  and/oar,  will  decide  the 
In  ir-k  execution  ol  the  other  motions.  As  soon  as  the  recruits  shall  well  Comprehend 
tin  position!  of  the  several  motions  of  a  time,  they  will  be  taught  tc  execute  the  timo 
without  resting  on  its  diflfi  r<  nt  motioni :  the  mi  cnariism  of  the  time  will  aevcrtb 

.  ai  well  to  give  a  perfect  use  of  the  ph  ee,   as  to   ftVOid  the  sinking  of, 
slurring  over,  i  ithi  r  ot  the  motions. 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  following  progression :  The  instructor 
will  command : 

Support—  A  it  MS. 
One  time  aud  three  motioni. 

13::.  . ".,„. ,     Bring  the  piece,  with  the  i  ight  hand,  perpendicularly  to  (he 

front,  and  betwi  en  the  eyee,  the  ban-el  t<»  the  rearj  seiie  the  piece  h  Itb  tb 
at  the  1"^  er  band,  rai  le  this  hand  as  high  as  the  <  bin,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  same 
time  with  the  right  hand  four  Inches  below  the  cock. 

134,  i  Second  motion,  t  Turn  the  piece  with  the  rigbl  hard,  the  barrel  to  the  froi  t 
earn  the  |  left  shoulder,  and  p.i-s  the  fore  arm  extended  on  the  br<  a~t  be- 

.iii.l  ;u.d  theoock;   rapport   tbfl  OOOk  against   the  Left  fore-arm,  the 
left  hand  retting  ,m  the  right  breast. 

186.  (  Third  motion.  I     Drop  tbfl  right  hand  by  thi 

13C.  'When  the  Instructor  maj  wish  to  give  repose  tn  this  position,  he  will  command 

Rest. 

KiT.    A.t  this  Command,   the    recruits  will   bring   up   .smartly    the   right   hand;. 

handle  of  the  piece    small  of  the  stock),  when  tney  wfll  not  bo  required  to  pr 
silence,  or  steadinecs  of  position. 

Wht  n  the  instructor  may  wish  the  reoruits  to  pass  from  this  position  to  that  of 
silence  and  steadiness,  he  will  conn::. 

1.  Attention.    2.  Squao. 
189.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the  position  of  the  third  motion 
of  support  arm*. 

Shoulder— Ann*. 
One  time  and  thief  motions. 
140.  (First  motioa.)     ('.rasp  the  piece  with  the  right   hand  under  and   against  the 
left  fore-arm;  seise  it  with  the  left  hand  atjhe  lower  band,  the  thumb  extended; 
detach  the  piece  sligbtlv  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  along  the  stock. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  11.  13 

141.  (Seoond  motion.)    Carry  the  piece  vertically  to  the  right  shoulder  with  both 

hands,  tin*  rammer  to  the  front,  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  a«  to  em- 
brace thr  guard  with  the  thamb  and  fore-finger,  slip  th"  lefl  hand  to  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  tad  joined,  the  right  arm  nearljr  straight. 

1 1'.'.  |  TSir<l  motion.)     Drop  the  right  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 
/'rc*rnt— Arms. 
tint  time  nmf  tirn  motion*. 

1 4  rt.  (  Fimt  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring  the  piece  erect  before  the  centra 
of  tlv  b  "lv,  th<>  runnier  to  the  front ;  at  the  tame  timt  -  I  ;e  the  pit  <  •■  n  ith  the  left 
band  half-way  between  the  guide  sight  and  lower  band,  the  thumb  extendi-d  along  th" 
barrel  and  against  the  stock,  the  fore-arm  horizontal  and  resting  ajiain-t  tht  > ■  • . •  i s .  the 
hand  ns  h i^h  as  the  elbow. 

141.    IS  rend  motion.)     Grasp  the  email  of  th"  stock  with  the  light   hand  1 
o.id  against  toe  gourd, 

Shoulder — Anus. 

ihir  timt  "w"  Nee  mmtfoni, 
1(5.  (  Fir*  motion.)    Rringthe  piece  to  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time  "hange 
the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  a«  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  I 
finger,  slip  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  snd 
joind,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight, 

146.   (.Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 
Order — Arms. 
Qytc  titnc  nnd  BSM  motion*. 
1*7.    [Firm)  notion. \     9eii  briskly  with  the  left  hand  near  the  upper 

band,  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand  :  loosen  the  grasp 
of  the  right  hand,  lower  the  piece  v.  ith  the  left,  resize  th.-  piece  with  the  right  hand 
above  the  lower  band,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the  butt  about  four  inches 
from  the  ground,  the  right  hand  supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand  by 
the  side. 

148.  '  Sernnd  motion.}      Let  the  piecf  slip  through  the  right  hand  to  the  ground  br 
rH  slightly  the  fingers,  and  take  the  position  about  to  be  described. 

/'n'ition   of   Order   Arm*. 

149.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between   the  thumb  and  fore-fingrr  extended  ■ 

the  other  fingers  extended  and  joined;  the  miu7lc  about  two  issehen  from 
the  right  shoulder;  th'-  rammer  in  front  :  the  I  ik    el  th    l  ntt,  agai  ist,  and 

in  a  line  with,  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  the  barrel  perpcudlculai 

'    Whefl  the  instructor  may  v.  ish  togir"  r'-p"'"  in  this  pr  -iti«n,he  will  cotni; 

At  this  command,   th"  recruits  will   not  be  required    I  «ilenee  or 

1.S2.   lVhen  the  instrurtwr  may  wish  the  recruit*  to  pass  from  thi«  position  to  t! 
■Hence  and  steadiness,  he  will  ""mmand  : 

1.    Attention.       1.    S«K 

At  the  second  word,  tb'  .11  resume  th"  position  Mrn>, 

Ur— Abvs. 

<"n#. 
./'-,-. f  «.imn. )      Ttai'  with    th"  right    h.  igbt 

O.  tht  "■> ,  and  op) 

with  the  hit  hand  b'dow  tht  .  c 

k,  the  thumb  i  ,  ress 

the  piece   .gainst  th<-  shoulder  with  th"  I" 

•  th"  l"ft  hand    \m     • 
L**n<l   in 

■ 

14S. 

•Whenever  tht  '-.d  firing*  »•  (  caose  lbs 

rat      :,     \*>tm  t.i  be  brong St  t"  •' 


14  &  WOOL  OF  THE  .SOLDI  UK — PAEI  II. 

■  >nd  motion.       Carry  the  pice- 1"  the  1  U  .-id  •  with  the  lefl  hand  — butt  upon  the 
ind — barrel  to  the  front  the  right  and  front  rotting  along  the 

[eft  thigh,  muz/!      \  in  hunt  ..i  ill.'  centre  of  the  body — right  hand  gra 

;  •  bt  lou  the  upp<  i  band,  and  left  hand  extended  upon  the  i 

ce  with  the  left  hand  at  the  mnxzl  the 

band  to  the  cai  ti  I 

2.   Handle—  CAnTiunot. 
time  and  onr  motto*. 

L">7.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next  two  lingers,  and  place  it  between 

tli. 

3.     T<ar—  Ow.TlMI'GE. 
(tin   time  (ni'l  om  ni'iii  m. 

IBS.  Tear  the  paper  t"  the  powder,  hold  the  cartridge  npright  between  th  ■  thun  b 
and  first  two  lingers,  near  the  top;  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of  and  neat-  the 
muzzle — the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front 

4.    Charge—  CaBTBIDi 

•ime  and  mic  motion. 

l.*)0.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel :  disengage  tin- ball  from  the  papas  with  the 
right  hand  and  the  thumb  and  the  first  two  fingei  ■  of  the  lefl  ;  Insert  it  into  the  I 
the  pointed  end  nppi  rmoat,  and  preaa  it  don  n  with  the  right  thumb  :  seixe  the  head  <>!' 

the   rammer  with  the  thumb  and  fore-linger  of  the  right  hand,   the  Other  Bng 

I,  theelbowa  near  the  body. 

5.   Draw — Raw 
One  time  and  thin   motions. 

160.  '  /'ir-t  motion.)    Half  draw  die  rammer  by  extending  the  right  arm;  steady 
it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb;  seize  the  rammer hetween  the  thumb  and 
fore-finger  of  the  right  band,  the    thumb  under  and  the  linger  over  the  rammer; 
extended,  palm  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

101.  [Second  morion.)    Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  by  extending  the  arm; 

r  in  prolongation  of  the  pipes,  pahn  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 
ir,2.  (  Third  motion. )    Turn  the  rammer  by  closing  Jthe  fingers,  the  little  end  pas* 
the  left  shoulder,  turning  the  back  of  th.' hand  to  the  front;  steady  it  by 
ling  the  forefinger  of  the  right  hand  :  place  the  head  of  the  rammer  on  the  ball, 
the  rammer  in  prolongation  of  the  barrel. 

Bam — Cautkidci:. 

Onr  tiiiis  and  onr  motion. 

]< ::.  [nserl  the  rammer  as  far  aa  the  right,  and  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the 
thumb  of  <h''  left  hand  ;  seise  the  rammer  at  the  small  i  nd  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 

:   on  the  i  ighl   hand,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front  ;   prCM  the  bull  home,  the 
elbows  near  the  body. 

7.   Return  —  Rammkk. 

flio    lino   and  thrct  motions. 

184.  [Fix  Drnu  theranunerhatf-way  out,  and  steady  it  in  this  position 

with  the  left  thumb  :  grasp  it  mar  the  muz/.le  with  the  right  hand,  the  thumb  under, 
and  P  shore  the  rammer,  the  fingers  extended;  clear  the  rammer  from  the 

I  ire  bj  extending  the  arm,  the  palm  to  the  front,  the  rammer  In  tne  prolongation  of 

the  barrel. 

168.  I  Sf  ond  motion, )  Turn  the  rammer,  the  head  passing  tear  the  lefl  shoulder, 
the  fingers  closed,  the  rammer  held  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger— naila  to  the 

h  onl  :    insert  the  rammer,   until  the  hand  reaches  th  ■  nuu/le. 

166.  '  Third  motion,  |     Force  the  rammer  home  by  plaang  the  little  finger  of  the 

right  hand  on  the  bead  of  the  rammer;   extend  the  left  band  down  the  piece  without 

d  pressing  the  shoulder. 

Prime* 

One  time  and  tiro  motion*. 
I'  7.      lint  motion.)      With  the  left  hand   raise  the  piece  till  the  hand  i.   aj  high  as 

♦If  Mnynard's  prime  be  used,  the  command  will  be,  load  in  ei-jht  timet,  and  the 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER — PART   II  15 

the  aye,  grasp  the  ."mall  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand;  half  face  to  the  right; 
j'Ucc  at  the  same  time,  the  right  Fool  behind  and  at  right  angle*  with  the  left 
hollow  of  the  right  Toot  against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left  hand  down  to  the  lower 
bind,  the  thumb  along  tl>"  stock,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body  ;  bring  the  ni< 
the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right  fbre-arm-  -the  imall  of  the  stock  against  the 
body  and  two  inchea  below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  upward*,  the  muzzle  on  alerel 
with  tl ye. 

168.     Second  motion.)     Half  cock  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hood,   the  ir 
supported  against  the  guard  and  the  miall  a€  the  stock-   remove  the  old  cap  with  ono 
of  the  fingers  of  the  r  ighl  hand,  and  with  the  thumb  and  band 

take   a  cap|  from   the   pouch,    place    it    to    the    nipple,  and   pram   it    down    with    tha 
thumb;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 
9.   Should*  r — Abu. 
0«f  time  and  tiro  moti 

Kn.  (Fir it  motion,)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  He-lit  -boulder  and  support  it  there 
with  the  left  hand,  face  to  the  front ;  brine  the  right  heel  to  the  side  oi  and  on  a  line 
w  itfa  the  left ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  as  indicated  in  tie  position  of  «A<.«/- 
<ler  nrmt. 

170.  (Scrond  motion. )     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Ki.  w>v. 
0*9  time  and  three  mntioni. 

171.  ( Firxt  motion)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  r.ith  the  right  hand,  making  a  half 
face  t.i  the  right  on  the  bit  heel  :    carry  the  light  front  to  the  rear,  and  place  it  at  right 

•  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite  to,  and  against  the  bit    heel;   grasp  the 

•  itfa  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band  and  detach  it  slightly  from  tin-  shoulder. 
174.      St*ond  motion.  )      Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  band-,  the  barrel  upward*. 

the  bit  thumb  extended  along  the  Stock,  the  butt  below  thy  right  lore-arm.  I 
the  stuck  against  the  b..d\  and  two  inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  a*  high 
aa  the  eye,  the  left  tinsl  the  aide;  place  at  the  aame  time  the  right  thumb  on 

id  of  the  cock,  the  other  linger-  under  and  against  the  guard. 

173.  |  Third  motion.)  Cork,  ana  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  ttock  without 
deranr-  !  the  butt. 

Atm. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

174.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  band*,  and  support  the  butt  against  the  neb!  shoul- 
der; the  left  elbow  down,  thi  the  shoulder;  incline  tl 

butt,  n  that  the  right   ey<    i  aickly  the  notch  of  the 

.  and  the  object  aimed  at  :   tl  loaod,  the  right  thumb 

■ 

17r>.   When    recruit-    aie    formed  in    two  rank"  to    eXCOBte    the    firing",    the    f 
rank  men  will  raise  a  little  1  |   elbow,  in  ordef  to  facilitate  the  aim  ot 

rear  rank  men. 

170.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  atnii  the  right  foot  about  eight  in 

right,  and  towards  the  left  fa   '  I  of   the  man  D 
be  body  for  • 

FtRR. 
'  ttOM  'ind   r,nr  motir.n. 

177.   Press  the  -,  fire,  without  lowerii   ■ 

In  ad,  an  I  remaii  I    'n. 

distinct  ..I,, 

low  them. 

eighth  command  will  one 

time  and  tw 

(/'»>i  •sitie*  of  r 

der  ara-i«.  a*  indica: 


16  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II 

Load. 

Our  time  and  one  motion. 

17!'.   Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands  .it  the  MOM  time  Auw  to  the  front  and 

t:ik'-  the  ponthm  0#  Ioh  as  indicated   No.    156.     Each  rear  rank  man  will  bring  his 

right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  infractor  »  ill  oasae  th"  loading  to  ' 
tinuod  bv  the  commands  and  means  prescribe  '■.  So.  156,  and  following. 

181.  It",  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish  the  recruits  to  reload,  he  will 
command : 

Shoulder— Arms. 
One  lime  and  one  motion. 

182.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  band  and  remma  the  position  of  afoul* 

der  arm*,  at  the  same  time  fare  to  the  front,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  and  bring  tho 
right  heel  on  a  line  with  the  left. 

188.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  command  jire,  the  instructor,  when 
thev  are  in  the  position  of  aim,  will  command  : 

Recover — Arks. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw  the  finger  from  the  triger  ;  at  the 
command  armi,  retake  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready. 

186.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready,  if  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  bring  them  to  a  shoulder,  he  will  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

186.  At  the  command  ihoulder,  place  the  thumb  upon  the  cock,  the  fore -finger  on 
the  trigger,  half-cock,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stork  with  the  right  hand.  At  tho 
MWDUM  orate,  bring  up  the  piece  briskly  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  posi- 
tion of  shoulder  arms. 

187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  fix  bayo 
nots,  he  will  command  : 

Fix—  Batonet. 
One  time  and  J  our  motion*. 

188.  ( I'irtt,  *rr,,nd,  an<l  thir<{  motioni.)  Same  as  in  first,  second  and  third  motions 
in  the  first  time  of  loading,  except  in  tho  third  motion,  the  right  hand  is  carried  to  tho 
bavonet,  grasping  it,  with  the  little  finger  up. 

180.  (Fourth  motion.)  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scabbard,  fix  it,  seize  the  piece 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  muzzle,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the  barrel,  arm  extended. 

.Shoulder— Aims. 

One  time  and  tico  motioni. 

190.    (,  Firtt  motion.)     Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  place  it  against'the  right 

ihoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right 

hand  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  tho 

right  arm  nearly  extended. 

19L   (Second  wution.)     Drop  briskly  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 
191  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  fix  bayo- 
nets, he  will  give  the  command  : 

fix  llayoneti, 

whfn  the  pieces  will  be  brought  to  the  left  side  at  one  motion,  and  held  as  prescribed 
in  No.  \*H.  At  the  second  motfon  the  bayonets  will  be  fixed  as  in  No.  189;  imniidi- 
ately  resume  the  position  of  ordered  armi. 

(  harye — Batosetb. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

193.   (Fint  motion.)     Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the  right  hand  and  make  a  half 

face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel ;   place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  opposite  to,  and 

three  inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet  Fquare;  aeize  the  piece  at  the  same  tiuio  with 

the  left  hand  a  little  abore  the  lower  bana. 


SCHOOL  OF  TIIE  SOLDIER — PART  II.  17 

194.  (Second nation.)     Tiring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the   barrel  upper- 
most, the  left  elbow  again-t  tli  ■  h  i'ly  ;   seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the  same  time, 
with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  supported  against  the  hip  ;   the  point  of  the  beg 
onct  as  high  as  the  i 

Shoulder  —  Arms. 

One  time  nnd  tiro  motion*. 

195.  (  KneJ  notion.)  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  in  facing  to 
the  front,  plane  it  against  th<-  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  tli"  front  ;  turn  the  right 
hand  M  U  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  th» 
light  hand  nearly  extend   3. 

196.  (Second  motion. )     Drop  tlie  Ml  hand  smartly  by  the  side, 

Tmil- -Arms. 
Our  time  and  tiro  moliViii. 

197.  (  Fimt  motion. )     The  same  a.s  the  Bnt  motion  of  order  nritn. 

198.  {Second  motion.  ,  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to  the  front,  the  butt  to  the  rear 
and  about  four  inches  from  the  ground.  The  right  hand  sapporte*4  at  the  hip,  will  mo 
hold  the  piece  that  the  rear  rank  men  may  not  touch  with  their  bayonets  toe  men  in 
the  front  rank. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

199.  At  the  command  •Siu'rfe'-,  raise  the  pice;  perpendicularly  in  the  right  hand 
the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel  :  at  th<>  command  arms,  execute  what  has  been 
prescribed  for  the  thonlder  from  the  position  of  order  armi. 

Un/ix — IUyohet. 
One  time  nnd  four  motion*. 
2*0.    t  Firtt  nnd  eerond  motion*. )     Same  as  in  fix  bayonet. 

201.  i  Third  motion,  i  Same  as  in  fix  hayonet,  except  turn  the  bayonet  clasp  with 
the  right  thumb,  gTEtp  th  •  thank  ol  the  bayonet  with  the  right  hand,  palm  under 
thumb  and  finger*  <xt   ndi  <!  well  at  the  blade  of  the  bayou,  t. 

'Jo.',    i  t\,nrih  motion.  |      Wrench   olf  the  bayonet,   return  it   to   the  scabbard,  grasp 
(he  piece  at  the  upper  band  ui<li  the  right  haul,  1  im  the  left  hand  along  the  barrel 
the  arm  extended  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

Sh  oulder —  A  RMS. 

203.  (Firtt  and  MCMMl  motion.  )      Same  as  from  fix  bayonet  N'os.  190  and  191. 

Sr<  ure — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motion*. 

204.  (  Fir't  motion,  i     The  same  as  the  first  motion  ol  "Uppor!  arm*,  No.  133,  ,., 
with  th«  right  bari'l  at  tb.    -mall  of  the  stock. 

2(i.">.    [Simndi  •  ••   with   bath   bands,   tli-  barr.l  to  the  front  • 

bring  it  opposite  thi    I  tli"   butt    again-t  tli  •  liij.,  the  left  band  at  thr  I 

bami.  th.  thumb  as  high  a*  the  chin  and  extended  on  the   rammer;  the  piece  erect 
and  (I  ■  tie-  thonlder,  the  left  lore-arm  against  the  piece. 

206.  (  Third  motion  ■),■•  pleee,   peat   ''  ■•da*  the  l-ft  arm,  the  left  ban. I 
line  at  th    lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  )>•■  \    n(   it  from  -mdm^r 

out.  the  little  linger  retting  against  th  ■  hip,  the  right  hand  (ailing  at  the  same  time 
bv  the  side. 

Skotd 

Onr  tintr  on  I  thrrr  motion*. 

207.  (  FiVii  m-  •  -  with  the  left  band,  end  tcize  it  with  the  right 
head  at  the  small  ol  the  stock.     Th"  pi 

unst  the  hip,  thi-  I   ft  fire-arm  along  th"  ; 

■  o  same    as  the  second   motion  of  i  ,m  a 

fnppurt. 

209.  (Third  m<. tin,,.'  Th-  -bird  motion    * **■  •»'*—  — — f-xm  ■  iwaati  (. 

•o/i-Ansi. 

•  im*    and  In  o  tnt. 

210.  (  Fir,t  mot,r.n        Detach  th-  |iec<»   perpendicularly  from   the  shoulder    • 
right  bead,  and  eeiae  it  with  the  I   '  aadaadgaid 

piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  |,r  .  ihouldcr  end  foar  inr h«.i  Itimo  it     v\*rt    ,: 


18  6G&O0&  OF  1KB  IOLDIBR      TART  ir. 

fame  time,  the  right  hand  on  the  butt,  the  beak  between  the  first  two  fingers,  the 
other  two  fingers  under  the  butt  < 

211.  (Second  motion.)     Quit  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  raise  and  place  the  | 

on  the  right  ibonlder  with  the  right  hand  the  h><  k  plate  upwards;  let  fall  at  the 

same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Anji?. 
One  time  and tun 

212.  (Fint  motion.)    Raise  the  pi  ee  perpendicularly  by  extending  the  right  arm 
(all  length,  the  rammer  to  the  Front,  at  the  Ise  the  piece  with  the 

left  band  between  the  lower  band  nnd  (roide-aight. 

813,     -         .  aoften.)     Qait  the ha4t  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  immed 
embrace  the  goard,  lower  the  piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arm*,  ?- 1  i - !•  ■  up  the  left 
hand  I  i  the  bight  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  exton  !  >1  and  rioted.    Drop  the  left 

hand  by  the  side. 

214,  The  men  being  :it  support  arms,  the  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  pic 
be  brought  to  the  right  .shoulder.     Tu  this  effect,  lie  will  command  : 
Right  Shoulder  ihi/l — A 

One  time  ami  tiro  motion*. 
216.    (  First  motion.)     Seize  the  piece  With  the  right   hand.   h.  low  and  near  the  lift 
fon    arm,  place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  the  heel  of  the  butt  between  the  first  two 

'  . 

216.  ( Second  motion.)  Turn  the  pieoe  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards, 
carry  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  left  hand  still  holding  the  butt,  the  mnxsle  eloTated  : 

hold  the  piece  in  this  position  and  plai  e  the  right  hand  upon  the  butt  as  is  prescribed 

No.  219,  and  Let  tail  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shouldi  r- -Aim.-'. 
One  time  and  tiro  motion*. 

217.  (first  motion.)     The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  tkomlder  arass  No.  212. 

21*.  8t*ond  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front, 
carrv  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  slip  the  right  band  to  the  small  of  tin  stock,  place 
the  left  fore-arm  extended  on  the  breast  as  Is  prescribed  No.  134,  and  let  fall  the  right 

hand  by  the  *idc. 

Arm'  — At  WILL. 
One  time  ami  one  WtOtiott, 
21!i.   At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasnre  on  either  .•boulder,  with  one  or 
both  hands,  the  muzzle  elevated. 

Sui'}>ort— Aims. 
Out  titnt  and  one  Motion, 
:.(i.    At  this  command,  retake  ij\ii<  kly  '.he  position  of  shoulder  arms. 
22L  Th"  r.  emits  being  at  ordered  ai  ma,  when  the  instructor  .-hull  wish  to  cause  tho 
pieces  to  be  placed  on  the  ground,  be  w  ill  Command  : 

Ground — Aims. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 
222.    (Firtt  motion.)     Turn  the  piece  with  the  i  i^ht   hand,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  at 

the'raii,.  time  -•  lie  the  cartridge  boa  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  bodj .  advance  the 
lcft  foot,  the  heel  opposite  the  lowet  band;  lay  the  piece  on  the  ground  with  the 
right  band,  the  toe  ol  the  bntt  oa  a  line  with  the  right  toe,  the  knees  slighUj  bent, 

the  ri^ht  bid  raised. 

20-  motion.)      Kise   up,  bring   the  left   foot  by   the  side   of  the  right,  quit 

the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  ana  drop  the  hands  by  the  fide. 

liaise—  AruS. 
One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

224.  [Tint motion.)  Seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  body, 
advance  the  left  foot  opposite  the  lower  band,  and  seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand. 

225.  (JbHlitl  motion.)     Raise  the  piece,  bringing  the  left  foot  by  the  aide  of  tho 


"  I100L  Or  THB  BOLDEBR — PAKI  II.  19 

right ;  turn  tho  piece  with  tl  id,  the  rammer  to  the  front  j  at  (he  same  time 

quil  ill  box  withl  d  <!i  op  iIji  i  hand  bj  tb 

its  beiog  at  i  h      I     'tn,  with  baronet  in  the  scabbard,  if  tfa 
•true tor  wi  tion  of  arms,  ho  will  command: 

>»•  H8> 

ki  motion*. 

id  K'otxl  motion*.  bayonet  No.   1  r»2,  except  that  (li 

the  muzzle,  air!  the  rammer  head  is  m 

Ion    I  rammer. 

2'1~ .  ribed  in  loading;   lower  (1. 

muzzle  band 

rijjht  b 

nh  motion.)     Bring  tin  </w  arau. 

I.  The  instructor  wiM  then   inspect   in  succession    th  '.in 

•  <>(  the  rank.     Bach,  :>•>  the  instructor  reai  bes  him,  will  raise 
with  hia  right   band,  e  i  thi  left  between  the  lower 

ight,  the  lock  to  nd  at  thi    height  of  the  cbii 

the  left  eye  :  the  instructor  will  lake  it  with  the  i 
handl  g  it.  will  rctnrn  il  to  the  recruit  who  will  re< 

« ith  tin  right  ha 

i    When  the  instsuctor  shall  hare  passed  bim,  each  recruit  will  retas 
tion  i  command  <  ■  tan  the  rammer,  and  i   tune  t!ie 

231  .   th    instructor  should  merely  wi.-h   to  ( 

bayonets  to  be  iixid.  lie  will  command  : 

•     tl     position  indicated  No.   192,  fix  bayonets  as  has  been  explained,  and 
tsttiaediafa  i 

h  o(  thi  instructor,  after  firings  to  ascertain  whether  tin  i 

mg — Hamm 
I     Tut  the  reamer    >n  tl<o  bai  cplaincd  ahore,  and  iaUDed 

.  Ibi  the  i  i",  .  fan  take  (ho  rammer  by  tha  small 

it  in  the  barrel,  pi  cause  each  recruit  to  i  akc  it  i  ing  in  tL 

'  .  will  return  rammer,  and  icsuirje 

mil. 

antud  "/'  An  ■ 

V"i.  The  manual  of  a 

- 

! 

- 
- 

/ 

Th"  four  mea  marching  in  the  dit  instructor  wi.l  coir.insnd  : 

i .  U    • 

«<1.    At  the  ar 
tta  f.  la  w,ll  make  a  scutbiaace  of  i.  , 


BCBLOOL  OF  THE  B  >LDIBK — PART  II. 

th  ■  «idc  of  each  oth^r.  an  1  obeerring  ih  •  cadence  of  tha  stop,  by  raising  each  foot 
■  '  ■  ly  ft  ilhoiil  adi  ■ 
2i'l.  Theinsti  uct.>r  Wishing  the  di  I,  frill  command: 

1.    t'oriravfl.     2.    Ki.BfBJ. 
•  iiinan'l.  which  (fill  be  glrea  a*  prescribed  above,  the  recruit! 
•rill  retake  the  atop  of  twenty-eight  inch 

To  change  step. 

24  J.  The  srjuad  being  in  march,  tha  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Ckamgt  Hop,    2.  March. 

246.  At  the  tecond  command,  which  frill  be  given  at  the  Instant  either  &»ot  ii  mm- 
the  ground,  bi  ing  the  fool  which  is  in  rear  by  the  aide  of  that  which  is  in  front, 
again  with  the  foot  which  was  in  front. 

To  march  backwards. 

210.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  backward*,  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.  March. 

sond  command,  the  recmita  trill  step  off  smartly  frith  the  1. -ft  font 

fourteen  inches  to  the  rear,  reckooiojr,  from  heel  to  beol,  and  so  on  with  the  fret  in 

ision  till  the  command  halt,  which  will  always  be  preceded  by  theoantion  tquael. 

,  ;.   will  halt  at  this  coiiunand,   and  bring  back  the  foot  in  front   bj  the  side  of 

the  other. 

248.   This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

240.  The  Instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  recruits  march  straight  to  the  rear, 
•  reft  position  of  the  body  and  the  piece  be  not  deranged. 

Lassos.  III. 

To  load  in  four  times. 

The  nbjeel  of  thh  lesson  Es  to  prepare  the  recruits  to  load  at  will,  and  to 

!i  the  times  winch  require  the  greatest  regularity  and  attention, 
harge  cartridge,  ram  cartridge,  and  prima.     It  will  be  divided  u  followi : 

2S1.  The  Brst  time  will  he  executed  at  the  end  of  the  command  ;  the  three  others  at 

.  three  and  four, 
Tic-  instructor  will  command  : 

1.    Load  in  four  time:      2.    Load. 
ie  times  to  inclu.l  •  to  charge  cartridge 

Two. 
Baccate  the  times  tainorade  ram  cartridge. 
Three. 

254.  !  time  to  include  prime. 

Foot. 

255.  Execute  the  times  mtekaulder  urmi. 

To  load  <it  will. 

250.  The  instructor  will  next  teaofa  loading  at  will,  which  will  be  executed  a<  Inad- 

q  four  times,  but  continued,  and  without  resting  Ofl  eitbl  r  of  the  times,      lie  will 

<■  >minaofl  : 

1.    Load  at  tcill.      2.    LOAD.' 

'.'.',7.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by  degrc  ".  to  load  with  the  greatest 
possible  promptitude,  each  without  regulating  himself  by  his  neighbor,  and  shore  all 
without  waiting  for  him. 

Pbe  cadence  prescribed  No.   12D,  is  not  applicable  to  loading  in  tour  times,  or 
at  will. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  IT.  21 

IV. 

firings. 

2f>9.  The  firings  arc  direct  or  oblique,  and  will  he  executed  as  follow): 

Th<  direct 

260.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  commands: 

1.   Fi      If  "/unrl.     'i.  S<jvo<I.     '.',.   ][,  mi.     4    Aim.     5.  Fikb.     C.  Loin. 
2n  ;ll  be  executed  as  has  been  i    escribed  in  the  Man- 

At  tbe 
explained.     At  tbe  fourth  (bei   «iil  aim  according  to  the  rank  ii 
each  may  find  hit  d,  the  rear  rank  men  inclining  forward  a  littli  > 

body,  in  ordei  that  thi  3  reach  aa  much  1  '•  (Vont  rank 

iMe. 

At  the  sixth  command,  Ihej  will  load  their  piece?  and   return  Immediately   ti 
the  position  of  read's/. 

2G3.   The  instructor  will  recommence  thefiiinghy  the  oommanda: 

1.  Squad,     2.   Aim.     9,   Fn  n.     4. 

•     When  tlie  instructor  wishes  lh«  liring  to  cease,  he  will  command : 

( '<  -ixr  firing. 

'  •  ■  men  will  ceaae  firing,  hut  will  load  their  pieces  if  un- 

d,  arid  afterwards  bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 

Oblique  Firing. 

Th<>  oblique  firing?  will  he  executed  to  the  right  nnd  lift.  and  by  the  same com- 
mands as  the1  direct  lire,  with  this  1  indaim  will  alws 
sat  ion,  right  or  U 

n  of  ike  two  rank*  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  t) 

'  .    \bt  tare    .ikswill  axecute  what  ha 

;  tire. 

0  ranks  wiii 
rich'  lily  .-it  ih<  i  Int. 

mm  and  aim,  ead  >.   maa  will  aim  to  the  ri 

ill  adi  aace  th<    l<  n  f< 

right  ibe  upper  part  ol  the  body  forward  a  galitth  tb< 

Position      the  •  Fire  to  the  ! 

27o.  At  il  % 

hit. 
27  I 

27'. 

- 

to  lea 

1 

■ 

1       /  I  MM. 


22  br-  paw  ir. 

irtli  command,  the  file  on  the  rijjht  will  aim  ami  fire  :   (1, 
ill  lake  tli.-  position  ind  178. 

J77.  The  men  of  tbia  file  will  load  th  and  fire  a  i  re- 

i 

27'  ;  1  fill-  will  aim.  at  the  instant  tin1  f.r«t  hrin^  down 

nform  in  al.  that  which  ■         .  r  the  first  file, 

.  t!i  ■  front  and  rear  rill  a  reqn 

me. 

ha   loading,  will  return  :  |   continue 

. 

will  e  immand  : 
■ 
i  and,  the  men  will  cease  Bring.    Tf  they  liar'1  Bred  they  " 
h  inlder  :  it'  at  the  j  ositi 

■h>ii  of  n<in,  they  will  bring'  down  their  pi 
-c.  ami  shoulder  arms. 

/';  ,;',->   by  Rank. 

The  Bre  by  rank  will  he  ezecnted  by  each  entire  rank,  alternately. 

2  I.  Tin'  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  y/il:.     2.  Squad.     3.  Kfai>t.     4.  Hear  rank.     5.  Aim.     f<.  Fiaa.     7.  Load. 

.\    the  third  command,  the  two  ranks,  will  take  the  position  of  ready  u 
?•■!  ibed  in  the  direct  Bre. 

kt  the  a  srenth  eommand,  the  rear  rank  v.  ill  execute  that  which  has  b?en  pre- 
I  in  the  direct  lire,  and  afterwards  take  the  position  <>(  ready. 

\    I    to  a-  the  instra  reri  the  rear  rank  in  the  position  of 

•  \>  ill  eommand  : 

■  .'.-.    2.    \i".    ".  I'i  ta.     i.  ' 
commands,  the  men  in  the  front  .  ink  will  .  pre 

ii  tfa    rear  rank,  but  they  will  not  ih  the  righl 

instructor  will  recommence  th  •  Bring  bv  the  rear  rank,  and  will  thus  con- 
ok,  ttntil  he  shall  ,  wh  'ii    be 

lich  will  he  heretofore  prescribed. 

■■  v . 


To  j  ling. 


In  this  ea  I  and  drawn  up  in  one  rank. 

The  instruction  '.-ill  b  i  sofa  man  individual!) ,  without  times  or  motions,  and 

in  'h>-  following  manner. 
291.  The  instrnctoi  will  command  i 

■  <■:  'ii.'  squad  will  more  forward  I 
paces  and  halt ;  then  carrj  th    right  foot  to  the  rear  ami  to  the  right  of  th  •  left  b  •••!, 
and  in  a  position  <  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  in  bendin 

I'-. i  i  •  knee  upon  the  ground  :  he.-   ;■  the  piece,  the  I  sup 

poi :  -'1  upon  the  thigh  <>n  th  i ■  i ..Jit  head  on  th  •  >:e.all  of  th  •  >toek. 

th.>  t,uti  resting  on  tin  right  thi;  b  i  ind  supporting  the  piece  near  the  loner 

^  to  the  left  around  th-  .  i  the 

ind,  until  tlo-  i  pencucular  to  the  direction  of  the  left  loot,  and  thus 

seat  i  fortably  on  the  righl  h<  1 1. 

884,  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  rapport  it  with  tin-  left,  holding  it 

near  the  lower  band,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  th"  left  thigh  near  the  knee;  seize  the 

hammer  with  th  •  thumb,  the  fore-Anger  aader  the  ruardj  oock  ami  seise  tin  piece  at 

sllol  th.  -tock;  bring  the  pi  ihouldi  r,  trim  andyiV*. 

235.  Bring  the  piece  down  ai  is  Bred,  and  support  it  with  the  left  hand 

the  butt  resting  against  the   right  thigh  :   carry  the  piece  to  the  rear  rising  on  the 


'  tOL    OF   THE   SOLDIER — PART    II.  23 

knee,  the  barrel  downwards,  thfl  halt  retting  on  the  ;round  ;  in  this  position  support 
the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  1 1  i ■  -  upper  band,  draw  cartridge  with  the  right  and 
load  the  piece,  ramming  the  ball,  if  necessary,  with  both  band*. 

'!:•''<.  VThen  loaded  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with  the  left  hind,  which  holdi  it  at 
the  upper  band  :  seize  ii  the  sam ■■  time  with  the  right  band  al  the  small  of  the  itook  ; 
turn  tli     >  trrel  uppermost  and  nearly  horizontal,  the  left  elbow  resting 

on  the  left  thigh  :  half-cock,  remoi  e  theold  cap  an  1  prime,  ru  ■  and  return  to  the  rank  . 
d  man  will  then  be  taught  what  hat  Just  been  prescribed  for  the  lir?t, 
and  so  on  through  the  remainder  of  the  squad. 

To  fin  and  loa  7  lying. 

2!'^.  In  this  exorcise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank  and  loaded;  the  instruction  will 
n  individually  and  without  times  or  motions. 

The  instructor  will  command: 

I  1 1!  K   AM'  LOAD  LYING. 

300.  At  tl  ■    1.  t!i  i  man  or,  the  right  eT  tli  •  squad  will  more  forward  three 

and  bait;  he  will  then  bring  his  piece  to  an  order,  drop  on  I  and 

place  himself  on  the  ground  flaton  hi-  belly.     In  tl  he  will  snppori  tbo. 

piece  nearly  horizontal  with  the  left  bai  it  near  thi    lowei  band,  the  !>u  t 

.  nd  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  ground,  the  barrel  uppermost  ;  cock 

the  pi  'cc  with  the  right  hand,  and  carry   this  hand  to  the  small  of  the  si 

ece  with  both  hand-,  press  tht   butt  against  the  shoulder,  and  resting  on  buth 

79,  aim  andy/rr. 

ML  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down  and  turn  upon  hi*  left  side,  still 

•  1  the  <■  "k  i<  opposite  his  bi  • 
the  butt  end  resting  on  the  ground ;  takeouts  cartridge  with  the  right  hand; 
the  small  ot  the  stock  with  this  hand,  holding  the  cartridge  -villi  the  thumb  and  two 
I   ho  will  th»n  throw  himself  on  hi-  I  ack  still  noldii  with  both 

tho  butt  between  I  be  barrel  up,  tl  e 

muzzl"  elevated.  In  this  position,  charge  carti  idge,  draw  rammer,  ram  cartridge  and 
return  ran, 

Ml.   Whon  finished  leading,  the  man  will  turn  again  upon  his  loft  side,  resaore  the 
'  prime,  then  raise  th    piece  verti  turnabout,  aadresami 

position  in  the  ranks. 

303.  The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has  just  be  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so 
.<>ut  the  squad. 

1  R  VI. 

Ba  'rrise. 

304  •  '  itxrd 

1  be  nn  n  will  be  j  i 

■    ■ 

1 
•  motion*. 

n  b  'ill  h< 
ghtlr,  and  sciie   i!  wit 
left  hand  ah  u  tho  lower  band. 

■ 

rig  nsturall- 

■ 

Onr  time  and  onr  mntmn. 
■■ 
same  time  brin^;  the  r  i. 

1.     ttunr  .1 

•   mofto*». 
SOS.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for   »■« 


24  SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   III. 

band  will  be  supported  against  4hc  hip.  and  the  bayonet  held  at  the  hight  of  the  eye, 
as  in  chary*  bayonet . 

Shoulder— Aim*. 

On*  timt  and  DM  notion. 

309.  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder, 
at  the  tame  tunc  bring  the  right  heel  by  the  aide  of  the  left,  and  face  to  the  front. 

PART  THIRD. 

310.  When  the  recruits  are  well  ettabliahed  in  the  prineipU*  cud  mcrhanitm  of  the 

Wry.,  and  the  \jtn.itinn  of  the  body,  the  Manual  of  arm-.  (In-  instructor  will  Unite  «.  i^llt 
men.  at  least,  and  t\\  eive  nun.  at  most,  in  order  to  teach  then  the  principle!  of  aliirn- 
meot,  the  principle*  ol  tin1  tench  of  elbow.-  in  marching  tq  the  front,  the  principle* 
•>f  the  man  h  In  the-  tiatik,  wheeling  fi  om  ■  halt,  w  heeling  in  marching,  and  the  change 
of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide.  Be  ■»%  i  1 1  place  the  squad  iu  one  rank  elbow  to 
elbow,  and  number  the  men  from  right  to  left. 

s    1. 

Alignments. 

311.  The  instructor  will  at  Brat  tea.  h  the  i  ecruita  to  alipn  themselves  man  by  man, 
in  order  the  better  to  make  them  comprehend  the  principle.-  >>f  alignment ;  to  tl.i.  end, 
he  will  command  the  two  men  on  the  lipht  Hank  to  march  tw<>  pacea  to  the  front,  and 
havinp  alipned  them,  he  will  caution  the  remainder  of  the  squad  to  mope  up.  U  they 
may  be  successively  called  each  by  hia  number,  and  align  themselves  successively  on 
the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

Sll  Kaeh  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number,  will  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the 
ripht  as  prescribed  in  the  In  si  leeSOUOl  the  first  pi  it.  and  will  march  in  quiek  timetirn 
pocei  fot  ward,  shortening  the  last,soai  to  find  himself  about  six  inches  behind  the  new 
alignment,  nrhicfa  heonghl  never  to  [ass;  he  will  next  more  up  steadily  by  steps  of 
two  or  tine.-  inch's,  the  hams  extended,   to    the  side  of  the  man    next  to  him  on  the 

alignment,  so  that,  without  deranging  the  load,  the  line  ol  the  eyes,  or  thai  of  the 
(•boulders,  he  mav  find  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  bis  neighbor,  whose  elbow  he  will 
lightly  touch  without  opening  hia  own. 

313.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well  alipned,  will  command  : 

raovr. 

314.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front,  and  remain  firm. 

315.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles, 

816.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thai  learned  to  align  themselves  man  by  man, 
ctly,  and  without  groping  or  jostling,  the  iaatr  uctoi  will  cause  the  entire  rank  to 
align  itself  at  once  by  the  command  : 

Might  i, or  left)  —  Dnr.ss. 

3!7.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  BM  ■  planed  in  advances*  a  basis  of  alignment, 
will  more  up  in  owse*  time,  and  place  themselves  ou  the  new  line,  according  to  the 
principles  pi  i  ioi  ■  !'  >l  v<  o,  312. 

318.  ''h.-  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  pares  in  front,  and  facing  the  rank,  will 
carefully  observe  thai  the  principles  are  followed,  and  then  pass  to  the  flank  that  has 
servi  J  si  the  basis,  to  verify  the  alignment. 

3i:».  The  instructor  teeing  the  greater  number  of  the  rank  well  aligned,  will  com- 
mand : 

I  ION  r. 

BM:  The  instructor  may  afterwards  order  l hi*  or  that  file  fonrard  or  back,  designat- 

un  ber.     The  file  or  files  designated,  only,  will  slightly  turn  the  lead 

towards  tbe  basis,  to  judge  bow  xuch  they  ought  to  move  up  or  bach,  steadily  place 

It,.  ,, ...  [y    -  on  the  line,  and  thl  D  I  the  front,  without  a  (.articular  command 

to  that  Meet. 

:.-'l,  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles,  the  recruits 
step)  ins  back  ■  little  beyond  the  line,  end  then  dressing  up  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  No.  812,  the  instructor  commanding: 

Right  (or  left)  bnctteard— Dbess. 
\'ter  each  alignment,  the  tnstl  u<  tor  will  examine  the  position  of  the  men,  and 
cam  .    to   ordered  arms,  to   prevent  too  much  fatigue,  and  also  the 

danger  and  negligence  at  ikvuldcraii  arm*. 


SCHOOL    OF    Till:    SOLDIER — TART   III.  2  ; 

Lesson  IT. 

323.  The  men  having  learned, in  thc6rit  and  second  parts,  to  march  with  steadiness. 
in  common  timi\  and  to  take  j tfj<c  equal  in  bnpth  and  iwiftticss,  "ill  be  exercised  in 
the  third  )iart  only  in  quuk  timr,  double  quick  t%me,  and  the  run  ;  the  USStnM  lor  will 
cause  thrin  to  execute  »ucc<  m\  i  ly,  at  these  ditferenl  ca>'--  th<  march  to  the  front, the 
faeinp  about  in  marching,  the  man  h  by  the  flank,  the  H  he<  la  at  a  halt,  and  in  uiarcb- 
inp,  and  the  changes  oi  direction  to  the  side  <d  the  guide. 

324.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits  that  at  the  command  wnrrh.  th<  v  will 
always  move  off  in  quick  time,  unless  this  command  should  be  preceded  by  tliat  of 
double  quit  h. 

To  march  to  the  front. 

32f).  The  rank  being  correctly  alip/nr  <1.  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
march  by  the  front,  he  "ill  place  a  well  instructed  man  on  the  right  or  the  left,  accord- 
ing to  the  side  on  whicli  he  may  Wish  t lie  guide  to  be.  and  command  : 

1.  Squad,  fvrumrd.     2.   Onid*  right       -    ■  I.  IfABCsT. 

"2C.  Af  the  command  waroA,,  the  rank  « ill  step  off  smartly  with  thelefl  foot;  the 
guide  v.  ill  take  care  to  march  straight  to  the  front,  keeping  his  shoulders  (always  in  a 

square  with  that  line. 

327.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marchinp  to  the  fiont,  thai  the  men  touch 
lightly  the  elbow  toward?  the  side  of  the    gttidej    that   they   do    r:ot  open  out  tl 

elbow,  nor  the  right  arm  ;  that  they  yield   to  pressure  eoming  from  the  side  oi  the 
guide,  and  resit  that  coram;  from  the  apposite  side  ;  that  they  recover  by  insensible 
degrees  the  slight  tout  h  oi  the  i  Ibow,  ii  lost :  that  thej  maintain  the  hi  ad  di  eel  to 
the  front,  no  matter  on  which  side  the  guide  maybe;  and  il  found  before  oi  behind 
the  alignmc  nt,  that  the  nan  in  fault  coi  i  ects  hims'  il  by  shortening  •  • 
almost  insensible, 
32s  The  instructor  "ill  labor  to  cause  rectuiti  to  comprtdicnd  thai  the  aligni 
can  only  be  preserved,  iu  marching,  by  the  regularity  ol  the  it*p,  the  touch  of  the 
.  and  the  msinti  nance  of  tl  m  a  square  with  tie  line  of  direction  ; 

that  it.  for  example,  the  att  |  r  than  thai  of  others,  or  if  some  march 

thanothi   s,  a  separation  of  <  a  loss  of  the  alignment,  wouh 

hie  ;  that  it  i  it  bi  ing  required  that  the  head  should  I 

icn  of  elbows,  it  would  be  impossible  for  an  individual  toj 
whether  be  marcht-i  abreast  with  his  neighbor,  or  not,  and  whether  there  be  not  an 
inti  rral  betwei  n  them. 

The  Impulsion  of  the  quick  step  baring  a  tendency  to  n-.ake  men  b»o  easy  and 
i  their  movements,  the  instructor  wilt  be  careful  to  regulati  th<  this 

step,  and  to  habituate  tbesa  to  pretervt  alwa  andtheahae 

lenpth  of   the  pace. 

'    The  mrn  being  well  established  in  the  principles  of  the  direct  march,  tb"  in- 
ter wilt  exercise  them  in   marching  obliquely.     The   rank  being  in  march,  the 
insti  actor  w  ill  command  : 

1.    Right    or   '<<■■  2.   M  »hch. 

331.  At  11  an  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  rigl  ; 
and  wjl)  then  march  straight  forward  direction.     As  the  met 

V  «  ill  plar 
to  w  hi'  I)  tl  and  »  ill   r    . 

alwa< 

real  the  hi  ad<,  of  the  otl 
tame 

332.  The  infctru  and  : 

1 .    Forward.     I     M  • 

At  the  sei  - 

and  I 

o  sreh. 

. 
I 

pass 


OL   OF    Tin:   a  iLDIKB      TAUT   III. 

them 
march  obliquely  ■.  rell  establish  '1  In  tin  i  . 

'■p. 

tin  quick  til  uctor  will  command  : 

1.   /  y       n. 

Utile  command  man  iiir  to  thf 

grout  off  in  double  quick  I        .     T   e  men  will  endeavor  to  follow 

l  down  in  the  first  pari  ..  and  to  preserre  the  alignment. 

.  Whx  n  ili"  Initrnetor  w  lain  ■  th  ■  squad  to  resume  the  step  in  quick  time,  he  will 

tnd  : 

itk  timr.      1.    M  UICB. 

immand  march,  which  will  bi  g      n  when  ing  to  the 

squad  »  .11  retak    I 
The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  halt  It  by  th*  commands  and 
The  command  ha  \  will  !''•  giTen  an  instant b 
b    ground, 
in  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  instructor  v  .illv 

it  to  r  ark  time  by  t !■  •  -  ■  10.     The  menwDl  then  mark 

.  (.  without  b 
to  jiav-  irom  the  direct  to  tl>    obi  informing  to  « hat  ha.-. 

lje<'n  ;  I,  and  follow  il.LT- 

se  it  to  march  in  double  quick 
seeding  the  command  march,  by  double  jutck. 

avor  to  regulate  well  the  cadence  of  tab 

To  face  about  in  marching. 

.  id  be  marching  in  ([ni'-k.  or  double  qnlek  time,  an  I  tbe  i 
n  veh  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  »ill  command  : 

1.  Squad  right  nh,,ut.    '1.  Much. 

mmand  starca,  which  will  be 
in-.'  I  rtcruil   will  brinj  and,  and  turning  on  it. 

.Li- ;  be  «i!l  then  place  the  right  foot  In  toe  new  direction,  and 

■ 

T<>  march  backward*. 
845.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  If  the  Instructor  should  wish  to  march  U  in  Lb  • 
■  I.,  he  n  ill  command  : 

1.  Squad  backward,     i.   Ovid*  left  (or  rijht.\     3.  Habok. 

.  The  bank  stop  will  be  an  cuted  by  the  means  proscribed  No.  247. 
i  i,    inatraotor,  In  thh  stop,  will  be  watchful  that  the  men  do  not  lean  on  each 
other. 

.  A-  tbe  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should  only  be  bi  boul 

instructor,  in  order  not   to  fatigue  the  men  too  nun!'.. 

.0,  will   halt  the  squad   from  time  to  tin* 
I  <l. 
349.  In  marching  it  double  quiek  time,  the  nun  will  always  carry  theii 
■  r  at  h  /r«n7.      T hi*  rule  i*  general. 

li  the  instructor  cball  wish  the  pieces  carried  at  a  trail,  be  will  tie 
Me  quirk.     If,  on  the  contrary,  thl 
a  will  shift  their  piecei  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command 
,.     |„  either  case,  at  the  command  halt,  the  men  nrill  bring  their  pit 
■  •  arm*.     Thin  rule  i»  general. 
I .  sill. 

The  march  by  the  jlml-. 

351.  The  rank  bcinp  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  will  command  : 
1.   8qvad,    right  — Yacv..     2.    Forward.     3.   MAitcn. 

jj2.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the  «»nk  will  hoe  to  the  right  J  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  Ml.  27 

even  numbered  men,  afl      facing  to  the  riijht.  will  step  quickly  to  the  ri 
the  odd  numbered  men         Inltor  standii  the  ntovemen 

ted,  the  nirn  will  be  I  nto  flies  of  |  ibreast. 

353.  At  the  third  co       md,  the  squad  lartlywithtl  the 

files  k  teping  align  si  iin;r  their  intervals. 

r.r.i.  The  march  by  l  i  catedbytb. 

and  by  inverse  means:  in  tin    i  ■    .  tfa  ■       n  aumb  red 
men,  after  facing  to  the  lilt   will  stand  Cast,  and  too  odd  numbered  will  |  Is 
a  their  left. 

•  The  instructor  will  place  a  well  ii  ildier  by  tl  the  recruit 
who  •  !'l  ol  the  rank,  to  regulate  th  *(<■]>,  and  to  conduct  lii'n  ;  and  it  will 
1                  ,;'''.        emit  <                always  ;lbow  to  elbow  with  I 

I.  The  Instructor  \\  ill  cans  •  to  be  oh*  rved  in  th    march,  by  tin-  (lank,  th  i  follow- 
ing rules  : 
That  the  ttep  be  executed  according  to  the  principle*  pr  Hep: 

principle^,    rithout  which  men,  pi 
rank,  ear.not  preserve  nnitv  and  harmony  of  movement,  an>  of  a 
race  in  m archil  g  in  Mr. 

That  the  head  of  tht    man  u  ■  lea  U   of  all  wko  are. 

in  ft  ,ni  : 

Because  it  i?  tfa  I  tin  rule  by  -  b  man  may  maintain  hlmscl  f  in  the 

:  the  file. 

instructor  will  place  himself  habitually  five  or  .«ix  paces  on  the  ill 
Ble,   to  \\  atch  oi  ation  of  1 1 

II ■  ■  .  halt,  and   puiligsje]*^' 

e  whether  th.'  ■ 
rately. 

•  the  rank,  marching  bj 
:".  he  fl  ont,  be  a  II  command  ; 

2.  Halt.     3.  F 

At  the  secon  I  command,  the  rank  will   halt,  and    ifterwardi  no  man  will 
although  h  stance.     This  prohibition  i»  d  v 

itlon  <■!  their  dial  i 
iroand,  each  man  will  front  by  fa<  left,  if  wan  I 

l>_v  tfa  a  face 

unk  mr-n  "ill  ;if  th*'  same  time  move  fjut ckl y 

tor  will  cai 

1.   / 

•  tile  will  chai 
in  del  ■.  and  will 

k  in 

- 

If.  in  fa< 

■ 

into 

•  -ik. 

If,  ahtn  I  mf  tractor  should  caasr  i 


8CTI00L  OF   THE  SOLDIER-  TART   III. 

8f-c  by  the  left  flank,  it  if  th<*  ev»n  number?  who  will  double  by  moving  to  th(>  ripht 
of  tlic  odd  numbers.  ;  but  il  by  the  ritrhl  Bank,  it  is  1 1 1 •  -  odd  number*  who  will  double 
t<>  tin-  ambers.     Observe  tin"  two  following  ralei  in  the  facings,  vi/.  : 

1.     '  .     ' :  '  ill  lul  Ul  tin-  frOIlt  ill  doabHl 

•  I  -r  of  the  .  andoabling. 

The  front  referred  t".  i,  the  original  or  real  front.     The  nomben  would  be  rr- 
•i  thf  right  of  the  company,  number  two  thould 
tall  t'  ,  lea  nppfj    '"  ail  lacings,  irhethcr  the  companj  be 

marching,  or  at  a  halt. 

a,  like  the  preceding  one,  will  be  practised  with  pieces  at  a  should)  r; 
but  the  instructor  mar,  to  give  relief  Oj  chancre,  occasionally  order  tupport  arm*, 
and  he  will  require  of  the  recruits  marching  in  tin-  much  regufaritj  ai  in 

thi.  former. 

The  mnrrh    hy   thr    tlnnl;   in   double  quick  l!mr. 

3CP.  The  prineii  lea  of  the  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time,  are  the  same  as 

in  quick  time.     The  inatractor  will  give  the  command!  prescribed  No.  351,  taking 

care  always,  to  gire  the  command  double  quick  before  ih-u  of  narei. 

il  •  will  pay  the  great)  st  ett  >ntion  to  the  cadence  of  the  - 

S70.  The  instructor  will  c  ■  •  direction,  and  the  march  by  the  Hank, 

tted  in  double  ciui'-k  time,  bj  the  same  eommanda,  and  according  to  the 

same  i  U  in  quick  time. 

171.  The  instructor  will  on  's  to  be  carried  either  on  the  right tkoulder 

or  a i  a  trail. 

SfX   1  he  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the  squad  by  the  flank,  w  itfaout  doubling 
the  61 

373.  The  principles  of  this  march    are   the   same   as   in   two   ranks,  and   it    will 
always  be  ex     uted  in  quick  time. 

374.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  prescribed  hTo.  S61,  but  he  will  be  care- 
ful to  caution  the  squad  not  to  double  fllea, 

DCtor  w  ill  be  W  at<  hful  that  the  men  do  not  bend  their  knees  uni  quallj  , 
n  hioh  would  cause  them  to  tfead  on  the  heeli  of  the  men  in  front,  and  also  to  lot 

cadence  of  the  step  and  iheir  dislanc-«. 

37C  Tl,^  \  arions  mor<  menti  in  this  lesson  "ill  be  executed  in  single  rank.     In  the 

changes  of  direction,  the  l<a  <  i  i  i  ^  man  will  change  direction  without  altering  the 

h  or  the  cadence  of  the  step.    The  Instructor  will  recall  to  the  attention  of  the 

men,  that  in  feeing  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  they  will  not  doable,  bnl 

march  in  one  rank. 

.  IV. 

WIIEEI.IN'GS. 

General  Principles  of  Wheeling. 

-  are  of  two  kinds:   from  halts,  or  on   fixed  pivots,  and  in  march,  or 

on  mor<  able  pi\  ots. 

.  Wheeling  on  •  fixed  pivot  takea  place  in  pasting  a  corps  from  the  order  in 
battle  to  the  older  in  column,  or  from  the  latter  to  the  former. 

Wheels  In  marching  take  place  in  changee  of  direction  in  cotamn,  aa often  at 
DDortmcnl  is  executed  to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guidt . 
ISO.  In  v.  bei  la  from  I  h.ilt,  the  pir<  I  mac  i  nlj  tw  ai  in  hit  i  leoe,  ■  ithonl  adi  incing 

■  ding. 

l .,  the  '•■•  b<  eh  in  n  arching,  the  pivot  tak<  i  Ft.  ps  of  nine  or  alerea  Inchea,  ac- 
cording aa  the  aquad  is  marching  in  qui<k  or  double  quick  time,  so  aa  to  clear  tha 
wheeling  point,  which  is  nec<  reary .  in  oi  der  that  ihe  rubdivieitmi  ol  n  coin  in. 

ection  nitbout   Losing  their  distances,  aa  will  be  explained  in  the  school  ol 

the  <  oinpm.v. 

Ihe  mas  on  Ihe  wheeling  Bank  will  take  the  full  itep  of  twenty-eight  inches, 
or  thirty-three  in<  b<  -.  act  oi  ding  to  the  ^ait. 

Wheeling  from  a  !mK,  or  on  ajixedpivot. 

383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  Ibe  inatractor  will  place  a  well-instructed  man  on 
the  wheeling  hank  to  conduct  it,  and  then  command. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE  SOLDIER — PART    III.  29 

1.    liy  squad,  right  xrhrrl.      2.    MtRni. 

384.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  step  off  with  their  left  foot,  turning  at 
the  same  time  the  head  a  1  •  1 1 1 . -  to  the  left,  the  eyes  Qzed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  "i  t!i  • 
men  to  tli  ir  left ;  the  pivot-man  will  m  ireljr  mark  time  In  gradually  turning  bit  bodj  . 
In  order  to  conform  himaelf  to  the  movement  of  the  marching  Hank;  the  man  who 
conduct*  this  tl.»nk  will  take  itepa  of  twenty-eight  inches,  ana  from  the  first  itep  ad- 
vance a  little  th  i  left  shoulder,  ea-t  his  eyes  from  time  to  time  along  the  rank,  and 
feel  constantly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  lightly,  but  never  poafa  him. 

S85.  Th'1  other  man  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  towards  the  pivot, 
resit!  preasare  ooming  from   the  i  .  and  each  will  conform  himself  to  th* 

marching  Hank — shortening  his  step  according  to  hi-  approximation  to  the  pivot. 

?>S6.  The  Instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel  round  the  circle  once  or  tw  ic  ■  b 
halting,  tn order  to  cause  the  principles  to  be  the  1>  •  1 1  •  r  understood,  and  he  will  b; 
watchful  that  the  centre  do  m  not  break. 

3s7.  He  will  cause  the  whaei  to  the  left  to  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

When  the  instructor  "hall  with  to  arrest  tht  wheel,  he  will  command  : 

1.   S'/uail.     2.   Halt.  ' 

:!ft!>.   At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  no  man  stir.     The  instructor, 
going  to  the  flank   opposite   the   pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  man  of  that  flank  to 
the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  the  rank,  without  bowi  ver  displacing  the  pivot,  who 
will  conform  the  line  of  bisshoulders  to  this  direction.     Th'-  instructor  will  tak< 
t<>  have  n  I  i  'wo  men,  and  the  pivot,  only  the  space  accessary  to  contain  the 

Otb   r  men.      lie  will  then  couiinand  : 

Left  (or  liijhi)—  Dana. 

WO.   At  thi<.  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment  of  the  two  men  established 

basts,  in  conformity  With  tbo  principle*  prescribed. 
.;:<!.  The  instructor  will  next  command  PaoxT,  which  will  b< 

114. 

Remarki  on  the  principles  of  {he  Wheelfrom  a  halt. 

182,     Turn  a  little  tht  hrml  I  mi  »<-rl*  thr  marching  flonk,  andjixtheeqeioittA 
'     ■  'hut  tide  : 

B  <  ause,  otherwise,  it  would  be  Impossible  for  each  man  to  regulate  the  I  ngih  o< 
Doform  hi-  own  m  ivcmeut  to  that  of  toe  marching  Bank. 
Touch  lightly  thr  elbow  of  th<  next  man  toward 
In  order  that  the  liles  may  not  open  out  in  the  who)  I. 

Il'ii-t  preistirt  that  rnmrs   from  thr  tide  of  thr  marching  flank  f 

"era;-  ibciplc  be  neglected,  th  ■  pivot,  which  ought  to  be  a  fixed  point, 

in  n heels  ii cm  a  halt,  i 

Wheeling  in  marching,  or  on  a  movcabU  pivot. 

tpfl.  \T},en  the  recruits  have  ben  brought  t-.  exncuU  well  the  wheel  from  a  halt, 

II  be  taught  i"  a  beel  in  mat 

Ic  being  in  march,  when  the  instructor  shall  wisl 

flank.;  he  will  command  : 

1.    A'      •  ')  uwsauf.     2.   Mui  n. 

•    ThMir«t  command  w  ill   be  given  whan   the   rank    i«   yet    few   par-- 
nt. 

■ 
lliil' 
■idi 

flank,  feel   liphth  tin   i  Ibow  ol  th 


i'-tsa. 
397.   The  wheel  being.  | 


80  SCHOOL   OF   Till:   SOLDIER     1AKT   1!I. 

l.  /  i :  i 

command  will  be  pronounced  whenj 

tiiin. 

d  march,  which  v  pletingthe 

i  I  all  the  rank  will  retake  the  step  ol  twenty-eight  i 
the  front. 

Turning,  or  chanty  guide. 

been  ut<  d 
'1  be  m.-u  actor  will  command  : 

1.   Left  (or  right    turn.    '1.  Mahch. 
401.  The  first  command  will  bo  given  wb  atherai  mthetnrn- 

•:;mand  marrh,  to  bo  pronoun  bl  ;■•  tern, 

tide  will  race  to  the  lef  in  mar  bins,  and  new 

tj  ii  uii!. -wt  slackening  or  quickening  the  cadence,  and  without  thorteni 
■]..  aina  the  step.     The  whole  rank  "ill  promptly  conl 
tion;  >■  ■  ..  ■  i  which,  each  man  will  advan  •    the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  take 
the  doubl<  quick  step,  to  carry  himself  in  thi  I    >n,  turn  th     bead  and 

of  the  guide,  and  retake  the  touch  "i  the  elbow  mi  that  Bide,  in  pla 
the  alignment  of  the  guide,  from  whom  he  will  ial>.  .1  then  i 

d  ol  the  head.     Each  man  will  thus  arrive  su<  cesslvely  on  the 

.'I  and  changing  direction  to  the  aid*   of  the  guide,  in 
double  quit  k  time. 

443,  When  the  reci nits  comprehend  and  execute  well,  in  qui«i;  tii  le,  il  e  wheek  ■ it 
a  ball  and  in  inarching,  and  the  change  <>!'  diri  cl  on  to  the  ride  of  the  guide,  t J ■ 
...  the  same  movements  to  be  repeated  in  double  quick  time. 
404.    i  b<  se  \  arlous  movements  will  be  executed  by  tli    same  commands  ind  accord- 
ing f  principles  aain quick  time, except  that,  the  command  dcmbU  quick 
will  precede  that  of  march.     In  wheelii  I    man  will   take 
ren  inobes,  and  in  tho  change!  ol  direction  to  the  side  ol  the  guide,  the 
menon  the  side  o]                 the  guide  must  inct                   it  in  order  to  bring  them- 

.inc. 

t       The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  recruit  lotbclrat- 

.:,  to  execute  tb      'Veral  movami  nts  of  whicb  tl  conv- 

hi'ut  without  arms,  and  next,  after  the  mechanism  I  •■  a-cll  compi  eh(  nded,  w  itli 

i.        -.  \'. 

irehet    IW   doubU   quick  time   and  the   run. 

406.  The  inatri  i  be  resumed  the  exercises  in  double  quick  tunt 

the  run,  u  itfa  *>  mi  and  ltaa| 

tflT.  He  will  cause  long  marches  t<>  be  executed  in  double  quids  time,  Loth  by  the 
front  and  bj  the  flank,  aud  by  constant  practice  will  lead  the  men  to  pass  ovei  a  dis- 
tance ol  five  milei  in  Blxty  minutes.  In  pieces  will  be  carried  on  either  shoulder, 
a,,ii  tonu  times  :i1  :l  traU. 

408.  H<  will  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches,  at  ■  run,  the  pieces  carried  at  will ; 
the  men  will  be  instructed  to   keep  at   unite-:  le,  without  however  exacting 

much  regularity,  which  Is  impracticable. 

The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  resorted  to  when  it  may  be  highly  im- 
portant to  reach  a  given  point  with  great  prompitode. 

Stack  arms. 

The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

Stack  -  Arms. 
410    At  this  command,  manlier  (ase  of  the  front  ran!;,  will  pass  his  piece  before  him, 
icize  it  with  the  left  hand  about  the  middle  band,  slop*   it  aoffOM  the  body,  barrel  te 


SCHOOL  OF  Tin-:  COMPANY.  31 

the  rear,  the  butt  three  inches  above  th^>  right,  too  of  the  man  on  hii  left,  mnxzl 
inches  to  the  rifjht  of  bia  right  shoulder, 

(11,  Number  two  <>f  the  rear  rank  will  turn  his  pieoc,  lock  square  in  the  fi 
pass  it  to  bis  front  rank  man,  who  will  seisa  it    with  hisrighl  liand  about 
hand  and  incline  it  forward,  resting  the  neck  of  the  baronet  on  tl 
and  close  to  the  blade.     Nut  I  the  front  rank  will  tarn  the  barrel  o 

square  to  the  front,  slope  it  across  the  body,  place  tl  .  a!  n\  >•  the 

necks,  and  between  the  blades  of  the  other  two  bayonets,  bold 

right  hand  at  the  middle  band,  the  butt  three   ln<  hi  ground  in  front  ol  bis 

right  toe, 

(IS.    Number  two  of  the  front  rank  "ill  throw  the  butt  of  the  rear  i  ; 

abont  thirty  inches  to  the  front,  at  the  Mine  time  resting  th  ■  I 

the  ground  on  the  left,  and  alitUe  in  roar  of  his  left  toe.     At  tho  Bame  instant,  numbi  r 
one  of  the  front  rank  will  r<  -t  the  but)  of  his  piece  on  tha  ground,  .1  little  in  fron) 
right  toe.     Slumber  one  of  the  rear  rank  «  ill  mcline  his  pii  ceon  the  stack  thus  forim  l. 

(1$.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  takou  the  position  of  the  Bcldier  without  1 
t!ic  instructor  will  command  : 

1,    Ureal-  rankt.     '1.    March. 

To  resume  arms. 

414.  Both  rank.«  being  re-formed  in  r<  at  of  their  stark?, the  insti  uctor  will  com- 

TnJ.r — Abhs. 

415.  At  this  command,  number  one  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake  his  piece.     Km 
two  of  the  front  rank  will  sei  with  his  left  hai  band, 
and  bis  rear  rank  man's  piece  in  tl                  inner  with  his  righl   haitd  :  and  an 

•  the  front  rank    will  seize   1  1  ith  hi*  righl  hand  in  Lb    sau 

two  men  will  ra  bayonets. 

Number  tu  bj  rant,  will  receive  bi  an,  and  nil 

will  reiume  the  position  of  erdi 


TITLE   TIIIK!). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

'  rules  an<l  division  of  ih<  &  my. 

1.  Instruction  by  will  always  precede  thai  1 

1 1,  the  11    I 

willl  as  well  in  respect  to  principles,  as  tli 

2,  There  will  be  attached  to  a  company  undergoing  clci 
tairi. 

man'  arged 

Willi    . 

5.  The  H  rach  lesson  *  ill 

comrrf  li'txl 

1. 

1.  To  op.  n  rank-. 

2.  AJtfMm  ;  •    rank. 

'  of  arms. 
4.  ks. 

6.  Alij 

LESSON   II. 
1.  To  load  in  f^ur  Umi  1  and  at  will. 
In  by  ctmpanr. 

3.  To  t,re  I 

I  bv  rank. 

-  rear  rank. 


32  IIOOL    OP    THE   COMPANY — LESSON    I. 

LESSON  III, 

1.  To  march  in  line  of  battle. 

5.  To  halt  tli«  company  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it. 

3.  Obllqes  march  in  line  of  t ■  .* 1 1 1  ■  ■ . 

4.  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  back  stop. 

6.  To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle 

LESS05  IV. 

1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

2.  T<>  change  direction  by  file. 

3.  To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank,  and  to  face  it  to  th"  front. 

4.  Th"  a  i-X  'f  march  by  th  •  fl.ink.  to  form  it  on  th"  right  or  loft  by  fib- 
into  Imi'  fif  battle. 

f>.  The  company  marching  bv  the  fl.ink.  to  form  it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line, 
and  cause  it  to  lace  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching. 

LESSON  V. 

1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a  halt,  or  while  marching. 

2.  To  march  in  column. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  halt  th ■<  column. 

6.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either 
at  a  halt  or  marchii.g. 

LESSON'  VI. 

1.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  company. 

2.  To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  eaose  th  MB  to  re-enter  into  line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the  movements  incident  thereto. 

4.  Countermarch. 

f>.   Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle. 

4.  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two  ranks.  The  instructor  will  then  cause 
the  flics  to  be  Dumb. ml,  ami  for  this  purpose  W'H  command  : 

In  each   rank— Count  Twos. 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from  light  to  left,  pronouncing  in 
a  loud  and  distinct  voir-,  in  the  sam  •  tone,  without  hurry  and  without  turning  the 
head,  «•«/  two,  according  to  the  place  which  each  one  occupies.  II'  will  alto  can  • 
th  •  company  to  bfl  dirid  -I  into  platoon*  and  sections,  taking  care  that  the  first  platoon 
is  always  composed  of  an  even  number  of  lil  ■  . 

C.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  eoneise  a-;  possible  in  his  explanations;  he  will 
cau^e  faults  of  detail  to  b  I  rectified  by  the  captain,  to  whom  he  will  indicate  them, 
if  the  captain  should  Hot  have  himself  observed  them;  and  the  instructor  will  not 
otherwise  interfere,  unless  the  captain  should  not  well  comprehend,  or  should  badly 
execute  his  Intentions! 

7.  Composure,  or  presence  of  mind,  in  him  who  command",  and  in  those  who  obey, 
b,  ,._.,  the  Hrsl  menus  ol  order  in  a  body  of  troo  >s,  the  instruct  or  trill  labor  to  habituate 
the  Company  to  this  essential  quality,  and  will  himself  give  the  example. 

LESSON  FIRST. 

AitTICI.K    FlHST. 

To  open  ranks . 

R.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranks  and  file  closer*  well  aligned,  when 
the  iintrii'  tor  shall  wish  to  cause  the  ranks  to  b  I  opened,  be  will  direct  the  left  jjuide 
to  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  which  being  executed,  f>  •  will  command  : 
1.    Attention.      1.    Company.      3.   SAeuWsr—  Anus.     4.    To  the  rear  open  order. 

9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergent.  and  the  left  guide,  will  step  off 
smartly  to  the  rear,  four  paces  from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark  the  alignment 
of  the  rear  rank.  They  will  judge  this  distance  by  the  eye,  without  counting  the 
step*. 


FCnoOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON"    I.  33 

10.  The  inrtruetor  will  place  himself  at  the  same  time  on  the  right  (Link,  in  order  to 
observe  if  those  two  non-commissioned  a  >n  ;i  line  parallel  to  the  trout  rank, 
and  if  accessary,  to  correct  their  positions,  which  being  executed,  he  «ill  command; 

5.  Marcit. 

11.  At  tliis  commani,  tlie  front  rank  will  stand  fa^t. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear,  without  counting  the  steps,  and  will  place 
themselves  on  the  alignment  marked  for  this  rank,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  321. 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank  on  the  left  guide  placed  to  mark 
the  hit  nf  tlii-  rank. 

14.  The  tile  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the  same  time  with  the  rear  rank,  and 
will  place  themselves  two  paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is  aligned. 

].">.   The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned,  will  command  : 

6.  Fi 

If.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  tlie  hit  of  the  rear  rank  will  return  to  his 
place  ai  :i  Hie  closer. 

IT.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor  will  direct  the  captain  and  the 
covering  sergeant  to  observe  the  men  in  their  respective  ranks,  and  to  correct,  if 
necessary,  the  positions  of  persons  and^pieces. 

Article  Secosd. 

Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in  the  first  exercises,  align  the  ranks, 
man  by  man,  the  better  to  inculcate  the  prin<  I 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on  the  right  or  left  of  ^ach  rank  to 
march  two  or  throe  paces  forward,  and,  after  having  aligned  them,  command  : 

fly  .file  right    (or  /e/()-Ili 

20.  At  this,  th°  m^n  of  each  rank  will  biotc  up  successive!*-  on  the  alignment,  each 
man  bring  preceded  by  his  neighbor  in  the  same  rank,  towards  th"  basis,  liv  two  paces 

correctly  aliened  himself,  will  cast  his  eyps  to  the  front. 

21.  Successive  alignments  having  habituated  the   soldien  to  dress  correctly,  the 
."-tor  will  cause  the  ranks  to  aliirn  themselves   at  once,  forward  and  backward, 

-  itnetimet  in  a  direction  parallel,  and  sometimes  in  one  oblique,  to  th<»  original  direc- 
tion, giving,  in  each  ease,  two  or  four  men    to  serve  as   a  basis  of  alignm 
i  ank.      To  ctl.  i  t  which.  h»  will  command  : 

1.  lUjht  for  !'/<)—  Dress.     2.   Y 

or 

1 .    /. 

the  mm  of  the  rear  rank  will  not  teak 
f  the  « 

.  in  the  did  ions, 

23.  In  the  several  »'.  .  tain  will  superintend  the  front  rank,sr. 

ing  sergeant  I  they  will  j  the 

i  the  rank«  i 

24    In  obliqii"  alignr  n  will  conform  th"  lin^  of  their  shoul  Ic 

'  ;.  the  captain  ai 

■  the  rank*  I 

- 

Mi  i 

-  rtnki  b*in-  .  0  t.n4 

»i.d  will  command  Uie  manual  «f  arms  in  the  following  oi 


34  .-•  BOOL  09  IHI  CDMPAH1  H. 

Pre*  -nt  arm.«.  .lder  arms. 

(Ji  ound  iru 

Rail  •  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

I  ort  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Kix  bayonet.  8b  tuldor  arms. 

Shoulder  arms. 

Trail  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

i  baronet.  Shoulder  arms. 

B    u  Shoulder  arm*. 

I.  ■  1 1  in  nin  I  tin 

27.  The  luetruutor  will  take  care  that  the  position  of  the 
,  be  alwaj    ■  n  t.  .iml  that  the  timet  be  briskly  exeout  d  an  J  olos  •  to  the  poraoa. 

Ar.nn.i:   FoUBTH. 

To  close  ranks. 

28.  The  manual  of  arms  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

I.   '  tot*  oroW.     '.'.  M.uuii. 
21'.  At  the  command  wtarok,  the  rear  rank    will   close  uj>  in  quick  time,  each  man 
directing  himself  on  his  tile  leader. 

AltTK'I.K    Fll  III. 

Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  rani:*. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  parallel  and 
oblique  alignments  l>v  the  right  ami  left,  forward  ami  backward,  observing  to  place 
always  two  or  four  liles  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment    He  will  give  (lie  commands 
bed,  So.  21. 

SL  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will  superintend  the  front  rank,  and 
the  covering  sergeant  the  rear  rank.  They  will  habituate  themselves  to  judge  the 
alignment  By  the  lines  of  the  eyes  and  shoulders,  in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye  along 
the  front  and  roar  of  the  ranks. 

S3,  The  moment  the  captaia  perceives  the  greater  number  of  the  front  rank  aligned, 
he  will  command  Paoar,  and  rectify,  afterwarda,  it  neoaesary,  the  alignment  "i  the 
other  men  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No,  520  The  rear 
rank  will  conform  to  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superintended  by  the  covering 

berg. ant. 

:;:!.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will  place  himself oa  the  Hank  to  verify 
their  alignment.  He  will  also  see  that  each  rear  rank  man  covers  accurately  his  Die 
leader. 

M,   In  c)ili(|ue  alignments,  the  instructor  will  observe  what  is  prescribed,  No.  21. 

'■'<■>.  In  all  alignments,  tho  file  closers  will  preserve  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the 
rear  rank. 

'■'•>'<■  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  manual 
of  arms. 

::".  The  instructor,  wishing  to  rest  the  men,  without  dernnging  the  alignment,  will 
first  causciarms  to  be  supported,  or  ordered,  aud  then  command  : 

In  place    But. 

.1*.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  b>-  constrrined  to  preserve  silonce  or 
steadiness  of  position  ;  bat  they  will  always.  Keep  one  or  other  heel  on  the  alignment. 

39.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should  wish  to  rest  the  men  without  con- 
straining them  to  preserve  the  alignment,  he  will  command: 

Rest. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be  required  to  preserve  immobility,  or  to 
remain  in  their  [daces. 

4f.  The  instructor  may,  also,  when  he  shall  judge  proper,  cause  arms  to  bo  stacked, 
which  will  bo  executed  as  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier. 

LESSON'  SKCONI). 

42.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second  Iwson,  will  cause  tho  company  to 
take  arms,  if  stacks  have  been  formed,  and  command  : 


SCHOOL   OF   THE  COMPANY — LESSON   II".  35 

1.   Attention.     2.   Company.     3.   Shoulder — Arms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and  firings  to  be  executed  in  the  follow- 
ing order  ■ 

Article  First. 

To  load  in  four  times  and  at  villi. 

4  1.   I, nailing  in  four  time*  will  be  commended  and  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
sc.iool  of  the  soldier,  No.  241,  and  following.      The  instructor  will  cause  this  exercise 
'Hen  repeated,  in  saccession,  before  peering  to  loading  at  will. 

46.  I,oading  at  will  will  ho  commanded  and  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  166.  In  priming  when  loading  in  four  time*,  and  also  at  will,  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant  will  half  'ace  to  the  ri<;ht  with  the  men,  and  face  to  the  front 
when  the  man  next  to  them,  respectively,  bring*  his  piece  to  the  shoulder. 

4fi.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to  cause  the  men,  in  the  different  load- 
ing?. .  what  has  bon  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Koe.  2.">7  and  258. 

47.  Loailing  at  will,  being  that  of  battle,  and  consequently  the  one  with  which  it  is 
most  inuni  taut  to  render  the  men  familiar,  it  will  claim  preference  in  the  exert  i-- 
moment  the  men  be  well  established  in  the  principles.     To  these  they  will  be  brought 
by  degrees,  to  I  hat  <  vei  y  man  mar  be  able  to  load  with  cartridges,  and  to  fire  at  lcas>t 
three  rounds  in  a  minute  with  ease  and  regularity. 

Article  Second. 

To  fir  c  by  company. 

4s.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  company  to  be  executed,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.    Fire  by  company.      1.    Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly  placL-  himself  opposite  the  centre 
of  hi?  company,  and  (bar  pact  I  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file  closers  :  the  covering  sergeant 
w  ill  retire  to  that  line,  and  place  hims-  If  opposite  to  his  interval.      Thit  rule  it  general, 

for  both  (he  captain  anil  cocerittf  tergeant,  in  all  the  different  firingi. 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add  : 

1.   Company;  2.  Readt  ;  3.  Aim;  4.  Firb;  5.  Load. 
M .   At  the  command  loml.  the  men  w  ill  load  their  pieces,  and  then  take  the  position 
nf  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the  firing,  by  the  commands  : 
L   I'ompnny.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 
S3.  The  firing  will  be  thus  continued  until  the  signal  to  cease  firing  is  sounded. 
;.4.   The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  to  the  right  and  left,  simply 
observing  to  pronounce  right    or  left]  obiiqu*,  before  the  command  aim. 

Article  Third. 

Tlo  fire  In/  filr. 

65.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  file  to  lie  executed,  will  command  : 

1.    fire  by  file.      1.    Company.      S.    RkaI'T.      4.    Commence  firing. 
M.   The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  rrh- 
the  soldier,  No.  275  and  following. 

.'•7.  •     1  be  oomn.'  ■  right  file  of  the  company  :   the  next  file  will 

take  aim  at  the  in*tant    the    1 1 r « t  bring*  down  piem   to   M  I  left; 

but  thi«  pr<  '■'  st  discharge,  aft»i  man 

will  re-load  and  fire  witboal  himself  by  otbcri,  conforming  himself  to  what 

is  prescribed  in  ti      •  '  the  soldier.  N 

AfcTICl.lt    Poi-RTTI. 

Thr  fin-   I'll   rtnth. 
!>*,  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be  executed,  will  romirisnd  | 

1.    />r«  hy  rmnk.       2.     '^mj.tiny.       3.   llfi  |     |  f 

5t.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  sxecated  as  is  j  rescribs*  in  the  school  of 
lb*  sr  "ing. 


oC  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON   II. 

CO.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in  the  rear  rank  at  a  ready,  he  will 
command : 

L   front  rank.     2.    Aim.      3.   Fmr.     4.    I 

01.  The  firing  will  be  centinued  thus  by  alternate  ranks,  until  the  signal  is  given  to 

•  ring. 

The  instructor  will  sometimes  c:\use  aim  to  be  taken  to  the  right  and  left,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  No. 

C3.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  ce:i"«,  whether  by  company,  by  file,  or  by 
rank,  by  sounding  the  signal  to  c*a*tjlrimg,  and  at  the  instant  this  sound  commences, 
the  men  will  cease  to  lire,  conforming  to  w  hat  is  proscribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  381 

The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  always  followed  by  a  bugle  note ;  at  which 
sound,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in  line, 
and  will  rectify,  it  necessary,  the  alignment  of  the  ranks. 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  powder  is  used,  the  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  in- 
dicated by  the  command,  cen—  fin\U,  which  will  be  pronounced  by  the  instructor 
when  he  wishes  the  semblance  of  tiring  to  « 

(  r.  The  conminnd  posts  "ill  be  likewise  substituted,  under  similar  circumstances, 
for  the  bugle  note  employed  as  the  signal   for  the  return  <>f  tin"  captain  and  covering 

ut  to  their  places  in  line,  which  command  will  be  given  when  the  instruct"' 
the  men  haTe  brought  their  pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

07.  The  fire  hv  file  being  that  which  is  most  frequently  m  1  against  an  enemy,  it  is 
highly  important  that  it  be  rendered  per  e-tly  familiar  to  the  troops.    The  instructor 

will,  therefore,  give  it  almost  exclusive  preference,  and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim 
with  care,  and  always,  if  possible,  at  some  particular  object.  As  it  is  of  the  utmost 
importance  that  the  men  should  aim  with  precision  in  battle,  this  [principle  will  bo 

rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises  for  purposes  of  instruction. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be  executed  to  the  rear,  that  is,  by 
the  rear  rank.     To  effect  this,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Face  by  the  rear  rank.      2.    Company.     S.    About — Fack. 
00.   At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out  and  place  himself  near  to,  and 
facing  the  right  file  of  his  company  ;    the  covering  sergeant,  and  lib-  dosers,  "ill  pass 
quicklv  through    the  captain's    interval,    and   place   themselves   faced  to   the  rear,  the 

•sovereign  sergeant  a  pace  behind  the  captain,  and  the  file  closers  two  paces  from  the 

from  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line,   each  passing  behind  the  covering  SSTgeat. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  last  file  closer 
s'»all  have  passed  through  the  interval,  the  Company  will  faOS  about  ;  the  captain  will 
place  himself  in  his  interval  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front,  aud  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  cover  him  in  the  front  rank,  and  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  baring  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the  Instructor  will  cause  it  to  exe- 
cute the  fire  bj  the  company,  both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire  by  file,  and  the  lire  by 
rank,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the  throe  preceding  articles ;  thecap- 
ti;,„  ,  •  rgeant,  and  tie-  men  will  conform  themselves,  in  like  manner,  to  what 
if  therein  prescribed. 

72.  The  fin  by  tile  will  sommence  on  the  left  «>l  the  company,  now  become  the 
right.  In  the  tire  by  rank,  the  firing  will  commoner  with  the  front  rank,  now  be- 
come the  rear. 

7'.S.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.    tare  by  the  front    rank.      i.    CompaHy.      3.    About— FacB. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  coveriug  sergeant  aud  file  closer  will  con- 
form to  what  is  prescribed  Hoa.  C'j  and  70. 

7i.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having  faced  about,  the  captain  and  covor- 
ingsergeaut  will  resume  their  places  in  line. 

7g.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  on  the  men  the  importance  of  aiming 
always  at  some  particular  object,  and  of  holding  the  piece  as  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  BO.  17b. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  III.  3f 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend   to  the  captain  to  make  a  short  pause  between 
the  command*  mm  ndyirt,  men  time  to  aim  with  accuracy.  DUween 

♦n7^,Tl'PrilY,,ruf'1t"r  Jf,111^1*08  ^">»elfiii  po-ition  to  see  the  two  ranks,  in  order 
todetect  faults ;  hewi  I  charge  the  captain  and  file  closer,  to  be  equally  watehful 
and  to  report  to  bio  when  the  rank,  are  at  reet.  He  will  remand,  for  i,  dividu'  ' 
itructioo,  the  men  who  may  be  observed  to  load  badly.  maiTiauai  in- 

I     The  instructs  will  recommend  to  the  BoMien,  ill  (he  firing,  the  h.Vfect  decree 
ofiCom,K,SUre,,r   pre.-  ence  of  mind  ;   he  will   ,,,1,,   nothing   thS' majTnTrib 

so.   lie  will  jrive  to  the  men    a,  a  gmutrtd  frineipU,  to  maintain,  in  the  direct  fire 
h    left  heel  in  its  pla,  thai  .he  alignment  of  the  ranks  and  files  may  ■ 

Jan'ce^ulrtSll.^7'  *  ~lti""'  ^  «*  exercise  in  firing  £ 
foUow?0   ins'rUctor   wi"  nhscT™>  in   «*««on   to  then  remarks,  all  those  which 

When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges,  it  i*  particularly  recommended  that 
a  nT.'r     rrV,,'i  ".'  7lf",ckl"v  "  ether  .„■.,  '  •  am  the  tube  wbicl   i 

tarn  indication  that  the  piec  bat  ir,  „„  ,,,„  f,,„ltl..ir       , 

-eaj  Idier,  in  such  caao    in.tead  ofre-loading/  wil  pick  and  ■ ,'i  Z  , 

t.  l-ehevn,;,  the  load  to   be  discharge,!,    the  eoldier   should  pur a  Vcon.l'eari^;      ' 
hu  Piece,  he  ought  at  least  to  perceire  it  in  ramming,  bv  the  beiirnt  tf theToad-  and 

'':;,;  ^;:,:;!s:;  «""■■»■•■«-" 5T«:SS 

.■flli'  ''","'.',"1""'"  .'"Pi"'";- " '"'"  a  °*P  ''•"  »"■""'  »•»,  »•<  Mm  tab.  b  Ibmd  .top™) 

at'idVSir^;       Tjrsar  m  -  -  •■*■■  -*  "•  *»33 

LESSON  THIRD. 
Art;ci.k  Fihst. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

.1  K"  JJif  r°m''an-T  beinP.i»  ««W  of  battle,  and  corn,  tlv  aligned,  when  the  bjatn 

';  ',  """*U  in  »»»1  it,  he  will  assure   himaelf  ih« 

in  and  covering  Wgeanl  are  perfectly  in  KofttdJ 

tiw  ranks   and  thai  th  accurately  cover.-  the  captain:   tfa. 

an     Jl         i  ...front  of  tl  em. 

and,  rear, 

*"■   7  '  •  bcin?  aligned  on  the  directing  file,  wiil  command  : 

1.   Company,  forward. 
At  this,  asfcrgeaat,    proTfoualy  deeignated,  will    move  t\x   Baf.„,  ;n  aiK-,nee„r 

•n  preacribed   w  II       r    CM.' 

'-"•*"'•  who  'ion   will   tt,.mr,ra„„( 

>waaad  th<  ~  '"  "  "°*w 

■  11  step  ,si,]c,  and  com,, 
'  ■nrB. 
1,  the  company  will  step  of  with  life.     The  direct!,,  rvp 

r^t  r^  •« 

''I   at  the  d>«tnrK 

I 


33  -  IIOOL  OF  TIIF.  O'MI'ANY       LMSBOS  JO. 

Bl.  Tlic  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  distance  of  two  paces  behind  the 
rear  rank. 

92.  If  the  men  I  <p,  the  instructor  will  command: 

To  tht — Srar. 

At  this  command,  the  men  will  plane'  towards  the  directing  sergeant,  retake 

from  him.  and  again  direct  their  ■  front. 

The  instructor  will  oassc  the  captain  anil  covering  srrgeant  to  be  posted  sorae- 

11  tin-  righl  oo  the  loft  of  th< ipany; 

!'5.  The  direct:'  .in  advance,  having  th  ■  greatest  influence  on  the  march 

of  the  compaaj,  he  will  be  selected  fo>  the  precision  of  his  step,  his  hni>it  of  main- 

•  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given  line  af  directioa,  ami  of  prolonging 

that  line  without  variation. 

should  fail  ta  observe  these  principles,  undulations  in  the  front 
of  the  companj  n  :  the  men  will  be  unabie  to  oontract  the  1 

of  taking  steps  equal  ia  length  and  swiftness,  and  of  maintaing  tbeir  shoulders  in  a 
square  with  the  line  of  direction — the  only  means  of  obtaining  perfection  in  the  march 
in  line. 

!'7.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  bettor, to  establish  the  men  in  the  length  and 

'■.id' •nee  of  the  step,  and  in  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line,  will  cause  the  c panv 

to  ad  or  four  hundred  paces,  at  once,  without  halting,  it'  the  ground  will 

permit.    In  the  B  will  march  the  company  with  open  ranks,  tbe  better 

to  observe  the  two  ranks. 

OR.  Th«  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  that  all  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line 

are  strictly  obeerv  .1 :  he  will  generally  be  on  the  directing  Hank,  in  a  position  t<>  ob- 

aks,  and  the  faults  they  may  commit  ;  he  will  sometimes  halt  behind 

the  directing  file  during  some  thirty  successive  steps,  in  order  to  judge  whether  the 

directing  sergeant,  or  toe  directing  tile,  deviate  from  the  perpendicular. 

Auticle  Second. 

To  halt  the  Company,  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it. 

.   The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company,  will  command  : 
1.  Company.     2.  Halt. 

1QS.  At  the  second  command,  the  aorapany  will  halt;  the  directing  sergeant  will 
ii  in  adv.n,ee.  onJ  i  to  return  ti>  the  line  of  tile  closers.    Th  •  com 

.  halt,  the  Instructor  may  advance  the  first  three  or  tour  tiles  on  the  side  of 
Mei:.  and  align  the  company  on  that  basis,  or  he  may  confine  himself  to  cau 

ctifled.     In  thislastcue,  he  will  command:   Captain,  rectify  the 
alignment.     The  captain  will  direct  th.  'eant  to  attend  to  the  rear 

wh  n  each,  glancing  bis  eyes  along  his  rank,  will  promptly  rectify  it,  oonformi 
what  ;  hool  v.i'  the  soldier,  No,  325. 

AuTict.r.  Tbibd. 

Olli'i'i*   march  in  lint  of  battle. 

101.   The    eon. panv    being    in   the  direct    march,  when  the   instructor  shall    wish  to 
It  to  march  obliqulj  .  be  « ili  comic  ami  \ 

1.  Right  (or  le/t)  oblique.     2.  March. 
108,  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the  obll  iuc  Btep.    The  mer.  will 
accurately  i  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  Boldier,   No    SSI. 

their  distances,  and  mat'eh  in  rear  <  next 

t,p  th  •  righl  |  or  left    of  their  habitual  Bl 

lie.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direat march  to  be  resumed,  he  will  command  : 
1.   Forward,    2.  Ifancs. 
At  the  command  marcA,  the  company  will  resume  the  direct  march.     Tin*  in« 
tor  will  move  briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  and  facing  the  coat* 
(•any,  will  ;     ■  .  th  in  thi   prolongation  of  the  captain  and  covering  ser- 

;  and  then,  by  a  sign,  will  move  the  dii  ■■■ant  on  tbe  same  line,  if  he 

already  on  ft;  the  latter  will  immediately  take  two  points  on  tbe  ground  be- 
tween) himself  and  the  instructor,  i  points  of  direc- 
tion. ■■■■                      i  V  .   89. 

103.  In  the  oblique  inarch,  the  men  not  having  the  tOUl  h  of  elbows,  the  guide  will 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY — LE8SSON   II I. 

alwavs  bo  on  the  ride  towards  which  the  oblique  Is  made,  without  any  indication  to 
thai  •  pivrti ;  and  when  the  direct  march  ia named,  the  guide  will  be, 

equally  without  indication,  on  the  tide  where  it  was  previous  to  the  oblique. 

106.  Th"  inatractor  will,  nt  Brit,  cause  t!in  oblique  to  b  •  mail  •  toward!  the  ride  of 

the  guide.     II"  «  ill  also  dli  ed  the  captain  to  have  an  eye  on  the  directing  sorofcant,  In 

nc  perpendicular  line  to  the  front  with  him,  whim  following  a 

i  direction. 

K'V.   During  I  In*  continuance  of  the  march,  the  Inftmctor  will  be  Watchful  that  the 

men  follow  parallel  directions,  in  conforming  to  th  •  principle*  prescribed  in  t  he  icbool 

of  the  soldier)  for  preserving  the  general  alignment :  «  henever  the  men  lose  the  align- 

tin  ii   by  lengthening  or  shortening  the 
without  altering  tl  or  changing  the  direction, 

108.   The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  company  and  face  to  it,  in 
order  t'>  regulate  the  march  of  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  man  who  is  on  the  flank 
rdn  which  the  oblique  is  made,  and  to  see  that  the  principles  of  the  march  are 
!y  observed,  and  thai  the  files  do  not  crowd. 

I     ric:.E  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  i  quick  time,  andtlie  back  Hep. 

The  company  hejni-  in  the  direct  march  and  in  quick  time,  tl  >r,  to 

it  to  mark  time  will  command: 

1.    Mark  time.      2.    M 

110.  To  rc?ume  th  •  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.    forward,     2    March. 

111.  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.    Dovble  quick.     2.   tf&acH. 

112.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  cither  foot  is  coming  to 

113.  To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  command: 

L    Quick  timt*.     2.  March. 

114.  Th"  command  mnrch  will  be  pronounced  at  the  Instant  either  foot  is  coming  to 
the  ground. 

1    Ine;  at  a  halt,   the  instructor  may  cause   it  to  march  in  the 
back  "ill  command  : 

1.   Company  backward.     2.   M\ 
118.   The  Hack  'mcr  to  the  prinf>  bed  in  the 

tor  will  not 
U>  be  taken  in  t 

11"  panj  in  marching  in  double  quick 

nek 

in  thi 

if  marchii>_  mo. 

I     - 
■ 


40  SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LEfcrOX    IV. 

1.    I'omjiany.      2.    Aln>ut — FaCK. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the  Instructor  will  place  hiuiselfin 
front  of  the  directing  lil".  conforming  to  what  i-  prescribed,  No.  84. 

121.  The  instructor,  being  correctly  established,  on  the  prolongation  of  the  <'• 
ing  file,  will  command  : 

iy.n?ii/  forward. 

122.  At  this,  the  din  ant  will  conform  himself  to  what  [■  prescribed, 

with  this  difference— ho  will  place  himself  six  paces  in  front  of  the  I 
iding. 

LIS.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  opposite  to  lag 
interval,  and  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  r«  ar  rank,  now  become  the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  tin-  instructor  will  command  : 

4.  MaacH. 

12.'».  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain,  and  the  men,  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed  No.  89,  and  following. 

120.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,   marching  in  retreat,  all  thai  i 
scribed  for  marching  in  advance;  the  commands  and  the  means  of  elocution  will  be 
the  same. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company,  will,  when  he  mar  vish,  cause  it 
to  race  to  the  front  by  the  command  prescribed  No.  119.    The  captain,  tl 

ant,  and  the  directing  sergeant)  will  resume  their  habitual  places  in  Line,  the 

moment  they  shall  have  laced  about. 

128.  The  company  being  in   march  by  the  front  rank,  if  the  instructor  should  wish 

it  tn  march  in  retreat,  he  will  cause  the  right  about  to  be  executed  while  marching, 
and  to  this,  effect  will  command: 

1.    Company.     2.   Right  about.     3.   Maiicji.  t 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will  promptly  face  about,  and  recommence 
the  march  by  the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with  the  company,  and  will  more  rapid- 
ly lis  paees  in  front  of  toe  Gle  closers,  and  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  guide.  The 
instructor  will  place  him  in  the  proper  direction  by  the  means  prescribed  No.  1 "  i . 
The  captain  the  corering  sergeant,  and  the  nun,  will  conform  to  the  principh 

so  ib -il  for  the  inarch  in  retreat. 

131.  When  the  Instructor   Wishes  the  company  to  march  by  the  front  rank,  li"  will 
give  the  same  commands,  and  will   regulate  the  direction  of  the  march   bj   th 
means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  all  the  move- 
ments ]  rescribed  in  the  S  1.  4th,  6th  and  6th  lessons  of  this  b<  hool,  ■  ith  the  exception 
of  the  march  backwards,  which  w  ill  be  executed  only  in  quick  time.  He  will  give  the 
same  commands,  observing  to  add  doublt  quick  before  the  command  march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right  shoulder,  in  quick  time,  the  distance 
between  the  ranks  will  be  sixteen  inches.     Win  never,  therefore,  the  instructor  bi  inn 

the  company  li a  shoulder  to  thfl  position,    the  rear  rank  must  shorten  a  lit  1 1 

first  steps  in  order  to  gain  the  prescribed  distance,  and  will  lengthen  the  iti  ps,  on  the 
contrary,  in  order  to  close  np  when  the  pieces  are  again  brought  to  a  shoulder.     In 
marching  in  double  quick  tin  w.  the  distance  between  the  rank-  will  be  twenl 
inchsji,  and  the  piece  n  ill  be  carri<  d  habitually  on  the  right  shoulder. 

134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  men  will,  bring  their  pieces  al  on< 
■boulder  at  the  cum  ma  ml  halt.    The  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  d 

rules  are   ijcncnil 

LESSON  FOURTH. 

Auin        I 

To  march  by  the  flank. 

185.  The  company  being  in  tine  of  battle  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  right  flank,  be  will  command: 

1.  Company,  right— F Mi.     2.   Forward,     S.  Makcii. 
130.  At  the  first  command,  the  company  w  ill  face  to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSOR    IV.  41 

will  place  himself  at  the  head   of  the  front  rank,  the  captain   having  ■- t'j-j>oH  out  for 
tin-  purpose,  in  far  m  to  find  himself  by  the  ride  of  the  sergeant,  and  on  li i h  lefl  :  the 
front  rank  will  double  aa  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  aoldier,  No.  362;  tl 
rank  will,  at  the  sane  time,  side  step  to  the  right  one  pace,  and  doable  in  the 
man  nor  -.  so  that  when  the  movement  is  completed,  the  (Ilea  will  be  formed  of  four  men 
aligned,  and  elboa  to  elbow .    The  intervals  « ill  be  preferred, 

1ST.  The  file  closers  will  also  mow  by  aide  step  to  the  ri^lit.  so  that  when  tlio  rank3 
are  Formed,  they  will  be  two  paces  from  th<  rearmost  rank. 

L38.  At  tli"  command  morels,  the  company  will  move  off  briskly  in  quick  time: 
the  covering  sei  head  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  captain  on  Ids  left,  will 

march  straight  forward.     The  men  of  each  61  e  will  march  abreast  of  theil 
front  rank  direct  to  the  front;  the  file  closers  will  march  opposite  their 

m  line  of  battle. 
130.  The  instructor  will  eaui  •  the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  to  be  observ- 
ed, in  placing  himself  pending  on  the.  inarch,  as  pr<  act  Ibi  d  in  the  school  of  the  soldier 
>'o.   367. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  lefl  Sank  to  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  substituting  Iqft  for  right;  the  ranks  will  d<  been  pre- 
scribed in  tl  ir  the  soldier,  No.  •:.''!  :  the  ri  ar  rank  will  side-step  to  the  left 
one  pace  before  doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left,  the  left  guide  will  place  himecl* 
at  the  head   of  the  front  rank  :  the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  left,  and   | 

If  by  the  right  ride  of  this  guide   the  covering  sergt  ant  n  ill  rt  |  . ;  tain 

in  the  front  rank,  the  moment  the  latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the  left. 

Ah  i hi k  < 

T"  ckange  direction  l>y  jilc. 

W2.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and  cither  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  when 
the  instructor  thall  wish  to  whet  1  by  lile,  he  will  command  : 

1.    /  or  right.  |     2.  Ma nar. 

143.  At  the  command  march,  the  Brst  Die  will  wheel;  if  to  the  side  of  the  front 
rank  man.  th<'  latter  will  take  care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  t"  horl  arc  of 
a  circle,  shoi  tening  a  little  the  brst  five  or  sis  sU  pa  in  order  to  give  time  to  the  fourth 
man  of  this   tile  to  conform  himsell  to  the  movement.     If  the  wheel  be  to  the  si 

the  rear  rank,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and 
the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself  to  the  movement  bj  a  short  arc  of  a 

explained.     Each  die  will  come  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  u 
that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

144.  The  instructor  w  ill  sec  that  the  wheel  be  ezet 

in  order  that  the  di-ta<  !.  and  that  tl 

be  no  check  or  hindrance  at  the  n  i,  t. 

AnrtCLi  fores. 

To  kali  fL>   company  marching  by  the  fianki  and 

to  ih<   f\ 

1 15.  1  r  will  command  : 

1.   Company.     2.  Hai.t.     3.   Faosrr. 
14' 

■ 
guide,  if  tl         -  l«-ft  (lank,  will  r 

the  instant  lh<   i  nt. 

147.  The  instruct  *  may  then  align  the  company  the  ir.cani  pi 

100. 

Aai 

■file. 
I  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  the  infractor  will  command  : 


42  I  ",1,  OP  Til::  COMPACT — LESSON   IV. 

1.    i>i  th.    right,  by  fit*  into  line,     2.   Mart:!. 

II  mark  time:  the  Cap- 
in  t  will  turn  to  tli-  right,  march  straight  forward,  at 
I  hi  the  hutructoi    when  ther  ihall  hare  least  six]  i  i   tii» 

tain  will  place  bin  tlv  on  the  fine  of  battle,  an. I 

n  i!!  iirect  the  alignment  M  th.-  men  of  the  front  ra  l\  arrive  :  the  >  • 

at  will  place  him-  It"  behind,  the  captain  at  the  distance  of  the  rear  i  auk 
ten  >.:i  tli  ■  riL'li!  of  the  front  rank  doubli  •  .■  cb,  and  pai 

tptain,  will  turn  to  the  right;  after  tut 
will  continue  to  march  elbou  I  and  direct  th 

li  ill  arrive  at  tn  will 

fhorten  tli  tthe  odd  numb  ■••  may  prect  tie  him  on  the  line,  t!i  ■ o  I 

an  Ion  th  ■  1  I  tain  :  the  i  i  will  after- 

tb  ■  left,  and  plane  himself  on  the  left  <>f  the  odd  namb  -r ;  th  •  next 

•li  ni  the  fnmt  rank  doubled,  will  -  ime  manner  b  hi:  i  th  ■  tw  >  !ir<t, 

tarn  then  to  the  right/and  plane  th  ding  to  the  meaju  just  explained,  to 

the  two  men  already  established  on  the  Itne )  the  remaln- 

■  this  rank  will  follow  in:  ..  and  be  formed  to  the  loft   in  the  d 

uiani  nr  rank  doubled  will  execute  the  movement  in  the  manner  all 

r  the  front  rank,  taking  ca  ice  the  movement   until  four 

nt  rank  are  i   tablisl     I  on  the  lino  of  1  i   ar'Yank  men,  as  they 

■  □  the  line,  will  i  ately  their  Hie  lead 

150.  II  the  company  be  marching  by  the  lefj  Bank,  the  instructor  will  ounse  It  to 
form  by  Ble  on  the  left  into  line  or  battle,  according  to  the  tarn    principles  and  b  • 

commands,  substituting  th*1  indication  U/l  for  right.     In  this  case,  the  odd  num- 

itcp,  so  that  the  even   numbers  may  precede  them  on  the  line. 

The  captain  placed  on  the  left  of  the  front  i  ank,  and  the  1  (ft  guide,  will  return  to  their 

places  in  line  of  battle,  by  order  of  the  instructonj  a  I  ■   tb    i  ompany  shall  be  form*  1 

ncl. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend  the  mechanism  of  this  movement, 
the  i:i-ti  actor  will  at  Brat  cause  it  to  be  ex  cutedsi  parat<  ';■  by  each  rank  double  & 

.  ards  by  the  two  ranks  nnited  and  doubli  d. 

153.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  lin.'  of  battle,  and  without  th<  i 
where  the  right  or  left  is  to  rest,  in  order  t.>  establish  the  base  of  the  alignment 
wards,  h    will  \\  Uow  up  the  are  himi  If  that  each  file  conforms 

No.  1  :■'. 

. 

i'l  in  march  Lj  the  Ji     b,  i 

ion,  into  Hue,  and  to  canst  it  to  face  to  the 
.  in  m  irching-. 

163.  Tl  being  in  march  by  the  right  flank,  the  instructor  will  order  the 

.;  into  line  j  the  captain  will  immediately  command :     1.  .Byoomj 
into  line  ;     'J.  M  Altai. 

■•  the  command  march,  the  covering  sergeant  will  continue  to  march  it 
forward;  the  men  will  advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  the  doubli  i,  and 

move  into  lin  i,  I  it  the  shortest  routo,  talcing  oaire  to  undouble  the  files,  and  to  conio 
.  :   tl  after  the  other. 

155.  A.s  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  In  line  with  the  covei 
they  will  take  from  trim  tl  I  then  turn  their  front. 

n  of  the  rear  rank  will  i   th<*  movements  of  their  respective 

lilc  lead  t.-,  but  without  endeavoring  t  i  arrive  in  Hui  c  time  with  the  latter. 

157.  At  the  instant  the   moi  captain  «iil  fa  o  to' his  company  in 

to  follow  up  the  execution ;  a  as  the  company  is  formed,  he  will  coin- 

,  place  himself  twi  e  the  centre,  face  to  the  front,  and  take 

•  ihi-  company. 

\ I  the  c  immand  quid*  left,  th  cant  will  promptly  i  I 

the  front  rank,  on  the  left,  ti  int  who  is  on  the 

opposite  flank  will  remain  there. 

153.  When  the  coini  any  marcti  ■-  by  the  left  flank,  this  innrement  will  be  executed 
by  tb  rding  t-i  the  suae  principles;  the  companj  being 


BOOL   OF   TUS   COMPANY — LESSON   V.  13 

formed,  the  captain  will  command  guide  right,  and  place  himself  in  front  of  his  company 

ill-  covering  w  i  :  *nl  who  i^  on  'lie  nghl  of  th  •  front  rank  will  mi  i 
guide,  and  I  crgoanl  plaoi  d  on  tip'  left  Rank  will  remain  tli 

180.  Tim-',  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left  in  front,  the  covering  sergeant  and 
ml  of  each  company  will  always  be  placed  on  tin  right  and  jeft,  re- 
.  of  the  font  rank;  they  will  be  denominated  right  yn<!c  nod U/t guide,  and 
;  or  ili"  other  oharged  with  the  direction. 

161.  Th    company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if  It  be  the  wish  of  the  Instructor  to 
it  to  form  ;  will  give  an  order  to  that  eifcet  to  tin-  captain  who  will 

command  : 

1.  By  platoon  into  line.     2.  Mi».cir. 

16J.  The  movement  will  he  executed  by  each  platoon  acorn  di  ig  to  the  above  i.rinei- 

files.     The  captain  will  place  himself  before  th  nd  the  Hrst 

riant  before  the  centre  of  the  second,  passing  through  the  opening  made  i 
pany,  if  th'"  march  be  by  th"  right  flank,  and  around  th"  left  ■ 
on,  if  the  march' be  by  theleft  :  in  this  1  i  tin  will  alsopass  around 

th-  1.  ft  of  th"  second  platoon  in  order  to  plac-  himself  in  front  of  the  li'?t.     Both  the 
n  and  lieutenant,  without  waiting  for  each  other,   will   com  Baud  gut 
.  at  th-  instant  their  reap)  stive  platoons  are  formed. 
At  the  command  guide  Itfl   lor  ri-jht*,  th»  guide  of  each   platoon  will  pass 
rapidly  to  the  indicated  flank  o(  »n,  if  not  atrt  i 

lf.4.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  always  serve  as  the  guide  of  H 
platoon,  and  the  lefl  impany  will  serve,  in  HI 

;iiide  of  the  second  platoon. 
165.  Thus  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will  be  but  on  latnon  ;  he 

will  always  be  )da'->  d  on  its  I  Ight  be  in  front,  and  on  the  right  Bank, 

if  tli"  lift  l><-  in  front. 

ii  nts,  the  file  closers  will  follow  tli"  platoons  to  which  tie  v  arc 
attai  i 

I(  T.   The  Instructor  mav  cau=c   the  companv.   marching   by  the  flank,  triform  by 

.  Lbed 
r  161. 

ijr,  without  a  halt,  from  the 
march  by  the  front,  to  tlm  march  by  the  !!  ink,  and  reciprocally.     In  <  i  1 1  * 
will  employ  the  i  chool  ef  the  soldi  r,  No.  'ting 

iquad.     The  company  will  face  to  th"  right  or  left,  in  u  i 
lin,  the  guides,  and  file  closers  «ill  conform  th  '    ' 

ink,  or  iu  the  march  by  the  front  ".''  ■■•-  c  • 

.  .inn. 

It  '.  If,  after  facing  to  the  right  or  loft,  in  marc! 
aaptain  will  place  bin 

ank,  now  leading,  and 
the  file  closers  will  march  in  front  of  this  rank. 

170.  Tie-  i  •  them  from 

_f*nt  in  the 
.  the  flank, 

ill. 

171.  Th--  company  b  ing  .it  .i  ha  I  rrak 

17' 


SCHOOL  OF   TUB   COMPANY — LESSON   V. 

dicular  to  that  oeeopied  by   the  company  in  lino  of  battle:  each  platoon  will  v. 

to  the  principles  pi  r  tbe  wheel  on  a  fixed  ptvot,and  irben  the  man 

ti  the  marching  Hank  shall  approach  to  mar  the  perpendicular,  its  chief 
will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.    '-'.  Halt. 
1T4.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the  Instant  tbe  man  wh 
the  marching  (lank  shall  hare  arriTed  nt  three  paces  From  the  perpendicular, 
platoon  will  halt ;  tin  •  gi  .mi  v\  ili  move  t"  tbe  point  wb ere  the  left  of  the 

first  platoon  La  in  rest,  passing  by  the  front  rank  ;  tl  I  will  place  blm- 

si  K.  |n  liki'  manner,  in  respect  to  the  second  platoon.     Each  will  uk.'  care  to  leave 
en  himself  and  the  man  on  the  right  of  li  i>  platoon,  |ual  to  its  i 

antain  and  first  lieutenant  will  look  to  t  h  take  care  to  align  the  aer- 

■  beta  een  himat  If  and  the  man  of  tbe  platoon  u  ho  had  meed  to  1. 1 1  -  -  right 
175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  established  <>n  the  perpendicular,  each 
will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  gni  i  Lug  towards  him,  will 

and: 

:;.  L*ft-  D 

17C.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  platoon  will  command,  i'loisr,  and 
place  himself  two  paces  beiore  its  centre. 

177.  Tbe  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  die  movement  of  their  respective 
platoons,  preserving  always  the  distance  ol  two  |  toes  from  the  rear  rank. 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  th  1  it.  according  I 
The  Instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Bg platoon,  left  ivhccl.     1.  Haboh. 

179.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  thesame  manner  a.<  if  breaking  by  platoon 
to  the  right. 

180.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the 
left,  and  t!u>  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  according  to  tbe  pi  indoles  prescribed  for 
the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot ;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  conform  to  the  principles  indi- 
cated Ifos.  173  and  174. 

181.  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of  each  platoon,  the  eorei  ing  sergeant 
on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  Brat  platoon,  and  the  si  ir  the 
left  of  the  second  platoon,  w  ill  each  move  to  the  point  i  w  here  the  right  of  his  platoon 
is  to  rest.  The  chief  of  each  platoon  should  be  careful  to  aligi  tween 
him  elf  and  the  i..an  of  the  platoon  who  had  faced  to  the  left,  and  w  ill  then  command  : 

RigKt-    l> 
188.  The  platoons  being  aligned,  eat  h  chief  of  platoon  will  command,  Fuost,  and 
]  lace  Inn:-  li  opposite  ii -  oci 

188.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  l'""  company  by  platoon  to  the  right,  and  to 
move  tbe  column  forward  after  the  wheel  is  complet)  a,  will  caution  the  company  to  that 

.in  1  command : 

1.   By  platoon,  right  whotL     '-■  M.vueii. 
184.   At  tbe  first  command,  tho  chiefs  of  platoon  will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  their 
respectii  ••  platoons,  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  172,  and  w  ill  remain 
in  this  position  during  the  continuance  of  tbe  «  heel.     The  covei ing  sergeant  will  re- 
place the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

186.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  tbe  right,  conforming  to  the 

print  ipU  I  herein  pi  c.-ei  ibod  :    the  man  00  the  pivot  will  let  face  to  the  right,  but.  will 

mark  tune,  conforming  himself  to  the  moi  ement  of  the  Diarchies  Hank  ;  ami  when  th" 

man  w  ho  i-  On  the  left  ol'  this  Hank  shall  an  ive  mar  the  p/rper.dicular,  the  instructor 

will  command  : 

.",.   Forward.     4.   Msucu.     6.   Quid* loft. 

ISC.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  ll  Completed, 

the  platoon-  will  move  straight  to  tbe  front,  all  tbe  men  taking  the  step  of  twenty- 
eight  inches.  The  covering  sergeant  at  ant  n  ill  mo\  h  rapidly  to  the 
left  efth  ir  respective  platoons,  the  former  pa  i  the  front  i  auk,  The  leading 
<_'uid./  will  Immediately  take  point!  on  the  ground  in  the  direction  which  may  be  indi- 
cated to  him  by  the  Instructor. 
1-7.  At  tho  fifth  command,  tbe  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  lightly  to  theleft. 
ii  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose  his  distance,  or  the  line  of  direc- 
tion, lie  wiil  conform  to  the  principl  is  heroin  prescribed  Mos.  103  and  808. 

189.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the  front,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON   V.  ',."> 

break  by  platoon  to  the  right  bjr  the  ume  on  id  mauds.     At  1 1 1  o  command  march,  the 
platooni  will  wheel  in  the  manner  already  explained,  tho  man  on  the  pivot  will 
care  to  mark  time  in  hia  place,  without  advancing  or  receding;  1 1  > •  -  Instruct) 

of  platoon,  and  the  guides,  will  conform  to  what 'has  ben  -    l-l 

and  follow  in<j. 

190.  The  company  may  be  broken  by  platooni  to  th"  left,  according  to  the  same 
principlea,  and  by  inn  the  instructor  giving  the  commands  prescribed 

titnting  Uft  for  riyht,  and  reciprocally. 

191  nanta  explained  in  Noa.  183  and  189  will  only  be  executed  after  tha 

company  lias  become  well  establish  d  in  the  pri  u  ch  in  column,  Articles 

Second  and  Third. 

Remarks, 

lf'2.  Tlie  instructor,  pli  esd  in  front  of  tli*  companr,  will  observe  whether  the  n 
men'         •  I  according  to  the  princi  whether  tfa 

breaking  into  coluu  n,  ai  •■  pci  pcndicular  to  the  1  i v > •  -  of  battle  jast  occupied  ;  and 
whether  the  guide,  wh  the  marching  (link  of  hit  platoon  liad 

t"  rest,  has  left,  between  himself  and  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right,    nr  kit.  ,  thu 
-■.in  the  front  of  the  platoon. 
.    After  the  platoon?  have    broken,  if  the  rcarmnct   cuide  «hould  not  aeeur 
rover  tho  leading  one,  he  will  not  i  lion  till  ilu  column  be  pal  in 

march,  unless  the  in»trur-tor.  wishing  to  wheel  immediately  into  line,  should  thii  k  it 
f\   the  direction  of  the  guides,   which  would  be  executed  as  will  be 
cplained  in  Article  Fifth  of  this  l< 

194                                                                an  on  the  right    or  left  of  each  pis  toon, 

at  the  command  vmrch.  faces  to  tli"  right    oi   lefl  rot  of  the 

I,  the  front  rank  man  next  to  him  ought   to  rain   a    little  giou;  int  in 
wheeling,  so  as  to  clear  the  pivot-man. 

Arti' 

T<>  march  in  oobtmn. 

Tli'-  company  having  bi  ■  ';en  by  platoon,  ri;-1 
Trhhlng  t"  rau^e  the  column  to  marrh.  will  throw  himself  twentv  Bre  orthirti 
in  front,  iace  to  the  guides,  place  himself  con ectly,  on  I  tioo,  and  caution 

take  points  on  (  eund. 

«  i  placed,  the  guide  of  tholoadincr  platoc n  will  tak>> two 

'ind  in  the  straipht  I  in-  tween  his  own  and  the  beets  of  his 

K'T.  Tl  being  made,  the  instructor  will  Mep  a'id".  and  com: 

1.   Column,  forward.     2.    Quid*  It fl    or  rifkt), 

'  t  th"  command  march,  promptly  re  the  chiefs  ol  i  latooa,  thev.  .-■ 

W'U  i 
that  the  a 
199.  1 

- 

- 
■ 

- 


U,e  march  of  I 


40  ;iool  OF  THE  COMPACT — LESSON  v. 

■  a  lo«*  of  distance.     In  nil  cases,  each  chief  of  platoon  will  cause  it  to  conform  to 
the  movements  of  it-1  golem.  - 

Remark*  on  the  march  in  ooWmn, 

.    1    [f  the  chiefs   and  guides  of  subdivisions  neglect    to  lead  off  and  t 
DUirdi  from  the  firal  ^.<-y.  the  march  will  be  began  in  uncertainty  which  will 
.  and  :i  lost  of  distance. 

ling  gaide  take  unequal  steps,  tin-  march  of  his  subdivision,  and  that 
h  follows,  will  be  uncertain  ;  there  will  be  undulatione,  qodekenings,  and  alai 
logs  in  the  Dsarch. 

306.  If  the  same  guide  he  not  babltaated  to  prolong  a  given  direction,  without 
deviation,  he  will  describe  a  crooked  line,  and  the  column  must  wind  to  conform 
itself  to  each  line. 

guide  be  not  habituated  to  march  in  the  trace  ol  the  preceding- 

one,  be  will  loae  bin  distance  at  every  mome.it  in  endeavors  to  regain  the  tram 

ration  of  which  i?  the  moat  important  principle  in  the  march  in  column. 

;.   The  guide  of  each  subdivision  in  column  will  be  responsible  for  the  direction, 

distance,  and  step  :  tin'  chief  of  the  subdivision,  lor  the  order  and  conformity  of  his 

subdivision  with  the  movements  of  tin'  guide.    Accordingly,  the  i  bief  will  frequently 

tin  ii,  in  the  march,  to  observe  his  subdivision. 

109.  The  instructor  placed  on  tin"  (lank  of  the  guides,  will  watch  over  the  execu- 
tion of  all  the  principles  prescribed;  he  will,  also,  sometimes  place  himself  in  the 
1 1  .i  ,  align  himself  on  the  guides,  and  halt,  pending  aome  thirty  paces  together,  to 
verify  the  accuracy  of  the  ^ ui«lo«. 

110.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  always  repeat,  with  the  greatest  prompti- 
tude, the  commends,  march  and  halt,  no  chief  waiting  for  another,  but  each  repeating 
the  command  the  moment  be  catches  it  from  the  instructor.  They  will  repeat  no 
other  command  given  by  him  :  but  will  explain,  if  necessary,  to  their  subdivisions,  i;i 

an  under  tone  of  voice,  what  they  will  have  to  execute,  as  indicated  by  the  commands 
of  caution. 

Ar.Tiei.E  Tiiir.n. 

To  change  direction. 

211.  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while  marching,  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  for  wheeling  on  the  march.  Whenever^  there- 
fore, a  column  is  to  change  direction,  the  instructor  will  change  the  guide,  If  not 

v  there,  to  the  Hank  opposite  the  side  to  which  the  change  IS  to  Da  made. 
IIS.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  th"  instructor 
to  change  the  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  immediately  go  himaelf,  or  send  a  marker  to  the  point  at  which  the 
change  of  direction  is  to  he  made  :  the  Instructor,  or  marker,  will  place  himself  on 
the  direction  of  the  guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast  to  that  flank  of  the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  bis  march  on  that  person,  so  that,  In  paaalng,  his 
left  arm  may  just  graze  his  b:ra<t.  When  the  leading  guide  shall  have  approached 
near  to  the  marker,  the  ohief  of  hi?  platoon  will  command  : 

1.    Bight  irhrel.      2.    MaKCH. 

214.  Tie'  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  platoon  is  at  the  distance  of  four 
paces  from  the  marker. 

21.V  At  tl>«*  i-oniuiand  mctreh.  which  will  bo  pronounced  at  the  instant  the  guide  shall 
bare  arrived  opposite  the  marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribes]  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  S9& 

210.  The  wheel  being  finished)  the  child'  of  each  platoon  will  command: 

3.    f'vrtrard.     4.    M.\uru. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  executed  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier.  pTos.  MjH  and  399.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  take  points  on 
the  ground  in  the  new  diroction,  in  order  the  better  to  regulate  the  march. 

S18.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  till  up  with  tho 
marker,  whan  it  Will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  retake  the  direct  march  by  the  name 
commands  and  the  »am<-  m^ans  which  governed  the  first  platoon. 

2 ID.  The  column  being  in   march  right  in  front,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to 


HOOL  OF   THE  COMPANY — LESSON   V.  17 

change  direction  to  the  left,  he  will  command,  gtiidt  right.    At  this  command,  the 
two  guides  will  moTo  rapidly  to  the  right  of  th<  tivs  platoon-,  i  ng  in 

front  of  hu  subdivision;  the  men  will  take  the  touch,  of  elbows  to  the  right ;  thein- 
itmctor  will  aft«  rwarda  conform  to  what  ii  prescribed,  No.  212, 

'220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then  be  executed  according  to 
same  principles  aa  the  change  of  direction  to  the  right,  lint  by  ini  erae  means. 

221.  When  the  oba&ga  of  direction  '1,  t)ic  Instructor  will  command, 

guide  li/t. 

The  change!  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  same  principles. 

223.    In  changes  of  direction  in  doable  quick  time,  the  platoons  will  whet  ' 
to  the  principh »  preacriLed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  404. 

221.  In  order  I  nt  men  for  those  formations  in  line,  which  enn  be  executed 

only  by  turning  to  the  right  or  the  1  ft,  the  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  the  column 
tii  efa  :  ""   to  tli'  side  ol  the  guide.     In  this  caso,  the  chid  «il  the  leading 

platoon  will  command:   Le/l   (or  right    turn,  instead  ol    -  ->n   wheel,     Th  ■ 

subdivisions  will  each   turn,  in  succession,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
1  of  tli"  soldier,  No.  402.     The  leading  guide,  as  soon  a?  h»  has  turned,  w  i.i  I 
La  on  the  ground,  the  bet  cr  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march. 
.    It  ia  highly  important,  in    order  to  preserve  distancea  and  the  direction,  that 
all  the  subdivisions  of  the  column  should  change  direction  preci 
the  leading  subdivision  changed;  ii   ii  for  this  reason  that  that  point" 
mat  ked  in  advaace,  and  thai  i  ibed  that  the  guides  direct  tneir  nm  ch  on  the 

leer,  also  that  each  chid  ot  subdivision  shall  not  cause  the  change  to  com  mi 
till  the  guide  of  hi-  subdivision  has  grazed  the  breast  ol  this  marker. 

■  are  that  his  subdivision  arrives  at  the  point  of  ch  a 
in  a  square  with   the  line  of  direction:  with  this  view,  he  will  face  t"  bis  sudivhriou 
wheat  tbe  one  which  pi  •  a  or  to  wheel,  and  be  will  be  wstfch- 

ues  t<"  march  squardy  until  it  arrives  at  the  point  a 

ot  direction  is  to  commence. 

.  If.  in  the  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of  the  subdivision  which  wheels  should 
sjxr  the  wheeling  point,  the  next  subdivision  would  be  arrested  and  distances 
lor  the  guide  who  conducts  the  marching  Hank   having  to  describe  an  a;c,  in 
1  ngth  ali"ut  a  half  greater  than  the  front  of  the  subdivision,  tbe  second  subdii 
would  be  already  np  with  the  wheeling  point,  whilst  tbe  flrst  which  whet 
the  half  of  its  front  to  execute,  ai  aid  be  obliged  to  mark  time  until  that 

half  !  It  is  therefore  prescribed,  that  the  pivot  of  each  subdivision  should 

-"1  I  ol  nine  or  eleven  inches  in  length,  according  to  the  swiftness  of  th  :  ga:t, 
in  orilci  ii"t  tn  arrest  the  march  of  the  next  subdivision.  The  chiefs  of  subdivision 
will  loi.k  well  to  the  step  of  the  nil 

as  mat  r.     Ity  the  nature  ol  thi  ■  each 

subdivision  will  bend  a  little  to  the  i 

The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the  step,  whether  tho 
;  e.  tion  be  to  the  side  '•!  tbi  g 

iced  at  the  wheeling  point,  wfll  always  present  his  breast  t 
flank  of  the  column.     The  instructor  will  tak 

be  will  Hat  thai  e»<h  subdivision  ".nh 
•i  when  the  jtuk!"  mi  of  the  d  j   ■ 

*  -        that  tin  marching  floali  •        e  the  arc  of  I 

in  oraer  that  it  may  n'"t  be  thrown  beyond  th 

by  whed  Um  .  g  flank  will 

at   the  mor  snd  will  del 

ate  af  a  circle  wh<..«,"  radius  is  equal  to  tbe  front  of  the  sul 

AaTlCt.B    Fnt  8T)t. 

/      '  ifi. 

q  column  being  in  march,  when   t  r  ahall  wiih  to  1  - 

COMB-  I 

• 

eosoraanii,  protc.  <•  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  cat— 

will  halt:  tbe  guides  also  will  ataad  la-  laey  may  bar* 

and  '      ' 


•IS  ilOOL   OF   TMK  V. 

[f  the  command  halt  be  not  repeated  with  the  gn  :i t. ■- 1  riracity,  ami  > 
at  tlir  fjnic  instant,  distances  trill  be  i 

'2?.',.    If  *  guide,  having  lust  bis  distance,  ver  it  after  that   COOUBUld,  he 

will  only  throw  hi-  fault  on  the  following  guide,  who,  if  he  hare  marched  well,  will 
no  lancer  be  al  h  i  it  the  latter  regain  what  he  has  ihu 

the  movement  will  be  propagated  t<>  the  rear  ol  the  column. 

Ar.Tirir.  Firm. 

Being  in  column  by  ]>!"'•  kt  or  left  into  line 

of  battle,  either  at  o  hall  or  on  the  march. 

235.  The  instructor  baring  halted  the  column,  righl  in  front,  anil  wishing  to  form 
U  into  line  of  battle,  will  plaee  himself  at  platoon  distance  i:i  front  of  the  leading 
guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  If  necessary,  the  position  of  the  guide  beyond;  which 
•  secut<  d,  he  will  command  : 

Left— Dress. 

130.  At  this  command,  which  will  not   be   repi  ;t t «  d  by  the  chi  >fs  of  platoons,  each 
of  them  will  place  himself  briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct  the 
of  the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the  direction  of  the  column. 

'J"7.    Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will  01  i:  n  quickly 

to  his  place  in  column. 
23S.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.    Lr/t  into  line  uhcrl.      1.    MahCH. 

2r,f).  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chi  lis  of  platoon,  the  front 
rank  man  on  the  lit  of  each  platoon  will  race  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast  lightly 
ag-iiii-t  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast  :  the  platoons  will  wheel  to 
the  left  on  the  principle  of  wheels  from  a  hall,  and  i  0  comfon.iity  to  what  is  prescribed, 
No.  !&<•  Each  chief  will  turn  to  his  platoon  to  observe  its  moremei  t.  and  when  the 
marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  ol  battle,  he  will  command  : 
1.   J'latonu.     1.   Halt. 

240.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  when  the  inarching  flank  of  the  platoon  is 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle. 

'.'41.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  haying  baited  it,  will  return  to  his  plaee  as  a 
file  cloi  around  the  left  of  his  subdivision. 

142.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will  move  rapidly  to  the  point  at 
which  the  right  of  the  company  will  rest  in  line  of  battle,  and  command  : 

Right — Dams. 
.')!.   At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on  the  alignment :    the  front 
rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  leading  platoon,  who  finds  himself  opposite  the  instructor 
[shed  on  the  direction  of  the  guides,  will  place  hU  in  <  est  lightly  Rgainst  the  left 
officer.    The  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from 

OH  the  opposite  Hank  of  the  com]  any. 

241.  T1k  I  ■  the  captain  will  command: 

Fbokt. 

2415.  The  initractor  seeing  the  company   in  line  of  battle,  will  command  : 

Quid** — Posts. 

246.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  the  captain,  and  the  left 
guide  will  return  to  bis  place  n«  a  fill 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  to  the 
right  in!  •  line  of  battle,  he  w  ill  place  himsi  If  at  plate  in  front  of  the  leading 
guide,  iV'e  to  him,  and  rectify,  ifnei  eatary,  the  position  of,  the  .  ad ;  which 

•  scouted,  he  will  command: 

1.    flight  into  line,  tchrtl.     2.   March. 
At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  each  platoon  will 
face  to  the  right  and  place  hi*   breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide  by  his 
who  standi  fast  :   each  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  will  be  halted  by  its 
chief,  when  the  marching  Hank  ha  I  near  the  line  of  buttle;  lor  this  pur- 

pose, the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  command: 

1.  J'latoon.     2.  Halt. 


BOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON   V.  49 

249.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  when  th"  marching  flank  of  the  platoon  in 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having  halted 
his  platoon,  will  resaiM  nil  place  in  the  rank  of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  fir't  platoon,  will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at 
which  the  left  df  the  company  will  mt,  anil  command  : 

D 

261.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dreN  up  on  the  alignment;  the  man  on 
the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  opposite  the  htstractor,  will  place  his  l>rea«t  lightly 
against  the  right  arm  of  this  officer,  and  the  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from 
the  left  on  the  man  on  the  opposite  Hank  of  the  company. 

ISS.   The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command: 

Front. 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command  : 

Gui'lri — V 

294.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  to  the  right  of  his  companv,  the 
rove  ring  sergeant  will  (.over  him,  ami  the  left  gokU  will  return  to  his  jla:e  as  a  file 

■  1"-'  i . 

tSS.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command  Irft  or  right  rfrr»»,  previous  to  com- 
manding left  or  right  into  line,  wheel,  or, less,  after  rectifying  the  position  of  tb°  g aides, 
it  should  become  necessary  to  dress  tin  platoons,  or  one  of  them,  laterally  to  the  right 

or  left. 

2;>d.  The  instruetor,  before  the  command  Irft  Cor  right]  info  lint,  trhrrl,  will  assnre 
him-  If  that  the  rearmost  platoon  i«  at  it«  exact  wheeling  distance  from  the  one  in 
front.  This  attention  is  important,  in  order  to  detect  negligence  on  the  part  of  guides 
in  this  essential  point. 

2r<7.  If  the  column  be  marching  rigv.t  in  front,  and  the  instrnctor  should  wish  to 
form  it  into  line  without  halting  the  column,  h«  will  pive  the  commands  prescribed, 
No.  23s.  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  leading  guide. 

2.'.*.  At  the  command  **nrrh,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefi  of  platoon,  the  left 
guides  will  halt  short,  the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  platoons,  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  2.1ft  and  following. 

imn  be  in  march  left  in  front,  this  formation  will  be  made  according 
to  th"  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  bm 

Tf  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the  instructor  should  wi«h  to 
form  it  into  line  without  baiting  the  column,  and  Ut  march  the  company  in  line  to  the 
front,  be  vvili  command: 

1.    By  plntonn*  Irft  vhrrl.      2.    M*RCn. 

M.   At  the  commar.d   mnrrh,   briskly  repeated  by  th"  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left 

gui'l  s  will  halt  :    th'  man  n"tt  to  th"  li  ft    guide  in  each  platoon  will  mark  time  :   the 

;lie   left,  conforming   to   toe   principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 

Wli   n  the  right  of  the  platoons,  fhall   arrive  near   the  line  of  battle,  the  in- 

:  will  'command  : 

3.    /•rtrorn'.      i.    March.      5.    Guidt  right  (or  itft.) 
At  the  fourth  command,  given   at    the   instant   the  wheel  is  completed,  all  the 
■sen  of  the  compear  will  m<  titer  with  the  step  «f  twenty  eight  inch"- 

captain,  the  chiel  of  the  second  p|  -tant,  and  the  left  guide  will 

take  th(  ir  )  '.'ito.ns  ai  in  line  of  battll  . 

I  mand.  which  will  be   riven    immediately  after  the  fourth,  the 
n  and  enrerinn  sergeant,  if  not  already  there,  will  more  briaklr  so  tha  i    - 
Whicl  I.      The  noncoromis«ioned  ofheer  charged  with  th«>    : 

spidly  in  front  of  the  guid< .  and  will   t>'  bis  line  of  march 

I   X 
■  ike  point*  Thr  tn'- 

tak<-  •  |  thcmeelre*  I 

etples  of  the  match  in  line. 

1    The  same  prinrij  lc»  are  s;  plicable  to  a  colamn  left  in  front. 

4 


50  SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON*  VI. 

-  -ov  SIXTH. 
Article  Fip.st. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons,  and  tore-form  the  company. 
To  break  the  company  into  platoons. 

205.  The  company  marching  in  the  eadenoi  '1  step,  ami  lapp—ed  to  make  part  of  a 
column,  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  (hall  with  to  cause  it  to  break  by  |  Lateon. 
lie  will  ^jive  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  oomroand  :  1.  />v<  ak  into  platoons,  and 
immediately  plaee  hlnstelf  befo:c  thi  the  first  platoon. 

2CC.  At  th^  command  break  into  platoons,  the  first  lieutenant  will  pas*  quickly 
around  the  left  to  the  centre  of  hi  ad  give  the  caution  :  Mark  time. 

Dm  captain  will  then  command  :  2.   March. 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward;  the  covering  ser- 
geant will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  flank  of  this  platoon  (passing  by  the  front  rank) 
as  soon  as  the  flank  shall  be  disengaged. 

M9.  At  the  command  march,  rlTea  by  th^  captain,  the  second  platoon  will  begin  to 
mark  time;  Hi  chief  will  Immediately  add :  1.  Bight  oblique.  2.  Mw.ru.  The  last 
and  will  be  given  so  that  this  platoon  tnav  commence  obliquing  the  instant  the 
rear  rank  of  the  first  plntoOB  shall  have  passed.  The  men  will  shorten  the  step  in 
obliquing,  so  that  when  the  command  forward  march  is  given,  the  platoon  may  hare 
its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  beiDp  near  the  direction  of  the  guide  of  the 
first,  the  chief  of  the  second  will  command  Forward,  and  add  Mahcii,  the  instant  that 
the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover  the  guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will  break  into  platoons  by  inverse 
means,  applying  to  the  first  platoon  all  that  ha*  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  and 
reciprocally. 

In  this  rase,  the  left   guide  of  the  compa  iv  will  shift  to  the  ri.'ht  flank  of  the 
second  platoon,  and  the  OOTaring  sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right  ot   the  first. 

To  r&form  the  company. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  form  company,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who 
will  command:    Form  company. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will  immediately  add  :  1.  First  pla- 
toon ;   2.    Rigfl*  ohli.juc. 

'.!7:>.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it  to  continue  to  march  straight 
forward. 

27t',.  The  captain  will  then  command:   S.  Mauch. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  second,  the  first  platoon  will 
oblique  to  the  right,  itt  order  to  unmask  the  second;  the  covering  sergeant,  on  the 
left  of  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to  the  right  of  the  company,  patting  b]  the  front 
rank. 

278.  When  the  Brit  platoon  .'ball  have  nearly  unmasked  the  second,  the  captain  will 
command:  1.  Mark  lime,  and  at  the  instant  the  Bnmaskiog  shall  be  complete,  he  will 
adil  :   ft.  M  Alien.     The  |»l  platoon  will  then  cease  t..  oblique,  and  mark  time. 

279.  In  the  mean  time  the  second  platOOH  will  have  continued  to  march  straight 
forward,  and  whin  it  shall  be  nearly  np  with  the  first,  the  captain  will  command 
J  urd,  and  at  the  Instant  thetwo  platoons  shall  unite,  add  Mitcu  ;  the  first  platoon 
will  then  cease  to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  movement  will  be  executed  by  inverse 
means,  the  chief  of  the  .second  platoon  giving  the  command  forward,  and  the  captain 
adding  the  command  March,  when  the  platoons  are  united. 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right,  will  pass  to  it'  left  Hank  the  mo- 
ment the  platoon  begins  to  oblique ;  the  guide  of  the  first,  on  its  right,  remaining  on 
that  dank  of  the  platooa. 


I! 


school  of  the  company — lesson  vi.  :>\ 

2S2.  The  instructor  will  also  sometime!  cause  the  company  to  break  and  re  form,  by 
platoon,  by  his  own  direct  commands.  In  this  cue,  he  will  fire  tbe  general  com- 
mands prescribed  for  the  captain  above :  1.  Break  into  j,latoon«;   '1.  IIabck;  and  1. 

Form  Company  ;    2.    Mahch. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  companv  into  platoons,  the  subdivision  that  breakl  "(F 
should  mark  time  too  long.it  might,  in  a  column  of  many  subdivisions,  arresl  tho 
march  of  the  following  "ne,  which  would  cause  a  lengthening  of  the  column,  and  a 
loss  of  distances. 

284.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  necessary  that  the  platoons  which  oblique 
should  nol  shorten  the  step  too  much,  in  order  not  to  lose  distance  in  column,  and  not 
to  arrest  the  march  of  the  following  subdivision. 

285.  If  a  platoon  obliqaei  too  far  to  a  flank,  it  would  be  obliged  to  oblique  again  to 
the  opposite  flank,  to  regain  the  direction,  and  by  the  double  movement  arrest,  prob- 
ably, the  march  of  the  following  subdivision. 

The  'hi.  Pi  of  those  platoon*  which  oblique  will  face  to  their  plafoons,  in  order 
ing  principle*, 

287.  When,  in  a  column  of  several  companic  s,  they  break  in  succession,  it  is  of  the 
greatest  importance  that  each  company  should   continue  to   march    il 
without  shortening  or  slackening,  whilst  that  which  precede!  breaks,  although  the 
following  company  should  close  up  on  the  preceding  one.     T h i .■-  a 1 1 <  niiwj  ii  i  tsential 

I  _-iinst  an  elongation  of  the  column. 

but  little  moment,  in  a  column  of  a  few  companies,  would  be  serioUa 
inconveniences  in  a  general  column  of  many  battalions.  B<  nee  the  instructor  will 
rive  the  pi       -  in  causing  all  the  prescribed  principles  to  be  strictlj  observed. 

To  thi-  i  nd,  he  h  ill  hold   himsilf  on  the  directing   flank,  the  better  to  observe  all  the 
movements. 

vn. 

Being  in  cotumti,  to  break  JUe$  to  lh<-  rear,  and  to  <  n  to 

n ■-<  n/ir  into  line. 

I,   The  company  being  in   march,  and  supposed   to  constitute  a  subdivision  of  a 
column,  right    "t  left  i  io  front,  when  the  Instructor  >hall  wish  I  ■  *k 

off  he  will  _•  let  to  the  captain,  who  will  immediately  tuir.  I 

and  command  i 

1.    T.co  file* /mm  le/l  (or  right)  to  rear.     2»   >J  - 
\    At  the  command   starei,  the   two  files  on   the  lefl  |  anv 

will  i  the  others  will  ooatinur  to  anarch  straight forward ;  the  two  real  i*nk 

i.  as  tbe  i  ear  rank  of  the  cotn]. any  shall  char  them    | 
iter  shoulder ;  the  odd  number  will  j 
hind  the  thin]  lib  from  that  flank,  the   <  ven   number  behind   the  fourth. 

ad  the  odd   nun.!  .  Iroot   rank    i  t><  n  will,  in  like  manner, 

to  tie  right  w  le  n  the  real  rank  of  the  company  shall  eh  ar  them,  the  odd  nusa- 
first   file,  the  even    number  behind    th< 

umber.      If  the  (  I  the 

right,  the  i 

third  tie,  the  ...Li   QUI 
rank  behind  the  foart]  .         -  •<  -  * t  t.l < .  t b*» 

(Kid:  •  behind  th>~  second,  the  odd  nui 

n  numb*  is.     Th--  m<  n  will  be  careful  nut  •  Hi.res 

and  t.  ■ 

7U] .  If  tl  >ld  stiQ  wish  to  break  two  Mrs  fi  on  the  same        .  !.<  «    1 

»       rder  to  the  captain,  who  mill 

2^2.   At  tm  -  idi  an- 

a  little  the  out.  f    '1:  "lildi  r.  »  .11   c.,    ■  fllri  to  th< 

■ 

(Tth  of  the  « t <•  j    in  ord 
29w 

up*  of  two  dies,  but  the-  new  files  nut  always  be  i 
side. 


r,2  SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LEVOX    fl, 

I 
■  tor.  wishing  to  6*0**  "1°*  broken  nlf  to  return  into  line,  he  will 
?ivc  tK  •  01  il,  r  t.i  the  captain,  who  will  immediately  command : 

1.    Tiro  filet  into  line.      2.    Milieu. 
T.iU.   At  the  command  marrh.  the  lirst  two  til.  -  of  thOM   marching  bj  the  flank  will 
return  briskly  into  line,  nnd  the  "th  -rs  "ill   gain    th"  space  of  two  liles  by  udvauciug 

the  IniHT  shoulder  towards  the  llxnk  to  which  they  belong 

Tbecaptail  will  turn  tohtfC  impany,  to  watch  the  observance  of  the  principle* 
which  h  rejost  been  preeoribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two  file*  to  break  one  after  another, 
and  to  r  turn  again  into  line,  will  afterward-  oaOM  two  or  three  jH)BSH  BO  break  to- 
gether, and  for  tlii*  purpose,  will  coininand  :  /'our  or  tix  filet  from  left  (or  rig! 
rear;  .Maui  ii.  The  file*  designated  will  mark  time;  each  rank  will  advance  a  little 
the  outer  shoulder  as  MOB  a<  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  lhall  char  it.  will  oblique 
at  once,  ami  each  group  will  place  itself  behind  the  four  neighboring  files,  and  in  the 
f:i.H(    manner,  as  it  the  movement  had  been  executed  group  by  group,  taking  care  that 

the  distance!  at  e  precenred. 

M8.   Th"  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain  to  cau-e   two  or  three  groups  to  bo 
brought  into  line  at  once,  who  turning  to  the  company,  will  command  : 
four  or  nix  filet  into  line — MabCW, 

299.  At  the  command  marr!,,  the  files  designated  will  adranee  the  inner  shoulder, 
move  up  and  form  on  the  Hank  of  the  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 

300.  As  often  as  liles  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  the  guide  on  that  flank  will  gradually 
slose  on  the  nearest  front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  and  he  will  also  open  out  to 
make  room  for  liles  ordered  into  line. 

301.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed  in  the  following  order  :  the  left 
files  as  if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  right  Hank,  and  tin'  right  files  as  if  the 
company  was  marching  bv  the  left  flank.  Consequently,  whenever  there  is  on  the 
right  or  left  of  a  subdivision,  a  lile  which  docs  not  belong  to  a  group,  it  will  be  broken 
singly. 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances  in  column  that  the  men  should 
be  habituated  in  the  schools  of  detail  to  execute  the  movements  of  this  article  with 
precision. 

303.  If  new  files  broken  off  do  not  step  well  to  the  left  or  right  in  obliquing  ;  if,  when 
files  are  ordered  into  line,  they  do  not  move  up  with  promptitude  and  precision,  in 
either  case  the  following  fdes  will  be  arrested  in  their  march,  and  thereby  cause  the 
column  to  be  lengthened  out. 

304.  The  instrsetor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank  from  which  the  files  arc  broken, 
to  assure  himself  of  the  exact  observance  of  the  principles. 

3U.V  Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of  direction,  in  order  that  tho  whole 
company  may  easily  pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 

Aktici.e  Third. 

To  march  (he  column  in    route,  ami  to  execute  the  movemmtn 
incident  titer eto. 

30C.  The  swiftness  of  th"  route  step  will  be  one  hundred  and  ten  stops  in  a  minute  ; 
this  swiftness  will  be  habitually  maintained  in  columns  in  route,  when  the  roads  and 
ground  may  permit. 

307.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  nnd  supposed  to  constitute  a  subdivision  of  a 
column,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  came  it  to  maich  in  the  route  step,  ho  will 
command  : 

1.    Culumn,  forward.      1.    (niidt,  left  tor  right.)      3.    Route  tttp.     i.    March. 

308.  At  the  command  murrh,  repeated  by  the  captain,  the  two  ranks  will  step  off 
together  ;  the  rear  rank  will  take,  in  marching,  by  shortening  a  few  steps,  a  distance 
of  one  pace  ^  twenty-eight  inches)  from  the  rank  preceding,  which  distance  will  be 
computed  from  the  breasts  of  the  men  iu  the  rear  rank,  to  the  kuapsacks  of  the  men 
in  the  front  rank.  The  nun,  without  further  command,  will  immidiatcly  carry 
their  arias  or  icill,  aj  indicated  in  tho  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  21U.  They  will  no 
longer  be  required  to  march  in  the  cadenced  pace,  or  with  the  same  foot,  01  to  remain 
silent.  The  liles  will  march  at  ease  ;  but  care  will  be  taken  to  preYSat  the  ranks  from 
intermixing,  the  front  rank  from  getting  in  advance  of  the  guide,  and  the  rear  rank 
fi  cm  oponing  to  too  great  a  distance. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— -LE8KON    VI.  53 

9 

30!).  The  company  marching  in  the  route  ptrp,  th"  instructor  will  MUM  il  to  change. 
direction,  which  will  be  executed  without  formal  commands,  oa  a  simple  caution  [torn 
tii  ■  captain  :  tli  rear  r  auk  will  omaeaf  to  change  direction  in  the  same  man  nor  a*  tho 
front  rank.  Each  rank  will  conform  itself,  although  in  the  i  oute  step,  to  1 1 1 » -  pi  indoles 
which  ban  ribed  for  the  change  in  closed  rank*,  with  this  difference  only  i 

that  the  |iivot  man.  instead  iif  taking  steps,  of  nin  •,  will  t .ik .-  itepl  "I   fou  teofl  inches, 
in  o;  il.  r  to  dear  the  »  heeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  rente  step,  to  cause  it  to  pass  to  the  oad<  need 
step,  the  instructor  will  in  st  order  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder,  an'!  then 
command : 

1.    Clr,,r    Onirr.      1.    MarCII. 

311.  At  the  command  mnrrh,  the  men  will  resume  the  cadenced  step,  and  will  close 
so  M  to  have  a  di&lanc  •  of  tixtoea  B  i  ach  rank. 

111.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadeaci  d  pace,  the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  take 
the  roate  itep,  will  command  : 

1.   Boats  Step.     1.  M  uirn. 

313.  At  tlie  command  mnrrh,  the  front  rank  will  continue  the  step  of  twenty-eight 
inches,  the  rear  rank  will  take,  by  gradually  shortening  the  step,  the  distance  of  ta 
eight  inches  frtm  tho  front  tank  ;    the  men  will  Barry  their  arms  at  will. 

314.  If  the  compani  he  marching  in  the  roate  st  «p,  and  the  Instructor  sboald  =uppose 

t]  ot   marching  by  the  II  ink  in  the  Mat  dnection,  he  will  cominand  i 
1.    Cimpnny  ha  thr  Tight  {or  lif I)  flank.      '1.    Ily  fxlr  left  (or  right. '■•      3.    Maiu'ii. 
At  the  command  mnrrh.  the  company  will  face  t"  the  right  (or  left)  in  march* 
lag,  the  captain  will  pis  fbj  the  side  of  the  guide  who  conducts  tb<  hading 

(lank  ;  this  gaide  will  wheel  immediately  to  the  left  01     ighl  :  all  the  Hies  wi  '  1 

•-.wheel  on  .t  as  the  guidi*:  If  there  be  flies  broken  off  to  the 

they  will,  by  wheeling,  regain  th  .r  respective  places,  aad  folloa  the  ■oreuMBt 
ol  ile  ( smpaay. 

s't.  r  having  caaoed  the  company   to  be  again   formed  into  line,  will 

g  ami  diminishing  front,  by  platoon,  which  will  be  executed  by 

il  the  company  were  1  n  the 

-.  the  chief  of  each  a  ill  move 

to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will  taki  :  guide,  who  will  step  back  into 

tie    !•  ai   tank. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and  supposed  to  march  in  the  route 

be  diminished  and  inci  tion.ifthe 

:  «  have  a  ft 

movement*  of  diminishing  and  increasing  fi  out.  by  °>-otion.  will  be  pj 

led  for  the  a  bj  platoon.     Hie  right 

inmanded  by  the  captain  and  In  st  lieuti  nant.  rcspe(  tirely; 
tubal  terns  in  rank,  ur,  in  their  J 
119.  The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  section,  will  give  the  order  t"  th    1  aptain, 
H  ill  command  : 

1.     J!r  M 

IM  j  shall  !>'  b 

fin  it  ''.ink  in  the 

back  Into  the  rear  rank:  th  rithin  one  |  .ink. 

i  luinti  in  rout 

wiQ  I 

;  1  tbe 

V 

1.       /"o»TT>     f'lnlr...,,,.  2.      MUTH. 

diminishing  aad  increasing 

front  by  fib  •  .  a»  1      • 


54  SCHOOL   OF   TUT   COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 

H5.  The  rn-nptiiT  bcinjj  broken  by  platoon,  '    >n.  the  instructor  will  canso 

it,  marching  in  the  roul    ■  march  bv  the  Hank  in  the  same  direction,  by  the 

commands  and  the  means  indicated,  Pfoe,  314  and  315.     Then  ibdiriaiona 

shall'-  wrill  wheel  to  the  left  (or  right,)  ha 

marobing,  n,  and  to  unit*  with  the  rear  file  of  the  aubdi' 

Immcdiatelv  preceding.     The  die  closers  will  take  their  habitual  places  in  the  march 
by  the  Bank,  b  fore  the  anion  of  the  subdivisions. 

lit.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  Sank,  and  the  instructor  ihonld  wish 
ti  uniloubh-  the  files,  irhich  might  sometimes  be  found  necessary,  he  will  inform  thr> 
captain,  who.  after  earning  the  cadencedttep  to  be  n  nimed,  ami  arnu  to  be  shoahieit  d 
or  inpportedj  will  oommand  : 

1.    /«  two  rnnki,  undouhle  jiUi.      2.    March. 

327.   At  the  ■eodnd  oommand,  the  odd  numbers  will  continue  to  march  straipht  for- 
ward, tin-  ••  v iti  numbers  will  shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the  Left,  will  place 
th'tiif'lvi-  promptly  behind  the  i  dd  nambera  ;  the  rear  rank  a  ill  pain  a  step  to  1 1 
i"  ;i-  i"  retake  t i •  •  toacfa  of  elbowi  on  the  > i< i >*  <>t"  the  fronl  rank. 

.  lithe  company  be  marching  bv  the  left  Hank,  it  will  be  the  eTcn  nambera  who 
will  continue  to  march  forward,  and  the  odd  numbers  who  will  andool 

S39.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  doable  the  til'-s.  he  will  give  the  order  to  th<5 
captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.    In/our  rank*,  double  file*.      2.    M.Wu  it. 

330.  At  the  command  atarea,  the  tile<  will  doable  in  the  manner  as  explained,  when 
the  company  faces  by  the  right  or  th  il<  it  flank.    The  inatructor  will  aft  irwardi 
the  route  el  p  to  be  ret  nmed. 

S31,  The  various  movements  preaorlbed  in  this  leaaon  may  be  exeoated  in  doable 
quick  time.    The  men  will  be  brought,  bj  pass  over  at  thii  gait  about  aleraa 

hundred  yards  in  seven  minal 

332.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  roate  step  shall  halt,  the  rear  rank  wiH 
close  up  at  the  command  malt,  and  the  whom  will  shoolder  i 

333.  Marobing  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  !>•  permitted  to  carry  their  piee 

the  manner  they  shall  Bnd  moat  convenient,  pa]  bag  attention  only  to  holding  the  mui- 
zles  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accident?. 

Auticle  Fourth. 

Countermarch. 

■ .  The  com]. .my  being  at  a  halt,  and  aappi  Mtate  part  of  a  column,  ripht 

t,  (i  heM  the  inatructor  shall  w  tab  to  cause  it  to  coantermat  cb,  he  will  i 

inasrauwaa.     2.  Cosipany,  rtoAt— Faci.     '.'•.   ByfiUltft.    \.  Mumi. 

Dond  command,  tb  will  face  to  the  right,  the  two  guides  to 

the  ri'_rht  about;  the  captain  « ill  po  to  the  right  of  hlacompanj  and  cms.'  two  fll 

break  to  the  rear,  and  th   n  place  bimi  ll  by  the  aide  of  the  front  rank  man.  to  conduct 
him. 

the  oommand  more*,  both  gnldea  will  stand  fast  :  the  o  imp  toy  «  ill  -i 
smartly;  the  Ant  file,  conduoted  by  the  captain,  will  wheel  around  the  right  guide, 
arid  direct  ita  march  along  the  fronl  rank  so  as  to  arrive  !>  hind,  an  1  two  par.'-  from 

the  left  guide;  each  Ble  ^^  i  1 1  i ie  in  succession  t . •  wheel  na  tb  I  around 

the  righl  guide ;  the  leading  Ble  having  arrived  at  ■  point  opposite  to  the  1  sft  e,ui  Ie, 

the  captain  will  command  : 

I.  Company.    2.  II  ki/r,      ;.   1      kt.    4.  Ill 
''•"~.  The  first  command  will  be  given  *.t/oiu  the  point  where  the  leading 

Ble  i-  to  r<  t. 

■  ond  command,  the  company  will  halt. 
).  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front 

MO.    At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  drflM  by  the  right  ;    the  captain  will  step  two 
I  he  I'M  gnide,  now  on  the  right,  ami  direct  the  alignment,  so  that  the 
Iron  I  rank  may  be  enclosed  between  the  two  guides;  thecontpanj  being  aligned,  he 
will  com  tn  a  ml  Fuo.n  r,  and  place  himself  before  the  centre  "I  the  co  npnnv  as  if  in  eol- 
uinn  :  the  guides  passing  along  the  front  rank,  will  shift  to  thei  lacoa,  on  the 

ripht  and  1  ft  of  that  I  s 


school  of  the  company — lesson  vi.  55 

3-41.  In  ft  column,  by  platoon,  the  countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the 
munds,  and  according  to  the  same  principle* :  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will  I 
and  it-  chief*  ill  .  at,  to  conduct  it. 

342.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch   will  be  executed  by  ii 

manda  and  meant,  hut  according  to  the  nme  principles.     Thai,  tin-  n  '11  he 

made  by  the  right  flank  of  subdivisions,  if  the  right  he  in  front,  and  by  the  It  ft  Hank. 
if  th''  left  be  iii  front;  in  both  cases  the  subdivisions  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  side  of 
the  front  rank. 

Artici.b  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  /arm  on  the  right,  (or  left)  into 

line  of  hat  tie. 

343.  The  column  by  platoon,  ri^-ht  in  front,  being  in  march,  the  instructor,  wifhing 
to  form  it  on  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  will  e  immand  : 

1.    On  the  ritfht  into  tine,      2.    Quid*  right. 

344.  At  the  second   command,  the  guide  of  each   platoon  will  shift  quicklv  t 
right  flank,  and  the  men  will  touch  elbows  to  the  right;    I  ic  t-) 
march  straight  forward. 

tractor  baring  given  the  second  command,  will  more  bri 
point  at  v.  impany  ought  to  real  in  line,  and  place  himself  face- 

point  of  direction  to  the  left,  which  he  will  rl 

The  line  of  bat'  n  that  th"  guide  of  each  platoon,  after 

having  turned  to  the  right,  may  have,  al  ke  before  arriving  upon 

that  1 

347.  The  head  of  the  column   beiac  nearly  opposite  to  the  instructor,  the  ah 
th"  ti;-'t   platoon  will  command  ;   1.   Id <jht  t urn  ;   and   when  exactly  that 

c  will  add  : 

2.    IfASOH. 

amand  ■mnvh,  (he  first  platoon  will   turn  to  the  right,  in  conf" 
with  •       ;  I  in  tli"  school  o!  th"  soldier,  No.  .11  so 

-  the  front  rank    man.  n<-Tf  on  bis  |fft.  o|  ••    in- 

ptnrt(,r:  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  march  before  its  centri  it»guidn 

shall  be  n.ar  th'  line  i  will  command: 

1.     rintoon.      2.    HllT. 
34f>.   At  the  rornmand    hnlt,  which  will   be  pivn  at  the  in«tant  th^  I  (  pls- 

•  inci>  ot  tht-  -n    the    Hoe 

will  ' 

hi-    will    (.  ■  ign  him   on   the  point  of  dii 

the   '  rivine.  "t   the  'am"   til 

(tb(  of  th(  i  • 

jn  line,  command  : 

man. 

liim- 

■ 

.  will  command  : 


56  980001  OF  Tim  OOKPAHT — UaVOH  vr. 

Right— IV 

3.'>4.  IlsTing  ^iTon  this  command,  he  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  filo  closer,  pass- 
ing around  the  l.'fi  ;  the  MGond  plat  mi  will  dreM  up  on  the  alignment  of  the  first, 
and,  when  established,  the  Captain  will  ouniinnd  : 

•<T. 

2ji.  The  movement  n»ded,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

Omidm>    Pi 

3.r>6.   At  this  command,   the  two  guides   w  ill  r.  tin  n  to  their  j  l:»c  bj    in  line  of  hat  tie. 

7.    A   column,  bar  platoon,  left  in  frost,   will   form  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle, 

according  to  the  aane  principles,  and,  by  InTerac  means,  appl.i  if  Lr  to  the  socoad  pla- 

toonwhat  I  a  for  the  first,  and  reciprocally.     The  <l.i.i  of  the  second  pla- 

having  aliened  it.  from  the  point  of  apsst,    the  loft,     will  retiri  t"  his  plac 
n  file  doner.    The  captain  baring  halted  um  Brat  platoon  three  i  M|  i  bt  bind  the  line 
ofbattle,  will  go  to  toe  same  point  to  align  thi*  phitoon,  end  then  command  :  Faoar. 
At  the  command,  guide* — posts,  riven  bi  the  instructor,  the  captain  will  shift  to  his 
proper    flank,  and    the   guide's  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle, 

.'losi.  When  the  oempaniea  of  a  regiment  are  to  be  exercised,  at  the  same  time,  iii 
the echool of  the  companj,  the  colonel  will  indicate  the  li — o  or  lessons  they  arc 
severally  to  execute.  The  whole  will  commence  by  a  bugle  signal,  and  terminate  in 
like  manner. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  single  rank,  < 

reciprocally. 

S59.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks  in  the  manner  indicated  No.  8, 
echool  of  the  soldier,  and  supposi  'l  i"  make  part  of  a  dolman,  right  or  left  in  front, 

when  the  IttatmCtOI  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  single  rank,  he  w  ill  command  : 
1.  In  one  rank,  form  company.     2.  Mutm. 
SCO.   At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  will  face  to  the  right. 

361.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  step  oil' and  march  in  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  front  rank. 

362.  The  firat  file  will  step  off  xt  the  same  time  with  the  guide  :  the  front  rank  man 
will  tuin  to  the  i  urht  at  the  Brat  step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  himself  followed  bj  the 
rear  rank  men  of  his  file,  w  bo  t.  ill  come  to  turn  on  the  tame  ipol  «  hei  e  be  had  toi  n<  d. 
The  second  file,  and  tueoessively  all  the  other  files,  will  stop  off  as  has  been  prescribed 
for  the  Bret,  the  froat  rank  man  ofeeeh  file  following  immediati  Ij  the  rear  rank  man  of 

the  file  next  on  hi.s  right.  Thl  Captain  w  ill  superintend  the  lee. v.  mi  nt.  ami  w  In  u  the 
but   man  shall  have  stepped  off,   be  B  ill  halt  the  COmpABJ  ,  and  face  it  to  the  front 

363.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  two  |  aces  in  tear  of  the 
lank. 

I,   The   company  being  in  single  rank,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it 
into  two  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.  In  (no  rnuhi,  form  riinij,<iiii/.     2.  Company  right— Facb.     3.  Mu;ru. 

30.r>.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  t"  the  ii^ht  :  the  right  guide 
and  the  man  on  the  right  will  remain  faoed  to  the  front, 

366.  At  the  command  marc*,  the  men  w  ho  hare  faoed  to  the  right,  w  ill  step  off.  and 
form  file*  in  the  :,iiiow  ing  manner  i  the  -■•  cond  men  In  the  rank  u  ill  place  hima 
hind  the  first  to  form  the  first  file  !  the  third  w  ill. place  himscll  bjf  the  side  of  the  first 
in  the  front  rank  ;  the  fourth  behind  the  third  in  tin- rear  rank".  All  others  will.  In 
like  max  aer,  plane  themselves,  alternately,  in  the  front  end  rear  rank,  and  will  thus 
form  ides  of  two  men,  on  the  hit  of  thus,-  already  formed. 

Mf,  The  formattoni  above  described  will  be  habitually  executed  by  the  right  of 
companies-,  but  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  have  them  executed  bj  the  left,  he 
will  face  tin-  company  ahomt,  and  post  thegaldea  in  the  rear  rank. 

■..  The  formation  w  ill  then  be  executed  bj  the  -a commands,  ai  d  accord!. 

the  same  principles  as  by  the  front  rank  ;  the  mo\  emenl  commencing  with  the  left  file, 
now  become  the  right,  and  in  each  file  by  the  rear  rank  man.  now  become  the  front; 
the  left  j,'"''1'1  « '"  oonform  to  what  has  been  pn  ici  Hx  d  for  the  i  igbt 

360.   The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will  face  the  company  to  its  proper  front. 


SCHOOL   OF   TIIE   COMPANY — LS3S03    \T.  .'7 

370.  Wh'-n  a  batt.ilinn  in  lin«  has  to  execute  either  of  the  formations   aim- 
Bcrilv-d.  the  cokiaej  will  mm   it  to  bn  ak  t  i  the  rear  by  the  right  i«r  left  ol  companies, 
ami  will  then  live  the  commands  jaet  peracribed  !  ten  company 
will  (  xi'cut  ■  th  ■  iini\ ciih  hi  M  if  acting  singly. 

Formation,  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four,  and  n 
rocauy,  at  a  holt,  and  in  march, 

371.  The  company  being-  formed  in  two  rank?,  at  ■  bait,  and  roppoaed  to  form  part 
of  a  rolumn  right  in  front,  win  n  the  instructor  shall  friah  to  form  it  iato  lour  ranks, 
he  will'coinniand  : 

1.    lit  four   rank*,  form    company,      1.     Company  I 'ft — Face.      3.    M 

quirk — Maecb.  > 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  jruidc  will  r"main  faced  to  the  front,  the  com- 
pany will  race  to  the  It:  the  n  ar  rank  will  pain  the  dl  n  th" 
front  rnnk  by  a  side  step  to  the  1  It  and  rear,  and  the  men  will  foltn  into  lour  rank-  a* 

ibed  in  the  school  ol  the  soldier. 

At  the  command  march,  the  Bret  fde  of  four  men  will  reface  to  the  front  with- 
out undouhlinp.     AH  I  tour  will    step  off,  and 
about   I'm,  inches  of  the  preceding  file,  will  bait,  and  immediately  nee  to  th..-  : 
the  men  remaining  doubh  d. 

'•     The  file  closers   will  take  their  new  placet  in  line  of  battle,  at  two  paces  in 
rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

175.  The  oaptain  will  superintend  the  moremeat. 

lb -company    i'inpin  tour  tank--,   wln-nthe   instructor  "ball   wish  to  form  it 
tnd  : 
1.    In    tiro   rank',  form    eompCMf.      2.    Company    riyht — Faci..      3.    M  Uteri      or   I 

■wiefc—  M  t  . 

177.   At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will  stand  fast,  the  company   will  face 

to  th.   ■ 

-     At  the  command  march,  the  right   guide  will  step  off  and  march   in  th 
'ion  of  th--  front  rank.     The  leading  Die  of  four  men  will  step 
the  other  I  .      .  d  file  will  step  off  wh  n  there  -lull  !>• 

nn  into   two  ran 
will   ■  rely  what   baa  l«rn   prescribed   foi  I 

but  file  -hall  Lave  its  d  -  u  ill  command  : 

1.  Qtmpanf.    2.  II  w  t.    S.  From. 

rnmand  front,  the  company  will  face  to  the  front,  and  t 
able. 

ks,  and  marching  to  the  front,  when  the 
hMtmctor  shall  -  tad : 

I.    In  f.nir    raiik'.f':mrnmj„n,ti.       1.     I  ■  " 

181.    At  the   command  nmrrh,  th  •  b-ft    jjni-!  will 

coatii 

inp  ti 
■ 
hie,  will  ta'  -r«  I., 

>  two  rani  remand  : 

I.  In 

■ 
the    C  ''irmar^l  mi- 


58 

ripht  ami  u  .  .  the  step  ■  little,  in  order  to  k^ep,  as  near  as 

mud  tile  from   the  left  ritatl  have 

..(  the  ini  Tval  neceasarv  for  th  •  left  Ml  •  to  form  into  hra  ranks,  tin? 

to  the  left  and  mutch  si  .ird; 

andt'  II  immediately  form  inl  ,  and  tekethetouehoferbowatotbe 

1  ■:  ■.     Bach  file  will  e>  lat  baa  just  I  ribed  for  the  file 

ml  each  file  will  f(irm  into  tw  i  ranks  whan  tl.  sa  it*  right 

quin  -I  distance  and  fac  -'I  to  the  front. 

pan.i  be  iu|  |  >-  <1  to  make  pari  of  ■  column,  left  in  front,  these  dif- 

''  I  ••       | 'ding  to  the  same  piiaciples  and  by  inverse 

luting  the  indication  Ufi  fur 

i:nd  of  the  schoOu  ok  tiif.  OOKPaJIT. 


DESTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

■r  the  instrucli 

1.  Th.-  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  '■  rules  a;  irill  give  to 

the  commander  the  m<  an«  of  moi  log  them  in  any  direction  with  p 

n  Hi-  -li  mid  be  executed  with  th  •  same  pre- 
cision  as  in  closed  tanks,  nor  i-  it  desirable,  ai  inch  -  would  materially  intcr- 

fercwith  their  prompt  execution. 

:,.   When  -  are  throw*  Ottt  to  char  tin1  way   for,  ami  to  protect  the  ad- 

:  n  corps,  their  movements  Bhould  be  so  regulated  by  this  corps,  as  to 
kc"|  lj  covered. 

.;.  |  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  reserve,  the  strength  and  composition 

■  l  which  will  ding  i"  eiro 

■,.  [f  the  body  threw  se  of  the  main  corps,  a  very 

.  reserve  \%  i i :  b  i  tuluci  nt  for  each  coi  ipauy,  n  bi  se  dull  it  thai]  be  U>  fill  vacant 

placi  be  line  with  .  relieve  the  fatigued,  and  as  hl,iS 

i.  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance,  beaides  the  aompai 

anoth  •  ill  be  required,  compose  ol  entire  c  a  bicfa  will  be  emj 

to  su  iafurce  saeh  parts  of  the  lint  ai  maybe  war  ted;  this  ra- 

iat   naif  the,  companies  deployed  as 
skirmisl 

7.  The  r<  I  behind  the  a  atre  of  the  >ine  ef  skirmishers,  the 

i  indred  ami  fifty,  and  the  principal  reserve  al  t'-nr  hundred 

i- rule,  however,   is  not   invariable.     The  res?rves,  while  holding  them- 

..  itliin  Bustaini  ig  distance  of  the  line,  should  be,  n<  much  as  posstbl  i,  In  a  poel- 

.in  I  iiiiu-i  earefnlly  profit  by  any  aec  - 
ind  to  conceal  th  itn  the  view  ef  the  enemy,  and  to  ah<dter 

.in  hit  in  ■■■ 

cecuted  in  quick,  or  doubts  quick  time. 
hi  a  ill  be  i  ■  '»)  • 

'.'.  Skirmishers  will  bo  permitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  most  conve- 
nient to  them. 

;  l,.  the  sounds  of  the  I 
14.  Thai  ry,  the  non-commissioned  olHeers,  will  i 

tobe  'j   <  : * '  i .  .'.    i  .vru  :  hut  to  avoid  mil 

:!.  they  will  wail  until  the  Last  b« 

12,  Wb(  n  i  apidly,  the  officers  and  i 

men  econ  im  cool,  :ll": 

the  ad  which  the  pround  may  •  .    Itii  only  by  thi 

rades,  that  n  line  of  skii  misbers  can  attain  sui  cei 
;::.  Thifii  I  into  live  artivh  ..vided  as  follows: 


INSTKHTION    FOR    SKIIJMISIII'R?.  ' 

Article  First. 

1.  To  deplov  forward.  4.   To  close  interval*. 

2.  To  depl  lank-  i.  To  relieve  akirintahera. 

3.  To  extend  intervals. 

AllTlt 

1.  To  advance  in  1  n-.  3.  To  change  direction. 

'.'.  To  retreat  in  line.  4.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

Autici.h  Tmnn. 
1.  To  fire  at  a  halt.  2.  To  fire  marching. 

Artici.k  Fi -riiTH. 
1.  The  rally. 

J.   To  form  column  to  march  in  any  direction, 
3.   The  assembly. 

Ai:tici,k  Firm. 

1.  To  deploy  a  battalion  as  .skirmishers. 

2.  To  rallv  the  bnttali  I  u  ikirntiehera. 

14.  In  the  Brat  fonr  artiH"  hat  th-   movements  arc  c-tr.r!it'-d  by  a 

company  d(  kirmi«her«.  on  a  front  equal  to  thai  talion  in  m 

;h  article,  it  i«  supposed  thai  each  company  of  the  battalion,  I 
deplored  as  skirmisher!  '  of  on"  but  Prorata 

tin   lea,  rules  may  be  d    Inoed  for  all  caeca,  whatever  may  be  the  numerical  etr< 
skirmishers,  and  tha 

Deployments. 

I    -    npany  reav  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  in  tw*  ard,  and  by  the 

flank. 

18.  The  d  i  loymi  nt  forward  will  b  •  adopted  when  the  company  i?  behind  th-  line 
on  which  ;  -  :  it  will  be  deplo;  • 

it  find"  itself  already  on  that  line. 

IT.   WTk  I  it  will  ba  dirided  into 

two  platoons,  and  each  platoon  wi 

roups  of  four  men,  will  1"-  careful  •■ 
7  '  If  that  the  hi'"!  in  th«  I 

1-.  A  nomnai  r  may  be  deployed  u 

own 

■ 

19,  A  fhain  '■'  skiri  hi  z  m-rall-  ad- 
Tan'    . 

21.   Th"  ' 
half  ■ 

. 

T 


CO  Qm&ucnon  fob  bkirbiishebs. 

1.    Flr*t  j,latoon  —  at  tkirmithcrt.     1.    On   the  lift  file—takt  interrali.     3.   Maiu'H  {Or 
double  quick — Si  LBI  il.  I 

23.  At  tli«-  first  OBnunand,  the  second  and  third  lieu  tenant!  will  pi 

-   b  bind  I  I  the  right  Brat  pis- 

toon  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  w  ill  more  one  pad  in  rront  of  the  eeotre  of  the  tirst  |  latoon, 
anil  will  pla  n  the  t«  o  tectioni  in  the  front  rank  as  fnun  as  the  i 

!i  sergeant  will  place  blase*  If  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of 
he  can  pane,    The  captain  will  indicate  to  this  nnrgoanl 
tin-  p  lint  on  which  he  wiahea  Mm  to  direct  ln>  inarch.     The  tirst  lieutenant,  placing 
bimsell  before  the  ceqtre  ol  the  second  platoon,  will  caromond: 

idtward—iA  u.<  n. 

24.  At  tlii«  command,  the  set d  platoon  will  atop  three  pacea  to  the  rear,  no 

avnask  tlr-  Bank  of  the  Brat  platoon.     It  will  then  be  baited  by  its  chief,  an 

"ii  the  left,  and  the  third  sergeant  on  the  right  flank 

of    til 

26.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of  four  men,  eendaoted  by  the  fourth 
ant,  will  'li  ■  <  ■  i  ita<  li  i  n  the  point  indicated  :  all  the  other  groups  ol  fours  throw- 
ing for* aid  briskly  tin'  left  shoulder,  «  ill  move  diagonaUj  to  the  fi ont  in  donble  quick 

to  gain  to  the  right  the  space  of  tn  II  be  the  di 

betweefa  each  group  and  that  immediately  on  its  left.  When  t it <•  second  ojroup 
the  left  shall  arrive  an  a  lino  with,  and  twentj  pacea  front  the  Brat]  it  will  mareh 
straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  gall  and  direction  of  the  Srat,  keeping  con- 
stantly "ii  the  same  alignment  and  at  t  i  from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all 
the  others,  will  conform  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second;  thej  will 
arrive  sucoeasivelj  mi  the  line.    The  right  guide  will  arrive  with  the  last  group. 

having  reached  the  point  where  the  left  of  i lu-  line  should  rest. 
the  captain  will  command  the  skirmishers  to  halt  ;  the  men  composing  i  ach  group  of 
four.*  will  then  immediately  deploy  at  Bvc  paces  From  each  other,  and  to  the  right  and 
1  tt  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  hie  in   each  group,  the  roar  rank  nun  placing 
Ives  on  the  left  of  their  Ble  1  sadera.     If  any  groups  be  not  In  line  at  th 
halt,  they  will  move  up  rapidly,  conforming  to  what  baa  just  beet  preserved. 
If.  during  the  deploy  mi  nt,  the  line  should  b  i  fir<  d  upon  l>y  the  enemy,  the  cap- 
lain  1 1 . n  ■.  can  je  the  groups  of  fours  to  di  |  Iby,  as  they  gain  their  proper  distances. 

The  line  being  formed,  the  non-commissioned  officers  on  the  i  ight,  leffl  and  centre 

of  the  platoon  n  ill  place  thci  -  in   rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  the 

'.  i  lv  occupied.     The  chl  na  will  promptly  rectify  any 

ulai  [ties,  ami  ih.  ii  place  themselves  tw  i  1 1 ;.  five  or  thirty  paces  in  the  rear  of  the 

tbeti  sections,  each  having  with  him  four  men  taken  from  the  reserve,  and 

also  a  bugler  who  will  repeat,  if  necessary,  the  signals  sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skin  uld  bo  particularly  instructed  to  take  advantage  of  any  covor 

which  th"  ground  may  offer,  and  should  lie  I'.ii  on  the  ground  whom  re?  such  a  iuoto- 
ment  i-  necessary  to  protect  them  from  the  Bre  of  the  enemy.  Regularity  in  the 
alignment  shonld  yield  to  thi    Important  advantage. 

50.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  flrsl  lieutenant  will  face  the  second  platoon 
about,  and  mai  eh  it  promptly,  and  1  \  the  shortest  line,  to  about  one  hundred  and  fifty 

in  rear  ot  the  centre  ot  the  line.    He  will  hold  it  always  at  this  distance,  unlaas 
itrary. 

51.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the  movemeata  af  the  liat.  rWi  rule  it 
gem  raL 

52.  Light  troop-  will  carry  their  bayoncti  habitually  In  the  scabbard,  and  thi<  rule 
applies  equally  to  the  akirmlshers  and  the  reserve;  .whenever  bayonets  are  required 
tone  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  be  given.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  super 
intendencc  to  the  whole  deployment,  and  then  promptly  place  himself  about  eighty 
paces  In  real  of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  n ill  h.n  e  with  bim  a  bugler  ami  four  men 
taken  ft  did  I  he  i  serve. 

53.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right  or  the  centre  of  th*  ';  the 
same  commands,  substituting  the  Indication  right  or  centre,  for  that  ol  u-jt  ble, 

34.  The  deployment  on  the  right  or  tin-  qpntr    will  be  mads  according  to  the  prio- 

:  above  :    in  this  latter  cn-e.  the    centre  of  the   p latoon  w  ill  li  ■  marked 

by  the  right  group  of  fours  in  the  tion:  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  him- 

self on  the  rbjht  ui  thi*  group,  and  serve  as  the  guide  of  the  platoon  daring  the  de- 
ployment. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISIIKI:.-.  G! 

'  3.r>.  In  whatever  manner  tlio  deployment  ho  made,  on  tlio  ri^ht,  left,  or  n.-nlro,  th  • 
men  in  each  group  of  (ours  will  si  at  five  paces  from  <  at  li  otb   r,  dad  ii|  on 

the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  Bo m bored  file.  The  deployments  will  habitually  be 
made  at  twenty  paces  interval;  but  if  ■  great  r  interval  be  required,  it  will  be  indi- 
cated in  the  command. 

M.   If  a  company  be  thrown  out  a.s  skirmishers,  SO  near  the  main  body  I    ! 
a  reserve  unnecessary,  the  entire  company  will  be  extended  in  the  iuh  manrer.  and 
according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for  ths  deployment  of  a  platoon.     In  lh(i 
the  third  lieutenant  will  command  the  fourth  s"rti  m,  and  a  non-coratnlssioDed  ol 
designated  for  that  purpose,  the  second  lection;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  act  as  centre 
guide;  the  tile  closers  will  place  themselves  t"ti  pacei  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite 
their  places  in  line  of  battle.     The  first  and  second  lieutenant  will  each  have  a  bugler 
near  him. 

To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  ha't,  when  the  captain  c'lall  wish  to  deploy  it  b 
flank,  holding  the  first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command! 

1.  Strand  platoon — a$  tkirmithcr'.      2.   lly  the  right  flank — take  i  ntervnl*.      8.  >I  ■ 

-March.) 

38.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  place  th 

behind  the  i 
n;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the 
.«:  oosd  platoon  j  the  third  sergeant,  as  soon  as  he  can  ]  ass,  will  place  himself  on  th.- 
oi  the  fiont  rank   nl  the  same  platoon.     The  captain  will  indicat    • 
on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct  his  march.     The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will 
••■  what  hai  i  Ibed  for  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  Kos.  23  at 

The  fourth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  Mr- 
'  will  remain  on  the  right  flank. 

19.  At  the  second  command,  th"  first  and  thiid  Hen  tenants  will  place  Cham 
two  paces  behind  the  left  group  tA  th 

40.  At  the  command  march,  the  sernnd  platoon  will  face  to  the  ripht.  and  romm^nco 
the  movement :  the  b'ft  proup  of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but  will  deploy  a-  soon  at  there 

■i  on  iU  right,  conforming  to  whal  ha»  been  prescribed  No.  ~f< :  the  third  ser- 
geant will  place  himself  on  the  b'ft  of  the  right  grown,  to  conduct  it ;  the  ' 
projp  will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from   the  one  on   its  left,  the  third   grown  at  t 
paces  from  the  second,  and  to  on  to  the  right.     A    the  groups  halt,  the y  will  ft  ■ 

enemy,  and  deploy  a*  ha-  lined  for  the  b'ft  group. 

41.  The  ohnefli  rfaecuieto  will  pay  particular  attention  to  the  successive  deployments 
oftf  ■piag  near  the  group  about  to  halt  hich 
may  t>p  committed.     When  the  deployment   i-   completed,  the)  will 

eoi  the  irse<  tions,  a»  hi 
tiicerc  will  s  iously  indicated. 

4?.  A»  noon  a*  the  movement  covaaeae<  i,  th'  chief  of  the  t,  .-,»»  it 

•    will  move  it  a«  indicated  No    .In. 

4?..   The  deplr vment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank  according  to  the  fame  principles, 

•lank  for  right  flank. 
4'.   If  tie   captain  thoald  ••  -  company  I 

«,  he  will  command  : 

1.    '  M — OS  fkirmi'hrrt.       ]  '  l,ft    flnnkt-    tnlr    | 

rates     XI* 

I        '•  'and.  th- oflio^r*  and  ne>n  cr.mmi«»i-ned  officer!  will  conform  te 

what  has  been  prescribed  Vc 

<        V   ■  r,d  command,  the  '  behind  t' 

group  of  the  right  i 

-   of  the  fame  pUtoeuw 
mand  mat    •  will 

wilt  face  to  the  left,  th"  rmap  on  t  ntfr  portion  w 

two  section!  will  moTe  off   in 

'   the  r:-M   '  IB*  SeOUfjd   Sergeant  or. 

left  Blr.     The  two  pri  un#  •>•  •  ,    »t«tid»  far 

p»r»»  frrm   Ihii  |  and  each  of  the  oth»r  f  rout*  wdl    halt    at   t  • 


C2  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

the  gioup  which  is  in  rear  of  it.     Each  proup  will  deploy  as  heretofore  prescribed 
No.  40. 

4».  The  fir-'  end  third  lieutenants  will  direct  the  movement,  holding  themselves 
alwa;  group  which  li  ubomi  la  halt. 

49.  '.lie  dcplojmi  lit    to  be   Dade  in  any  named  group  what- 

er;  in  this  case,  the  Ifth  scrgi  ant  n  ill  |  lave  himself  before  the  group  ino 
ai.d  the  deployment  will  be  made  according  to  the  principles  heretofore  prescribed. 
60.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

To  extend  intt  rvdU. 

51.  This  movement,  which  i  employed  to  oxt.  nd  a  line  of  skirmishers,  will  be  ex- 
ecu-,  d  a<  cording  to  the  pi  ini  •     ibed  for  deploj  meats. 

b'l.  If  it  b  BUpposi  d  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is  at  a  halt,  and  that  the  captain 
wish- -s  to  i  xteod  it  to  tlu-  left,  he  will  command: 

1.   By  the  \qf t  flank  (so  many  paeee)  extend  interval.     2.  Ma  ecu   (or  double  quid: — 

Ma  lien.) 

it.  At  the  command  march,  the  group  on  the  right  will  stand  fast,  all  the  other 
groups  will  face  to  the  left,  and  eacp  group  will  extend  its  Interval  to  the  prescribed 
distance  by  the  means  indicated  Xo.  40, 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to  preserve  between  each  other  the 
distance  of  live  paoes,  unless  the  nature  of  the  ground  should  render  it  necessary  that 
they  should  close  nearer,  in  order  to  keep  in  sight  of  each  other.  The  intervals  refer 
to  the  spaces  between  the  groups,  and  not  to  the  distances  between  the  men  in  each 
group.  The  intervals  will  bo  taken  fl  im  the  right  or  left  man  of  the  neighboring 
group. 

55.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the  front,  and  the  captain  should  wish 
to  extend  it  to  the  light,  he  will  0 mand  : 

1.    Ch|  the  left  group  (SO  many  }>a<cs)  extend  intervals.      2.    Maucu    (or  double  quick — 

Maucu. 

5C.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  (he  guide,  will  continue  to  march  on  the  point  of 
direction;  the  other  groups  throw  ing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and  taking  th  -double 
quick  step,  will  open  their  intci  vals  to  the  prescribed  distance,  by  the  means  indicated 
.No.  26,  conforming  also  to  w  hat  is  prescribed  No.  .VI. 

57.  Intervals  may  lie  extended  on  the  c. -nt.-e  of  the  line,  according  to  the  same 
principles. 

fcfl.  [f  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  Intended  that  one  company  or  platoon  should 
occupv  a  line  which  had  been  previously  occupied  by  two.  the  men  Of  the  company 
or  platoon  which  Is  to  n  tire,  «ill  lull  successive  ly  to  the  rear  as  they  are  relieved  by 
the  extension  of  the  intervals. 

To  close  intervals. 

59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals,  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  priorities  prescribed  Per  the  deployments. 

(0.  If  the  line  of  skirmish,  is  b  •  halted,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  close  inter- 
vals to  the  left,  be  will  command  : 

1.  liy   the   left  Jlank    (m    many  paces)    close   intervals.      2.  Maucu    (or  double-quick — 

U  i 

61.  At  the  command  »»<ir<A,  the  left  group  "ill  stand  fast,  the  other  groups  will  face 
to  the  left  and  close  to  the  prescribed  distance,  each  group  facing  to  the  enemy  as  it 
attains  its  proper  distance. 

C2.   If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  captain  will  command: 
1.   On  the  left  group  (so  many  pacts)    close  intervals.     2.  March    (or  double   quick — 

M  LSI  n. 

6?,.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  continue  to  move  <»n  in  the  direc- 
tion previously  indicated  :  the  other  groups,  advancing  the  right  shoulder,  will  close 
to  the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced  to  the  prescribed  distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  bo  closed  on  the  right,  or  ou  the  centre,  according  to  the  same 
principles. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR   BKTRMISIIERS.  63 

65.  When  intervals  an-  to  be  elated  up,  in  order  to  reinforce  a  line  of  ikirmi  I 

so  as  to  cause  two  companies  to  cover  tbe  s_- ; • r ■  1 1 1 . ■  1  which  hid  Been  previously  ("  ■  upied 
by  one,  the  Dew  company  trill  deploy  to  h  to  finish  its  inovemeni  at  twenty  paces  in 
rear  of  tlie  line  it  la  to  nccupv,  and  the  men  will  sip  ove  npon  that  line,  u 

they  shall  be  unmasked  by  the  men  of  the  old  company.  The  reserves  of  the  two 
companies  will  unite  behind  the  centre  of  the  line. 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  bo  relieved,  the  captain  will  be  advised  of 
the  intention,  which  he  will  immediately  communicate  to  his  Bnt  and  second  lieu- 
tenants. 

ST.  The  new  company  will  negate  Its  deployment  forward,  so  as  to  finish  the  move- 
ment at  about  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

6*.  Arrived  it  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new  company,  by  command  of  their 
captain,  will  advance  rapidly  a  few  |  ai  ■  I  b(  yond  the  old  line  and  halt  ;  the  new  line 
being  established,  the  old  company  will  assemble  on  its  reserve,  taking  care  not  to  get 
-ups  of  fours  until  tiny  are  beyond  the  lire  of  the  enemy. 

60.  If  the  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  marching  in  retri  at,  the  company  thrown 
out  to  relieve  them  u ill  deploy  by  the  Bank,  as  pr<  .-■  ribed  No.  38  and  f<  II •  m  ing.  TLc 
old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire  with  order,  and  having  passed  the  new  line, 
they  will  form  upon  the  reserve. 

AttT.'CLS  Sbcoko. 

To  advance. 

To  ndranrt  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line, 

70.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  i-  marching  by  th«  front, 
tide  will  be  habitually  in  the  centra.     Mo  particular  indication  to  t bis  i 

•e  giv<  0  in  the  commands,  but  if  on  the  contrary  it  kw  [reel- 

ing guide  should  be  on  the  t  iffht,  or  left,  the  command  guide  right,  or  guide  left,  will 
•n  immediately  after  that  of  forward. 

71.  The  cajtai  kirmisbers  to  advance,  will  command : 

1.  /'..>  .-nrd.     2.  M  u  i  B  ;or  doubt* q uick — Mauch. ) 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  tb  rapidity  by  the  chiefs  i  I 
tions,  and  in  ca-e  oi  need,  hi  the  sergeants.     This  rule  is  gen  ral,  whether  the  skirm- 
ishers march  by  the  frost  M  by  the  Hank. 

73.  At  the  ill  move  briskly  i 
the  r                         i, nd  oa  the  left,  and  the  thinl  in  the  centre. 

74.  At  the  command  «ore4, tbi  lino  will  move  to  the  front,  tl  -  :  with 
the  direction  will  Bare  on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  tie                     -  will  hold  them- 

■  igai  d  on  this  guide,  and  pi  BBM  \  S  tie  il   n,t   i  l  all  ton  ai  da  him. 

will  march  Immediately  behind  their  sections,  so  as  to 
I  end. 

1  he  captain  will  give  a  general  r.i. 
77.   '•'•  ball  the  skirmishers,  he  will  command  : 

Halt. 
At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will  halt.  'ions 

will  promptly  rectifj  my  in  ignment  and  intervals,  and  after  takiag 

tveri  possil  l<  they, 

with  the  tin  lr  prop<  r  placet  in  the  r>  ar. 

i,  wishing!  -a ill  command  : 

1.  in  retrtat,     2.   M*k  «-<7«i.i      M- 

SO.  At  the  first  con  •  prgeantt  will  move  on  the  line  as  presc- 

H      73. 

''  ■  will  face  sbiut  individually,  and  carch 

to  ti  scribed  No.  7*. 

t#  Will  U*e 

S3.  To  bait  the  skim  ■  I    '.•',  n  ill  command : 


f.4  INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHSaS. 

M.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt,  and  Immediately  face  to  the  front. 
tions  and  Lbe  lb i  .  o  guldi  a  n  ill  each  conform  himself  to  what  it 
preacrlbed  S 

To  change  direction. 

BC  Tf  the  eommaader  of  a  lino  of  skirmishers  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  chang?  di- 
.  to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  :-.'i".'.    '.'.  Mutm  (or douiUqwiek— Manca.) 
ST.  At  the  oomtswnd  ssordb,  the  right  gnide  will  mark  time  in  Us  place;  th 
guide  will  move  in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and  thai  he  may  properly  regulate  hW  move- 

menta,  wUl  occasional!}  cast  hit  eyes  t"  the  right,  eo  as  to  observe  the  di tion  of 

tin  lino,  and  the  nature  of  the  ground  to  be  pined  ore?.    The  a  mtre  gnlde  will  .iis.> 
march  in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and  in  order  to  conform  hii  movements  to  the  general 

direction,  will  take  care   that   his   steps   are  only  half  the   length  of  the  Steps  of  the 
guide  on  the  left. 

The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of  their  ttepi  by  their  distance  from 
the  marching  flank,  beii  they  approach  the  pivot,  and  greater  as  they  arc  rc- 

I  from  it ;  they  "ill  often  look  to  the  marching  Bank,  m  a^  to  preserve  the  di- 
rection and  their  intervals. 

Wneu  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to  resume  the  direct  march,  he 
will  command  : 

1.   Forward.     2.  Makch. 

00.  At  th'*  command  march,  the  line  will  eease  to  wheel,  and  the  skirmishers  will 
more  direct  to  the  front ;  the  centre  guide  will  march  on  the  point  which  will  be  in- 
dicated to  him. 

91.  if  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in  place  of  moving  it  to  the  front, 
he  will  command : 

Haiti 

92.  At  this  command  the  lino  will  halt. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  he  made  according  tothesaiue  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  will  change  direction  by  the  same 
means,  and  bv  the  same  commands,  si  a  line  marching  in  advance;  for  example,  if 
the  captain  should  wish  to  reverse  his  left,  now  become  the  right,  he  will  command: 

1.   /.•  >'l  xrhrtl  ;    I,  Maucji.      At    the   command   halt,   the   skirmishers   will    lace   to    the 

enemy. 

!'.">.  lint  if,  instead  of  halting  the  line,  the  captain  should  wish  to  continue  to  march 
it  in  retreat,  he  will,  when  he  judges  the  line  has  wheeled  sufficiently,  command  : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March. 

To  march  by  the  flan  I:. 

9C.  The  captain,  wishing  th  ■  skirmishers  to  march  by  the  right  (lank,  will  command  : 
1.  Jiy  tht  right fiamh.     2.  March  (Or  double  jvt'oap— MaMB.  i 

97.  At  the  flnt  command,  the  tin.  will  place  themselves  OB  the  line. 

98.  At  the  command  moreo.  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right  and  move  oil';  the 
ri»ht  guide  will  plaOC  him*  If  by  tbi  side  ..|  the  leading  man  <oi  the  right  to  conduct 
kirn,  and  will  march  00  the  point  indicated;  each  skirmish  t  will  take  care  to  follow 
exactly  in  the  direction  of  the  one  immediately  preceding  him,  and  to  preserve  his 
distance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the  hft  flank,  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples, and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  Untight  ;  the  left  guide  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  to  conduct  him. 

100.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to 
halt  them,  he  will  command: 

Halt. 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt  and  face  to  the  enemy.  The  officers 
and  sergeants  will  conform  to  what  bae  been  prescribed  No.  78. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS.  65 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements  of  the  line,  and  be  held  always 
about  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  position  to  second  its  operations. 

103.  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he  will  com- 
mand :  1.  i'latoon  forward.  2.  Guide  left.  3.  MARCH.  If  he  should  wish  to  march 
it  in  retreat,  he  will  command:  1.  In  retreat.  2.  March.  3.  Guide  right.  At  the 
command  hvlt.  it  will  re-face  to  the  enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  understand  that  the  signals  or  commands,  such  as 
forward '.  mean  that  the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the  enemv  ;  in  retreat,  that  they 
■ball  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  left/lank,  that  the  men  must  face  to  the  right  or  left, 
whatever  may  be  their  position. 

106.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  bv  the  flank,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to 
change  direction  to  the  right  (or  left,)  he  will  command  :  1.  Jit  file  right  (or  (eft.) 
2.  March.     These  movements  will  also  be  executed  by  the  signals  S'os.  14  ainl  15. 

Article  Third. 

•ifcjL  The  firings. 

106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

To  fire  at  a  halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  captain  will  command  : 

Commence — Fmisro. 

105.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  men  of  the  front  rank  will  commence 
firing  ;  they  will  reload  rapidly,  ana  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  fire  again.  Du- 
ring this  time  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  come  to  a  ready,  and  as  soon  as  their  re- 
flective file  leaders  have  loaded,  they  will  also  fire  and  reload.  The  men  of  each  file 
will  thus  continue  the  firing,  conlorming  to  this  principle,  that  the  one  or  the  other 
shall  always  have  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to  aim  with  accuracy;  they  should, 
moreover,  endeavor  to  estimate  correctly  the  distances  between  themselves  and  the 
enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  deliver  their  fire  with  the  greater  certainty 
of  success. 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place  whilst  reloading,  unless  protected 
by  accidents  in  the  ground.  f 

To  fire  marching. 

111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  as  the  fire  at  a  halt. 

112.  At  the  command  commence  firing ,  if  the  line  be  advancing,  the  front  rank  man 
of  every  file  will  halt,  fire,  and  reload  before  throwing  himself  forward.  The  rear 
rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  after  passing  ten  or  twelve 
paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man,  will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select  his  object,  and  fir* 
when  his  front  rank  man  has  loaded  ;  the  fire  will  thus  continue  to  be  executed  by 
each  file  ;  the  skirmishers  will  keep  united,  and  endeavor,  ai  much  as  possible,  to  pre- 
serve the  general  direction  of  the  alignment. 

113.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  command  rommenre  firing,  the  front 
rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  face  to  the  enemy,  fire,  and  ihrn  reload  whilst  moving: 
to  the  r-ar  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  halt  tea 
or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man,  face  about,  come  to  a  ready,  and  fire,  «  hen 
bis  front  rank  man  has  passed  him  in  retreat  and  loaded  ;  after  which,  he  will  m  I 
the  rear  and  reload  ;  the  front  rank  man  in  his  turn,  after  marching  bi  ear, 
will  bait  at  ten  of  twclre  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  face  to  the  enemy,  load  hi<  , 
and  fire.confoimingto  what  ha*  just  been  prescribed  ;  the  firing  will  thus  be  continued. 

114     If  the  company  be  marching    by  the   right  flank,  at  the  command,  commmri 
firing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  itep  one  pace  forward, 
halt,  and  fire;  the  rear  rank  man  will  cnntiDU"  to  move  forward.     As  soon  as  the 
rank  man  has  fired,  he  will  place  him"  If  briskly  behind  his  rear  rank  mar,  i 
whilst  marching.     When  he  has  load<-d,  the  r<  ar  rank  man  will,  in  his  tur: 
ts.ee  forward,  halt,  and  fire,  and  rrturr.  .;>ks,  will  place  himself 

front  rank  man ;   the  latter,  in  his  turn,  will   act   in  tbe  same  manm 
same.  At  the  command,  r,a§t  firing,  tbe  snen  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake 

their  t  already  t>  I 

5 


66  CNSTEUCTIOS    FOR  SKTB 

1 15.  If  the  company  bn  marching  by  the  lert  flank,  the  Src  "ill 

e  principles,  but  in  this  case,  it  will  rank  men  who  will  fire 

116.  The  Following  rnlea  will  hicb  they  apply. 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing*  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  command, 

i,  it  will  be  the  men  « I 
nlar  rank  to  \\  bich  thej  bel 

!  have  been  discharged,  will  remain  in  I  1  them  l>  I 

:  il.  and  thf  firing  v,  ill  be  continued  agn  eablj  to  the  prim  \  .Wl. 

[f  thelin  incing,  or  whilst  marching  by  the  Hank, 

at  the  command,  fn  retreat — March,  the  men  wh  *re  loaded,  will  remain 

r,  and  will  Bre  in  tins  position  ;  the  men  w  bo 
will  retreat  loading  them,  and  the  fire  will  be  continued  agreeably  to  the  prim 
I  \o.  1  la. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishes  beflring  either  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at 
the  command,  It y  the  ,-i:/!i>   \  or  left  \  flank—  M  n  ch,  the  men  wl 
will  step  <>iie  pace  out  of  the  general  alignment,  face  to  the  enemy,  and  fire  in  this 
tion:  tin  men  wl  are  unloaded  will  face  to  thi  ad  march  in 

the  direction  indicated.     The  men  who  si  ipped  out  of  the  ranks  will  place  tbenu 
immediately  after  firing,  upon  the  genera]  direction,  and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear 
men,  as  the  case  maj  b  i.     The  fire  w  il!  be  continn  d  according  to  the  principles 
-  ■.  111. 

I.  Skirmishers  will  behs  i  Loa  1  their  nieces  whilst  marching  ;  bnl 

will  be  enjoined  to  ball  always  an  instant,  when  in  the  act  of  charging  cat  I 
priming. 

131.  They  should  be  practised  to  fire  ami  load  kneeling,  lying  down,  and  sitting, 
ami  much  liberty  should  be  allowed  in  th  ■-<■  i  i  ord  ir  thai  they  may  b 

■  I  in  the  manner  found   to  be  most  convenient.     Skirmishers  Bhould  be  cautiom  d 
forget  that,  in  whatever  position  they  may  load,  it  is  important  that  the  • 

I  upright  before  ramming,  i.i  order  that  the  entire  charge  of  powder 
may  reach  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

122.  in  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same  rank  Bhould  not  all  fit 

and  the  men  of  the  same  file  should  be  particular  that  one  or  the  other  of  thei 
always  load)  d. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the  skirmishers  should  seize  on  every 
advantage  which  the  ground  mny  pre."  i  ting  the  enemy  as  long  as  passible. 

124.  At  the  signal  to  cean/lring,  the  captain  will  see  that  the  order  is  promptly 
obeyed;  but  the  men  who  may  not  be  loaded,  will  load.  If  the  line  be  marching,  ft 
will'  continue  the  movement  :  but  the  man  uf  each  file  who  happens  to  1  a  in  front,  \\  iil 
wait  until  the  man  in  rear  shall  be  abreast  with  him. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  advancing,  at  the  command  halt,  the  lino  will 
:u  upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  front :  when  the  line  Is  retreating,  upon  the 

skirmishers  who  are  in  rear. 

128.  Officers  should  watcb  with  the  gi  ible  vigilance  over  a  lino  of  skirm 

.  they  sbonld  neither  earn  a  rifle  or  fowling  piece.     In  all  the  In 
.  .is  well  as  the  sergeants,  s  )j>  >u  l<)  see  that  order  and  silence  are  pies  >rved,  ami  that, 
the  skirmishei  -  do  not  wander  imprudently  ;  they  sbonld  especially  caution  them  t..  be 
calm  and  collected  :  not  to  fire  until  they  distinctly  perceive  th 
r.im,  and  are  sure  that  1  E  shouldtake 

advantage  promptly,  and  with  intcllig  nee,  of  all  shelter,  and  ef  all  of  the 

bi    fire.     It  may  often  happen,  that  intervals  are  momentarily  1  reral 

ach  other  find  a  com  i i  shelter;  but   ivhen  they  quit  this  position,  they 

should  imroedial  Ij  resume  their  intervals  and  tbelr  places  in  line,  so  that  thej 
not,  by  crowding,  needlessly  expose  thi  mat  Ives  to  the  tire  of  the  enemy. 

Aimeu.    I'o    i:th. 

THE     I 

To  form  column. 

127.  A  com]. any  deploj  ed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied  in  order  to  oppose  the  enemy  with 
-i.ee.-  -  :  the  rallies  are  made  at  a  inn,  and  with  bayonsti  fix  3  ;  wb 
to  rally,  the  skirmiehi  rs  fix  bajoneti  without  comma 


[ON    FOR    SKIBMISHERS.  07 

ie  will  adopt  accord- 
in  cumstances. 

■.  If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely  disturb*  >1  by  scattered  horsemen, 
it  will  not  I  II  back  on  th  tain  will  cause  bayonet 

fixed.     lit  should,  however,  advance  to  charge  the  skirmiahei 

captain  will  command,  •  •'»•<-.    The  line  -v^  j  1 1  halt  if  marching,  and  the  four 

croup  will  execute  this  rally  in  the  following  manner  :  the  front  rank  man 
of  the  even  numbered  file  will  t ;i k < ■  the  position    ';  ,  .•  t ho  rear 

rank  i  ■:■•  ill-  posit 

turning  bisback  tohim,  the  former, 

and  parallel  to  it;  th  of  the  odd  file,  and  th  man  of  the 

to  back,  taking  ad  between 

the  t  Bf  to  the  right  and  left ;  tli  four 

ill  be  brou £  a  i]  support.     The 

fourmen  in  crvl,  ion  may  ofler,  and  load  with- 

-  will  each  can?"  the  four  nvn  who  constitute 
bim  ami  th 
Tin- tin  ts will  each  promptly  place  himself 

in  the  group  nearest  bim  in  the  line  of  skirmisl 

131.  Wh  captain  shall  squares  too  weak,  but  should  wi 

his  lino,  he  will  command  : 

TtaUy  by  sat  ions. 

132.  mmand,  the  Dtre  group 

i  on  any  oth  gi  oup  whose  position  n 

i  idly  at  ■  run  on 

roup,  ami   ■  »  ambers.     1  group  on 

formation  is  made,  will  imm<  d 

and  elevate  theii  indicate  the  point  on 

which  the  rally  i  The  other  skirmishei  irrive,  will  occupy  and 

fill  th'  open  angular  s]  men,  and  rally  aroun 

•rin  rapidly  .  cle.     The  ll 

■mn  of  chart"'  bayonets,    the  point 

will  fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and  ving  their 

guard,  wherever  he  may  jr. 

particulai  the  rally  i«  I  i 

■ 

I 

■    - 
I 

■ 

■ 


-vbo   is  *<  »        '  I  : 


68  INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKTRMI8HER5. 

groups  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  toward*  each  other,  and  in  such  manner  as  to 
form  into  section*  with  the  greatest  possible  rapJditi  while  moving  to  the  rear;  tbe 
officer*  ar;«l  MTgOUtl  "ill  see  that  this  formation  is  made  in  proper  order,  and  the 
eliitfs  will  direct  their  M-ctions  upon  the  reserve,  taking  care  to  umiu-k  it  to  the  right 
and  left.  A-  t hi^  skirmishers  arrive,  they  nil.  continue  and  complete  the  formation  of 
the  square  begun  bj  the  rcservs,  closing  in  rapidly  upon  the  latter,  without  regard  to 
their  places  in  line:  they  will  come  to  a  ready  without  command,  and  fire  upon  the 
enemy  ;  which  will  also  be  done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked  by  the  skirm- 
ishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cavalry  while  retreating,  it?  chief  will 
command  holt :  at  tl>i«  command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly  into  a  compact  circle 
around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his  section  and  resume  the  march,  the  moment  he 
can  do  so  with  safety. 

142.  The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt  and  efficient  manner,  requires  coolness 
and  activity  on  the  part  of  both  ofliccrs  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment  of  respite  which  the  enemy's 
cavalry  may  leave  him  ;  as  soon  as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place  himself  beyond 
the  reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a  position  where  he  may  defend  himself 
with  advantage,  or  by  returning  to  the  c*rps  to  which  he  belongs,  tor  this  purpose, 
being  in  square,  he  will  cause  the  company  to  break  into  column  by  platoons  at  half 
distance  ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

144.  At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  will  dress  on  its  centre,  and  the  platoon 
which  was  facing  to  the  rear  will  face  about  without  command.  The  guiaes  will  placo 
themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  their  respective  platoons,  those  of  the  second  platoon 
will  place  themselves  at  half  distance  from  those  of  the  first,  counting  from  the  rear 
rank.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  captain  can  move  the  column  in  whatever 
direction  he  may  judge  proper. 

145.  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.   In  retreat.     2.  M.vucn   (or  double  quick—  March.) 

146.  At  the  command  marrh,  the  column  will  immediately  face  by  the  rear  raak, 
and  move  off  in  the  opposite  directioa.  As  soon  as  the  column  is  in  motion,  the  captain 
will  command : 

3.    Guide  right  (or  left.) 

147.  lie  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading  guide;  the  guides  will  march  at 
their  proper  distances,  and  the  men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.   Form  square.     2.  Mauch. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt;  the  first  platoon  will  face  about 
briskly,  and  the  outer  half  sections  of  each  platoon  will  be  thrown  perpendicularly  to 
the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and  third  fronts  of  the  square.  The  officers  and 
sergeants  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities  which  may  be  committed. 

159.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  in  advance,  the  captain  will  command  : 
1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

151.  Which  w  ill  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  144. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will  command: 

1.  Forward.     1.  March  (or  double  quick— March.  )     3.   Guide  left  (or  right. ) 

153.  At  the  secend  command,  the  column  will  move  forward,  and  at  the  third  com- 
mand, the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

154.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain  ground  to  the  right  or  left  he  will 
do  so  by  rapid  wheels  to  the  sidetjpposite  the  guide,  and  for  this  purpose,  will  change 
the  guide  whenever  it  may  be  necessary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at  half  distance,  right  in  front,  the  cap- 
tain can  deploy  the  first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already  explained;  but 
if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the  second  platoon  forward  on  the  centre  file,  leaving 
the  first  platoon  in  reserve,  no  will  command : 


INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKIRMISHERS.  69 

1.  Second  platoon— a»  ikirmithcrt.     1.   On  the  centre  file — take  intervals.     3  March. 
(or  double  quick  —  March.  ) 

156.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  ol  the  first  platoon  will  caution  hi?  platoon  to 
stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  sections  of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves  before 
the  centre  of  their  sections  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  pace  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  second  p  latoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section,  second  platoon,  will 
command:  Section  right  face  ;   the  chief  of  the  left  section  :   Section  hft  face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will  moTc  off  briskly  in  opposite  direc- 
tions, and  baring  unmasked  the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  respectively 
command  :  By  the  left  flank — March,  and  By  the  right /tank — March  :  as  soon  as  these 
sections  arrive  on  the  alignment  of  tbe  first  platoon,  they  will  command.  At  'kirmi*h- 
ert — March.  The  groups  will  then  deploy  according  to  prescribed  principles,  on  the 
right  group  of  the  left  section,  which  will  be  directed  by  the  fifth  sergeant  on  tbe  point 
indicated. 

1 59.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deployment  made  by  the  flank,  the  second  platoon 
will  be  moved  to  the  front  by  the  means  above  stated,  and  haltec  after  passing  some 
steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the  first  platoon  ;  the  deployment  will  then  be  made  by 
the  flank  according  to  the  principles  prescribed. 

160.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as  skirmishers,  and  the  captain  should 
wish  to  rally  them  on  the  battalion,  he  will  command: 

Rally  on  the  battalion. 

161.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve,  no  matter  what  position  the 
company  to  which  thev  belong  may  occupy  in  the  order  of  battle,  will  rapidly  unmask 
the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing  themselves  in  a  run  towards  its  nearest  nank,  and 
then  form  in  its  rear. 

MS.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed  beyond  the  line  of  file  eloten,  the  men 
will  take  tbe  qitick  step,  and  the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section  will  reform  his  sub- 
division, and  place  it  in  column  behind  the  wing  on  which  it  is  rallied,  and  at.  ten  paces 
from  the  rank  of  the  file  closers.  These  subdivisions  will  not  be  moved  except  by  order 
of  the  commander  of  the  battalion,  who  may,  if  he  thinks  proper,  throw  them  into 
line  of  battle  at  the  extremities  of  the  line,  or  in  the  intervals  between  the  battalions 

163.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the  sanre  wing  of  a  battalion,  or  be- 
hind any  shelter  whatsoever,  they  should  be  formed  always  into  close  column,  or  into 
column  at  half  distance. 

164.  When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  company  of  skirmishers,  shall  be  formed  into 
square,  the  platoons  and  sections  of  the  covering   company  will   be  directed  by  their 

to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will  be  opened  at  the  angles  to  receive  the 
skirmishers,  who  will  be  then  formed  into  close  column  by  platoons  in  rear  of  the  first 
front  of  the  square. 

195.   If  eircumst.inee:  ghoulrl  prevnt  the  angles   of  the  square  from  being  opened, 

the  skirmishers  will  throw  them«el  ves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank  men.  the  ripht  knee 

on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  (be  piece  resting  on  th»  tlnph.  the  bayonet  in  a  threatening 

on.     A  part  mai  t  themselves  about  the  angle;.,  where  they  can  render 

good  service  by  defending  the  sectors  without  fire. 

If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are  rallied  be  in  roliimn  ready  to 
square,  the  skirmi-her?  will  be  formed  into    close  column    by  platoon,  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  third  division,  and   at   tbe  command.   Form  'quart — March,    they    will 
move  forward  and  dose  on  th< 

2f.  7  misbers  have  been  raJlii  I  by  platoon  or  section  behind  the  wiag 

a  battalion,  an'!  it  be  «  -'lem  ajrain   I  will  be  ma- 

flank  toward"  the  interval*  on  tbe  wings,  and  '  «  ■  as  to  cover  the 

front  of  the  battalion. 

When  platoons  or  section*,  placed  in  the  interior  of  square*  or  columns,  are  to 

be  deployed,  they  will  be  TOA-  •«■»  forward,  as  is 

as  soon  as  thev  shall  have  anma*ked  the  eolumn  oi  square,  they 

will  be  deployed,  the  or,  i  ft  file. 

77/'   awnilly. 

A  company  deployed  as  skirmisher-  will  be  ass^m'  no  longer 

danger  of  its  being  disturbed  .   the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually  in  quick  time. 


7  '  DflRB&cn 

170.  The  e^ptata  wishing  to  aaaemble  the  skrro  b   reserve,  will MBunaod: 

171.  A:  this  command,  the  skinni-!,  i  of  fours;  I 
rank  men  «ill  place  th                   bind  theii  year  rank  men  ;  ana  ttch  group  ot 
will                                        i  e,  m  here  each  w  ill  lake  II 

•  will  rejoin  the  battalion  bo  which  it  belt 
17:.  Ifmajbealso  pro]  ble  the  skirmishers  on  th  rontherlght 

or  I'll  of  the  lino,  eithei  .  at  ;i  halt. 

17::.  If  the  captaii  ntre  while  marching,  he 

will  command  i 

Assi  mble  on  the  a  ntre. 

171.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  continue  to  march  directlj 
front  on  the  point  indicated  \  the  front  rank  man  of  th    •  ile  «  ill  follow  the 

guid  .  rank  man;  theothei  I  group, 

and  likewise  thot  on  their  left,  will  march  diagonally,  advancing  the  left  shoulder 
and  accelerating  the  fj  reform  the  groups  wbil 

the  directing  file ;  the  men  of  the  right  Bection  will  unit  in  the  Bame  manner  into 
groups,  andthen  upon  the  directing  file,  throwing  forward  the  right  shoulder.  A.s 
thej  ly  unite  on  toe  centre,  the  men  will  bring  their  pi  i  Ight 

shoulder. 

17."..  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  be  executed  according  to  tl 

170.  The  ass  mblv  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat  will  also  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  the  front  rank  men  marching  behind  their  rear  rank  d 

177.  ]  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt,  and  on  tl  npy,  the 
Lin  Will  giro  the  same  commands;  the  skirmishera  will  face  to  the  right  or  left, 

.   Bhould  march  bv  the  right  or  left  Hank,  re  form  the  groups  whll  - 
hing,  and  tuns  arrive  on  the  file  which  serred  as  the  point  of  formation.     As 

ill"  .  kiinii.-liris  will  support  arms. 

'  Autii'i.k  Firm. 

To  dt\  \ttal\pn  a&  skirmishers,  and  to  rally  thi 

battalion. 

Ti>  deploy 

178.  A.  battalion  oeing  in  line  of  battle,  if  the  commander  should  wish  to  doplov  it 
on  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  holding  the  three  right  compani  re,  he 
will  intention  to  th  •  lieutenant  colonel  and  adj  i  the  major, 
who  will  be  directed  to  take  charge  of  the  reserve.  He  will  point  out  to  the  lien 
tenant  oolonel  thi  direction  he  wl                     the  line,  as  well  as  the  point  where  he 

right  of  the  sixth  oompany   to  rest,  and  to  tl"'  commander  of  the  i 
•  a  he  inaj  wish  it  establ 

179.  The  lieu)  man)  colon  I  will  move  rapidly  In  Front  of  the  right  of  the  sixth  com- 
pany, and  the  adjutant  in  front  of  ths  left  of  the  same  company .    The  commander  of 

rve  will  dispose  of  it  In  the  manner  to  be  hereinafter  in'di 

180.  The  colonel  will  command  ■ 

I.    1-  d)  platoon* — a$  skirmi*hor*. 

'.'.    '  I 

(or  doubU  quick — afaai 
L81.  At  th    si  •■  md  command,  the  captains  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  oompanies  will  pre- 
pare i"  deploy  th  •  first  platoons  of  their  respective  compa 
the  fifth  on  it-  left  file 
l  M.  Th  ■  captain  of  the*  fourth  company  will  race  it  ho  the  right,  and  the  captain 

th  and  eighth  companies'  will  face  the  respective  companies  to  the  left. 
L88.  At  the  commai  I  will  commence      The  platoons  of  the 

fifth  and  sixth  companies  will  deploj    forward;  the  right   guide  of  the  sixth  will 
march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indicated  to  him  bj  the  Lieutenant  colonel. 
184.  The  oompany  which  has  faced  to  the  right,  and  also  the  companies  which  have 


TN.-TttUeilOX   FOR  SKIRMISH]  71 

Taccd  to  the  left,   will  m  :  ward.     Tho  fourth  company  will  take  an  in- 

ig  from  the  left  of  the  fifth,  ana  its  chief  «  ill  di 
its  first  platoon  on  it-  nth  and  eight   i  .11   eacjb  t ikr an 

interval  of  one  hundred  paces,  counting  from  the  first  file  ol  the  company,  which  i- 

iramcdiatelv  on  I  |  l,,y 

their  i  en  tli.'  right  lil". 

The  guide  act  the  files  on  which  the  deployment  is  made,  shoul 

careful  to  direct  vl  wards  the  outer  n  unpany,  already 

deployed  as  skirmahers ;  or  it  tbeoompani  1  t,  they  will 

carefully  the  distance  which  may  still  be  n  qu  ail  thi  ■■•  fill     In  line, 

will  thin  match  on  bus  marked  out.     The.  arrive  on 

the  lin<',  will  align  tie  msclvc   on  tho  e  already  depli 

The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  will  follow  the  deployment,  the  one  oi 
tight,  the  other  on  the  left  ;  the  concluded,  they  will  place  I 

iie  colonel. 

1-7.  The  reteri  in  echelkra  in  th- foil  •> 

man'.  the  sixth  < 

in  the  ri'.ar  of  th  \  right  of  this  company  :  th  fourth  and   tilth  i 

p,  united,  o]  of  their  lin  ishen,  and  thirty  paces   in 

ice  of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  c< rmpaay  ■.   I  nth  and  eighth 

also  united,  oppi  itre  of  their  line  of  skirmishers,  and  t  i 

farther  to  the  rear  than  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company. 
188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  composing  tl  on  receiving  an 

order  from  to  thai  effect,  will  march   these  companies  thirty  paces  to  the 

rear,  and  will  then  |  loj  them  into  column  by  company,  at  hah  tfter  which, 

he  will  conduct  the  column  to  thi  point  which  shall  barebeun  indicate  d  to  him. 

.-el  n ill  L.  and  when 

I,  will  mn\  In  rear  of  the  lin  his  view  ma 

I  to  deploy  by  the  flank,  th"  sixth 
• .  halt,  d,  and  di  ploi  t  d 
thcr  on  the  lit  file,  by  the  d  ly  in- 

f  tl  by  the  flank 

direction,  shall  hare  taken  its  interral, 
it  will  npon  the  line  oatablishcd  by  the  fifth  and  sixth  balt<  d,  and 

deple 

191.   Tn  tl  .u'  in  the 

of  battle ;  but  if  in  column,  it  would  be  deployed  as  skirmisl  ,-ame 

\'.<7.  1  i8  to  be  di 

nan, 

and  «  ' 

■ 

•  ill  be 
and  will  th 


1 

I 


72  MANUAL   OF   TIIE  SWORD,    ETC. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmisher?  will  be  rnllied  in  squares  on  their  re- 
»pectivc  iowiim  :  each  reserve  of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form  the  first  front 
of  the  square,  throwing  to  the.  rear  the  sections  on  tlie  flanks  ;  the  skirmishers  who 
arrive  first  will  complete  the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last  the  fourth  front.  The  officers 
and  sergeants  will  superintend  the  rally,  and  as  fast  as  the  men  arrive,  they  will  form 
them  into  two  ranks,  without  regard  to  height,  and  cause  them  to  face  outwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders  of  squares  will  profit  by  any  interval 
of  time  the  cavalry  may  alow  for  putting  them  in  safety,  either  by  marching  upon  the 
battalion  reserve,  or  bv  seizing  an  advantageous  position;  to  this  end,  each  of  the 
squares  will  be  formed  into  column,  and  march  in  this  order;  and  if  threatened  anew, 
it  will  halt,  and  again  form  itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the  battalion-reserve,  each  will  re- 
form as  proinply  as  possible,  and  without  regard  to  designation  or  number,  take  place 
in  the  column  next  in  rear  of  the  companies  already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if  itself  threatened  by  cavalry. 
In  this  case,  the  companies  in  marching  towards  it  will  place  themselves  promptly  in 
the  sectors  without  tire,  and  thus  march  on  the  squares. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  FOR  OFFI- 
CERS. 

POSITION  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  UNDER  ARMS. 

The  carry.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  suppoited  against  the 
right  hip,  the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  shoulder. 

TO  SALUTE  WITH  TIIE  SWORD  OR  SABRE. 
Thrtt  timet   (or  pau$e$.) 

One.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  person  to  be  saluted,  raise  the  sword  or 
sabre  perpendicularly,  the  point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  to  the  right  eye,  the 
guard  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  supported  on  the  body. 

Tico.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  bv  extending  the  arm,  so  that  the  right 
band  may  be  brought  to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain  in  that  position  until 
the  person  to  whom  the  salute  is  rendered  shall   be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six 

pao  -. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place  the  back  of  the  blade  against 
the  right  shoulder. 


COLOR  SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  will  always  carry  the 
heel  of  the  color-lanoe  supported  at  the  right  hip,  the  right  hand  generally  placed  on 
the  lance  at  the  height  of  the  sh..tililer,  to  hold  it  steady.  When  the  color' has  to  ren- 
der honors,  the  color-bearer  will  salute  as  fbllOWl  : 

At  the  distant-  of  si*  paces  slip  the  i  jght  hand  along  the  lance  to  the  height  of  the 

eye;  lower  the  lance  by  straightening  the  ami  to  its  (nil  extent,  the  heel  of  the  lance 
remaining  at  the  hip,  and  bring  back  the  lance  to  the  habitual  position  when  the  per- 
son saluted  shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  pawed,  six  paces. 


MANUAL  FOR  RELIEVING  SENTINELS. 

Armt — Port. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 
Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  bodv,  the  lock  to  the  front,  seize  it  smartly 
at  the  same  instant  with  both  hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left  at  the  lower 


RELIEVING   SENTINELS,    ETC.  73 

band,  the  two  thums  pointing  toward?  the  mule,  the  barrels  sloping  upwards  and 
crossing  opposite  the  point  of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  proportionally  lowered.  The 
palm  of  the  right  hand  will  be  above,  and  that  of  the  left  under  the  piece,  the  nails  of 
Doth  hands  next  tha  bod?,  to  which  the  elbows  will  be  closed. 

Should*) — Anus. 
One  time  and  tico  motioni. 

{Fint  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  right  shoulder,  placing  the  right 
hand  as  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  ofthe  shoul- 
der, the  fingers  extended. 

(Second  motion. )     Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the  side. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms,  if  it  be  wished  to  give  the  men  rest,  the  com- 
mand will  be : 

Parade — Rest. 

At  the  command  re»t.  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel  of  the  butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left* 
the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  body  :  poize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the  left 
hand  just  abore,  and  with  the  right  at  the  upper  band;  carry  the  right  foot  six  inches 
to  the  rear,  the  left  knee  slightly  bent. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  THE  CHIEF  BUGLER  AND  DRUM 

MAJOR, 

The  posts  of  the  field  music  and  band  hare  been  given,  Title  I,  for  the  order  in 
battle. 

In  column,  in  manoeuvre,  the  field  mufic  and  band  will  march  abreast  with  the  left 
centre  company,  and  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

In  clumn  in  route,  as  well  as  in  the  passage  of  defiles  to  the  front  or  in  retreat, 
they  will  march  at  the  head  of  their  respective  battalions. 


RIFLE  AND  INFANTRY  TACT] 


TITLE   FOU  K  T  II 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 
Formation  of  the  Battati     , 

1.  Every  colonel  will  labor  to  habituate  his  battalion  to  form  line  of  ba.Uk',  by  niijbt 
.1-  well  u  by  day,  with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude. 

2.  The  color-company  will  generally  b  d  as  the  direct  my.    Tint, 

on  the  colonel  mar  have  determined  for 
tin  line  (>;'  1  attle.  'I  in'  other  companies  will  form  on  it.  t"  th  ■  right  and  left,  on  the 
principles  i  I  foi  (nations  n  bich  will  be  herein  presci ;: 

3.  Th  ■  color-bearer  may  have  recen  ed  the  color  from  the  hand-  of  th"  colonel ;  but 
if  there  be  daylight,  ami  time,  the  color  will  be  produced  with  due  solemnity. 

I      position  <>it<!  march  of  th 

■i.  When  the  battalion  turns  out  under  arms  ai  i-  ranted,  a  company 

.  n  ill  be  put  in  marofa  t"  .  t  it. 

5.  '1'h-  march  will  be  in  th.'  following  order,  in  quick  time,  and  without  music:  the 
field  music,  followed  by  the  band;  the  escort  in  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front, 
with  arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  ami  the  color  bean  i  between  th.'  platoons. 

Arrived  in  front  of  the  t*  at  or  quai  ti  n  of  th.-  colonel,  the  escort  will  form  line, 
id  music  ami  band  on  tin-  right,  and  arm.-  will  be  brought  to  a  Bhoulder. 
7.  The  moment  the  escort  i*  in  line,  tin-  color  bi  arer,  preceded  by  the  first  li 
ant,  am!  followed  by  a  sergeant  oi  the  escort,  will  go  to  receive  the  color. 
When  the  color-bearer  shall  com?  out.  followed  by  the  lieutenant  and 
be  will  halt  before  tin'  entrance;  the  esoort  will  present  arms,  and  the  field  music 

will  sound  to  the  I 

:i.    \  :  he  captain  will  cause  the  sound  to  cease,  arms  to  be 

shouldered,  and  then  break  bi  platoon  into,  column  :  tin-  color  I"  arer  n  ■•'.  i  lace  him- 
self between  the  platoon-,  and  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant  will  resume  their  posts. 

10.  The  escort  will  marcb  back  to  the  battalion  to  the  sound  of  music  in  quick  time, 
and  in  the  same  o  ride  on  the  right.     The  march  will 

ducted  thai  when  the  escort  arrives  at  one  hundred  and  n  I  front  ot  tl  ■•  right 

of  th.'  battalion,  th.'  direction  of  th.-  march  w  ill  be  parallel  to  it>  front,  and  when  the 

■    .hiinn  w  il!  ■  tion  to  the 

right  guide  will  direct  himself  mi  the  centre  of  the  battalion. 

/ f>>K<>rs  paid  (o  lite  color. 

1!.    Arrived  at  tic:  distance  of  twenty  paces  from  the  battalion,  the  escort  will  halt, 

ami  tiie  mi cease :   ih  •  colonel  will  [.lac  bimsell  m x  pocee  before  the  centre  of  the 

battalion,  the  color-bearer  will  appioach  the  colonel,  by  the  front,  iu  quick  time; 


*  H  IIOOL   OF   THE   DATTAI.IoN — PARI   I.  15 

wlirn  at  th"  distance  of  ton  paces,  he  will  lialt  :  the  colonel  will  cause  arms  to  be 

8  nt  d  anil  i»  tlu  sounded,  wbicb  b  sing  i  recnti  d.  the  color-bearer  will  take 

his  i  a  •  in  th    front  rank  of  the  color  guard,  and  tbj  battalion,  bj  command,  shoulder 

a  1  In ;-. 

12.  The  escort,  field  music,  and  band,  will   return   in  quick  time  to  their  several 

battle,  marching  l  J  lion. 

13.  The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  colonel's  tent  or  quarters  in  the  above 
order. 

General  Rules  and  Di  hoolof  the  Battalion. 

li.  This  school  has  for  it?  ol  jtruction  of  battalions  singly,  md  I 

ire  them  for  manoeuvres  in  line.     The  harmony 
of  man t  battalions,  can  onl  d  b)  the  use  of  th 

principles),  and   I  ill  colonels  and  actual  oom- 

tlionswill   conform  themselves,  without  addition  or  curtailui 
what  «ill  herein  be  prescril 

15.  When  a  battalion  instructed  in  tlii-  drill  ?bnll  manaeUtTe  in  line,  the  colonel  will 
regulate  its  movements,  ibed  in  the  tlii;  d 

;  |  v . 
10.  The  school  of  the  battalion  will  be  divided  into  five  part?. 
IT.  The  fir*t  will  Bompi  ng  and  closing  ranks,  and  the  execution  of  the 

The  secon''  at  mod"?  of  passing  from  the  order  in  battle,  to  the  order 

imn. 
Is),  Th"  third,  the  march  in  column,  and  the  other  moron 

The  fourth,  th  >.  different  mod  In  column  to  the  order 

n  b*l 

21.  The  fifth  r.  eh  in  line  of  battle,  in  advance  and  in  reti 

the  passage  of  di  dank  :   the  forn  into 

line  of  battle ;  ti  front;  the  column  doubled  »ti  t; 

-t  cavalry  ;  the  rally,  and  rules  for  manceuri  i  ink. 

PART  FIRST. 

■i  ion  of  i 

AiiTir;  b  First. 

■.  ill  command  : 

1 .   / 

■  iajnr  will  place  th  n  th« 

1  lour 

- 


7G  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   I. 

27.  The  file  closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the 

r'-;ir   rank,  glancing  SJM  to  the   right;   the  lieutenant  colonel  will,  from  the  right, 

align  them  on  the  file  closer  of  the  left,  who,  having  placed  himself  accurately  two 

from  the  rear  rank,  will  invert  his  piece,  and  hold  it  up  erect  between  his  eves, 

the  better  to  be  seen  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

2H.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  command  : 

4  Fbont. 
At  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  and  the  left  sergeant,  will  retake 
their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

19.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  closed  by  the  commands  prescribed  for 
the  instructor  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  28. 

Article  Second. 
Manual  of  Anns. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  following  times  and  pauses  to 
be  executed : 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arm*. 

Order  arm:  Shoulder  arm'. 

Support  arm*.  Shoulder  arm*, 

fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arm*. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arm*. 

Unfix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arm*. 

Article  Thiud. 

Loading  at  will,  and  the  Firings. 

31.  The  colonel  will  next  cause  to  be  executed  loading  at  will,  by  the  commands 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  45  ;  the  oflicers  and  sergeants  in  the  ranks 
will  half  face  to  the  right  with  the  men  at  the  eighth  time  of  loading,  and  will  face  to 
the  front  when  the  men  next  to  them  come  to  a  shoulder. 

32.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  tire  by  company,  the  fire  by  wing, 
the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by  file,  and  the  tire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  to  be 
herein  indicated. 

33.  The  fire  hy  company  and  the  fire  by  file  will  always  be  direct ;  the  fire  by  bat- 
talion, the  fire  by  wing,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  may  be  either  direct  or  oblique. 

34.  When  the  fire  oujrht  to  be  oblique,  the  colonel  will  give,  at  every  round,  the 
caution  right  (or  left)  oblique,  between  the  comuads  ready  and  aim. 

So.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alternately  by  the  right  and  left  compa- 
nies of  each  division,  as  if  the  division  were  alone.  The  right  company  will  lire  first ; 
the  captain  of  the  left  will  not  give  his  first  command  till  he  shall  see  one  or  two  pieces 
at  a  ready  in  the  right  company;  the  captain  of  the  latter,  after  the  ftnt  ditCnaM, 
will  obaerre  the  same  rule  in  respect  to  the  left  company ;  and  the  fire  will  thus  be 
continued  alternately. 

36.  The  colonel  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  the  firing  by  wing. 

37.  The  fire  by  file  will  eoinmence  in  all  the  companies  at  one,  and  will  be  executed 
ax  lias  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  tin:  company  No.  .',.'.  and  following.  The  lire 
by  rank  will  be  executed  bv  each  rank  alternately,  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school 
Oi  the  company  No.  58  and  following. 

38.  The  color-guard  will  not  tire,  but  reserve  itself  for  the  defence  of  the  color. 

The  fire  by  company. 

39.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  fire  by  company  to  be  executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  company.     2.  Commence  firing. 

40.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  will  take  the  posi- 
tions indicated  in  the  school  of  the  coirpany  49. 

41.  The  color  and  its  guard  will  step  back  at  the  same  time,  so  as  to  bring  the  front 
rank  of  the  guard  in  a  line  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion.  Thi*  rule  i*  general 
for  all  the  d\fferent  filing*. 

42.  At  the  Becond  command,  the  odd  numbered  companies  will  commence  to  fire; 
their  captains  will  each  give  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — PART  I.  77 

No.  50,  observing  to  precede  the  command  company  by  that  of  first,  third,  fifth,  or 
leveuth,  according  to  the  nambcr  of  each. 

43.  The  captains  of  the  even  numbered  companies  will  give,  in  their  turn,  the  same 
commands,  observing  to  precede  them  by  the  number  of  their  respective  companies. 

44.  In  order  that  the  odd  numbered  companies  may  not  all  fire  at  once,  their  cap- 
tains will  observe,  but  only  for  the  first  discharge,  to  give  the  coruroandyire  one  alter 
another  ;  thus,  the  captain  of  the  third  company  will  not  give  the  commandyirc  until 
he  has  heard  the  fire  of  the  first  company  ;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  will  observe  the 
same  rule  with  respect  to  the  third,  and  tlie  captain  of  the  seventh  the  same  rule  with 
respect  to  the  fifth. 

45.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  to  cease  by  the  sound  to  cease  firing  ;  at  this 
sound,  the  men  will  execute  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  comparer  No.  G3  ; 
at  the  sound,  for  officers  to  take  their  places  after  firing,  the  captains,  covering  ser- 
geants, and  color-guard,  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in  line  of  battle ;  th\$  rule 
»«  general  for  all  the  firing*. 

The  fire  by  wing. 

46.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  this  fire  to  be  executed,  he  will  command : 

1.    Fire  by  icing.      2.    Right  tcing.      3.   Ready.     4.    AlM.      5.    FlRB.      6.    LOAD. 

47.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alternately,  and  he  will  recommence  the 
fire  by  the  commands:  1.  Right  wing  ;  2.  Am;  3.  Fire;  4.  Load.  1.  Left  icing  ;  2. 
Aim  ;  3.  Fias  ;  4.  Load  ;  in  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  35. 

The  fire  by  battalion. 

48.  The  colonel  will  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  last  prescribed, 
substituting  for  the  first  two,  1.  Fire  by  battalion.     2.   Battalion. 

The  fire  by  file. 

49.  To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    Fir*  by  file.      2.  Battalion.      3.   Ready.      4.    Commence  firing. 

50.  At  the  fourth  command,  th<_>  fire  will  commence  on  the  right  of  each  company, 
as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  57.  The  colonel  may,  if  he  thinks 
proper,  cause  the  fire  to  commence  on  the  right  of  each  platoon. 

The  fire  by  rank. 

61.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  coloDel  will  command  : 
1 .  Fire  by  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Keadv.      4.  Rear  rank.     5.  AlM.     6.  Fins.     7.  Load. 

52.  This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  been  explained  in  the  school  of  the  company 
No.  if,  in  following  the  progression  prescribed  for  the  two  ranks  which  should  fire 
alternately. 

T<>  firr  hy  the  rear  rank. 

53.  When  the  coloocl  shall  wish  the  battalion  to  fire  to  the  rear,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Face  by  the.  rear  rank.      2.    Battalion.      3.    About — Fac«. 

'  *  At  the  first  command,  the  tB|  tain*,  mvsriag  ^f-rpoants,  and  file  rlo»<r»  will  ex- 
ecute what  has  been  pres<-rib<-d  in  th«'  school  of  the  roropanj-  ^  ••■arer 
will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  and  for  this  purpose,  the  aorporal  of  hia  file  will  st.-; 
fore  the,  eorpon]  B<xt  on  his  right  to  let  the  color  I  and  will  then  take  his 
place  in  the  front  rank  ;  the  li<  ot'iirt  col  on  i  1.  adjutant,  ma;  ■■  .and 
the  mu'ir  will  [.laf-  Ihenadi                   the  front  rank,  and  fec> 

site  hi*  place  in  the  line  of  battle,  the    i**l    lw'     passing    aro;.  ,    ,t,  and   the 

others  around  the  loft  of  the  halts. 

At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  faceaboi;'  i  ni  and  corering 

sergeants  observing  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  70. 

The  battalion  faring  thus  bv  th>  rear  rank,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  txecnu- 
the  different  fires  by  the  same  commands  as  H  -d  by  the  front  rank. 

57.  The  right  and  left  wings  wi.i  retain  the  same  designation!,  although  faced  about ; 
the  companies  also  will  preserve  their  former  designations,  as  firtt,  »»*ond,  th*rd,  dct. 


7S  ::00L  of  Tin:  BATTALION— PART  t. 

•"  each  company,  now  bcoon 

:  ank  will  commence  by  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear  rank. 
nomination. 
Cfi.  "lnrd  will,    at   th"   first  com:. 

Vont 
■ 

I,  aftor  firii 
.  w  ill  command  : 

1.   !'■•■■.   '"'  the  front  rank.     2    Battalion, 

■  \<.  tlir  battalion  will  return  t'>  it-  m  by  the  ■ 

. 

war.  the  colonel  will  give  it  tli»  prefar- 

lit  to 
:t  with  t!i  ible  r 

When  the  colonel  mar  wish  I  taxation  to  .without 

breal  ks,  be  will  execute  whai  \-.z-  been  prescribed  in  tl  F  the 

9  and  40. 

ill  bring  thi 
and  tfa  ;i  command: 
l.  .-  '•  )•« ii /.•«.    :■. 

CC.  The  colonel  wishing  the  men  to  return  lo  the  ranks,  will  cauie  attention  to  be 
at  which  the  battalion  will  re-forrt  behind  the  stacks  ol  arms.     The  Bound 
finished,  the  colonel  al  ■  n  ill  command  : 

Batta 
67.    At  this  command,  tlie  tnen  will  fix  their  attention,  ami  remain  immovable. 
TAUT  SECOND. 

1  modes  of  pa  sing  from  the   order  in   battle  to  the 
ord  r  in  column. 

To  break  to  (k  or  the  left  into  column. 

ttle  will  habitually  break  into  column  b;  :   they  niaj  also 

break  by  division  or  1  y  platoon. 

it  i-  here  Ruppoa  id  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  break  by  company  to  the  rl 
he  « ill  command  : 

1.    By  company,  right*trhed.     1.  Mail  n   (or   double   quid; — Maucii.) 

70,  each  captain  « il!  place  himself  rapidly  before  the  centre 
of  hu                             ution  it  that  it  has  to  wheel  tothe  right;  each  covering 

'aiii  in  the  front  rntik. 

71,  At  the  command  man':,  each  conrpanj  will  break  to  the  right, 

princl  ribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  17:S;    each  captain  will  i 

form  himself  to  what  hiefs  of  platoon ;  the  left  guide,  s 

..ill  place  himself  on  the  lefl  of  the  fronl  rank  to  coi  arch- 

ing flank,  and  w  hen  he  slmll  have  ap|  roached  n<  ar  to  the  perpendicular,  the  captain 
v.  ill  command  :     I.  S* 

72,  At  the  si  cond  command,  which  will  l>c  given  al  the  instant  the  left  guide  shall 

tance  of  three  paces  from  the  perpendicular,  the  company  will  hall 

A  place  hia  Icfl  arm  lightly  the  captain, 

i  will  establish  him  on  the  alignment  ol  the  man  who  has  faced  to  the  right  :  the 

•reeant  will  place  himself  correctly  on  tho  al  '  that 

man;  whii  'uted,  the  eaptainwill  align  bis  company  by  the  left,  command 

.  and  place  hims  It'  two  paces  before  it?  ci 

i  having  commanded   Prokt,  tlio  guides,  although  pome  of  them 

•iot  be  in  the  direction  of  the  preceding  guides,  will  stand  hist,  in  order  that  the 

tny  that  has  wheeled  too  much  or  too  Little  way  not  be  propagated; 


SCnoOL   OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I.  ?9 

:i  will  readily  conic  into  it  when  tlic  oolamn  i    pat  ,'n 
march. 

7).  A  btittallon  In  line  of  battle  «'i!l  break  ii.to  column  by  company  to  tbi 
according  •  and   by   invi  it  of 

each  company  will  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and  t!,"  left  guide  will  plai  ;  hii 
on  the  left  of  th.>  fronl  rank  a  t  th  •  company  !■ 

7'..  When  the  battali  Uion  will  be  substitu- 

ted in  the  commands   l"t    t'i  any;  tip'  ebief  of  each  division   (thesenior 

in    will  cohl  i f  to  w hat  pan v.  and 

Trill  place  himself  two  .  the  junior  captain,  if 

ri"t  already  there,  will  place  himself  in  (lie  interval 

•  he  left  con 
rank.  .-lit  company   Will  be  the  right  guide,  and  th 

guide  of  the  left  company,  tl  of  the  dn 

When  the  battalion  shall  break  by  platoon  to  thr  right  or  to  th"  left,  each  first 
lieutenant  will  pass  around  the  lefl  of  bis  oompat 

;   the  one  ol  I 
impany,  will  step,  for  th  in  rear  ol  the  right  til 

77.  When  the  battal  v  division  tu  tli"  right,  and  there  is  an 

pany,  the  captain  of  this  company  .  lumn,  will 

the  left,  lnlt  it  at  company  distance  from  the  preceding  division, 
place  his  left  guide  on  thr  direction  of  the  columto,  am)  th<  n  align  h 
left.     When  the  line  breaks  bv  division  to  the  left,  the  odd  company  will  i 
ito  captain,  having  win  >  column,  will  caus<  i  the  right,  halt  it 

at  (li-.  division  next  in  the 

.  and  align  I 

will  I'lar^ 

I  both  six  paces  from  the  flat 

Ion  1.  and  I 

rbsjooloacl  will  the  inntrtu  battalion;  hut  in 

d  ol  many  battalions,  he  will  bituallv  on  1 

log  Sank  fifteen  or  twenty  paoos  from  ti  nrith  the  cei 
battalion. 

BO  i  shall  wi-l    -  ward  with  it,  he 

w  ill  caution  the  battal 

1.  By  company   right  irhcd.     2.  v  rrn.) 

61.    '  •ptairi''  of  •  ill  execute  what  is  pre- 

balt, 

all   arrive  D 

1         > 

ofelb 

■ 


80  SCHOOL   OF   THK   BATTALION — PART   I. 

cither  flank,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break  bv  company  to  the  right  or  left,  aa  haj 
just  be*  n  prescribed;  but  when  the  lino  breaks  to  the  right,  in  order  to  march 
towards  the  left,  Of  the  rcTWSJSk  Um  colonel  will  command:  Break  to  the  right  to 
march  to  thr  left,  or  break  tn  the  left  to  march  to  the  right,  before  giving  the  command, 
by  company,  right  (or  left)  tcheel.  Ai  goon  as.  the  battalion  is  broken,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  place  a  marker  abreast  with  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  company 
The  instant  the  column  is  put  in  motion,  this  company  will  wheel  to  the  left  (or  right) 
march  ton  pace*  to  the  front  without  changing  tho  guide,  and  wheel  again  to  tho  left 
(or  right. )  The  second  wheel  being  completed,  the  captain  will  immediately  com- 
mand guide  Uft  (or  right.)  The  guide  of  this  company  will  march  in  a  direction 
parallel  to  the  guides  of  the  column.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  be  careful  to  place  a 
second  marker  at  the  point  where  the  first  company  is  to  change  direction  the  second 
time. 

Article  Second. 

To  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  into  column,   and  to 
advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies. 

£7.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the  battalion  to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the 
right,  into  column  by  company,  he  will  command  : 

1.   By  the  right  of  companiti  to  the   rear  into  column.     2.   Battalion  right — Fach.     3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

88.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his 
company,  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeants  will  step  into 
the  front  rank. 

vr>.  At  the  second  command,  tho  battalion  will  face  to  the  right ;  each  captain  will 
hasten  to  the  right  of  his  company,  and  break  two  files  to  the  rear  ;  the  first  tile  will 
break  the  whole  depth  of  the  two  ranks  ;  the  second  file  less  ;  which  being  executed, 
the  captain  will  place  himself  so  that  his  breast  may  touch  lightly  the  left  arm  of  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  last  file  in  the  company  next  on  the  right  of  his  own.  The 
captain  of  the  right  company  will  place  himself  as  if  there  were  a  company  on  his 
right,  and  will  align  himself  on  the  other  captains.  The  covering  sergeant  of  each 
company  will  breuK  to  the  rear  with  the  right  tiles,  and  place  himself  before  the  front 
rank  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to  ihc  right ; 
the  covering  sergeant,  placed  before  this  file,  will  conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the 
roar.  The  other'riles  will  come  successively  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot.  The  captains 
will  stand  fast,  lee  their  companies  tile  past,  and  at  the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have 
wheeled,  each  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt.    3.  Front.     I.  Left—  Dress. 

91.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front,  its  left  guide  will  place  himself 
so  that  his  left  arm  may  touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

it.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  company  will  align  itself  on  its  left  guide,  the  cap- 
tain so  directing  it,  that  the  new  alignment  may  be  perpendicular  to  that  which  the 
company  had  occupied  in  line  of  battle,  and,  the  better  to  judge  this,  he  will  step 
back  two  paces  from  the  flank. 

9S.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command  :  Froht,  and  take  hit 
place  before  its  centre. 

94.  The  battalion  marching  in  lino  of  battle,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  break 
into  column  by  company,  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.   By  the  right  of  companie*  to  the  rear  into  column.     2.   Battalion,  by  th*  right  flank. 
3.   March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

95.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  step  briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
his  company,  and  caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  jlank. 

96.  At  the  command  march,  tho  battalion  will  face  to  the  right ;  each  captain  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  company  and  cause  it  to  break  to  the  right ;  the  first 
file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  the  covering  sergeant  placed  in 
front  of  this  file  will  conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear  ;  the  other  files  will  wheel 
successively  at  the  same  place  as  the  first.  The  captains  will  see  their  companies  file 
past  them;  when  the  last  files  have  wheeled,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   II.  81 

.1.    Battalion,  ly  the  left  flank—  March.     4.    (,'nirie  left. 

f»T.  At  the  command  mareh,  the  companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and  march  in  coin  inn 
in  the  new  direction.  The  captain*  will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centre-  of 
their  respective  companies.  At  the  fourth  Command,  the  guides  will  conform  to  the 
principle*  of  the  march  in  column  ;  the  leading  one  "ill  move  in  the  direction  indica- 
ted to  him  bv  the  lieutenant  colonel.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the 
left. 

B&  To  break  to  the  rear  by  th"  left,  the  colon  1  will  give  the  name  commands  as  in 
the  Ml  of  breaking  to  the  rear  bv  the  right,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  that 
of  ri;/ht.  • 

99.  The  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principle*.  Each  captain 
will  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company,  cause  the  first  two  files  to  break  t«  the  rear, 
and  then  place  his  breast  against  the  right  file  of  the  company  next  on  the  left  of  his 
own.  in  the  manner  prescribed  above. 

M0l  As  soon  as  the  two  files  break  to  the  rear,  the  left  guide  of  each  companj  will 
place  liimself  before  the  front  rank  man  of  the  headmost  file,  to  conduct  him. 

101.  The  instant  the  companies  fac»  to  the  front,  the  right  guide  of  each  will  place 
himself  80  that  his  right  arm  may  lightly  touch  the  breast  or  his  captain. 

102.  The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  in 
like  manner  ;  in  this  case,  the  indication  divition*  will  be  substituted,  in  the  first 
command,  for  that  of  comjkmJM  J  the  chiefs  of  division  will  conform  themsrlveg  to 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  company.  The  jurnior  captain  in  each  division 
will  place  himself,  v;hcn  the  division  faces  to  a  flank,  bv  the  side  of  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company,  who  steps  into  the  front  rank. 

103.  If  there  be  an  odd  number  of  companies,  and  the  battalion  breaks  by  division 
to  the  rear,  whether  bv  the  right  or  left,  the  captain  of  the  left  company  wifl  confusyn 
to  what  is  prescribed  N'o.  77. 

104.  This  manner  of  breaking  info  column  being  at  once  the  most  prompt  and  reg- 
ular, will  be  preferred  on  actual  service,  unless  there  be  some  particular  reason  for 
breaking  to  the  front. 

105.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line  and  at  a  halt,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance 
■ire  by  the  right  of  companies,  he  will  command  : 

1.     2?Jf  thr  right  of  companies  to    the  front    (or  rear.  I      2.    Jlnt'rilion,  right — Face.      3. 

ILtBCfl    or  double  quirk    Mil  cm.)     4.   Guide  right  (left)  or  (otntrt 
M41   At  the  firft  command,  each  captain  will  move  rapidly  two  paces  in  front  of  the 
centre  oi  his  company,  and  caution  it   to  face  to   the   light;   the  covering  sergeants 
will  replace  the  captains  in  the  front  rank. 

1<i7.   At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will   faceHo  the  right,  and  each  captain 
moving  quickly   to  the  right  of  his   company,  will    cause   files    to   break  to  the  I 
■  ing  to  the  principles  indicated  Hi 
I  mand  rtxirrh,  tM  b  captain  placing  himself  on  the  left  of  his  leading 

guide,  will  Qoadact  hi"  ooeajpanj  p<  rpendiculartjr  to  the  original  line.     At  the  fourth 
command,  the  guide  of  cacti  company  will  dre.ss  to  the  right.  I«f(,  0r  c  ntre,  according 
indication  given,  taking  care  to  prei  |  bii  di-t.ance. 

If  the  colonel  should    with  to  wove  to  the  front,  or   rear,  by    the  left  of   com 
panics,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  means  and  the  same  commands,  sub- 
stituting I'ft  for  rijkt. 

110.  If  i  -  lie  in  march,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advan" 

Bjfal  .  r  will  command  : 

I.  Mi  "    •  * 

111.  Which  wi  rding  to  the  principles  and  mean*  ]  i 

H  following,  and  KtC and  following.     At  the  ftretceauBuad 
guides  will  take  their  pl»  mnn. 

112.  If  the  colonel  should  wi«h  to  «dv»  -.    the 
nent  will  be  executed  bf  the  same  n»'                      vno  commands,  pahstituting 

tfejc, 

111,  If  the*  battalion  be  advancing  br  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  and  the  colonW 
should  wish  to  form  line  to  the  fr^at,  be  will  command  : 


82  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   II. 

1.    By  companie*  into  lint.      2.    MaK'H    |  or  dnuhle  quick — MARCO).      3.    Guide  centrt. 

1141  At  t lie  command  marek, briskly  repeated  bvthe  captains,  each  company  will 
be  formed  into  line,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  154. 

11B.  At  tlie  third  command,  the  color  and  general  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  their 
plaOW  in  linr,  as  will  he  hereinafter  praam  Ibed  No.  405. 

116.  If  the  battalion  be  retiring  by  the  right  <>r  left  of  companies,  and  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  form  line  facing  the  enemy,  be  "ill  Bret  canae  the  companies  ta 

about  while  marching,  and  immediately  form  in  line  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed Nos.  113  and  following. 

Aktice  Tuibd. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column. 

117.  This  movement  may  be  executed  by  company  or  bv  division,  on  the  right  or 
left  subdivision,  or  on  any  other  subdivision,  right  or  left  in  front. 

118.  The  examples  in  this  school  will  suppose  the  presence  of  four  divisions,  with 
directions  for  an  odd  company  ;  but  what  will  be  prescribed  for  four,  will  serve 
equally  for  two,  three  or  live  divisions. 

[19,  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  by  division  in  rear  of  tho  Grst,  the 
colonel  will  commaud: 

1.    Cloie  column,  by  dirinion.      2.    On  the  firtt  division,   right  in  front.     3.   Battalion, 
rxght — Fack.     4.  Mahcii  (or  double  uuick—  M akch). 

120.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  chiefl  of  division  will  place  themselves  beforo 
the  centre!"  of  their  divisions;  the  chief  of  the  Brat  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast;  the 
chiefs  of  the  three  others  will  remind  them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
the  covering  sergeant  of  the  right  company  of  each  division  will  replace  bis  captain  in 
the  front  rank,  as  soon  as  the  latter  steps  out. 

121.  At  the  third  command,  the  last  three  divisions  will  face  to  the  right;  the 
chief  of  each  division  will  hasten  to  it >  right,  and  cause  filet  to  be  broken  to  the  rear, 
as  indicated  No.89;  the  right  guide  will  break  at  the  same  time,  and  place  himself  he- 
fore  the  front  rank  man  of  the  Orel  file,  to  conduct  him,  and  each  chief  of  division  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  this  guide. 

123,  The  moment  these  divisions  face  to  the  right,  thejunior  captain  in  each  will 

Elaee  himself  on  the  left  of  the  covering  sergeant  01    the  hit  company,  who  will  place 
imselfin  the  front  rank.     T  hi*  rule  it  general  for  mU  tlepfogamiHaji  dieiiiom. 

123.  At  the  command  Uarek,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  add,  guide  lift;  at 
this,  its  left  guide  will  place  himself  OD  its  left,  as  BOOB  M  the  movement  uf  the  second 
division  may  permit,  and  the  tile  closers  will  advance  one). ace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

124.  All  the  other  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its  chief,  will  step  off  together,  to 
take  their  placet  in  the  column  :  the  second  will  gain,  in  wheeling  l>y  file  to  the  rear, 

the  space  of  six  paces,  which  ought  to  separate  its  glide  from  the  guide  of  the  first 
division,  and  so  direct  its  march  a*  to  enter  the  column  on  a  line  parallel  to  this  divi- 
sion; the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  towards,  but  a 
little  in  rear  of.  the  points  at  w  liich  they  ought,  respectively,  to  enter  the  column  ;  at 
six  paces  from  the  hit  Hank  of  the  column,  the  head  of  each  of  there  divisions  will  in- 
cline a  little  to  the  left,  in  order  to  enter  the  column  ns  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  second,  taking  care  also  to  leave  thedistajicc  of  six  paces  between  its  guide  ami  the 

guide  of  the  prooeding  dii  urion.  At  the  moment  the  divisions  put  themselves  in  march 
to  enter  the  column,  the  file  closers  ol  each  will  incline  to  the  left,  so  as  to  bring  thenv- 
m  Ives  to  the  diatau fa  pace  from  the  rear  rank. 

125.  Bach  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will  conduct  his  division  till  he  shall  be  up 
with  the  guide  (>r  the  directing  one;  the  chief  will  then  himself  halt,  see  his  division 
file  put,  and  halt  it  the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have  passed,  commanding:  1.  Apai 
diriimn;    '_'.   Hai.t;   3.    Fkont;   4.    Left — Dukss. 

136.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt  :  the  left  guide  will  place  himself 
promptly  on  the  direction,  six  paces  from  the  guide  which  precedes  him,  in  order  that( 
the  column   being  formed,   the  divisions  may  be  separated  the  distance  of  four  paces. 

127.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  face  to  the  front  ;  at  the  fourth,  it  wij 
be  aligned  by  its  chief,  who  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  di 
rect  the  alignment  so  that  his  division  may  be  parallel  to  that  which  precedes— which 
being  done,  he  will  command,  Fkont  and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  divi- 
sion. 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   BATTALION — PART  II.  83 

128.  If  any  division,  a  tor  the  command /ronf.  he  not  at  its  proper  distance,  and  tliis 
can  only  happen  through  the  negligence  of  its  chief,  inch  division  will  remain  in  its 
place,  in  order  that  the  fault  may  not  be  propagated. 

12f>.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  execution  of  the  movement,  and  cause  the  pre- 
scribed principles  to  be  observed. 

1 30.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  in  succession  in  rear  of  the  left  guides, 
will  a-.-ure  thein  on  the  direction  as  they  arrive,  and  then  more  to  his  place  outside  of 
the leR  Hank  of  the  column  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  lirst  division.  In  as- 
suring the  guides  on  the  direction,  he  will  be  a  mere  observer,  unless  one  or  more 
should  fail  to  cover  exactly  the  guide  or  guides  already  established.  Thit  rule  ii 
general, 

131.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  left  of  the  fourth  divi- 
sion, and  aftcrwanls  take  his  position  nut.-ide  of  the  left  Hank  of  the  column,  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with,  this  division. 

132.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  front  of  the  first  division,  the  colonel  will  give  the 
same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  Uft  for  that  of  right  in  front. 

133.  At  the  second  and  third  commands,  the  chiefs  of  division  and  the  junior  cap- 
tains will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  No?.  120,  121,  122  ;  but  the  chiefs 
of  the  last  three  divisions,  instead  of  causing  the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear, 
will  cause  them  to  break  to  the  front. 

13*.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  add  :    Qwidt  right  : 

136.  The  three  other  divisions  will  step  off  together  to  take  their  places  in  the 
column  in  front  of  the  directing  division  ;  each  will  direct  it-elf  .-is  prescribed.  No. 
124.  and  will  enter  in  such  manner  that,  wlu  ii  halted,  its  guide  may  (ind  himself  six 

from  the  guide  of  the  division  next  previously  established  in  the  column. 
130.   Each  chief  of  these  divi-ions  will  conduct  his  division,  till  his  right  guide  shall 
be  nearly  up  with  the  guide  of  the  directing  one;   he  will  then  halt  his  division,  and 

it  to  face  to  the  front  ;   at  the    in-tant    it    halls.it-    ri^'ht   guide  Will   face  to  the 
rear,  place  himself  six  paces  from  the  preceding  guide,  and  col  tlv— whieh 

being  done,  the  diief  will  alien  his  division  by  the  right. 

137.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  in  front  of  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division, 
will  assure  the  guides  on  the  direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  and  then  move 
outside  of  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  to  a  point  six  paces  "from,  and  abre»«t  with, 
the  fourth  division,  now  in  front. 

L3&  The  major  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  131,  and  then  move 
outside  of  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  firtt 
division,  now  in  the  rear. 

1  J:-.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Quid**,  nfiout — Face. 

140.  At  this,  the  guide.,  who  are  faced  to  the  rear,  will  face  to  the  front. 

HI.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  rear,  or  in  front  of  the  fourth  division,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.    Clo't ■column  bw  riiritinn.       2.    On    th'    fnurlh    iliniiin,    Uit    for    riqht  ■    M  frnnt.       S, 
lint:"  '  |  4.    Si  u:<  )l      or  Honl.i. 

142.  These  rnovi  ments  w  ill  be  executed  according  to  the  principli  which 

on  which  tha  battalion  ploys  will 

last;    the  Instant  the  inurement  Commence*,  its  chief   will  OOamaad,  guide  right 

(or  h 

143.  The  foregr.ine  '  ..brace  all   the    pi  thus,  when   I 
shall  wi«h  to  ploi  the  battalion  on  an  interior  division,  lo  w  ill 

''.       3.    lini 

-■    '    • 

144.  The  in'tani  tl  eommenco  will 
command,  gu\d'    ■                   '  i.) 

14V     The  divisionr  which,  in  the  ordsr  in  bat 1 1  ling 

D,  will  fac<   • 

14'.    If  tSe  right 
ing  (livi«ion,  and  the  left  in  ,t»  •  i   ,<\  IB 

eJlthe  foregoing  sepposilion-  , 


84  BCB001  OF  THE   BATTALION — PART   IH. 

in  wheeling  by  file  to  the  front  or  rear,  will  pain  the  space  of  six  paces,  which  ought 
;it«-  their  guides  from  the  guide  of  the  directing  division. 

147.  In  .-ill  the  ploymenta  on  an  interior  division,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure 
the  positions  of  the  guide."  in  front,  and  the  major  those  in  the  rear  of  the  directing 
division. 

14--.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a  halt,  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  combining  the  two  gaits  of  quick  and  double  quick  time,  and  always  in  rear 
of  one  of  the  flank  divisions. 

149.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploj  it  in  rear  of  the  tir.-t  division,  the  colonel 
will  command  : 

1.  Close  column  by  dixiiion.      2.  On  the  fir 't  division.      3.  Battalion — by  the  right  flank. 
41.  Double  guide —  Maiicii. 

150.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division  will  move  rapidly  before  the 
oentrc  of  his  division  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 

151.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  it  to  coetinuc  to  march  to  the  front, 
and  he  will  command  :  Quick  march. 

152.  At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  command  ;  Guide  left. 
At  this,  the  left  guide  will  move  to  the  left  flank  of  the  division  and  direct  himself  on 
the  point  indicated. 

153.  The  three  other  divisions  will  face  to  the  right  and  move  off  in  double  quick 
time,  breaking  to  the  rij^lit  to  take  their  places  in  column  ;  each  chief  of  division  \\  ill 
move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  division  in  order  to  conduct  it.  The  Glee  will  be 
careful  te  preserve  their  distances,  and  to  march  with  a  uniform  and  decided  step. 
The  color-bearer  and  general  guides  will  retake  their  places  in  the  ranks. 

154.  The  second  division  will  immediately  enter  the  column,  marching  parallel  to 
the  Brat  division  ;  its  chief  will  allow  it  to  lile  past  him,  ind  when  the  last  tile  u  abreast 
of  him,  will  command  :  1.  Second  dirition.  by  the  left  flank — March.  2.  Guide  left, 
and  place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division. 

156.  At  the  command  march,  the  division  will  face  to  the  left  :  at  the  second  com- 
mand, the  left  guide  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  left  guide  of  the  Brat  division  ;  the 
men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  When  the  second  division  has  closed  to 
its  proper  distance,  its  chief  will  command:  Quick  time — March.  This  division  will 
then  change  its  step  to  quick  time. 

150.  The  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  execute  their  movements  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  taking  care  to  gain  as  much  ground  as  possible  towards 
the  head  of  the  column. 

157.  If  the  battalion  had  been  previously  inarching  in  line  at  double  quick  time, 
when  the  fourth  division  shall  have  gained  its  distance,  the  colonel  will  command: 
Jloulile  quick —  Maiuii. 

158.  In  this  movement,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  move  rapidly  to  the  side  of  the 
leading  guide,  give  him  a  point  of  direction,  and  then  follow  the  movements  of  tin- 
first  division.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  Left  of  the  lourth 
division. 

Remarks  on  ploying  the  battalion  into  column. 

159.  The  battalion  may  be  ployed  into  column  at  full,  or  half  distance,  on  the  same 
principles,  and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  for  the  lirst  command  :  Column  at 
full   (or  half)  dixtance  by  dirieion. 

100.  In  the  ployments  and  movements  in  column,  when  the  subdivisions  execute  the 
movements  successively,  such  as — to  tako  or  olose  distances,  to  change  direction  by 
the  flank  of  subdivisions,  each  chief  of  subdivision  will  cause  his  men  to  support  arm* 
after  having  aligned  it  and  commanded,  Front. 

PART  THIRD. 
AuTici.i  First. 

To  inarch  in  column  at  full  distance. 

161.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the  column  in  march,  he  will  indicate  to 
the  leading  guide  two  distinct  object*  in  front,  on  the  line  which  the  guide  ought  to 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   III.  85 

follow.  This  guide  will  immediately  put  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  that  line,  take 
the  more  distant  object  as  the  point  of  direction,  and  the  nearer  one  as  the  intermediate 
point. 

162.  If  only  a  single  prominent  object  present  itself  in  the  direction  the  guide  has 
to  follow,  he  will  face  to  it  as  before,  and  immediately  endeavor  to  catch  on  the  ground 
some  interniediate  point,  by  which  to  give  steadiness  to  his  march  on  the  point  of 
direction. 

188.  There  being  no  prominent  object  to  serve  as  the  point  of  direction,  the  colonel 
will  dispatch  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  adjutant  to  place  himself  forty  paces  in  advance, 
facing  the  column,  and  by  a  sign  of  the  sword  establish  him  on  the  direction  he  may 
will  to  giv.  to  the  li  adins  gaidi  ;  that  officer  being  thus  placed,  this  guide  will  take 
him  as  the  point  of  dir  ■•<  Bon,  conforming  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  company,  > 

164.    1  ■-Minns  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  I   ■lumn/orttnrd.     2.  Quid*  left  (or  right.)     3.  March   (or  doubU  quick — sfaBCH. ) 

166.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  the 
column  will  pat  itself  in  inarch,  conforming  to  what  u  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
company  No.  200  and  following. 

.  The  hading  guide  may  always  maintain  himself  correctly  on  the  direction  by 
k'  i  ping  steadily  in  view  the  {wo  points  indicated  to  him,  or  chosen  by  himself;  if  these 
points  have  a  certain  elevation,  he  may  be  assured  he  is  on  the  true  directum,  when 
the  nearer  masks  the  more  distant  point. 

lf.7.  The  following  guides  will  preserve  with  exactness  both  step  and  distance ;  each 
will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  him,  without  occupy- 
ing himself  with  the  general  direction. 

1(8.  The  lietrnant  colonel  will  hold  himself,  habitually,  abreast  with  the  leading 
guide,  to  see  thai  be  docs  not  de\iate  from  the  direction,  and  will  observe,  also,  that 
the  next  guide  inarches  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  first. 

189.  The  major  will  generally  be  abreast  w  uh  the  last  subdivision  ;  he  wifl  see  that 
eaeh  guide  marches  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  preceding  ;  if  c  itbi  r 
deviate  from  the  direction,  the  major  will  promptly  rectify  the  error,  and  prevent  its 
bi  ing  propagated  :   but  he  need  not  interfere,  in  this  way,  unless  the  deviation  has  be- 

*  ble,  or  material. 

170.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel  will  frequently  cause  the  about  to  be 
d  while  marchinf  Sect,  he  will  command: 

1.   Battalion,  right  about.     2.  M.uuii.     3.    Owidt  right. 

171.  At  the  s'-ennd  command,  the  companies  will  face  to  the  right  about,  and  the 
in  will  then  march  forward  in  an  opposite  direction ;  the  chiefs  ol  modi' 

will  remain  behind  the  front  rank,  the  file   closers  in  front  of  the  rear   rank,  and  the 
'will   place  themselves  in  the  same  rank.     The  lieutenant  colonel  will  remain 
'ion,  now  in   rear:   the  major  will  give  a  point  of  direction  to 
thl    U  ,i  lii  |  guide,  and  march  abreast  of  bin. 

172.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  habitually  on  the  directing  flank  ;  he  will  |{  I  k 
to  the  step  and  to  the  distance*,  and  •'  e  that  all  the  pi  LD<  i]  '  <-d  for  the  march 
in  DOtomn,  ucboi                      pany,  are 

ina,  which  tl  si  ought  to  hare  rendered  familiar, 

will  give  sufficient  exactness  I  also  enable  it  to  form 

rJU  right,  or  un  th:  left,  iLto  line  of  battle,  and 

■ 

174.  I',  ut  when  ■  column,  arriving  in  front,  or  in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  or,  rather, 

*n  one  of  the  r\ \  i  ibat  line,  bai  to  prolong  itself  on  it.  it.  •  in  to 

■  ihf  right  into  line  of  battle,  then,  a'  ii  .  nmn 

■  ug  U om   it,  othei  II  be 

rnlumn  ■  ,  battle,  I  •/  it 

<>n  lliix  I 

■  i 

■ 
will  • 


86  m  IIOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   III. 

the  column  ought  to  cro»«  it,  and  another  marker  to  Indicate  the  point  where  the  first 
subdivision  should  commence  to  wheel;  he  will  be  eo  placed  tut  when  the  wheel  li 
executed  the  left  guide  will  find  himself  four  paces  within  the  line  of  bottle.  The 
chief  of  ill  ibdivision,  when  the  1 1  sd  of  the  colamn  shall  have  arrived  near 

the  (too,  will  take  thr>  guide  to  the  right!  and  thi>  guide  will  immediately  direct  him- 
self oa  the  second  marker,     Oa  arriving  abreast  of  him.  this  subdivision  will  be 
wheeled  to  the  left,  end  whoa  the  whool  i-  completed,  the  fjuide  will  he  changed  • 
to  the  left  :   tin-  guide  will  then  march  parallel   to  the  line  «f  battle  by  the  moans  to 
\n-  hereinafter  indicated. 

17fi.  The  instant  the  Brat  subdivision  wheels,  the  right  general  guide,  who,  by  a 
eautiou  from  the  lieutenant  colonel,  will  before  ha\.'  placed  himself  on  the  line  of 

battle  at  the  point  when  the  column  crooBOl  it,  and  who  will  have  faced  to  the  two 
points  of  direction  in  his  front,  indicated  by  the  colonel,  will  march  forward  correcti- 
on the  prolongation  of  those  points. 

177.  The  color-bearer  will  place  himself  in  like  manner  on  the  line  of  battle  ;  and> 
at  the  Instant  the  color  subdivision  wheels,  In-  will  prolong  his  march  on  that  line- 
abreast  with  this  sabdirlsion,  taking  oare  to  carry  the  oolor-lanoe  before  the  contra 

of  hi.«  person,  and  to  maintain  himself  exaotlj  in  the  direction  of  the  general  guide 
who  precedes  him,  and  the  point  of  direction  in  front  which  will  have  been  indicated 
to  him. 

178.  Finally,  the  left  general  guide  will  place  himself  in  the  same  manner  on  the 
line  of  battle ;  and,  at  the  Instant  the  last  subdivision  of  the  battalion  wheels,  he  will 

march  correctly  in  the  direction  of  the  color-hearer,  and  the  other  general  guide, 

179.  The  guide  of  the  first  subdivision  will  march  steadily  abreast  with  the  right 
general  guide,  and  about  four  paces  to  his  right  :  each  of  the  guides  of  the  following 
subdivisions  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  him,  as 

:  [bed,  Ho.  I'm. 

180.  The  colonel,  placed  outside  of  the  general  guides,  will  see  that  the  column 
marches  nearly  parallel  to,  and  about  four  paces  within  these  guides. 

181.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  look   to  the  direction  of  the  general 

f guides,  and  to  this  end.  place  themselves  sometimes  in  rear  of  the  color-bearer,  or  the 
eft  general  guide. 

182.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battalions,  the  general  guides  of  each 
will  successively  place  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle  to  prolong  their  march  on  this 
line,  as   the  leading   subdivision,  that  of  the   color,  and  the  one   in    the   rear  of   their 

battalion,  shall  wheel  into  the  new  direction  ;  these  guides  will  conform  themselves 
respectively,  as  will  also  th.'  colonel,  Lieutenant  colonel,  and  major,  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed above  for  tlm-e  of  the  leading  battalion. 

183.  [a  the  oase  of  ..several  battalions,  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  each  will  maintain 
steadily  the  guide  of  his  leading  subdivision  about  four  paces  within  the  line  of  gene- 
ral guide?,  even  should  the  last  subdivisions  of  the  battalion  immediately  preceding 
deviate  from  the  parallelism,  in  order  that  the  false  direction  of  one  battalion  may 
not  influence  that  of  the  battalions  which  follow. 

The  column  arriving  behind  the  line  of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on 

this  line. 

it.  [f  the  colamn,  right  Id  front,  arrive  behind  the  line  of  battle,  as  it  ought  to 

find  its.il    lour  pacet  within  this  line,  after  having  ohanged  direction,  the  colonel  will 

cause  a  marker  to  be  placed  .it  the  point  where,  according  to  that  condition,  the  first 
subdivision  ought  to  commenoe  wheeling.  Another  marker  will  be  established  on  the 
line  of  battle,  to  Indicate  the  point  at  which  thn  general  guides  ought,  in  succession, 
to  begin  to  prolong  themselves  on  that  line  ;  be  n  ill  be  so  placed  that  each  subdivision, 

having  finished  its  wheel,  may  find  Itself  nearly  in  a  line  with  this  marker. 

Is"'.  At  the  Instant  the  liist  subdivision,  niter  hating  wheeled  to  the  right,  begins 
to  prolong  itself,  parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle,  the  leading  general  guide,  placed  in 
advance  on  that  line,  will  direct  himself  on  the  two  points  taken  in  bis  front;  tho 
color  be. u  ,-r  and  the  other  general  guide  will  successively  plaoe  themselves  on  the 
came  Line  the  instant  that  their  respective  subdivision  shall  have  finished  their  wheel. 

189,  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battalions,  the  general  guides  of  the 

following  battalion-  will  successively  execute  what  has  ju-t  been  prescribed  for  those 
of  the  leading  battalion,  and  the  whole  «  ill  conform  themselves,  at  well  as  the  guides 
of  subdivisions,  and  the  held  officers  of  the  several  battalions,  to  what  is  indicated, 
above,  for  a  column  arriving  in  front  of  a  line  of  battle. 


SCHOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION — PART   HI.  87 

187.  In  a  column,  lift  in  front,  arriving  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle, 
these  movements  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  column  arriving  <>n  the  right  or  the  left  of  the  line  of  battle, 
to  prolofig  if  on  this  line. 

188.  If  the  column.  instead  nf  arriving  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle, 
arrive  on  its  right  or  left,  and  if  it  have  to  prolong  itself  on  that  lino,  in  order  after- 
wards to  form  to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  bring  the  color 
and  general  guides  on  the  flank  of  the  column  by  the  command  color  andgtntral  gnid*t 
on  (he  linr;  and  those  guides  will  prolong  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle,  conforming 
to  what  is  prescribed  above. 

Manner  of  prolonging  a  line  of  battle  by  markers. 

189.  When  a  column  prolongs  itself  on  the  line  of  battle,  it  being  all-important  that 
the  general  guide?  marrh  correctly  <>n  that  line,  it  becomes  necessarv  that  colonels, 
lieutpnant  colonels,  and  majors,  whose  duty  it  is  to  maintain  the  true  direction,  should 
be  able  to  see,  ai  far  as  practicable,  the  two  objects,  on  which  the  march  of  the  general 
guides  ought  to  be  directed;  consequently,  when  no  prominent  objects  present  them- 
selves in  the  desired  direction,  the  chief  of  the  column  will  supply  the  want  of  them 
in  advance  by  aids-de-camp,  or  other  mounted  officers,  and  in  such  number  as  may  be 

ary. 

190.  Three  such  officers  may  prolong  a  line  as  far  a?  may  be  desired  in  the  following 
manner  :  they  will  place  th  Omars' Tri  in  advance  on  the  line  of  battle,  the  first  at  the 
point  where  the  bead  of  the  column  ought  to  enter  ;  the  second,  three  or  four  hundred 
paces  behind  the  first,  and  the  third,  a  like  distance  behind  the  second.  The  first  of 
thee  olBeeri  will  remain  in  position  till  the  leading  general  guide  shall  have  entered 
on  the  line  of  battle,  and  then,  at  a  gallop,  place  himself  at  a  convenient  distance  be- 
hind the  third.     The  second  will  do  the  like  in    respect  to  the   first,  when  the  head  of 

•lumn  shall  be  near  him,  and  so  on  in  continuation.  These  officers,  without  dis- 
mounting, will  face  to  the  column,  and  cover  each  other  accurately  in  file.  It  will  be 
on  them  that  the  general  guides  will  steadily  direct  their  march,  and  it  will  be  SO  much 
the  more  BlfJ  for  the  latter  to  maintain  themselves  on  the  direction,  M  they  will 
always  be  ahle  to  see  the  mounted  officers  over  the  heads  of  the  preceding  guidoi; 
that  the  deviation  from  the  direction,  by  one  or  more  general  guides,  need  not  mi      »« 

■  bo  folhm . 

191.  A  single  mounted  officer  may  taffies  to  assure  the  direction  of  a  column,  when 
the  point  of  direction  toward-  which   it  marches  is  very  distinct.     In  thi»  case,  that 

will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  within  that  point,  and  beyond  the  one 
at  which  the  bead  of  the  column  will  halt,  and  remain  in  po-ition  till  the  column  halts  ; 
serving  thus  as  the  intermediate  point  for  giving  steadiness  to  the  march  of  the  general 
guid' 

1'>7.  For  a  column  of  one  or  Iwo  battalions,  markers  on  foot  will  suffice  to  indicate 
the  line  to  be  frill-  general  guides. 

uxrkt  on  the  ooUtmn. 

U though  the  unetdoneed  Mop  be  that  of  columns   in    route  marches,  and  also 
that  which  oaghl  to  I-  employed  in  the  Evotntiotu  "/  ihr  Lin*,  beta 

leave*  the  men  I  and,  consequent!  adapted  to  movements  OB  ■ 

large  scale  and  to  difficult  p;i  oiinds.  nr  Mrth- i  '  paramount  irn; 

rm«oldier»  in  the  measan  arid  the  movement  of  the  cadeneed  peee,  »h<  • 
Step  will  bo  but  little  practiced  in  the  <  ,  ittalion.  except    in    going   to,  and 

Tiing  from,  the  gtound  of  Instracti  in,  and  for  I  anism  and  ; 

ment«  of   column'  Hi  route. 

194,  It  i«  highl  v  essential  to  the  regular  it  v  of  the  march  in  column  that  each  guide 
folh  ;h"  trace  of  t  •  hn 

'ion  with  the  general   i 
!.  thcgind'«  will  find  them* 
■  iv  in  the  direr  1 1*  n  in 
into   a   momenta    i 

.  whereas 

won1 
and  from 

list  eoc*  fuidt  tkmlt  exmetif  /nl'rn   M  (** 


88  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— -PA KT    IH. 

trart  of  the  one  tho  immediately  jirereuri,  if,  pending   the   march  of  the    Column,  the 

colonel  shall  give  a  new  point  of  <lir( iction,  too  near  to  the  Brat  to  require  a  formal 
change  of  direction,  the  leading  guide,  advancing  the  one  or  the  other  shoulder,  will 

irnun -diati-lv  direct  bin. sell  on  thi»  jx.i n t  :  the  other  guides  will  only  conform  them- 
selves to  tola  movi  bm  r.t  a-  i  ach  arrives  at  the  paint  at  which  the  Brat  had  executed  it. 
Each  subdivision  will  oonform  itaell  to  tin-  moTemi  i  le,  ihe  men  insensibly 

lengthening  or  ahortevinf  the  step,  and  advancing  or  refusing  [throwing  bank  J  the 

shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  but  without  losing  the  touch  of  the  elbow  towards  his 

side. 

19G.  The  column,  by  company,  being  in  march,  the  colonel  will  can«e  it  to  diminish 
front  by  platoon,  from  front  to  roar,  at  0U00,  and  to  increase  front  by  platoon  in  like 
manner,  which  movement-  will  be  commanded  and  ex  i  ooted  at  f  i  ■■  101  iocd  in  the  school 
of  the  company,  Not.  282  and  273  and  following,  changing  toe  command /ore*  coat- 

j/any  to/orm  companie*.      So  may  he  increase  and  diminish,  or  diminish  and  InCI 

front,  according  to  the  same  principle!  and  at  once,  by  company,  changing  the  oom- 

mand /«rm  rom]>nniei  to/orm  division*,  and  the  command  break  into  platoon*  to  break 
into  eo»ij,nuien.  In  this  case,  the  companies  and  divisions  will  execute  what  it  pf0» 
scribed  lor  platoons  and  companies  respectively. 

107.  The  column  bring  at  a  halt,  if  the  colonel  should  wish  to  inarch  it  to  the  rear, 
and  the  distance  to  be  gained  be  to  inconsiderable  as  to  render  a  countermarch  a  dis- 
proportionate loss  of  time,  he  will  cause  the  column  to  face  about,  and  then  put  it  in 
march  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  1(14  ;  the  chiefs  of  the  subdivisions  will  remain 
behind  the  froat  rank,  the  tile  closers  before  the  rear  rank,  a  id  the  guides  will  step 
into  the  rear  rank,  now  in  front.  In  a  column,  by  division,  the  junior  captains,  in  tho 
intervals  between  companies,  will  replace  their  covering  lergeantl  in  the  rear  rank, 
and  these  sergeants  will  s  ep  into  the  line  of  tile  closers  in  front  of  their  intervals. 

Articlk  Second. 

Column  in  route. 

19S.  A  column  in  route,  like  a  column  in  manoeuvre,  ought  never  to  have  a  depth 
greater  than  about  the  front  it  had  occupied  in  the  line  of  battle,  less  the  front  of  a 
subdivision. 

199.  The  observance  of  this  principle  requires  no  particular  rule  for  a  column  in 
manu-uvre:   but,  as  a  column  in  route  may  have  hourly  to  pass  narrow  ways,  bridges, 

or  other  defilet,  rendering  it  necettarj  to  diminish  the  iron!  of  subdivisions,  it  becomes 

important  to  give  rules  and  mean-  by  which  the  column  may,  for  aaj  length  of  march, 
preserve  il ase  ,,|'  t|M.  route  step  without  elongation  from  front  to  rear. 

200.  A  column  in  route  will  be  habitually  formed  by  company. 

SOL  When  a  column  in  route  shall  arrive  at  a  pan  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front 
of  a  company,  the  column  a  ill  diminish  front  by  platoon  1),  foi  centering.  This  move- 
ment will  be  executed  successively,   or  by  all  the  companies  at  one,-. 

202.  If,  however,  the  defile  be  very  short,  and  it  may  be  passed  by  the  diminution 
of  a  few  tiles,  it  will  be  preferable  to  break  to  the  rear  the  limited  Dumber  of  filet. 

203.  The  column  being  l>\  platoon,  and  the  want  of  space  rendering  i  further  diminu- 
tion of  II  out  neCI  s.saiy  .  it  It  ill  be  diminished  by  section,  if  the  platoons  be  of  twelve 
or  more  files. 

204.  The  column  being  by  section,  will  continue  to  march  by  that  front  M  long  as 
the  defile  may  permit. 

205.  If  the  platoons  have  less  than  twelve  liles,  one  or  two  files  will  be  broken  to  the 
rear,  according  to  the  narrowing  of  the  defile,  and  the  route  step  continued  Itlongat 
six  fibs  can  march  aim  a  ;. 

20C.  What  has  just  bceu  explained  for  breaking  files  to  the  rear  in  a  column  by 
platoon,  is  equally  applicable  to  a  column  by  at 

In",  [f  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  permit  six  nun  to  march  abreast,  the  subdivision! 
will  be  marched  successively  by  the  Hank,  conforming  to  whatis  prescribed  Not.  314 
and  316,  school  ot  the  company. 

■JOs.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  Hank,  will  be  formed  into  column,  bv  section, 
by  platoon,  or  bj  company,  as  soon  as  the  breadth  of  the  way  maj  permit;  the  several 
movement!  which  these  formations  include  will  be  executed  by  the  commands  of  the 
captains,  as  their  companies  successively  dear  the. defile,  obttrringthe  following  rules. 

209.  As  soon  as  the  way  is  sufficiently  broad  to  contain  six  men  abreast,  the  captain 
will  command: 


SCHOOL   OF  TTIE   BATTALION — rART   III.  89 

x  1.  By  nertion  (or  hy  platoon)  into  line.     2.   M  Alien". 

210.'  At  the  command  ma-rh ,  the  subdivisions  indicated  will  form  themselves  into 
line;  the  files  which  have  not  been  able  to  eater,  will  follow  (by  the  Hank)  the  last 
four  flies  of  their  subdivision  which  have  entered  into  line. 

211.  The  column  marching  in  this  order,  the  files  in  rear  will  be  caused  to  enter  into 
line  as  the  increased  breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

212.  The  eolumn  marching  by  section  or  by  platoon,  platoons  or  companies  will  be 
formed  as  soon  ns  the  breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

213.  The  leading  subdivision  will  follow  the  windings  of  the  pass  or  defile;  the  fol- 
lowing subdivisions  will  not  occupy  them  si  -Ives  with  the  direction,  but  all,  in  succession, 

over  the  trace  of  the  subdivi.-ion  which  precede  them  respectively.  The  men  will 
not  sack  to  avoid  the  bad  parts  of  the  way,  but  pass,  as  far  as  practicable,  each  in  the 
direction  of  his  file. 

'.'1  I.   Ohaagei  of  direction  will  always  be  made  without  command  ;  if  the  char, 
important,  a  caution  merely  from  the  respective  chief*  to  their  subdivisions  will  (office, 
and  the  rear  rank,  as  well  u  the  files  broken  to  th  •  rear,  will  execute  successively  the 
movement  where  the  front  rank  had  executed  it. 

115.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the  battalion  :  he  will  regulate  the 
Step  of  the  leading  subdivision,  and  indicate  to  its  chief  the  instant  for  executing  the 
various  movements  which  the  nature  of  the  route  may  render  necessary. 

216.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battalions,  each  will  conform  itself,  in  its 
turn,  to  what  shall  have  been  commanded  for  the  leading  battalion,  observing  to  exe- 
cute each  movement  at  the  same  place,  and  in  the  same  manner. 

217.  Finally,  to  render  the  mechanism  of  all  those  movements  familiar  to  the  troops, 
and  to  habituate  them  to  march  in  the  route  step  without  elongating  the  column,  com- 
manders will  generally  cause  their  battalions  to  march  in  this  step,  g<  ing  to,  and  re- 
turning from,  fields  of  exercise.  Bach  will  occasionally  conduct  his  battalion  through 
narrow  psstsea,  In  order  to  make  it  per  cat  re  the  utility  of  the  principles  prescribed 
above;  and  he  will  several  times,  in  every  course  of  instruction,  march  it  in  the  route 
st»p,  and  cause  to  be  executed,  sometimes  at  once,  and  sometimes  successively,  the 
divers  movements  which  have  just  been  indicated. 

Qi  ju  ral  ranarki  on  the  column  in  route. 

218.  The  lesson  relative  to  the  column  in  route  is,  by  its  frequent  application,  one  of 
th"  Boat  important  that  ran  be  given  to  troop*.  If  it  be  not  well  taught  end 
lisbed  on  right  principles,  it  trill  happen  that  the  rear  of  the  column  in  route  will  be 
obliged  to  run,  to  regain  distances,  or  that  the  front  w  ill  be  forced  to  halt  till  the  rear 
shall  have  accomplished  that  object ;  the  _•  the  march  g  great- 
ly more  fatiguing,  generally  both,  than  if  it  were  executed  ar-                      ale. 

21  t>.  The  ordinary  progress  of  a  column  in  route  ought  to  be,  on  g..od  road-  or  good 
ads,  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  paces  in  a  minute.     This  rata  ms 
maintained  by  columns  of  almc-t  any  <\<  pth  :  but  m  .  plough'  d  I 

sands,  or  ssonntsinons  distrl  _-rers  cannot  be  so  great,  and  must  there- 

regulated  according  to  ctrcasastai 

i  ertain  mean"  of  marching  well  in  rout' 
gular  and  equal  movement,  and.  il  .   k"n 

i        f  maich  lobe  res'  nent 

th"  diffi<  • 

221  to  tak"  more  than  the  prescribed  distant 

i  nee. 
222.  Thus  :  the  bead  of  the  column  encounter*  an  obstar 
Us  march  :   all  the  following 

in  ir- 

ward«  r.a.urall . 

- 

whilst  the  . 

with 

i 
i 

halt,  after  having 

■ 


90  SCHOOL  OF*  THE   BATTALION — PART   III. 

224.  The  column  being  composed   of  BSTSrsl  battalions,   the  IWMUl  !■  Illllsf  will 

always  Icive  an  aid  ifci  mnjf  « ith  its  rear  to  bring  liiia  prompt  information  if  it  find  a 
riitliculty  in  following. 

225.  Suhdivi.-iom  ought  always  to  step  out  well  in  obliquing,  both  in  breaking  and 
in  forming  companies  or  platoons.  When  cither  i-  done  in  BUCC  aaion,  it  is  highly  im- 
portant that  no  subdivision  sUcken  or  shorten  t li --  itep  whilst  that  which  precede*  it  is 
engaged  in  the  movement.     The  observance  of  this  principle  can  alone  prevent  an 

ition  of  the  column. 

22S.  If  the  battalion,  marching  by  the  flnnk.  encounter  a  pass  so  narrow  as  to  oblige 
it  to  d<  Ble  with  a  front  of  two  men,  the  colonel  will  order  suj)port  arms,  take  the 
cadenoed  Itcp,  and  ondonble  the  files,  which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  lefaool 
ol  the  company,  No.  326  ;  the  files  will  double  again  as  soon  as  the  breadth  of  the  way 
vrill  permit. 

227.  If  the  defile  be  only  sufficient  to  receive  a  front  of  one  man,  the  colonel  will 
cease  the  men  to  pass  one  at  a  time.  The  men  of  the  same  file  should  follow  each  other 
in  their  order  as  closely  as  possible,  and  without  loss  of  time.  As  soon  as  the  defile 
permits  a  front  of  two  or  four  men,  the  battalion  will  be  re-formed  into  two  or  four 
ranks,  and  will  march  in  this  order  until  there  be  space  to  form  platoons  or  sections, 
as  indicated  No.  209. 

22*.  In  both  cases,  just  supposed,  the  head  of  the  battalion,  after,  ha7ing  passed  the 
defile,  will  march  till  sufficient  space  be  left  to  contain  the  whole  of  the  subdivisions  in 
mass;  afterwards  it  will  be  put  in  march  by  the  means  indicated  No.  122. 

229.  When  a  command  has  to  move  rapidly  over  a  given  distance,  the  movements 
prescribed  in  this  article  will  be  executed  in  doable  quick  time;  if  the  distance  be  long, 
the  chief  of  the  column  will  not  allow  the  march  at  this  gait  to  be  continued  for  more 
than  fifteen  minutes  ;  at  the  end  of  this  time,  he  will  order  the  ordinary  route  step  to 
be  marched  for  five  minutes,  and  then  again  resume  the  double  quick.  If  the  ground 
be  uneven,  having  considerable  ascents  and  descents  he  will  reserve  the  double  quick 
for  those  parts  of  the  ground  most  favorable  to  this  march. 

230.  A  column  marching  alternately  in  double  quick  time  and  the  ordinary  route 
step,  in  the  manner  stated,  can  easily  accomplish  very  lung  distances  in  a  very  short 
space  of  time :  but  when  the  distance  to  be  passed  oi  er  be  not  greater  than  two  miles, 
it  ought  to  be  accomplished,  when  the  ground  is  favorable,  without  changing  the  rate 
cf  march. 

Article  Tiiikd. 

To  dhange  direction  in  column  at  full  distance. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  cadenced  step,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  cause  it  to  change  direction,  he  will  go   to  the  point  at  which  the  change  ought  to 

be  commenced,  and  establish  a  marker  there,  presenting  the  breast  to  the  flank  of 
the  column;  this  marker,  no  matter  to  which  side  the  change  ol  direction  is  to  be 
made,  will  be  posted  on  the  opposite  side,  and  he  will  remain  In  position  till  the  last 
■ubdiTision  of  the  battalion  shall  have  passed.  The  leading  subdivision  being  within 
a  lew  paces  of  the  marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

lhad  of  column  to  the  left  (or  right.) 
2*2.  At  this,  the  Chief  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  immediately  take  the  guif  c  on 
the  ride  Opposite  the  change  of  direction,  if  notalready  there.  This  guide  will  direct 
bimsell  so  a-  to  rraie  th'  breast  of  the  marker;  arrived  at  this  point,  the  chief  will 
cause  his  •  nbdiristoi]  to  change  direction  by  the  commands  ami  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company.     When  the  wheel  i*  completed,  the 

chief  of  this  subdivision  will  retake  the  guide",  if  changed,  on  the  side  of  the  primitive 
direction. 

233.  The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivision,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  conform  to 
what  has  just  been  explained  for  the  leading  subdivision. 

234.  The  colonel  will  carefully  sec  that  the  guide  of  each  subdivision,  in  wheeling, 
not  throw  himself  without 'or  within,   but  passes  over  all  the  point-  of  tic    I 

the  circle,  which  he  ought  to  describe. 

886.  Al  often  U  no  distinct  object  present!  itseU  in  the  new  direction,  the  lieutenant 
eolond  will  place  himself  Upon  It  in  advance,  at  the  distance  ol"  thirty  or  forty  paces 
from  the  marker,  and  be  assured  in  this  direction  by   the   colonel  ■    the  leading  guide 

will  take,  the  moment  he  shall  have  changed  direction,  two  points  on  the  ground  in 

the  straight  line  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would  pasi  between  the  I \t  of  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel,  taking,  afterwards,  new  points  as  he  advances. 


SCHOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION — rART   III.  91 

236.  The  major  will  see  that  the  guides  direct  themselves  on  the  marker  posted  at 
the  point  of  change,  so  u  to  grace  bii  breast. 

237.  If  the  coluinn  he  composed  of  several  battalions,  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  tho 
second,  will  cause  the  marker  of  the  Brat  battalion,  to  be  replaced  a*  soon  as  the  last 
subdivision  of  this  battalion  shall  have  passed  ;  this  disposition  will  be  observed  by  bat- 
talion after  battalion,  to  the  rear  of  the  Column, 

//-  ? n < irks. 

23S.  It  bM  been  demonstrate  J,  school  of  the  company,  how  important  it  is,  first, 
thai  each  subdivision  execute  its  change  of  direction  precisely  at  the  point  where  the 
the  leading  one  had  changed,  and  that  it  arrive  in  a  square  wiih  the  direction  ;  tecond 
that  the  wheeling  point  ought,  always,  to  be  cleared  in  time,  in  order  that  the  subdi- 
vision engaged  in  tho  wheel  may  not  arrest  the  movement  of  the  following  one.  The 
deeper  the  column,  the  more  rigorously  ought  these  principles  to  he  observed  ,  because, 
a  fault  that  would  he  but  slight  in  a  column  of  a  single  battalion,  would  cause  much 
embarrassment  in  one  e-f  great  depth. 

Article  Foun-rn. 
To  halt  the  column. 

239.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.    Column.     2.    Halt. 

240.  At  the  second  command,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains,  the  column  will  halt ; 
no  guide  will  stir,  though  he  may  have  lost  his  distance,  or  be  out  of  the  direction  of 
the  preceding  guides 

241.  The  column  being  in  march,  in  double  quick  time,  will  he  halted  hy  the  same 
commands.  At  the  command  hnlt.  the  men  will  halt  in  their  places,  and  will  them- 
* -Ives  rectify  their  positions  in  the  ranks. 

242.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  of 
battle,  he  will  move  a  little  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  and  face  to  him  :  this  guide 
and  the  following  one  will  fix  their  eyes  on  the  colonel,  in  order  promptly  to  conform 

directions, 
MS.  If  the  colonel  jndge  it  not  necessary  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  g< 
he  will  limit  himself  to  rectifying  the  position  of  such   as  may  be  without,  or  within 
the  direction,  by  the  cormand  711.1  -  ■  nmpany.  OT  OKtd  imj.anie*, 

tothi  right    or  to  tht  l<-/i  :     at  this  command,  the  guidi  I  will  place  them- 

•  on  the  direction  ;   the  others  will  stand  I 
244.   If.  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it   Decenary  to  give  a  general  direction 
to  the  guid<  -  nt  the  column,  he  wi.l  place  the  first  two  on  the  1  I  shall  have 

chosen,  and  command  : 

• 

14"..    At  this,  the  following  guides  will   promptly  place  themselves  on  the  di r->cti»n 

covering  the  first  two  in  file,  and  each  precisely  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his 

company,  from  the  gaide  immediately  preceding;   the  lieutenant  colonel  willassare 

them  ii  n,  and  the  ooloael  will  command  : 

Le/i  —  Drrss. 

240.    \t  tlii»  command,  <  aeh  companv  will  inclin'   I  for- 

ward or  backward,  so  as  t"  I  h  cap- 

tain will  piece  btmsoll  1  •  r  align   bi 

parallelly  with  that  which  )  recedes,  I  s 

in  column. 

Final!  v,  if  the  general  guides   march   on  the   flanV 
having  halted  it.  will  place  hitn«e|f  in   rear   of  the 

the  li  ( tion  of  tl,  - 

potats  in  advance,  and  establish  them  •  ■   be  not  aln 

the  major  will  do  the  li)  rear ; 

■ncl  will  commar 
1.    '■ 
command.  I 

ant  colonel,  pl»' 

pU  'n<\  will  promptly  align    h»  corn;  « 


D2  BGHOOL  OF  Till'  BATKAIIOH — PART  III. 

249.  The  colonel,  ha  .  I  the  direction  of  the  guides,  will  command  : 

Left  (or  riyht         I' 

250.  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  N<>.  146. 

/«'<  marks. 

251.  The  means  Indicafc  A.  No.  244,  and  following,  for  giving  a  genera]  direction  to 
the  guides  of  a  column,  at  full  distance,  will  apply  onlj  to  .i  i  olumn  oompoaed  of  two, 
or,  at  most,  three  battalions.      If  tin'  number  be   BOM  numerous,  its  chief  will  cause 

the  colors  and  general  guides  of  all  the  battalions  to  itep  out  and  place  theinscl-. 
tic  direction   which   he   may    wish    to  give  to  the  column,  as  is  explained  in  the  evolu- 
tions of  the  line. 

Aktjci.k  Fifth. 

To  dose  the  column  to  half distance,  or  in  mass. 

262.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  distance  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  to  halt  distance,  on  the  leading  company,  ho 
will  command  : 

1.    To  half  distance,  close  column.     2.  March  (or  doudle  uu id; — March.) 

253.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  companv  will  caution  it  to 
stand  fast. 

364.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  repeated  bv  all  the  captains,  except  the 
captain  of  the  lending  company,  this  company  will  -land  East,  and  its  chief  will  align 
it  by  the  left  :    the  lile  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

255.  All  the  other  companies  will  continue  to  march,  and  as  each  in  succession  arrives 
at  platoon  distance  from  the  one  which  precedes,  its  captain  will  halt  it. 

266.  At  the  instant  that  each  company  halts,  its  guide  will  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  guides  who  precede,  and  the  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the 
left :   the  tile  closers  will  close  on.-  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

'.'."•7.  No  particular  attention  need  be  {riven  to  the  general  direction  of  the  guides 
before  they  respectively  halt;  it  will  sutlice  if  each  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  on"  who 
precedes  him. 

258.  The  colonel,  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  will  superintend  the  execration  of  the 
movement .  obsering  that  the  captains  halt  their  companies  exactly  at  platoon  distance 
the  one  from  the  other.  ( 

'.  19.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  a  few  paces  in  front,  will  face  to  the  leading  guide  and 
Insure  the'  positions  of  the  following  guides   as    they   successively  place  themSI  Ives  on 

the  direction. 

2U0.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  last  guide. 

201.   If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  caus  ■  it  to  close  bj  the  same  com- 

262.  If  the  column  lie  marching  in  doublequick  time,  at  the  tirst  command,  the  cap- 
tain of  the  |,  ading  company  fl  ill  command  quiek  time  ;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  coin- 
pani  M  "ill  caution  them  to  continue  their  inarch. 

2C3.    At  the  command   RMroA,  the  leading   company    will    march    in   quick,   and  the 

other  companies  in  doable  quick  time :  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from 

the  preceding  one,  its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

2C4.  When  the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gained  its  distance,  the  colonel  will 

command : 

Doubll  quick—  M 

2C5.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  the  column  and  to  eau-e  it  to  close  to  half 
distance  at  the  same  time,  he  will  netify  tin'  captain  of  the  leading  company  of  his 
intention,  who  at  the  command  marefl  will   hall    his  company  and  align  it  bv  the  left. 

2CG.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  lime,  and  the  col,,  ml  should  not  give  the 
command  double  quick,  the  captain  of  the  hading  company  will  halt  his  company  at 
the  command  ROrrA,  and  align  it  by  the  left.  In  the  ease,  w  here  the  colonel  adds  the 
command  doubU  quick,  the  <  aptaina  of  companies  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  262,  and  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  indicated  No.  263, 

To  close  the  column  on  (he  evjhth,  or  rearmost  company. 

207.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of  causing  it  to  close  to  half  distance  on 


SCHOOL   OP   TIIE   BATTALION— PART   in.  93 

the  first  company,  the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  on  the  eighth,  hi  will 
command  : 

].    (h\  the  eighth  company.    In  half  dituncc  clnte   column.      2.    Battalion  about      V 
3.    Column  forirard.      4.    (inide  right.      ;>.    Maucii   (or  double  quick— MAIOH.) 

26s.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies  except  the  eighth,  will  lace  ahout, 

and  th<  ii  guide?  will  remain  in  the  front  rank,  BOW  1 1 1 ' -  \< 

260.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains  will  place  themselves  two  paces  ontiide 
of  their  companies  on  the  directing  Hank. 

270.  At  th"  command  march,  the  eighth  company  will  stand  fast,  and  its  captain 
will  align  it  by  the  left,  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves  in  march,  and.  j' 
arrive.*  at  platoon  distance  from  the  one  established  before  it,  its  captain  will  halt  it 
aad  face  it  to  the  front.  At  the  moment  that  each  companr  halts,  the  left  guide,  re- 
maining faced  to  the  rear,  "ill  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction  of  the  elides 
alreadv  established.  Immediately  after,  the  captain  will  align  his  company  by  the  left, 
and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  on  the  rear  rank.  It  this  movement  be  exi  a  ted 
in  double  quick  time,  each  captain,  in  turn,  will  halt,  and  command  :  Such  oompamw, 
right  about  Halt.  At  this  command,  the  company  designated  will  face  to  the  ri^Lt 
about  and  halt. 

271.  All  the  companies  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  guides,  who  stand 
fared  to  the  rear,  to  lace  about. 

272.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placinp.  himself  behind  the  rearmost  guide,  will  s«"ure 
successively  the  positions  of  the  other  guides,  as  prescrib  :  tie- major  will 
remain  abreast  with  the  rearmost  company. 

27^>.   The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  close  it  on  the  eighth 
company,  he  will  command  : 
1,    On  the  eighth    company,    to   ha'f  dittnnce,    clofe    column.      2.    Battalion  Tight  about. 

3.  Mxaca  (or  ttarnVm  quivk    If  aaon. )    4.  Quid*  right. 

274.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  caution  hi«  com- 
pany that  it  will  remain  faced  to  the  front ;  the  captains  of  the  other  companies  will 
caution  their  companies  thlt  they  will  have  to  faee  about. 

275.  At  the  command  marrh,  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  halt  his  com- 
pany and  align  it  by  the  lelt  :   the  tile  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

276.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the  same  command,  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  flank  of  the  column  ;  the  subdivision!  will  fare  about,  and  as  each  an  ires 
at  platoon  distance  from  the  <ompany  immediately  preceding  it,  its  chief  will  face  it  to 
the  front  and  halt  it  a?  preSCI  Ibed  No.  270.  Tli  instant  each  company  halts,  the  guide 
on  the  directing  flank,  remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will  quickly  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  g  jtablisbed.  After  which,  the  captain  will  align  the 
company  by  thaled,  and  the  file  cJosan  will  don  one  pare  upon  the  rear  rank. 

277.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  follow  the  movement  ;.  s  Brsl  company. 
The  major  will  plac«  himself  a  few  paces  in  rear   of  tli?  guide  of  t lit  • 

and  will  a«sure  successively  the  position  of  the  Other  gu 

//'  marks. 

,  loan  by  division  st  full  distance  will  close  to  hall 

means  and  the  same  com  mar 

27''.    A  column  by  company    or  by  division,  being  at  full  or  half  dist  ml 

will  i  loos  in  ma««  by  the  as  d  command-  indi- 

■  •    lor  that  of   I 
subdivision  will  conform  himself  to  all  that   ha*  ju  =  : 
will  not  halt  his  subdivision  till  its  guide  shall  be  at  a  disl 
if  the  subdivision  D*it  ; 

MO.  In  a  column,  left  in  f-  *s  will   be 

i  > 

XTR. 

To  march  in  column  at  hnlf  distance,  or  dosed  in  mass. 

■L   A  rolumn  at  hs  »»s.  b*ing  st  a  hslt.  tv  » 

march  by  the  commands  prescribed  for  s  column  st  fall  distance. 


94  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   III. 

Tin-  mean?  of  direction  will  also  he  the  •ami'  fur  a  column  at  half  distance  or  in 
mass,  a*  for  a  column  at  full  distance,  except  that  the  general  guides  will  not  stop  out. 
lumn  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,   being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  thill 
wish  to  halt  it.  he  will  give  the  command*  prescribed  for  halting  a  column  at  full  dis- 
tance, audit",  efterwarda,  he Jodjpe  it  neoetaan  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  anklet 

of  the  rohiiim.  ho  will  employ,  to  this  end,    the  commands   and   means  indicated,  No. 
'244  and  following. 

2M.  In  columns  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  repeat 
the  commands  march  and  hall,  as  in  columns  at  full  distance. 

285.  The  colonel  will  often  march  the  column  to  the  rear,  by  the  means  and  the 
commands  prescribed  Nos.  170  and  171. 

.   A  column  by  division  or  company,  whether  at  full  or  half  distance  or  closed  in 
jt   ■   hall  or   marching,  can  be  laced  to  the  right  or  left,  and  inarched  offiu  the 
new  direction. 

Artici.h  Seventh. 

To  change  direction  in  column  at  half  distance. 

287.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march,  will  change  direction  by  the  same 
commands  and  according  to  the  same  principle!  U  ■  Column  at  full  distance;  but  as 
the  distance  between  tin-  subdivisions  is  less,  the  pivot  man  in  each  subdivision  will 
take  steps  of  fourteen  inches  instead  of  nine,  and  of  seventeen  inches,  instead  of  del  n. 
according  to  the  gait,  in  order  to  clear,  in  time,  the  wheeling  point,  and  the  marching 
flank  will  describe  the  arc  of  a  larger  circle,  the  better  to  facilitate  the  moTement. 

Autici.b  Eighth. 

To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 
1st.    To  change  direction  in  inarching. 

288.  A  column  bv  division,  closed  in  mas3,  being  in  march,  will  change  direction  by 
the  front  of  subdivisions. 

I.  Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse,  or  to  the  pivot  Hank,  it  will  al- 
wa\  ■  bv  executed  on  the  pi  inciplei  of  wheeling  in  marching  :  to  this  end.  the  colonel 
w  ill  lirst  cause  the  battalion  to  take  the  guide  on  the  Hank  opposite  to  the  intended 
change  of  direction,  i!  it  be  not  already  on  that  Hank. 

290.  A  column  bv  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in  front,  having  to  change  direc- 
tion to  the  right,  the  colonel,  after  having  canted  t  marker  to  be  placed  at  the  point 
where  the  change  ought  to  commence,  « ill  command: 

1.    Battalion,  right  uhn>.     2.    Mll'.cil. 

291.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  division  will  wheel  as  if  it  were  part  of  a 
column  at  hall  distance. 

292.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the  wheel,  all  the  others  will,  at 
once,  conform  themselves  to  its  movement  ;  to  this  end  the  left  guide  of  each,  advanc- 
ing slightly  the  left  thovldeT  and  lengthening  a  little  tho  stop,  will  incline  to  the  left) 
and  will  observe,  at' the  same  time,  to  gain  so  much  ground  to  the  front  that  there 
may  constantly  be  an  Interval  if  lour  pace!  between  his  division  and  that  which  pre- 
cede* it  :  and  at  toon  at  be  shall  cover  the  preceding  guide,  he  will  cease  k>  incline 
and  then  march  exactly  in  his  trace. 

293.  l'.aek  division  will  conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  its  guide;  the  men  will 
feel  lightlv  the  elbow  towards  him  and  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder  the  instant  the 
movemeni  commence!  :  each  hie  in  inclining,  will  gain  so  much  the  less  ground  to  the 
front,  as  the  lib-  shall  be  nearer  to  the  pivot,  and  the  right  guide  will  gain  only  to 
much  U  may  be  necessary  to  maintain  between  his  own  and  the  preceding  division 
the  same  distance  which  separates  their  marching  flanks. 

294.  Bacfa  chief  of  division,  turning  to  it.  will  regular  its  inarch,  and  see  that  it  re- 
mains constantly  included  between  its  guides,  that  its  alignment  continues  nearly- 
parallel  to  that  of  the  preceding  division,  and  that  the  centro  bends  only  a  kittle  to  the 
rear. 

29f>.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  movement,  and  cause  the  pivot  of  the  leading 
division  to  Lengthen  or  to  shorten  the  ttcp.  conforming  to  the  principle  established, 
k  l.ool  of  the  company,  No.  227— if  cither  be  necessary  to  facilitate  the  moreincnt  of 
the  other  divisions. 


SCHOOL   OF   TIIE  BATTALION — PART   III.  95 

20G.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  near  tlio  loft  guide  of  tin-  leading  division,  will 
regulate  hif  march,  and  take  care,  nbove  all,  that  he  does  not  throw  hinicelf  in'rAin 
the  arc  he  ought  to  describe. 

89Ti  The  major,  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  guides,  will  see  that  the  last  three  conform 
themaelvi  -.  each  by  flight  degrees,  to  the  movement  of  the  guide  immediately  preced- 
ing, and  that  neither  inclines  too  much  in  the  endeavor  to  cover  too  promptly  the 
guide  in  his  front  ;  he  will  rectify  any  serious  fault  that  may  be  committed  in  either 
of  those  particulars. 

.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  wheel  neatly  ended,  will  command  : 
1.    Forxrard.      1.    JUnCB. 

t$9.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  leading  division 
completes  it*  whe<  I,  it  will  resume  the  direct  march  :  the  other  divisions  will  conform 
themselves  to  Mm  movement  ;  and  if  any  guide  find  himself  no)  covering  his  immedi- 
ate leader,  he  will,  by  slight  degrees,  bring  himself  on  the  trace  of  that  guide,  by  ad- 
vancing the  right  shoulder. 

300.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  has  to  change  direction  to  the  left,  the  colonel 
will  first  cause  it  to  take  the  guide  to  the  right,  and  then  command  : 

1.    Jinttalion,    left  vitrei.      2.    Mu 

301.  At  the  command  mnrrh,  the  battalion  will  change  direction  to  the  left,  aerord- 
tbe  principles  just  prescribed,  and  by  inverse  means. 

302.  When  the  battalion  shall  have  resumed  the  direct  march,  the  colonel  will 
change  the  guide  to  the  left,  on  seeing  the  last  three  guides  nearly  in  the  direction  of 
the  one  in  fi  ont. 

Mtt,  Th«  foregoing  changes  of  direction  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  in  a  column,  left  in  front. 

304.  A  column  by  company,  doted  in  mass,  will  change  direction  in  marching,  by 
the  commands  and  means  indicated  for  a  column  by  division. 

The  guide,  who  is  the  pivot  of  the  particular  wind,  ought  to  maintain  himself 
at  his  usual  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  guide  who  precedes  him  ;   if  this  distar 
not  exactly  preserved,  the  divisions  would  necessarily  become  confounded,  which  must 
be  carefully  avoided. 

2d.   To  change  dived  ion  from  a  hall. 

106.   A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  closed  in  ma<s,  bring  at   a  halt,  when 
the  colonel  shall  hi  li  to  give  it  a  new  direction,   and  in  which  it  is  to  remain,  be  will 
ate  this  movement  by  the  flanks  of  subdivisions,  in  the  following  man- 
ner : 

The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  C« 

it"    right  flank,  he  will    Indicate   to  the  lieutenant  colonel  the 
right ;  this  officer  will  immediately  establish,  on  the  low  di- 
■  other  a  little  les«  than  the  front  of  the  first 
subdivision,  the  fir't  marker  in  front  of  the  right  tile  of  tl  a  ;   which  I 

U  d,  he  will  command  i 

UrMtitm    ly    the  right  finnk.       1.     Hiltahnn,    Tight — Facf.       3.    MaBCI 

'  rjvul;       M  ' 

■•nd  command,  the  column  will  face   to  the  right,  and  ra<-h  r  > 

le  of  his  right  guide, 
•nmand   mnrrh.  all  the 
guide  of  the  leading  one  will  direct  him*  If  from  lh< 

i'  ed   in  sdi  an<  •  on  tb< 
low  the  movement,  bat  aMil  md  as  soon  a  anted, 

he  will  command  : 

1  /  en).         2.      Ill  ;    KM- 

310.   At  the  fourth  command.  th< 
ers,  snd  be  promptly  aligned  I  » 

31 1 

iissn. 
ttjsjsj  parallelly    to  that  sabdivuioc,  and  at  tl 
ra  its  rear  r  •    • 


96  9  IIOOL   OF    EH   BATTALION — PART    IH. 

312.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  halt  in  bis  own  per«on.  on  arriving  opposite  to 
the  I'f:  guidi  i  already  placed  on  the  new  direction,  aee  his  subdivision  file  pa«t,  and 
!,i  himself,  In  halting  and  aligning  it.  to  what  is  preacribed  No.  309. 

31.1.  If  the  change  of  direction  be  bj  the  1  ••■Tt  flank,  the  colonel  will  cause  markers 
to  be  establish*  I  .  the  first  in  front  of  the  l"ft  file  of  tin*  leading  subdivision, 

and  then  give  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  riijht. 

."14.   At  the  second  command,  all  the  subdivisions  will  face  to  the  left,  and  each 
a  ill  place  bimaelf  by  the  tide  of  his  left  guide. 

S16.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  subdivisions  will  step  off together. each  con- 
ducted by  its  chief. 

31fi.  The  guide  of  the  leading  sabdiriaion,  will  direct,  bimaelf,  from  the  flrat  btep, 

pai  allelly  to  the  marker*  ;  the  subdivision  will  be  conducted  by  ita  chief;  and  as  soon 
left  guide  shall  have  passed  the  second  marker,  it  w ill  be  halted  and  aligned  aa 
bed  abort  :  and  soofeeeh  of  the  following  subdivisions. 

"17.  The  colonel  v.  ill  hob!  himself  on  the  designated  flank,  to  see  that  each  subdivi- 
sion enters,  the  new  direction  parallelly  to  the  leading  one,  and  at  the  prescribed  dia- 
tancc  from  that  which  precedes. 

318.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  in  front  of,  and  facing  to,  the  guide  of 
the  leading  subebv  iaion,  and  a  ill  aasnre  the  positions  of  the  following  guides,  as  (hey 
successively  arrive  on  the  new  direction. 

319.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  last  subdivision. 

320.  In  order  that  this  movement  mav  be  ezeonted  with  facility  and  precision,  it  is 
necessary  that  the  leading  subdivision  should  entirely  unmask  the  column;  for  exam- 
ple :  the  movement  being  made  by  the  right  Hank,  it  is  necessary  before  halting  the 
leading  subdivision,  thai  its  left  guide  shall,  at  least,  have  arrived  at  the  place  previ- 
ously occupied  by  its  tight  guide,  in  order  that  each  following  subdivision  which  has 
to  pas*  over  a  space  at  least  equal  to  its  front  to  put  itself  in  the  new  direction,  and 
whose  left  ought  to  pass  the  point  at  which  the  right  had  rested,  may,  at  the  command 
hull,  find  itself  in  its  whole  front,  parallel  to  the  leading  subdivision. 

321.  By  this  method  there  is  no  direction  that  may  not  be  given  to  a  column  in  mass. 

Autici.b  Ninth. 

Being  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  to  take 

distances. 

322.  A  column  at  half  dittanee  will  take  full  distances  cy  the  head  of  the  column 
when  it  has  to  prolong  itself  on  the  line  of  battle.  If,  on  the  contrary,  it  has  to  form 
its*  It  in  liii''  of  bit  tie  00  the  ground  it  occupies,  it  will  take  distances  on  the  leading  or 
on  the  rearmost  subdivision,  according  as  the  one  or  other  may  find  itself  at  the  point 
where  the  right  or  left  of  the  battalion  ought  to  rest  in  line  of  battle. 

1st.  To  take  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column. 

323.  The  column  being  by  company  at  half  distance  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  take  full  distances  by  the  head,  he  will  command: 

By  the  In  ad  of  column,  take  wheeling  distance. 

324.  At  this  command,  the  ca[  tain  ofthe  leading  company  will  put  it  in  march  ;  to 
this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Firit  company,  forward.    2.  Ouideltft,    3.  March  (or  doubls  quid — Mauch). 

32T..  When  the  second  shall  have  nearly  its  wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Second  company,  forward.     2,   OuicUIeft,     3.  Mauch  (or  double  quick — March). 

326.  At  the  command  SMrcA,  which  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  that  this  com- 
pany shall  have  its  wheeling  distance,  it  nil!  step  off  smartly,  taking  the  step  from 
the  preceding  company.  Kach  of  the  other  companies  will  successively  execute  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  Becond. 

327.  The  colonel  will  see  that  each  company  puts  itself  in  march  at  the  instant 
La*  its  distance. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   III.  9? 

328.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the  hea<l  of  the  column,  and  direct 
the  march  of  the  leading;  guide. 

329.  The  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the  rearmost  guide. 

330.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  at  a  halt,  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  give  tht 
same  commands,  and  add  : 

M  mich  (or  double  quick — March). 

331.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  march,  tht  captain 
of  the  leading  company  will  cauie  dtuble  quirk  time  to  be  taken  ;  which  will  also  be 
done  by  the  other  captains  as  the  companies  successively  attain  their  proper  wheeling 
distance. 

332.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  doublr  quick-  time,  the  leading  company  will  con- 
tinue to  march  at  the  panic  gait.  The  captains  ot  the  other  companies  will  cause  quick 
time  to  be  taken,  and  as  each  company  gains  its  proper  distance,  its  captain  will  eause 
it  to  retake  the  double  quitk  iteji. 

la.   To  fake  (listajices  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

3J3.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on  the  rearmost  company,  he  will  estab- 
lish two  markers  on  the  direction  he  shall  wish  to  give  to  the  line  <>t  battle,  t|)(.  first 
opposite  to  the  rearmost  company,  the  second  marker  towards  the  head  of  the  column, 
at  company  distance  from  the  first,  and  both  facing  to  the  rear;  at  the  same  time,  the 
right  general  guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant  colonel,  will  move  rapidly  a 
little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the  hoail  of  the  column  will  extend,  and  place  hi  nasi  II 
correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the 
colonel  will  command  : 

1.    On   tht  eighth   company,   tnhe  traeeliwy  dittance.      1.     Cn\\imn''  fortrard.      3.    Guide 
]r/t.     4.   March    i  or  dimbit  quick — March  i. 

334.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  will  place  themselves  two  paces  outside  of 
the  directing  flank  ;   the  ?a|  tain  of  the  eighth  company  will  caution  it  to  starul 

335.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the  captains,  except  the  captain  of  (he 
eighth  company,  this  latter  company  will  stand  fast;  its  elm  I  » ill  ajign  it  hv  the 
left  on  th«>  firf-t  marker,  who  is  opposite  to  this  company,  and  place  hiinsvll  before  it* 
centre,  after  commanding  :  Frost.  At  this  command,  the  marker  will  retire,  and  the 
left  guide  will  take  hit.  place. 

336.  All  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves  in  march,  thr  guide  of  the  leading 
one  directing  himself  a  little  within  the  right  general  guide  :  when  the  seventh  com- 
pany has  ariived  opposite  the  second  marker,  its  captain  will  halt,  and  align  it  on  this 
marker,  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  the  eighth  company. 

When  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company  shall  see  that  there  is,  between  his 
company  and  the  seventh,  the  necessary  space  lor  wheeling  into  line,  he  will  bait  his 
company  ;  the  guide  facing  to  the  rear  will  place  himself  promptly  on  th*  direction, 
and  the  moment  he  shall  be  assured  in  hi'  position,  the  captain  will  align  the  companv 
bj  the  left,  and  then  place  himself  two  pace  before  its  centre  ;  the  other  companies 
will  i  conform  themselves  to  what  baa  just   been   prescribed   fi 

company. 

ind  see  that  each  company  halts  at  the 

tibed  diitance.    he    wil  dr  any  fault  that  may  be  commit t*n\  and 

as  soon  as  all  thi  .  .ball  be  aligi  Icauaethcgt  .ire  faced  ts> 

the  rear,  to  face  about.  » 

3^.9.   The  lieutenant  colonel  will  soeeessivrly  aasure  the  left  guide,  Uan, 

placing  him-elf   in  their  rear,  as  they  arrive. 

340.  The  mij.r  will  h*ld  himself  at  tht  head  of  the  column,  and  will  direct  the 
march  of  the  leading  guide. 

To  lahf  dist  hr<i<l  of  the  column. 

341.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  take  tUaUwOM  on  the   leading  rr>mr>aar,  will  ett  ■> 
two   markers  ia   the  mini."    ;u«< 

ether   at  enmpany  distance  in  r»ar  of  the  hr«l.  bm  \*{\ 

general    guide,  on  an  intims' 

rear  and  place  himself  »    prolongation  of  tht  two  snarkmnsV  nsmlefen- 

rond  the  point  In  whirh  *  he  r  mr  ■  '  \\,<-  column  will  extended 

ing  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

7 


p|  SCHOOL   OF   THK    BATTALION — IWRT    III. 

1.    On    the  firtt    company     take     irhee\ing    di'taure.       1.     llattaMnn,    about — FaCK.      5 
Co] Hmn.  farmird.      4.    lluidc  right.      S.    Mm.cii   (ftr  rfOM&le  Q arirl         1 

342.  At  i  In-  second  command,  all  ike  cmnpanii  *.<  icept  the  i«ne  designated,  will  face 
ab'iut.  tin-  guides  remaining  in  the  ti  not  rank    row  In  cone  Ihe  rear. 

:;43.   At  the  fourth  command,   tin-  captain*  will    place  themselves  outside  of  their 

344.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  designated  company  will  align  it,  a> 
p-    m  il'ed.  No.  335,  on  the  marker  placid  by  its  side. 

346.  The  rnnaininp  companies  «  ill  put  themselves  in  march,  the  guide  of  the  resr- 
Bio>t  one  will  din  ct  himsei:  a  little  within  th  •  lefl  general  guide  ;  when  the  Second 
Kiawit  shall  ha\ e  an  ived  apposite  tin-  second  n  n.  ier,  its  captain  w ill  face  it  shout, 
Conforming  to  eh.it  i.-i  preacitkod,  N<>.  270,  and  align  it,  ad  has  just  bei/n  pmscrikei 
f«n  the  hist  company. 

:;4fi  The  instant  that  the  third  company  shall  have  it«  wheeling  distance,  its  captain 
will  halt  it  facing  it  about,  as  picscrihid,  No  270.  and  align  it  by  the  left  :  the  cap- 
tain.- ol  the  retraining  companies  will  eai  h.  in  succession,  conform  himsi  It  to  what  baa 
ju-t  been  preset  ibed  lor  the  captain  of  the  third. 

347.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as  indicated  \o.  33H  ;  tbe  lieutenant 
Colonel  and  major  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  presented,  Nos.  339  and  340. 

348.  Th  •* :>.  various  movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principle*  in 
*  a  column  with  the  left  in  front. 

34!'.   Thej   will  be  caccuUd  in  like  manner  in  a  column  closed  in  mass  ;  but,  if  it  be 

the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  open  out  the  ciilu.no  to  hull,  instead  of  full  distance,  he  will 
substitute  i..  the  commands,  the  indication  ha\f.  tor  that  of  u hr> Mug  distance. 

350.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will  be  taken  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples. 

AllTlCI.  K    T    NTH 

Countermarch  of  a  column  ut  full  or  half  disluncc. 

861.  In  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  countermarch  will  be  executed  bj  the 
means  indicated,  school  ol   the  company  ;   to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    Countermarch.      2.    Ilnt'nlion  ri<jht  (or  left )  —  Face.      3.    liy  jilr  left  (or  right.) 
4     JI a itcii  (or  double  quirk—  March.) 

To  cmntcr  march  a  column  dosed  in  mas.i. 

352.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  countermarch  w  ill  be  executed  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  subjoined. 

353.  The  column  being  supposed  formed  by  a  division,  right  in  front,  the  colonel 
will  command  . 

1.    Counrtrmar^k.      2.    Ilattalion,  right  tmd  left — Kacf..      5.    Hy Jilt  left  and  right. 
4.   Makch  \or  double  quick — March.) 

364.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  numhered  divisions  will  caution 
tftnn  to  luce  to  the  i  ight,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  otheis  to  face  to  the  left 

35.r).  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  divisions  will  face  to  the  right,  and  th- even 
to  th.  leit  :  tke  light  and  left  guides  <*J  all  lb  divisions  will  face  about  ;  the  chi.-ls  of 
odd  divisions  will  hasten  to  th  ir  right  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and 
ra  '  ■  h..  fs  |  I  ice  himsell  in  the  left  of  the  leadiug  front  i  ank,  man  ol  his  .'iv!s  on  ;  the 
C  f  i»f  ev.n  divi-ions  «ill  hasten  to  their  loit,  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the 
riu. .  and  each  chid  place  hiinseli  on  the  right  of  his  leading  front  rank  man. 

350.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  division?,  each  conducted  by  its  chief,  will  step 
oil'  smartly,  the  guides  standing  last  ;  each  odd  division  w  iU  wheel  by  til  to  the  left 
around  its  right  guide  ;  each  even  division  will  wh  el  by  tile  to  the  right  u.ouud  iU 
left  guide,  each  division  so  directing  its  ma.ch  as  to  an  ive  behind  its  opposite  guide, 
and  when  its  head  shall  be  up  with  this  guide,  the  chief  will  halt  the  division,  and 
vause  it  to  face  to  the  front. 

367.  Each  division  on  facing  to  the  front,  will  be  aligned  by  its  chief  by  the  right; 
to  this  end,  Uw  chiefs  of  the  even  divisions  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  their  re- 
spective divisions. 

3!>H.  The  divisions  being  aligned,  each  chief  will  command,  Froxt;  at  this,  th* 
guides  will  shift  to  their  proper  flanks. 


SCHOOL   OF   TUB   BATTALION  — PART   III.  99 

359.  In  a  cnlnmn  with  t ho  I. -ft  in  front  the  countermarch  will  be  exect"d  by  the  same 
commands  and  mesa* :  bnt  all  the  divisions,  will  be  aligned  b)  tlic  lolt  :  to  thin  end, 
th  •  i-hii'lx  <it  III  ■  odd  divi-ions  will  ba-ten  to  the  let  of  their  respective  divisions  M 
toon  as,  the  latt   i'  ihall  ha\  v  I)  mi  lac-  d  to  the  liont. 

36<l  Tho  colonel,  jdacod  on  the  directing  flank,  will  superintend  theg-ncral  move- 
m  nt. 

Ml.  The  mnnterini.rrh  being  ended,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  always  place  himself 
ab  •  a  t  with  the  leading,  and  th  •  major  abroaat  with  the  rearmoat  division. 

ML  In  a  column  by  companv,  closed  in  mass,  tbe  Onaotermarc  will  he  executed  by 
tb   woii!  mean.-  and  oo  Duianda,  applying  to  cornpaniea  what  ia  prescribed  foi    iivi.-inns. 

313  The  counterniai  cli  will  at  nay  8  take  place  from  a  halt,  whether  the  column  be 
timed  in  mass,  or  at  lull,  or  hall  distance. 

Article  Ki.rventh. 

Being  in  column  by  company,  vtttsed  in  mass,  tofortn  division. 

304.  The  coluim  bfyig  closed  in  max.",  ii;j  lit  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  w  h>  n  the  coion<4 
shall  wish  to  torui  divisions,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Form  divisions.     2.   Left  companies,  left—  Face.     3.  Mahch    (or  double   quirk  - 

M ikch.) 

3ti5.   At  the  fir.- 1  command,  the  captains  of  the  left  companies  will  caution  them  ta 

fa.-.    t»  the  I,  It. 

366.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and  their  cap- 
tains will  place  themselves  by  the  side  of  th  it  respective  le.t  gmd-«- 

367.  T  h e  i  i.'lii  oompaaiea,  and  th-  ir  captains,  will  stand  fa-t ;  but  the  right  and  left 
fluid- 1-  oi  each  ol  ill  s.  ■  compani  -s  will  place  themselves  r.-xp -rtiveiv  before  the  right 
and  left  hies,  ol  th  ■  company  both  guides  lacing  to  tb  .•  right,  and  each  resting  hi  right 
arm  gently  again-t  the  breast  of  the  front  rank  mao  of  th  •  tile,  in  order  to  maik  th* 
du .  i  ten. 

368.  At  the  command  m<ir<h,  the  left  companies  only  will  put  thetnaclvea  in  march, 
th  ir  captain?  'landing  fa-i  j  as  each  shall  bco  that  hid  coin)  an\  filing  past,  has  n.  arlj 
r'e  and  the  column,  he  will  cotmnand  : 

1.    Such  rompniiy.      2.    II  ai.t.      3.    Krokt. 

313.  Th ■•  first  command  will  bo  giv  n  when  the  omnpani  r-hall  yet  bare  four  pace  to 
ma.  ch  ;  the  second  at  tile  infant  it  shall  have  chared  its  right  company,  and  the  third 
immediately  after  the  second. 

370.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  front,  the  files,  if  th.  r^  1..  baterrala  t><  tween 
lata,  will  promptly  Incline  to  tbe  right  j  ihe  captain  will  place  bimeeM  on  th.- left  of 
the  right  Ann  pan  j  >.f  tie  division,  and  align  bimseU  correctly  .>n  the  ftont  rank  of 
that  company  . 

371.  The  I.  ft  guide  w  ill  plare.  hi.n«.lf  at  the  »aino  time  before  one  ..f  the  three  left 
files  «f  his  compani.  face  to  the  tight,  and  rnv«T  rnirectlv  the  guides  <>t  the  ric.ht 
company  ;  t'  ■  |  his  captain  sees  him  established  on  tbv  direction,  he  will  co»- 
■  I.  d:  * 

Right  -  Dress. 

372.  At  this,  the  left  company  will  dicss  forward  on  the  alignm.-nt  of  the  right 
tampaaj  ;  th.  front  isnk  man.  «ho  may  find  hi  •  If  0|  |  m  !•  In  the  left  guide,  w.ll, 
without  preceding  l.i-    a  \.  lest  lighllf  his  b>  •  ast  sgainst  the  ?  ight  aim  of  this  p.. 

il.    captain  of  th                     ini   will  direct  it«  sjigament  na  this  man.  and  the  align 
m<  nt  being  aaanred,  h.-  w  ill  .  ommand.  Fkosjt  ;   but  not  quit  bis  i lion. 

373.  The  |  |  the  divisions  formed,  will  command 

I.Ml.l*.       I'osts 

374.  At  this,  the  guide*  *  h<>  have  mark  d  the  front*  of  div>»i«ns  w  ill  r.  torn  to  thru 
\  *  in  column,  t  h  It  t  guid  ..I  •  a<h  right  company  passing  lb  rough  th.  int.  rial  in 
U»  •  cntre  <>|   the  du  i-i.  i>,  ai.d  th"  captaiata  will  pla<  ■•■    7&. 

S7S.  The  Colonel,  from  th<  do  .•'"tine;  flank  n(  th*  rolumn.  will  sop<r  intend  th«-  gv» 
erai  «i.  cuti.m  ..I   lift    | 

376,  If  jh*  ante     ■  h    ir,    march,  instead  of  at  a  halt,  when    :  >ball  wk«b 

lo  l«nn.  -  »nH  • 

■aflbintM      2.   /  ,f,  rt,».;.oi..#.,  hy  ik,  U/i/mnk.     3.  MaMB  («r ahjaJN 
MaacHj 


100  !'^OL  OF  TOE   BATTALION — PAKT   III. 

ITT.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  right  companies  will  cnn.ir..mii,  Miri 
Maw.  the  captains  of  tin.'  left  companies  will  caution  thwir  companies  to/ace  by  the  left 
flank. 

378.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  COmptntCT  will  mark  time,  the  left  companies 
will  face  to  the  left  :  the  tnirtiJM  of  the  left  companies  will  each  see  his  company  file 
past  him,  and  when  it  has  cleared  the  column,  will  command  : 

Such  company,  by  the  riyht jlank — March.    ■ 
As  soon  as  the  divisions  are  formed,  the  colonel  will  command : 
4.  Forward,    h.  March. 

379.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  column  will  resume  the  gait  at  which  it  was  march- 
ing previous  to  the  commencement  of  the  movement.  The  guides  of  each  division 
will  remain  on  the  right  and  left  of  their  respective  COmpanil  »  :  the  left  guide  of  the 
right  company  will  pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  before  the  two  OOmpulH  ;ire 
united  ;  the  right  guide  of  the  left  company  will  step  into  the  rear  rank.  The  cap- 
tains will  place  themselves  as  prescribed  No.  7<>. 

Being  in  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  to  form  divisi 

380.  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  and.  instead  of  being  closed  in  mass,  is  at  full  or 
half  distance,  division?  will  be  formed  in  the  same  manner:  but  the  captains  of  the 
left  companies,  if  the  movement  be  made  in  quick  time,  after  commanding  Promt,  will 
each  piece  hitaself  before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  command,  1.  Such  company, 
fortrard.  '2.  <lui>lr  ri'/hi.  3.  Mauch.  If  the  movement  be  made  in  double  quick 
time,  each  will  command  as  soon  as  his  company  has  cleared  the  column  : 

1.   Such  company,  by  the  right jlank.     2.   March. 

381.  The  right  guide  of  each  left  company  will  so  direct  hi--  march  as  to  arrive  by 
the  >idf  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  right  company.  The  lift  company  being  nearly 
up  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  right  company,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  and  the  movement 
will  be  finished  as  prescribed  No.  371  and  following. 

382.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  inverse  means:  the 
right  companies  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribi  '1  shore  for  the  left  coiu- 

fianies :  and  the  two  gaides,  placed  respectively.  Before  the  right  and  left  files  of  eaCft 
eft  company,  will  faee  to  the  I. -ft.     At  the  command.  •  [#,  given  by  the  colonel, 

the  guides,  who  have  marked  the  front  of 'divisions,  and  the  captain.-,  vr ill  quickly  re- 
take their  places  in  the  column. 

:ts;i.  It  the  column  be  marching  at  full  distance,  the  divisions  will  be  formed  as 
prescribed  No.  190.  If  it  be  marching  at  half  distance,  the  formation  will  take  place 
by  the  commands  and  according  to  the  principles  indicated  No.  370;  If  the  column 
be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  companies  which  should  mark  time  will  march 
in  quick  time  by  the  commands  of  their  captains. 

liemarks  on  the  formation  of  divisions  from  a  halt. 

■84.  As  this  movement  may  be  considered  as  the  element  of  deployments,  it  ought 
to  lie  executed  with  the  utmost  accuracy. 

MB.  If  companies  marching  by  the  flank  do  not  preserve  exactly  their  distances, 
there  will  be  openings  between  the  tiles  at  the  instant  of  facing  to  the  front. 

B£6,  If  captain*  halt  their  companies  too  early,  they  will  want  space,  and  the  file* 
which  have  not  cleared  the  flanks  of  the  standing  companies  will  not  be  able  to  drew 
into  line  without  pushing  their  ranks  laterally. 

387.  If  on  the  contrary  the  companies  be  halted  too  late,  it  will  be  necessary  for 
them  to  Incline  BO  the  right  or  left  in  dressing ;  and  in  dcplo_\  inents,  either  of  these 
faults  would  lead  to  error  in  the  following  companies. 

868.  As  often  as  a  guide  shall  have  to  step  out  to  place  himself  before  his  subdivision 
in  order  to  mark  the  direction,  he  will  be" particularly  careful  to  place  himself  so  as  to 
be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  outer  files  ofthe  subdivision  when  they  shall  be  aligned  : 
if  be  take  too  much  distance,  and  neither  of  those  files  finds  itself' against  him,  the 
chiefs  of  the  subdivision  will  have  no  assured  point  on  which  to  direct  the  alignment. 


I«  h»i 

tit 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   IV.  101 

PART  FOURTH. 

Different  modes  <f  passing  from  the  order  in  caiman  to  the order 

in  battle. 

Article  First. 

Manner  cf  d<t<rmiiiing  tin  li?ie  of  batth  . 

9,  The  line  of  battle  may  bo  marked  or  determined  in  three  different  iranner?  : 
\tt.  by  placing  two  markers  eighty  or  a  hundred  peew  apart,  <>n  the  direction  it  is 
wished  to  give  to  the  line:  2r/.  by  placing  a  marker  at  the  point  at  which  it  may  be 
intended  to  reet  a  flank,  and  then  choosing  a  second  point  toward-',  or  beyond  the  op- 
posite flank,  and  there  posting  a  second  marker  distant  from  each  other  a  1  i 1 1 1  •  -  le»l 
than  the  leading  subdivision  ;  3d,  by  choosing  at  first  the  points  of  direction  for  the 
flanks,  and  then  d(  t  riuining.  by  intermediate  points,  the  straight  line  between  those 
selected  points,  both  of  which  may  sometimes  be  beyond  reach. 

Artici  k  Skcosp. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  full  a  \0to  line, 

of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  ] 

2.  On  the  right  (orTeft)  e  of  battle. 
.1.    forward, 

4.   Faced  U>  the  rear,        J 

1st  Column  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the  left  into  line 

of  battle. 

SM.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  'hall  wish  to  form 
it  to  the  left  into  line,  he  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  by  the  means  previ- 
ously Indicated,  and  then  command  : 

].   Left  into  live,  trheel.     2.    MARCH  (or  double  quick—  March.  ) 
Stl.    At  -  rand,  the   ri,_rht   guide  of  the  leading  Company  will  hasten  to 

r  la"   himself  on  the  direction  of  the  left  guides  of  the  column,  face  to  theni.  and  place 
MSBttlf  K  ;i  U)  one  of  the  three   right  Bid  of   nil  OOSBpaay,  »li(ii  they 

shall  be  in  line  :   he  will  be  assured  in  thai  ) ■' ■- 1 1 1 < >it  by  the  lieutenant  color,'  1. 

3'.'7.  At  th<>  fommand  march,  brisklT  repeated  by  the  captains,  the  left  front  rank 
man  of  each  company  will  face  to  the  (eft.  and  re't  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right 
arm  of  his  gnidp  :  the  companies  will  wbeel  to  the  lefl  on  the  principle  of  wheeling 
from  a  halt,  conforming  themselves  to  what  i  ■         ■ 
23f-» :  each  captain  will  turn  to  his  company .  to  obw 
and.  _'bt  of  the  f 

he  will  command  : 

L  2.   Ilii.T. 

the    captain  will    place  himsrlf  on    the   line  by  the 
I    ■        hi  of  the  company  next  on  the  right,  align  I  cor- 

rectly, and  command  : 

3.  Mi§kt—  Dams. 

I     At  this  command,  tits  company  will  'li'.'sn; 
rank  man  on  it"  left,  the  rartain  ■'■ 
man  on  the  right  of  tl 
will  lightly  re«i  his  breast  again't  the  left  arm  of  this  guide. 

a;  tain,   having   aligr.rd   his   •  ^nd   the 

'  will  add  : 

■ 

will  tnomentaril i  j  Btsjssanl 

l*hinH  t  lie  uirif  fib  .        7  /..■■'■  .•■.•>•-»    .  -  •  >      rti  ii-ir,«in*ii«fflii.i  '■    '  ,   r  » 

"n  companies  form  UaH 

two  ptc^f  fr„I0  the  ;*a.i  rar.k  U  rofhciently  aseure  Uv 


102  SCHOOL   OP  TUB   BATTALION — PAB1    !V. 

39R.  The-  battalion  being  correctly  aligned.  Hi  •  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and  ma- 
jor, as  well  «.«  the  adjutant  mid  sergeant  BMBJm  .  m  ill  i  etui  n  to  their  respeetn  s  places 
in  line  «'  battle.       Thi    rule  »',  general  for  nil  the  formoiou-,  into  (ln«  o/"  tutto?  ;  n    \.r- 

tli  lew,  the  battalion  being  in  the  scnoalof  the  elementary  iutiuction,  tl  I 

»ill  go  In  a  in    poial  h  ■  may  deem  neOMMTJ. 

3U9.  A  column,  with  tin-  Ml  in  front,  will  Inrm  itself  to  tkr  right  turn  line  of  battle, 
accoiding  to  the  ane  principles \  the  left  guide  of  th.'  1.  tt  company  n  ill  place  him- 
self, at  the  fust  comma)  il.  on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides  in  a  manner  i  or  res- 
ponding'.o  xx  hat  is  pi  iki  ibid.  .No.  391,  fot  the  right  guide  ol  the  right  company, 

400.  At  the  command  ./nh/««  BO 'ft,  the  captains  \x  ill  take  their  places  in  line  of 
battle  as  will  if  the  guides,  Tmi*  tnle  U  pSOSfof  /or  Off  formation*  into  line  oj  LattU 
in  vhiih  the  roatpOHW<  art  aligned  by  the  left, 

401.  A  column  bv  division  Dial  form  itadf  into  line  of  battle  by  the  same  commands, 
and  means,  but  observing  what  follows:  if  the  right  be  in  front,  at  the  command  halt. 

givi  n  hx  the  (  htefl  M  1 1  i  \  i.-ion,  the  bit  guide  of  cat  h  i  ight  lompanv  \\  ill  place  hill  -'If 
on  the  alignment  opposite  to  one  ol  the  three  tile-  on  th     left  01   bil  CompaOV      the  I   ft 

guide  oi  the  first  company  will  be  •spared  on  the  direction  bj  the  lieutenant  eohn    I; 

the  I. ft  guides  of  the  oth' r  »"  i  tT  1 1 1  companies  \x  ill  align  th  ms-lves  eorrcctl)  OB  the 
dix  ision  guidi  s  :  to  this  end,  the  division  guides  (on  the  alignment  will  invci  t.  and 
hold  their  pit  us  up  perpindiiulai  l\  before  the  centre  of  theii  nodi  t,atthecoaat        1 

left  into  line,  trhetl.      If  th     column   b»   dix  i.-ion   be  with    the    bit    in    front,   the    right 

guided  of  I  .-it  oontpanies  vyill  conform  themai  1»  s  In  «  bat  ba-  just  bei  n  pre*  i  ib  d  ior 
the  I  t  guides  of  i  iarfal  companies,  and  place  Ihemselrcs  on  the  line  opposite  to  one  of 
the  three  i  ight  filet  ol  their  reap  ctive  oompani  s. 

402.  A  column  in  maieh  will  be  formed  into  line,  without  halting,  bv  the  same  com- 
mands and  im-anx.  At  the  command  mat-cA,  the  guid  s  vx  ill  halt  in  th,  ii  places,  and 
the  li>  utenant  colon   I  will  promptly  rectify  theii   positions. 

403.  If.  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  forward, 
without  halting,  be  xx  ill  command: 

1.   lly  vomjiomei  left  B heel.      2.  MakCII  (or  sfetaVa  quiet—  Ma>OH«) 

404.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  thecaptains,  each  compani  v.ill 
w  li  1 1  "o  (he  left  on  a  fixed  pivot   as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  th  ■  company,  No.  261  ; 

the  bit  guide  will  Step  back  into  the  lank  ol  file  closeis  before  the  wheel  is  COBB* 
plet'-d,  and  when  the  right  of  the  couipaniea  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  the  cnlnnoi 
will  coinmand  : 

3.    Forward.      4.    M  \ i.cn .      f>.    (,'uitle  <ent-e. 

405.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  in.-tant  the  wheel  is  completed,  the  com- 
panies will  match  directly  to  the  front.  At  tin-  fifth  Command,  the  color  and  the 
general  guides  w  ill  move  rapidlx  six  paces  to  the  fiont.  The  Colonel  w  ill  assure  the 
direction  of  the  color,  the  captains  of  companies  and  the  men  xxill.  at  once,  conform 
thev. selves  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  ol  battle,  to  be  hereinafter  indicated, 
No,  587,  and  following. 

406.  The  same  principles  arc  applicable  to  a  column  left  in  Front. 

By  inversv/n  to  fJie  ritjJit  (or  ftfi)  intt>  line  of  hctftle. 

407.  Wi  en  a  column,  right  in  front,  shall  be  tinder  the  necessity  of  forming  Itself 
into  line  lac  d  to  the  ri  vetse  Bank,  and  the  colonel  .-hail  n  i.-h  to  exi  cute  this  loi  (na- 
tion bv  the  choi  test  inovi  ment.  he  xx  il!  command  : 

1.    lly  inrrr-ton,  right  into  line,  it  heel.      2.    Battalion,  guide  right. 

40ft.  At  tin-  fiist  command,  the  Heatearal  colonel  xxill  place  himself  in  front,  and 
facing  to  the  i  i^ht  s^iide  <»t  the  It  Biting  wbdlvistno  ;  at  the  second  command,  be  will 

rectilx  ,  as  pi  on  ptlx  as  possil  b  ,  the  dil  ection  of  the  i  ig lit  guides  uf  the  column  ;  the 
captain  of  the  odd  company,  if  th  re  be  one.  and  the  column  be  bv  division  will 
pionptlx  b  ing  the  lighted  his  company  on  the  diiection.  and  at  compani  distance 
from  the  dix  i.-ion  next  in  front  ;  the  left  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  xxill  place 
himsill  mi  (be  direction  of  the  right  guides,  and  \x  ill  be  as.-ui  e.  in  his  position  b^  tho 
lit  utenant  Oulonel  ;  vxhii  h  being  wr<  cuted.  the  colon  I  xxill  comman  I  : 
.'!.  M  Mien  (or  double  quirk-—  M  Alien.  } 
403.  At  this,  the  right  front  rank  nan  of  each  subdivision  will  facr  to  the  ripht, 
rest  his  breast  light  1 1  against  the  left  aim  of  bia  guide,  and  the  battalion  will  form 
it-  If  to  the  lie  hi  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed;  which 
being  executed,  the  colonel  will  comr  and: 

Cuidti—  To  If« 


SCHOOL    op   Tll«-:   BMTALroX — PART   TV.  1015 

410.  If  the  column  bo  with  th  ■  h-ft  in  front,  it  will  form  it-elf,  by  invorainn,  to  the 
loft  into  1  in  '.  according  to  th'-  same  princit'l'**- 

411.  If  the  colonel  -hoi'd  i\  i.*h  the  battalion,  when  fortned  into  lin.-  af  battle,  to  ho 
moved  forward  the  movtn.  nt  will  he  executed  bv  the  command*,  and  according  tt» 
th  •  ni  inripl  «  indicated  in  No.  403;  always  preceding  tho  coin  .  and,  by  aompamii* 
right  (or  l'ft)  trhrrl,  by  the  rommnnd.  fcy  ini'fr.ton. 

Succe.s.siv'}  formations, 

4 1  "2.    Under  th"  denomination  of  successive  formations  arc  included  all  those  forma- 
tion* wh  m  ••  t!>  •  iev«ral  aubdirinlnna  of  a  column  arrive   one  after  anoth   i   on  th  •  line 
o(  hn'tl  ■ :   WCTI  are  foi  mat  ions  on  the  tight,  or  left,  forward  and  faced  to  the  i  ear  iiilo 
iMtrle,  a«  «ri  II  as  deployment*  of  cohnnne  in  ma*s.  _ 

413.  The  aneceaaive  formations  which  mar  be  ordered  when  the  column  i"  marching, 
an*'  i*  to  continue  marching,  will  be  •  »  ento  d  by  a  combination  of  the  t«  o  jtaits.  y«r)  h 
xn>\  •!'•  i>  quick  time. 

2'/.  Column  at  full  distance^  '»>  lie  right,  (or  en  the  Irfi.)  iu/n 

UlW  of  huJltc. 

414.  A  column  hv  companv,  a'  full  distance  and  i  ight  in  front,  having  to  form  it  self 
on  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  the  colon.  1  will  indicate  to  th  lieutenant  onion  I  a 
littl  in  advance,  th"  point  of  trppiti,  or  rest,  lor  th,'  light,  as  well  as  tie-  point  of  < I ■ — 
rcrtinn  to  the  I  ft  ;  the  li  lutenanl  colonel  u  ill  baMten  n ith  two  mat  kcta.  and  exUbli  a 
th   m  in  the  following  manner  on  the  direoiion  indicated. 

4l."i.  Th  •  M; -i  marker  will  he  planed  at  the  point  of  n/tpni  for  the  right  front  rank 
aaaa  «t   tlv  1  -ading  compmiv  ;    th  ■    second  will    indicat"    ill      point  wher  ■    one    of   tho 
lino  1*U  fi|e»  ol   tin  saitw  Com  pant   will  r  ft  \\h  n    in   tin'  :    they  will  be  placed  so  aa 
•  nt  th  •  i  ight  shoulder  to  the  battalion  «  hen  formed. 

4JA  Tbcae  dtatpoaitioni  being  made,  the  oolonei  will  command  : 

I.     (9a    ihr  rxnht.  into   r»*«.      2      i!n  tnHmt .  gitidt  right, 

417.  At  th»  second  command,  th  •  right  will  become  ihe  directing  flank,  and  t h« 
touch  ol  th    elbow  will   In-  to  that  aide  :    ih  ■  right  guide  of  the  I   .iding  company  will 

'  -ti  sight  foi  ward  until  up  with  th ••  turning  point,  and  each  following  guioe  w  ill 
■  In  the  trace  o4  the  one  immediately  preceding. 

418.  The  lending  companv  being  nearly  up  with  the  drat  marker,  its  captain  will 
enmrrand  ;  1.  Kiijht  turn,  and  w  lien  th  ■  company  is  preeUely  up  with  this  ruai  ker, 
ho  «  ill  add  :   2  If  4 

419.  At  th  •  command  mnrrk,  the  companv  will  turn  to  the  rifdat;  the  right  guide 
wfll  an  direct  him >  li  aa  to  bring  th  •   man  uezt  t    bim  opposite  to  the  i  ight  aaa   • 
and  nli.j  .i |  -  from  hi  n,  the  captain  «ill  command; 

1.     Fir»t  «im|«i»y.       2.     llst.T. 

I  mmaiid.  ih.-  companv  will   hall  :    the  files,  not  vot  in  lin*.  will 

form  ;li     k-U  gmde  will  n-tire  as  a  Me    doner;   and   the   capi.nn  «  ill    ill   n 

and  : 

ft,   a?t**fa     Dm 

411  mi   w  ill    align   ita  If;    th.-  ta 

to  th  two  inoHt»ra.  Will  oweb  light  I     r««at  hia  I 

»  '      captain.  pa««ing  to  ti,  •  light  oi  the  front  tank    >■  ill 

th     align" 

i.«m  win  continue  to  march  straight   forward  i   wh  n   en       4 

'li     i   fi  fin  k  ••)   ih     preceding   companv.  it  will   tw  « 

*-  I,  1.   1  >•  - 1    b  cp  pni       '•    I      th     1  ight 
••me  upon  that    I  (h      in.in 

I  in.  . 

,.'    i»,-,.e    •  I  t>,„    ro-np«m    "ill    !w> 

in    on     (lie 

•     and  »hg  1  bimi 
i    *     T»       U   1    gnid  •  will,    at    ' 
Ic't  '  ••<  .  and  («r  w  ill  place  hum.  't  <•■ 

'  o  w  ill  then  comw 

—  »«t«». 


104  SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION* — PART   IV. 

426.  At  tliis  command.  the  second  company  will  dross  forward  on  the  line:  the  cap- 
tain will  direct  its  alignment  on  the  front  rank  man  who  has  rested  his  breast  ag.un.t 
the  left  guide  (if  the  company. 

417.  The  following  oompaniei  will  thus  come  successively  to  form  themselves  on  the 
line  of  battle,  each  conforming  itself  to  what  has  _ju»t  bees  prescribed  for  the  one  next 
to  the  right;    and  when  they  shall  all  be  established,  the  colonel  will  command: 

(t'ui,irt       l'i'M«. 

42s.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the 
marker.*  placed  before  the  right  company  will  retire. 

429  If  the  column  lie  marching  in  i|uick  time,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause 
the  movement  to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  he  w  ill  add  the  command  :  Double 
quick — Mabcb.  At  the  command  marrh.  all  the  companies  will  take  the  double  quick 
step^  and  the  movement  will  he  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  417,  and  following. 

430.  The  colonel  will  follow  up  th  •  formation,  passing  along  in  front,  and  being  al- 
wa\  ■  opposite  to  the  company  about  to  turn  :  it  is  thus  that  he  will  be  the  he  tier  ablo 
to  see  and  to  correct  the  error  that  would  result  from  a  command  given  too  soon  or 
too  late  to  the  preceding  company. 

431.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will,  with  the  greatest  care,  assure  the  direction  of  the 
guides  ;  to  this  end,  the  instant  that  the  markers  are  established  for  the  leading  com- 
pany, he  will  move  a  little  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  next  company  will 
rest,  establish  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers,  and  assure 
the  guide  of  the  second  company  on  this  direction  ;  this  guide  being  assured,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  will  place  himself  farther  to  the  rear,  in  order  to  assure,  in  like  tian- 
ner,  the  guide  of  the  third  company,  and  so  on  successively,  to  the  left  of  th*  batta- 
lion. In  assuring  the  guides  in  their  positions  on  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  take  care 
to  let  tliem  first  place  themselves,  and  confine  himself  to  rectifying  their  positions  if 
they  do  not  cover  accurately,  and  at  the  proper  distance,  the  preceding  guides  or 
markers.      Thin  ride  M  general  for  all  «i<rce«itr«  formation*. 

432.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle  according 
to  the  same  principles  :  the  captain  will  go  to  the  left  of  their  respective  companies  to 
align  them,  and  shift  afterwards  to  their  proper  Hanks,  as  prescribed,  No.  400. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  on  the  right,  or  left,  into   line   of 

battle . 

433.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  executed  with  regularity,  it  is  necessary 
to  establish  the  line  ol  battle  so  that  the  guide  of  each  company,  after  turning,  raay 
have  at  least  ten  steps  to  take,  in  Order  to  come  up  to  that  line. 

434.  In  the  first  exercises,  the  line  ol  battle  will  be  established  on  a  direction  parallel 
to  that  of  the  column  :  hut  when  the  captains  and  guides  shall  comprehend  the  me- 
chanism of  the  movement,  the  colonel  will  generally  choose  oblique  directions,  in  order 
to  habituate  the  battalion  to  form  itself  in  any  direction. 

4:i'i.  When  the  direction  of  tin-  line  of  battle  forms  a  sensible  angle  with  that  of  the 
march  of  the  column,  the  colonel,  before  beginning  the  movement,  will  give  the  head 
of  the  column  a  new  direction  parallel  to  that  line  :  to  this  end.  lie  will  indicate  t'>  the 
guide  of  the  leading  company  a  point  in  advance,  on  which  this  guide  will  immediately 
direct  himself,  and  the  company  w  ill  conform  Itself  to  the  direction  of  its  guide,  at  the 
command,  or  on  a  mere  caution,  of  the  captain,  according  as  the  change  of  direction 
may  require  :  each  following  company  will  make  the  same  movement,  on  the  same 
ground,  as  it  shall  successively  arrive.  By  this  means  the  guide,  of  all  the  companies 
in  the  column  will  have,  after  turning,  nearly  the  same  number  of  paces  to  take  in 
order  to  come  upon  the  line  of  battle. 

430.  Evert  captain  will  alwayi  obserye,  in  placing  himself  on  that  Una,  not  to  give 
the  command  Un.**,  until  after  the  guide  of  his  company  shall  have  been  assured  on  the 
direction  by  the  lieutenant  colonel.      7' hi*  rule  it  e/susraf/or  all  taessssMrs  formation*. 

437.  Each  captain  will  cause  his  company  to  support  arms,  the  instant  that  the  cap- 
tain, who  follows  him,  shall  hare  commanded  front.  Thit  rule  it  yencrat  for  all  »«c- 
remM-f  formation*.  , 

438.  When  in  the  excution  of  this  movement,  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  commence 
firing,  he  will  give  the  order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain  whose  company  is  the  first 
in  line  of  battle:  this  captain  will  immediately  place  himself  behind  the  centre  of  his 
company,  and  as  soon  ae  the  next  captain  shall  have  commanded fr oh tt  he  will  com- 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION — PART   IV.  105 

mencc  the?firo  by  file,  by  tli  I  command*  prescribed,  school  of  the  company.  At  the 
command  /?>e  by  file,  the  marker  at  the  outer  tile  of  thin  first  company  will  retire,  and 
the  other  will  place  himself  against  the  nearest  man  ot  the  next  company  The  cap- 
tain of  the  latter  wilt  commence  tiring  as  soon  as  the  captain  of  the  third  company,  in 
line,  shall  hare  commanded  front)  tin-  marker  before  the  nearest  tile  of  the  second 
compnnv.  in  line,  will  now  retire,  and  the  guide  before  the  opposite  flank  will  place 
himself  before  the  nearest  file  nf  the  third  company,  in  line,  ana  so  on,  in  continuation, 
to  the  last  company  on  the  left  or  right  of  the  battalion,  according  as  the  formation 
may  have  commenced  with  the  rijrht  or  left  in  front. 

439.  In  all  the  successive  formations,  the  same  principles  will  be  observed  for  the 
execution  of  the  fire  by  file.  This  fire  will  always  be  executed  by  the  command  of 
each  captain  of  company. 

3d.   Column  at  full  distance,  forward  into  line  of  battle. 

440.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  forward  into  line,  he  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
Sos.  414  and  Ilk,  and  then  command  : 

1.   Forward  into  line.     2.   By  company,  left  half  vh*e\.     3.   March  (or  doubh  quick — 

M  1 1 

441.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  add — §midt  right, 
put  the  company  in  march,  halt  it  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and  align  it  against 
the  latter  by  the  right. 

442.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed 

fiirots;  and,  at  the  instant  the  colonel  shall  jndge,  according  to  the  direction  of  the 
inc  of  battle,  that  the  companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  command: 

4.    Forward.      5.    M*RCH.      6.    Guide  right. 

443.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  ceasing  to  wheel,  will  march  straight  for- 
ward :  and  at  thesixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right.  The  right  guide 
of  the  second  company,  who  is  nearest  to  the  line  of  battle,  will  march  itraight  fur- 
ward:  each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately  before  him  at  the 
cessation  of  the  trheeC 

444.  The  second  compay  having  arrived  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  cap- 
tain will  cause  it  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the  line  of  battle  ;  anil 
when  its  rijrht  guide  shall  be  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.    Sec  ond  company.      2.    Halt. 

445.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt  :  the  files  not  vet  in  lire  with 
the  guide  will  come  into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
battle,  so  as  to  Vie  opt  osite  to  one  of  the  three  tile-  on  tie  left  of  the  company  :  and  as 
soon  a«  he  is  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  captain,  having 
placed  himself  arrutately  on  the  line  of  battle,  will  command: 

I 
44fi.   At  the  in«tant  that  the  guide  of  :!  mpany  begi  is  to  turn  to  the  right, 

the  guide  of  the  third,  rra'ing  to  follow  thr  file  immediately  before  him,  will  match 
sfright  forward  :    and.  when  he  »hall  an  ;  to  the  left  of  tbe  second,  hi 

tain  will  canst  the  companv  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the 
tic,  halt  it  at  three  pans  from  that  line,  and    align    it   b/    the  i  -1  for 

ond  company. 
447.   Isrl,  following  company    will  execute    what   has 
third.  a«  th<  ,  *nv  shall  turn  to  the  right,  id  order  to  approach  ti 

of  battle,  v 

14ft.   The  formation  ended,  tbe  colonel  will  command  : 

■ 
449.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will     Wrvein  this  formation,  what  i< 
■iHked  for  th<  m  or,   tt  '  .w . 

\       ■lomn  left  in  front,  will  form  itiK-lf  forw»-  g  to 

the  i»n  ■  -    r«r  means. 

«  mpany  at  ft  r,t,  and  in  i 

and 
,  themselves  to  what  is  * 

I  The  head  of  the  column  bsvtstg  diitasrtt  from  the  two 


10(5  SCHOOL    OF   TIIK    B\TTAIJ0N — PART   IV. 

I.    Funrnrd  into  line.     2.    Ily  company  left  half  irheel.      3.   M  ARCH  (or  doithlt  quick — 

March.  1 
4 r> rj .    At  th<- first  command,  the  Captain  of  the  first  eompanv  will  command,  (iuide 
right,  and  caution  it  to  ma  ch  directly  to  the  front,  the  captains  of  the  other  comi  a- 
ni' s  will  motion  th  m  to  wheel  to  the  1  ft. 

454.  At  th'- command  march,  briskly  repeated  bf  the  cartains,  the  first  oompaujr 
will  continue  to  niar<  li  t  i  the  front.  taking  tli  ■  touch  ol  elbows  to  the  right.  Its  chief 
w>ll  halt  it  at  three  par  *  Iron  the  Barken,  an  I  align  it  bf  th  I  i  ight.  The  other  root* 
pani  -s  will  wheel  to  th  •  1ft  on  fixed  pivots,  and  at  the  instant  the  colonel  shall  judge 
that  they  have  wheeled    it  lietehtl.V,  he  will  coiqtnaml  : 

4.    Forward.      5.    March.      8.    Quid*  right. 

455.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  will  cease  to  wheel  anil  move  forward. 
At  the  sixth,  they  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right  The  movement  will  be 
executed  as  previously  explained. 

4.)6.  It  th--  colonel  should  wish  to  form  the  column  forward  into  line,  and  to  continue 
to  ma!  eh  in  ibis  oi  d-r.  h  •  will  not  cause  ma.kis  to  !>•  established:  th  •  movenu  nt 
wi'l  ti  •  Pi  eut.-d  in  ttonbU  yuick  time,  bv  the  same  commands  and  ui.-ans,  'nut  with  the 
followii  g  modilications: 

4.',7.  At  th"  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  wi  I  add  quick  ti  ft*  alter 
the  command  guide  right.  At  the  Bccond  command  the  first  company  will  continue 
to  march  in  quick  time,  and  will  take  the  tout  h  of  elbows  to  the  i  ight  ;  its  i  hi  •!  will 
imutedi  teir  place  himself  on  its  right,  and  to  assure  the  march  will  take  points  of 
direction  to  th  ■  front.  The  captain  of  th  ■  s  'cond  company  will  cause  his  company  f> 
tak  •  Ihe  same  pa  it  a>  soon  as  it  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  tir-t.  and  will  also  more 
to  the  right  of  his  eompanv  ;  th  •  captains  n  th  •  third  and  fourth  companies  will  ex- 
ecute sneceaeivi  Iv  what  has  just  b  en  prescribed  lor  the  second.  The  Companies  will 
preserve  the  touih  of  elbows  to  the  right,  until  the  command,  guide  centre. 

4"iS.  When  the  color  company  shall  have  enti  r  d  tic  line,  the  colonel  w  ill  command 
guid'  >„„tre.  At  ibis  command,  the  color-bearer  and  the  I  i-ht  general  guide  will  move 
rapid) <  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  line.  The  colonel  will  assure  th  •  direction  vf  the 
color-hearer.  The  li  *utenant  colon  1  and  the  right  compani'8  will  immediately  con- 
form themselves  to  the  principles  of  th  •  march  in  line  of  battle.  The  left  companies 
and  th  ■  1  d't  general  guide,  as  they  arriv  on  the  line,  will  also  conform  to  th  •  same 
principles,  [f  the  column  be  ma  ching  in  double  quick  time,  wh"n  the  last  company 
shaN  have  arrived  OH  the  line,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  double  quick  to  be  re- 
sumed. 

4-Vi.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  movement  he  entirely  completed,  b  forehalfinir  the 
battalion.  As  soon  as  the  part  of  tie  battalion  already  formed  shall  have  arrived  on 
the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion;  the  companies  not  in  line  will 
each  complete  the  movement. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  forward,  info  line  of  hattfe. 

400.  Th  •  precison  of  this  movement  depends  on  the  direction  the  com  pa  is.  have  at 
th*  moment  the  colonel  commands  forward— March.  The  colonel  w  ill  judge  nic  ly 
the  point  of  time  for  giving  this  command,  observing  that,  if  the  direction  ot  the  line 
of  battle  form  with  that  of  tli  •  column  a  right,  oi  n  arl\  aright  angle,  tV  compani  s 
ought  to  whe  1  about  tin'  eighth  ol'  the  circle,  and  that  th  more  acute  the  angel 
foi  im  d  b\    lb  ■  two  •  iri'Ctinna,  so  much  the   more  the  companies  ought  to  wheel  belore 

mat  chins;  -t>  sight  forward. 

4<il.  It  is  im  per  tan  t  that  each  company  in  marching  towards  the  line  of  battle  should 
turn  exactly  opposite  th  point  where  its  captain  ought  to  place  himself  on  that  line; 
if  a  company  turn  too  soon,  it  will  find  its  If  n  a-k  d.  in  pa- 1  by  that  which  preceded 
it  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  be  oblig  d  to  unna-k  itself  by  the  oblique  step  ;  if  it  turn 
too  late,  it  will  leave  an  interval  h  tween  its.  li  and  the  preceding  company  to  be  re- 
pain  I'd  in  like  manner.  In  either  case,  the  n  xt  company  will  be  led  into  error,  and 
the  fault  propagated  to  the  opposite  flank  of  the  battalion. 

492.  The  guide  of  each  company  ought  so  to  •  egulate  himself  in  turning,  as  to  bring 
his  company  to  the  halting  point  parall   Ily  with  the  line  of  battle. 

IPS.  If  the  angle  formed  by  the  line  of  battb;  and  the  pi  inrtivc  direction  of  the 
column  be  so  acute,  that  Ihe  companies  on  arriving  opposite  to  their  respective  plac  s 
on  the  line  o''  battle,  find  themselves  nearly  pat  and  to  it,  the  captains  will  not  give 
th.'  command,  right  (or  left)  turn,  but  each  hilt  his  company,  place  himself  on  the  line, 
and  command  : 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    BATTALION —PART    IV.  107 

Might  (or  Uft)  —  Dam, 

464.  If,  on  the  contrary,  th- angle  formed  bv  th  •  line  of  battlf*  and  the  primitive 
di,  i  ction  of  thi-  column  be  Bucfa  greater  than  a  right  angle,  th  •  formation  should  be 
executed,  not  In  the  nu'vcni'  atfonrvrtl  in  "  I  in*  of  i'ati  e  I  ut  b'  that  of  o  the  right  (or 
lift)  itno  lint  of  bnttlc,  and  according  to  th    pt  incipU'8  prescribed  for  this  formal  ion. 

405.  It  a  company  encounter  an  obstacl  •  sn  fici  >nt  to  prevent  it  fr<. in  inarching  by 
the  'Votit,  it  uill  right  (or  left)  fore  in  marching. by  th  ■  com  >  and*  and  means  indi  ated 
in  the  school  or  the  company,  Nos.  314  and  315.  The  guide  will  continue  to  follow 
the  same  file  behind  which  h-  was  marching  and  will  maintain  exactly  tho  same  dis- 
tance from  the  company  immediately  preceding  Ilia  own.  Thfl  obstacle  being  parsed, 
tli'   company  will  be  formed  into  line  by  th  \  command  of  its  captain. 

Ath.  Qt/lumn  at  full  distance, faved  to  the  rear,  info  five  of  luifle. 

4^6.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt.  a  h*n 
th  ■  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he  and  th  •  li  *n t  nai.t  coto- 
n  I  will  conform  th  tins  he*  to  what  is  prsscrib  id  Nos.  414  and  415.  and  th  oolonel 
will  t'len  wimi  and  : 

1.    Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.      2.    liitlta  inn,  rifjht — Face.      3.    Miiirn  (orrfoefcV  quick 

—  Mm. en.  | 

407.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  cause  it  to  faco 
to  th  right,  snd  put  it  in  march,  causing  it  In  \\  heel  by  Ale  to  the  left,  and  di  'Ci  its 
.  towardi  ill  •  line  ol  battle  which  it  will  paw  in  rear  of  the  I  'ft  marker ;  1 1  •  •  first 
fill-  having  pawed  three  paces  beyond  th  •  lin  .  the  company  will  wheel  again  by  tde 
1"  th  ■  left,  in  order  to  place  its  If  in  rear  of  th  •  two  mat  Ken;  being  in  this  po-i  ion, 
its  captain  will  halt  it,  lace  it  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against  th  ■  ma   k   is. 

1>>.  At  th  •  w ootid  i  nmmsrtd,  all  th"  other  companies  will  face  to  the  right,  sad 
caMain  placing  himsi  II  bl  the  lide  of  bis  i  ight  guide. 

4<;f).  At  the  command  mnrrh,  the  companies  will  put  themselves  jn  movcmi  nt  ;  the 
left  guide  of  the  «  Ton  I.  who  is  nearest  to  the  line  or  battl  ».  will  hasten  in  advance  to 
r  ai  k  that  line  :  bewillpLic  himself  on  it  as  orescrib.'d  above  for  swe— aire  forma- 
lions,  aid  thus  indi<  ate  to  his  captain  th  •  point  a»  which  h  ■  ought  to  pass  the  line  of 
hattle.h-  three  ps  cis  inoidei  tow  he  I  In  file  to  the  left,  and  then  to  direct  his  com- 
pany  pal  all   111   t'>  that  lin-. 

4"rT.  As  sr>on  as  the  first  hi  •  of  this  company  idiall  hav  arrived  near  the  left  file  of 
the  preceding  one  already  on  th  •  line  of  battle,  its  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  company.     1.  Halt,     3.   Fno.;r.     4.   Right — •!» 

471  The  first  ca  nmand  will  he  g  inn  when  the  company  shall  yet  have  four  paces 
to  tane  to  r -ach  th  •  h  1 1 1 1 n _r  point. 

47.'.    At  th"  s  •oaad  • «  .,  nand,  th  •  company  will  hilt. 

473.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if  there  be  openings  h<v- 
twc.  n  the  files,  th  latter  will  prompt!*  close  to  th  •  right  ;  the  captain  will  imta  diate- 
ly  pis  b    th"  side  of  the  man  on  the  lett  of  the  preceding   oinpany,  and  align 

hies  If  on  its  front  rank. 

471.  Th  ■  fourth  e,,,n  i, and  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  r?«.  42fi. 

The  folhtwiag  eoHipani  s  will  be  enndut  t  d  and  established  on  the  line  ol  battle 
as  inst  prescribed  fo    'h    -  cond,   acb  regul&tiug  it>  I   l>    the  oar  that  precedes  itj  ihe 

I  It  guid.  s  w  ill  d  lafh  th  n  sell    n  in  tim"  to  pr«-ccd    th  ii  respective  coiupsni  :-<oi   he 
lin'i'  ■  ptces,  snd    a<  h  place  himself/so  as  to  be  oppoeil    I 

1   ft  lil   s  of  his  e.en  ,an\  .  w  h   n  in  lit,  •.      If  th*    n  >v  "ii   nt  h  •  el  ihlp 

quiek  tine,  th  •  mo  n  at  it  is  c  i.  imenced.  all  th.'  left  guid  "S   w  ill   d   t  if  h  th   ms  ll    s  *t 
■  "e  time  fiom  th"  column,  and  will  move  at  a  t  un.  i  lie  BaasivU  M  the 

line  ol    battle. 

47fi.    Th  •  formation  ended,  th     Colonel  will  eommand  : 

I '    • 
477.     The  colonel  and  Heat  nasi  colonel,  in  this   formation,  will  each  obi  i      what 

'     tl)   in   tli*t    if  "»  'he  r%  /hi    ,,.  |  aa 

■  f t.  will  form  itself  faced  to  the  rear  iota  Use  n    ha  t!    ac- 

C"  ding  to  th"  s»me  pi  m>  iph  s  and  In  inverse  means. 

4  71'.    If  the  column  h     in  march    and  -h  mil   mm  r  the  right  O     th     line 

on  which  ||  ittle,    th.    colon*!  and  lit  a  tenant  kotwuel  will  conform  to 

»b»t  ii  prescribed,  N««.  414  and  415. 


108  IffHssi    m    TIIF    BATTALION — PART   IV. 

(ML  When  the  head  of  the  column  shall  be  nearly  at  company  distance  from  the  two 
markers  established  00  the  line,  the  OQtsxM  1  will  command: 

1.    Into  line, factd  to  the  rear.      2.   Battalion,  by  the  right  jlank.      3.    March  (or  double 

quirk-      VI 

4*1.  At  the  first,  command,  the  captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  face  by  the 
right  flank. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of  companies,  all  the 
companies  "ill  face  to  the  right  j  the 'first  company  will  then  wheel  by  tilt'  to  the  left, 
and  be  directed  by  its  captain  a  little  to  the  rear  of  the  left  marker  :  then  pass  three 
pace?  beyond  the  line,  and  wheel  again  bv  file  to  the  left  :  having  arrived  on  the  line, 
the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and  align  it  t>v  the  right.  The  remaining  part  of 
the  movement  will  he  executed  as  heretofore  explained. 

483.  The  foregoing  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column,  left  in  front. 

4  S4.  As  the  companies  approach  the  line  of  battle,  it  is  neressarv  that  their  captains 
should  to  direct  the  march  as  to  cross  that  line  a  little  fa)  rear  of  their  respective  guides, 
who  are  faced  to  the  basis  of  the  formation  :  hence  each  guide  ought  to  detach  himself 
in  time  to  find  himself  correctly  established  on  the  direction  before  his  company  shall 
come  up  with  him. 

Articlb  TniitD. 
Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  two  movements. 

4f>.r>.  If  a  column  by  company,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  find  itself  in  part  on  the 
line  of  battle,  and  the  colonel  should  think  proper  to  form  line  of  battle  before  all  the 
companies,  enter  the  new  direction,  the  formation  will  be  executed  in  the  following 
manner: 

•Isfi.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  column  has  arrived  behind  the  line  of  battle,  and 
that  live  companies  hare  entered  the  new  direction.  The  colonel  having  assured  the 
guides  of  the  first  live  companies  on  the  direction,  will  command: 

1.    Left  into  line  ichecl.      2.    Three  rear  companitf,  forward  intoline. 

4*7.  At  the  second  command  the  chief  of  each  of  the  rear  companies  will  command  : 
1.    /.'//  rampant/,  left  half  irheel  ;   and  the  colonel  will  add: 

3.   March  (or  doublt  quiok — March-.) 
488.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  (he  first  five  companies  will  form  themselves 
to  the  left,  into  line  of  li>ittl*.  and  the    three    last  forward,    <»(«  KtM   >•/'  buttle,    by  the 
means  prescribed  for  these   respective    formations;  each  captain  of  the  three  rear 
companies  will,  (Then  his  company  shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  command  : 
1.    Foruard.     2.   March.     3.    1,'uide  riijht. 
189,   If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1  To  the  left,  and forirard  into  line.  1.  March  (or  double  quick— March.  } 
4'.i0.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  those  companies  which  have  not  entered 
on  the  new  direction,  will  command:  Hy  company,  left  half  irheel.  At  the  command 
march,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  five  companies  will  form  left  into  line,  and  the  last 
three  forward  intoline,  as  prescribed  for  these  respective  formations.  Those  captains 
who  form  their  companies  forward  into  line  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  488. 
491.  If  the  colonel  should  wish,  in  forming  the  battalion  Into  line,  to  march  it  im- 
mediately forward,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Hi/  company  tn  the  left,  and forirard  into  line.  2.  March. 
45)2.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain,  whose  company  is  not  yet  in  the  new  direc- 
tion, will  command  :  1.  Jly  cimpany,  hft  ha\f  vheel  ;  I,  Double  quick.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  briskly  repeated  by  tlie  captains,  the  companies  not  in  the  new  direction 
will  execute  what  is'  prescribed  above  for  forming  forward  into  line  while  marching  ; 
each  of  the  Oth«T  companies  Will  wheel  to  the  left  on  a  hied  pivot,  and  wheu  the  light 
of  these  companies  shall  arrive  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command  : 
3.   Forward.     4.   March.     5.    Guide  centre. 

493.  The  fifth  command  will  be  given  when  the  color-bearer  arrives  on  the  line,  if 
not  already  there. 

494.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  colonvl  will  cause  quick 
time  to  betaken  before  commencing  the  movement. 


8CH00L   OF   TIIE   BATTALION— PART   IV.  109 

495.  If,  inMcad  of  arriving  behind,  the  column  should  arrive  before  the  line  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    L'ft  into  \ine,  irhct\.      2.    Three  rear  rompanie>,  into  lire  fared  to  the  rear. 

49fi.    At  the  second  command,  the  captain   of  each  of  the  three  rear  companies  will 
command:   1.   .Such  company  ;    1.   Right — Face.     The  colonel  will  th-jn  ada  : 
3.   March  (or  douh\e  quirk — March.) 

407.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  five  compsniea  will  form  them- 
selves to  the  le/i  info  line  n/'  l,ntt\r,  and  the  three  \a*t  fared  to  the  rear,  iutoline  of  batt\e, 
by  the  means  prescribed  ("or  these  respective  formations. 

498.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    To  the  left,  nnd  into  tine,  fared  to  the  rear.      2.    MARCH  (or  double  quick — March.) 

499.  The  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  Nos.  391,  4S0,  and  following. 

500.  These  several  movements  in  a  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

ARTirr.B  Forum. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half  distance,  into 

line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right  ■>  ] 

2.  On  the  right  (or  left)  ...         .  ,     ... 
8.  Forward    by  deployment,          lnt°  1,ne  of  batt,e- 
4.  Faced  to  the  rear                    J 

1st.   Column  at   half  distance,  to  the  left   (or  right)  into  line  of 

battle. 

501.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form  itself  to  the  left  (or  right)  into  line 
of  batt.e.  the  colonel  will  eau-e  it  to  take  distances  by  one  of  the  means  prescribed. 
Article  IX..  Part  third,  of  this  school  :  which  being  exeeuted,  he  will  form  the  column 
into  line  of  battle,  as  has  been  iodicafc  '1.  N  ■.  W0j  and  following. 

502.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  be  in  march,  and  it  be  necessary  to 
form  rapidly  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   By  the  rear    •/  column    left    (or    right  |    into    line,  vhe'l.      2.   March    (or   doublt 

quirk— March.  ) 
50.1.   At  the  first  command,  the  right  general  guide  will  move  rapidly  to  the  front, 
and  place  himself  a  little  bevond   the   point    where   the  head  of  the  column  will  rest, 
and  on    the  prolongation    of  the  guides.     The  captain  of  the  eighth   company   will 
command:    Left  into  line,   'rhrel  ;    the  other  eaptains    will    caution  their  compare 
continue  to  march  to  the  front. 

504.   At  the  command   mnr'h,  briskly    repeated  by    the  eapt.iin  of  the  eighth  com- 
pany,  the  gmjdi  of  this  company  will  halt  short,  sum  the  company  will  wheel  to 
left,  conforming  to  the  principlci  prescribed  1..r  whaling  from  a  halt;   when  its  iijit 
shall  iniv  m  M  the  line,  the  eaptain  will   halt  the  company,  and  align  it  bv  the  left. 
The  other  esptmns  will   place  themselves  briskly  on  the  flank  <if  the  eolnmri  :    when 
the  I  .11  '.am  of  the  ■<  ventb  aeea  there   is  sufficient  distance   between    his  oorppar 
the  eighth  to  form   the  latter    into    line,    be    will    command:    Left  into  lint,  tek*t\ — 
i  ;    the  left  guide  will  halt  short,  and  faring  to  the  rear,  will  place  himself  ,,n  the 
the  company  will  wheel    to    the  left,  th.'   man   on  the  left  ol   the  front  rank 
fa"   ■ 

will  halt  thi  all  arrive  n>nr  the  line,   and  n  ill 

the  |„ft         i  tnptniM  will    e..nf..rm    i»rr,f 

scribed  for  the  seventh. 

h  eaptain  will  direet  the  alignment   of  his  company   on  the  left  man  in  the 
fr«nt  rank  of  the  eompany  next  on  hii  right. 

5fm    The  lieutenant  c  .lonel  will  be  watchful    that    the  leading  guide  r 
rately  on  the  prolongs. 

eral  guide.      The  rnsjor,  |.]»r»d   in  rur  t  -  „  , 

a*  toon  as  th*  guide  nf  company  it  establish' 

rear  of  tKe  guides  of  the  other  Companies,  »a  as  to  assure  each  of  them  in  —  noa—iea 
on  the  line. 


110  SCHOOL   OF   TIIK   BATTALION— PART   IV. 

2c/.    Column  (it  half  distance .  on  the  right  (<>r  left)  into  line  of 

bo/tlc. 

607.  A  column  at  half  distance  will   form  iUelf  on  the  right   (or  loft)  iuto  line  of 

haul-,  as  pi  i  so  iln-il  for  a  column  at  lull  distance. 

'Ad.    Column  nt  lailf  distmoc.   forward,  into  line  of  battle. 

60*.  If  it  be  wish -d  to  form  a  colirnn  at  half  distance,  forward  into  lin-*  ol  b:ittle, 
the  colonel  h  ill  first  eaOM  it  to  ttow  in  man  arid  then  deploy  it  on  the  loading  com- 
pany . 

Ath.  Column   at   half  distance,  focal  to  the  rear,  into  line  of 

bottle. 

509.  A  column  at  half  distance  w  ill  V  tunned  into  line  of  battle,  fae«tl  to  the  rear, 
a-  preset  ibed  lor  a  column  at  lu  1  distance. 

Article  Firm. 

Deployment  of  columns  dosed  in  mass. 

610.  A  column  in  mass  may  be  formed  into  line  of  battle  : 

1.  Faced  to  the  trout.  by  deployment. 

2.  Faced  to  the  rear,  by  the  countermarch  and  the  deployment. 

3.  Faced  to  the  ri^hl  and  faced  In  the  left,  by  a  change  of  direction  by  the  flank, 

and  the  deployment. 

511.  When  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  arrives  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is 
int  iiiUd  to  deploy  it,  the  colonel  will  indicate,  in  adv. me.-,  to  the  li  u  tenant,  colonel, 
the  direction  of  the  lin  ■  ol  battle,  as  well  as  th  •  point  on  which  he  may  wish  to  direct 
the  column.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  immediat  ly  d  taeh  himself  with  two  mark- 
er-, and  establish  them  on  that  line,  the  firat  at  the  point  indicate  .  the  second  a  little 
less  than  the  front  of  a  division  from  the  Brat. 

51'.'.  Deployments  will  alwaja  he  made  upon  lines  parallel,  and  lines  perpendicular 
to  the  Una  of  battle:  consequently,  if  the  load  of  the  column  be  ma.  th- line  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  commence  l>\  establishing  the  direction  of  the  column  perpea- 
diiulaih  to  that  line,  ii  it  be  not  ilrexah  to,  by  one  of  the  means  indicated,  No.  $44 
and  following,  •*  K«.  JOT  ami  following.  It  the  column  he  in  march,  he  will  so  direct 
it  that  it  mav  arrive  exactly  behind  th  markers,  perpendicularly  to  the  line  ol  battle, 
and  hall  it  at  three  pac.-s  from  that  line. 

513.  The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halt<d,  it  is  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes 
tr  <1  ploy  it  on  tin-  tii  -l  division  ;  he  will  order  the  left  general  guide  to  go  to  a  point 
on  th  line  ol  battle  a  little  be\  ond  that  at  which  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  rest 
wlun  deployed,  and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  markers  estab- 
lished before  the  lirst  division. 

614.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    (Jit  the  Jir*t  divirimk,   drjiXny   column.      2.    liattaMon,   lr/"<— F*CB. 

615.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  cantion  it  to  stand 
fast;  the  chiefs  of  the  three  other  divisions  will  remind  them  that  they  will  have  to 
face  to  the  left. 

61C.  At  the  second  command,  the  three  last  divisions  will  face  to  the  left;  the  chief 
of  each  division  w  ill  place  lums<  II  by  the  side  of  its  hit  guide,  and  the  junior  captain 
b\  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company,  who  will  have  stepped  into 
th"  ti  out  rank. 

617.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  a  third  markei  on  tho 
alignment  of  the  two  first,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  >igbt  coin- 
rnuipanv.  first  division,  and  then  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  a  few  paces 
beyond  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  second  division  will  rest. 

618.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

3.   March  (oi ■  d<,ul\t  yut'cA-—  Makch.  ) 

619.  At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divisiou  will  go  to  its  right,  and  com- 
mand : 


SCHOOL   OF   TIIK   BATTALION  — PART   IV.  Ill 

Right—  DitKSft. 

520.  At  thlsy  the  division  will  dress  up  against  thfl  markers;  roe  chief  of  the  divis- 
ion, and  its  junior  captain,  will  each  align  the  Company  on  its  left,  and  then  com- 
mand : 

Front. 

521.  Th*  throe  division",  faced  to  the  left,  will  put  theni»>ol»>og  in  march  ;  the  left 
guide  of  the  aeeood  will  direct  hisneelf  parall  II     to  the  line  at   hattl    ;   the  loft  guides 

ol  tli  -  tin,  d  and  tout  th  division*  will  inai  eh  abi  ast  with  th  •  guide  oi  the  second  ; 
tli  •  »ui(i  b  mI  the  thiid  and  fourth,  each  preserving  the  pnsei  ib,-d  di-tano  •  I  ctwven 
binis.-ll   and  the  guide  of  the  division  whi'h  prec,  d  d  his  own  in  th.-columr. 

MS,   The  chief   n    the  r,  cond  division  will    not   follow  its  movement  :   Ik'  will  lee  it 
file  by  lit  in.  ai.d  when  its  lie-lit  guide  -lull  be  abreast  with  him,  he  will  coniiiiainl  : 
1.   Seroit  '  <lit <i  ton.     2.    Halt.     3.    FitoNr. 

523.  Th;*  first  command  will  b  •  given  when  th  •  division  shall  y<  t  have  aeVM  or 
eight  psn-i-H  to  march  j  the  second,  when  the  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  th' 
chi   ;  ol   th.   divitiion,  and  the  thi,  i!  iniiii' di.it  lv  a  tei   the  second. 

524.  At  th  ■  secotui  command,  the  division  will  halt;  at  the  third,  it  will. face  to  the 
front,  and  i.  tin  r,  he  opening,  between  th  •  til  «,  the  <  hiet  of  the  '  -i  vision  will  cause 
th  in  to  be  pi  1 1 1  n  |  •  1 1  \  cloned  to  the  right;  the  leit  guides  of  b  th  coinpanit  -  will  -to 
upon  th  ■  line  of  battle,  lace  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves  on  the  di:  ctioii  ol  the 
n  a.  k  i .-  established  be, ore  the  hrst  division,  each  guide  opposite  to  one  of  th  thi< 
leit  lib  s  ol    hi-  company. 

52').  The  division  haring  faced  to  the  front,  its  chief  « ill  place  himg.  If  accurately 
on  ib  line  yl  b.ittl  -,  on  th  •  1  It  ol  th -fist  division  ;  and  w  hen  he  shall  see  the  guid,  « 
assii,  •  d  on  h  ■  <li,  i-ction.  h"  w  ill  com  in  and,  Jliykl  I)  kss.  At  this,  the  division  will 
be  a  ign   d  bv   the  i -ight  in  the  manner  inilicateil  lor  the  In  ft. 

62f>.  The  thii  d  and  fourth  divisions  will  continue  to  march  ;  at  the  cominand  halt, 
giv  ii  to  ili  second,  th  i  hi  I  ol  lb  tniid  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  jilaci-  hnnselt 
cxacll  i  o,ipo-it  to  th  ■  guide  ol  ill  .-  s  -cond,  alt  t  tin-  di  vi-ion  shall  have  ,  ae  n  ti  ihe 
front  and  cliti  d  its  lil>s  ;  be  will  a  e  In-  division  lile  past,  and  wh.n  hn  right  guide 
shall  be  abreast  with  linn,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Third  division.     2.    Halt.     3.    Fho.vt. 

527.  An  f«oon  a*  the  division  laces  to  the  front,  its  cbie  will  place  himiclf  two  pares 
before  it*  centre,  and  command  : 

1.     Thtrd  division,    'orirard.      2.    Guide    ri<jht.      3.    M4KCH. 
~     At  th  ■  third  command,  th  •  division  will  march  towards  the  line  ol   Laitl  -  ;  the 
right  guide  will  -o  direct  lines   Ii    a<  to  arrive  hv  the  side  ol  th     man  on  the  Ii  It  ol  tie 
sreon  .  division,  and  w h   n  the   division    in   at  three   paces  iroin   tbe  line  ol    bstti 
chi    l   will  halt  it  and  align  it  by  lie    light. 

529.  The  chiel  ol  the  foni  th  division  will  conform  himself  ( and  the  chief  of  thr 
fifth    il    Ui.i  e  be  a  lilth,  j  \u  what  has  ju-l  be,  n  pi  bmi  ib.  d  for  tbe  third. 

MO.   The  dej.lov  moot  ended,  the  r in   I  will  cominand  r 

Guidti—  I'osrs. 

531.  At  this  command,  th'-  goid-»  will  resume  their  places  in  lin?of  battle,  And  th> 
ma.  ben  w  ill  in 

632.    1 1   the  column  be  in  mat  eh.  and  the  colonel    shall  wish  to  deploy  it  «.n  Ik 
divi  ion  withoat  halting  the  column,  he  will  make  th"  disposition*  indicat 
»re     ,|:t.  «in,  «  Ir  n  ib,-  in  -t  division   shall    have   an  iv.  <1  .at  th,  ■ 
he  w  ill  command  : 

1.     On    thr    fir,f    ,i  ,  loy    ri.lumn.       2.     An/folio*    by    lk*   )'Jt  Jl,t*k.       3.    M*1CR 

I      viAt     yuirir         M  »  HI  II  ,  I 

535  At  lh--  fimt  command,  th,  .hi-  i  ol  th  ■  first  <ii«,«i  n  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and 
will  ,  oininainl,   /  ir.i  riirinci  ,    il  els  will  caution  tbe  1 1  div.tici 

th.   I   u  Dank 

»•*♦.    At  lb     command  mar-'A    b   i*klr  irpnf-d  b\   • 
chit  •  •-   Utv  !*•  st  uiruion  will  c.», iihmkI,  Halt,  and  will  i 
against  Hi.    ii, a,  k,  tr  ,    tin   .,|i»r  ui>  >»••«*•  will     - 

I  Ii     •   <  uiid  uiiui    .>    -•  i  iiat  ii 

preaciibrd  .»•».  Wll  and  (ollowia*.  J  and  luui  th  <ln  ision*  will  i  »•  <  ul«  wist 


I 

112  M  HOOL   OF    THE   BATTALION — PART   IV. 

i-  preotslbed  N'  ■«.  527  and  following;  but  the  chief  of  each  division  will  halt  in  his  own 
person  at  the  command  march  given  bi  the  chief  <>f  the  division  which  precedes  hiiu, 
and  when  the  right  of  Ml  division  arrives  abreast  of  him,  he  will  command  : 

Suvh  itii  inifit.  ly  the  right  tiank — Maiich. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  position  of  the  guide.",  conforming  to 
That  U prescribed  No.  431.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  khe 
fourth  division. 

■  .  If  the  colonel  shall  wij.li  to  dcplor  the  column  without  halting  it.  and  to  con- 
tinue the  march,  the  markers  will  not  be  posted ;  the  movement  will  be  executed  by 
the  same  commands  and  the  same  means  as  the  foregoing,  but  with  the  following 
modifications : 

5.»7.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  command,  1.  Guide 
riyht.  2.  Quicklime.  At  the  command,  DotibU  quirk — If  arch,  given  bj  the  colonel, 
the  first  division  will  march  in  quick  lime  and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the 
right:  the  captains  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  their  respective  companies  ; 
the  captain  on  the  right  of  the  battalion  will  take  points  on  the  ground  to  atsnre 
the  direction  of  the  march.  The  child' of  the  second  division  will  allow  his  division 
to  file  past  him,  and  when  he  sees  its  right  abreast  of  him,  he  will  command,  1.  Second 
divuion  by  the  right  flank.  2.  Makih.  '.'>.  Quid*  right,  and  when  this  division  shall 
arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first,  he  will  cause  it  to  march  in  ijuick  time.  The 
third  and  fourth  divisions  will  deploy  according  to  the  same  principles  at  the  second. 

53s\  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  and  color-bearer  will  conform  themselves 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  458. 

539.  The  colonel  will  see,  pending  the  movement,  that  the  principles  just  prescribed 
are  duly  observed,  and  particularly  that  the  divisions,  in  deploying,  be  not  halted  too 
soon  nor  too  late.  He  will  correct  promptly  and  <juickl  v  the  faults  that  may  be  com- 
mitted, aud  prevent  their  propagation.     This  rule  is  general  for  all  deployments, 

MO,  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if.  Instead  of  deploying  it  on  the  first,  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  rearmost  division,  he  will  cause  the  dispositions  to  be 
made  indicated  Ha  511  and  following;  but  it  will  be  the  right  general  guide  whom  he 
will  send  to  place  himself  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  battalion  will 
l  esl  when  deployed. 

541.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

]Z    1.    On  the  fourth  (or  such)  divition,  deploy  rolumn.      2.    HattaMon,  right — Fack. 

542.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  stand 
fast;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to 
the  right. 

543.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  three  divisions  will  face  to  the  right ;  and 
the  chief  of  each  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right  guide. 

Ml.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel  w  ill  place  a  third  marker  between 
the  first  two,  so  that  this  marker  may  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  the 
left  company  of  the  division  ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  place  himself  on  the 
lin<-  of  battle  a  lew  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  third  division 
will  rest  when  deploy  ed. 

545.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

a,   March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

546.  At  this  command,  the  three  right  divisions  will  put  themselves  in  march,  the 
guide  of  the  first  so  directing  himself  as  to  pass  three  paces  within  the  line  marked 
by  the  right  general  guide.  The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  not  follow  its  move- 
ment ;  he  will  see  it  file  past,  halt  it  when  its  left  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  and 
came  it  to  face  to  the  front;  aud,  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  he  will  cause 
them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  left. 

547.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  sees  it  nearly  unmasked  by  the  three 
others,  will  command  : 

1.    fourth  divition, forward.     2.    Guide\eft.     3.    Mabch. 

548.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  the  instant  the  fourth  is  unmasked, 
this  division  will  approach  the  line  of  battle,  and  whcL  at  three  paces  from  the  markers 
on  that  line,  its  chief  will  halt  it,  and  command  : 

Left — Dress. 
49.  At  this  command,  the  division  will  dress  forward  against  the  markon ;  tho  chief 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION — PART   IV.  Ho 

of  the  division  and  the  junior  captain  will  each  align  the  company  on  his  right,  anil 
then  command  : 

Front. 

S.riO.  The  instant  that  the  third  division  is  unmasked,  it.«  chief  will  cause  it  to  ap- 
proach the  line  of  battle,  and  halt  it  in  the  manner  just  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

1 .   The  moment  the  division  halts,  its  right  guide  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  it" 

left  company  will  step  on  the  line  oi  "battle,  placing  themselves  on  the  prolongation  of 

of  th  in    front   of  the   fourth   division;   as  soon  aa  they  shall  be 

il  in  their  positions,  the  division  will  be  aligned  as  has  just  been  prescribed  for 

the  fourth. 

55«2.  The  serond  and  first  divisions  which  will  have  continued  to  march,  will  in  suc- 
cession, be  halted  and  aligned  by  the  left,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  third  ;  the  chief] 
of  these  nivisions  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  520,  The  second 
being  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  command  will  not  be  given  for  it  to  wo\e  on  thil 
Line  but  it  will  be  dressed  up  to  it. 

653.   The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

(iuidei — Posts. 

554.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  ofdivision  and  the  guides  will  resume  their  place? 
in  line  ol  battle,  and  the  markers  will  retire. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  by  the  means  In- 
dicated, So.  431,  and  the  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  fourth 
division. 

.   If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  fourth 
division,  be  will  make  the  d  indicated,  No.  511    and  following;  and  when 

the  head  of  the  column  shall  arrive  within  three  paces  of  the  line,  he  will  COOSO 
1.    < >n  the  fourth  dirUion,  deploy  column.      2.    Battalion,  by  the  right  flank.      '.',.    March 
(or  double  quick — March.) 
At  the  first  command,  the   chief  of  th-  fourth   division  will  caution  it  to  halt, 
and  «ill  command.  Fourth   tVrWwa  ;   the  chiefs   of  the  other  divisions  will   caution 
their  divisions  to  face  to  tic  light. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the  fii.-t  three  diri- 

hief  of  the  fourth  will  command  :   Halt.     The  lirst  three  divisions  will  face 

it,  and  be  directed  paralleily  to  the  line  of  battle.     The  ohiefofeacfa  of  these 

■  ill   place   himself  bv   the  side    of  its    right  guide.     The  chief  i>l  the  third 

division  will  see  his  division  file  past   him,    and  when  his  left  guide  is  abrea>t  of  him, 

he  will  halt  it.  and  face  it    to   the  front.     The  chief  <>f  the   fourth   division,  when  he 

■ball  see  it  nearly  unmasked,  will  command :     1.  Fourth  di<i*ion forward  .-    2.  duid<- 

'eft;     .1.  Hanoi  (or  d»mU*  muitk    Mabom.  )     This  division  will  move  towards  the  line 

ol  battle,  and  when  at  three    paces  from   this  line,  it  will   be  halted  bv  its  chief,  and 

by  the  left. 

The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  move  his  division  forward,  conformi: 
what  has  ju  •  i  th. 

The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  Brat  divisions,  aft«r  halting  their  di\ 

m  i'Ii  to  deploy  on  the  fourth  division,  without  halting  the 
n,  and  to  c  i  :irrh  forward,  ha  will  not  have  m 

by  the  same  commands  and  tl 
lowing  modifications:  the  fourth  division  when  unmasked,  will  rd  in 

quirk  time,  and  w 

of  all 

i  th> 
I    rm    to  wbs 

msy  cause  the  battalion  to  t«k- 

colonel  and  1 1<  u tnant  colonel  will  |     what  has  been  i  - 

the  r-olnmn  on  ar  -donrl  will  ean»«>  the  ] 

l  will  i 
I  MA     This  being  ex  .Joucl  will  iota- 

8 


114  SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTALIOH      I'ART  IV. 

1.    Oi  iurh   dicuion   •.  an,     2.    Bat  -  ird* — Faci.     3.   II  VRCil    (or 

double  quick— \l\ 

564.  Whether  the  column  bo  with  the  right  <>r  left  in  front,  the  division*  which,  in 
the  order  in  battle,  belong  to  Ike  right  of  the  directing  one,  will  race  to  the  right  , 
the  other*,  exrept  the  directing  division,  will  face  to  the  left  :  the  divisions  in  front 
of  the  latter  will  deploy  by  th"  m-ans  indicat  d.  flo.  542,  and  following  ;  those  in  it^> 
resr  will  deploy  as  is  prescribed,  No.  613,  and  following. 

565.  The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  find.-  itself  unmasked,  will  approach  th» 
line  of  battle,  taking  the  guide  lirft  or  right,  according  as  the  right  or  leltof  the  column 
may  be  in  front.  The  chi ■•!' of  tbll  divisi  >n  will  align  it  by  tke  directing  Hank,  and 
then  step  back  into  the  rear,  in  order  momentarily  to  give  place  to  the  chief  of  the 
next  for  aligning  the  next  division. 

566.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  of  the  division*, 
which  in  the  line  of  battle,  take  the  right  of  the  directing  division,  and  the  major  will 
acsure  the  positions  of  the  other  guides. 

567.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    On  tuch  division,  deploy  column.     2.    Ilattaiiaii,  ly  the  right  and  left  ftanki. 

3.  March  (or doMt quick — Mtann.) 

568.  The  divisions  which  are  in  front  of  the  directing  on.-  will  deploy  by  the  ■ 
indicated,  Nos.  557,  and  following  ;  those  in  rear,  as  preaorib  id,  No.  o'^l,  and  following. 

569.  The  directing  division,  when  unmasked,  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for 
the  fourth  division,  No.  558. 

570.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  conform  to  what  baa  been  pn  - 
scribed,  Nos.  458  and  459. 

571.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  deployments  will  be  executed  according-  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

Remarks  on  the  deployment  of  columns,  closed  in  mass. 

572.  All  the  divisions  ought  to  deploy  rectangularly,  to  march  off  abreast,  aud  to 
preserve  their  distances  towards  the  line  of  battle. 

573.  Each  division,  the  instant  that  it  is  unmarked,  ought  to  be  inarched  towards 
the  line  of  battle,  and  to  be  aligned  upon  it  by  the  Hank  next  to  the  directing  divi-ion  ; 
the  latter,  whether  the  right  or  left  be  in  front,  will  always  be  aligned  by  the  Hank 
next  to  the  point  of  ami,  when  the  deployment  is  made  on  the  Bret  or  la>t  divi-ion  ; 
but  if  the  column  be  deployed  on  an  interior  division,  this  division  will  be  aligned  by 
the  flank  which  MM  that  of  direction. 

574.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  see  that,  in  deploring,  the  principle!  prescribed  for 
inarching  by  the  Hank  are  well  observed,  and  if  openings  between  the  tiles  occur,  «  hich 
might  not  to  happen  excepting  on  broken  or  difficult  grounds,  the  openings  ought  to 
t>  I  promptly  clos-d  towards  the  directing  Hank  as  soon  u  the  divisions  lace  to  the  front . 

576.  If  a  chief  of  division  give  the  command  halt,  or  the  command,  by  the  right  or 
left  flank,  too  soon  or  too  late,  his  division  will  be  obliged  to  oblique  to  the  right  or 
left  in  approaching  the  line  of  battle,  and  his  fault  may  lead  the  following  subdivision 
into  error. 

.'>7«;.  In  the  divisions  which  deploy  by  the  flank,  it  is  always  the  left  guide  of  each 
com  j  any  who  ought  to  plane  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  to  mark  the  direction;  in 
divisions  which  deploy  by  the  right  Hank,  it  is  the  right  guide. 

.ri77.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  maSSS,  may  be  formed  to  the  left  or  to  the 
right  into  line,  in  tli.  same  manner  as  a  column  at  half  distance,  and  by  the  means 
indicated,  No.  502,  and  following. 

578.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may  be  formed  on  the  rijht  or  on  the 
left  i  ito  line  of  battle,  as  a  column  at  half  distance  ;  but  in  order  to  execute  this 
movement,  without  arresting  the  march  of  the  column,  it  is  nec-ssarv  that  the  guides 
avoid,  with  the  greatest  care,  shortening  the  step  in  turning,  and  that  the  men  near 
them,  respectively,  contorm  themselves  rapidly  to  the  movements  of  their  guktaa, 

Remarks  on  inversions. 

579.  Inversions  giving  frequently  the  means  of  forming  line  of  bsttle,  in  the  prompt- 
eet  mann.-r,  are  of  great  utility  in  the  movements  of  an  army. 


M  IIOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION — TART   V.  115 

660.  The  application  that  may  bo  made  of  inversions  in  the  formations  to  the  right 
-nd  to  the  lilt  in  line  of  battle,  baa  he  n  indicated,  No.  407,  and  following.  They 
may  also  be  advantageously  employed  in  the  successive  formations,  except  in  that  of 
faced  to  the  rear,  into  tine  of  brittle. 

581.   Formation*,  by  inversion,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  game  principles  ns 
itiona  in  the  direct  Older  :  but  the  colonel's  first  command  will  always  begin  by 
iMinwu. 

682.  The  battalion  b  ing  in  line  of  battle  by  inversion,  when  the  colonel  i-hali  wish, 
bj  forming  it  into  column,  to  bi  ing  it  back  to  the  direct  order,  he  will  eatUM  it  c  itlier 
to  break-  or  to  jilny  by  company,  or  by  division,  accordingly  as  the  column  may  have 
been  by  company  or  by  division  before  it  had  been  formed  into  line  of  battle  by  inver- 
sion. 

I,  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  formed  by  inversion,  has  to  be  ployed  into 
column,  the  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  as  if" the  line 
were  in  the  direct  order,  but  observing  what  follows. 

5S4.  If  it  be  intended  that  the  column  shall  be  by  division,  with  the  first  in 
front,  or  by  company,  with  the  first  company  in  front,  the  colonel  will  announce  in 
the  second  command —  left  in  front,  because  the  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  by 
inversion,  that  subdivision  is  on  the  left. 

585.  Each  chief  whose  subdivision  takes  position  in  the  colnmn  in  front  of  the  direct- 
ing one,  will  conduct  hi'  subdivision  till  it  halts;  and  each  chief  whose  subdivision 
takes  position  in  rear  ot  the  directing  one,  will  halt  in  his  own  person  when  ap  with  the 
preceding  right  guide,  and  see  his  subdivision  file  paBt :  and  each  chief  will  align  his 
subdivision  by  the  right.  When  the  column  is  to  be  put  in  match,  the  second  com- 
mand will  be — gmidt  left,  because  the  proper  right  is  in  front. 

6^<>.  For  the  same  reason,  if  it  be  intended  that  the  last  subdivision  shall  be  in  front 
right  in  front,  will  be  announced  in  the  second  command;  the  subdivisions  will  be 
aligned  by  the  left,  and  to  put  the  column  in  march,  the  second  command  will  be,  guide 
right,  because  tin  proper  left  is  in  front. 

PART  FIFTH. 

Articus  First. 

Y<<  advance,  in  line  of  battle. 

The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and  supposed  to  be  the  directing  ■  ne. 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  marcVi  in  line  of  battle,  he  will  give  the  lieutenant  col- 
•  ne|  an  intimation  <>f  his  purpose,  place  himself  about  forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  color- 
t  k,  and  face  to  the  Front, 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  a  like  distance  in  front  of  the  same 

lonel,  who  will  establish  him  as  correctly  as  possible,  bj  signal 

of  the  iword,  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle  opposite  to  the  color  bearer.     Tiie 

colonel  will  next,  tbore  the  h.  ads  of  the  lieutenant  and  color  bearer,  Uke  a  point  of 

tion  in  the  I  I,  it  a  distinct  one  present  itself,  exactly  In  thr  pndona~a 

tmn  of  those  Si  si  t«  n  j 

The  colonel  will  then  move  twenty  paces  farther  to  the  rear,  and  establish  two 
markers  on  the  prolongation  of  the  straight  line  passing  through  the  color  benict  and 
the  lieutenant  colonel  ;  these  markers  will  face  to  the  rear,  the  flrst  placed  about 
twenty-five  j  ac. i  behind  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion,  and  the  second  at  the  same 
distance  from  she  iHt 

■  The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to  take,  the  moment  the  lieutenant  colon*) 
(.hall  be  established  on  tie   perpendicular,  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straip! 

n  himself,  would  pass  between   the   heels  ot   that  <■•' 
these  points  will  be  taken  at  I 

591.  These  dispositions  bf  ing  mnde,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

i I  t  alio* ,  for  tea  rd. 
r>92.    \t  tl  u    the  front  rank  of  the  color  guard  will  advance  sis  paces  SO 
tha  corporals  in  the  rear  rank  will  place  themse|v<  •  m  the  front  rank,  and  the,. 

;  Uoe<i  |,T  theea  in  the  rank  of  file  closers  :  at  the  mum 
will  iro«e  in  advance,  abrea't  with  the  color  bearer,  the  one  on  the  • 

tbe  other  opposite  to  the  s> 
kft  of  tbe  battalion. 


116  or  Tin:  BARAUDH     PART  V. 

.  Tin'  captains  of  tbo  left  wing  «  ill  shift,  pasting  before  the  front  rank,  to  the 
left  of  their  reepecthre  conn  int  on  the  loft  of  the  battalion  will  itep 

Inch  Into  the  rear  rank.     The  covorine;  sergeant  of  the  company   next  on  the  l< 
th«  color-company,  will  *tep  into  th  •  front  rank. 

The  lieutenant  colon'-l  having  assured  the  color-bearer  fin  the  line  between 
himself  and  the  corporal  of  the  color-file,  now  Id  the  front  rank,  will  go  to  the  position 
which  will  be  hereinafter  usdlcat  •>!,  No.  C02. 

..  The  major  will  place  himself  six  or  eight  paces  on  either  flank  of  the  color-rank. 
The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

1.    MtKCII   (Or  double  quirk  —  MAnC!l/i 

597.   At  this  command,  the  battalion  trill  stop  off  with  life ;  the  color-bearer,  chs 
with  the  (top  and  direction,  will  ■  irnpnlously  obserre  the  length  and  cadence  i 

inarching  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  points  previously  taken,  and  succes- 
sively taking  Others  in  advance  by  the  mean?  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company  , 
the  corporal  on  his  right,  and  the  one  on  his  left,  will   march  in  the  .same  Step,  taking 

not  to  turn  the  head  or  shoulders,  the  color-bearer  supporting  the  color-lance 

■gainst  the  hip. 

.r>98.  The  two  general  guides  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  color-rank,  each 
maintaining  himself  abreast,  or   nearly  so,  with   that  rank,  and  neither  occup; 
himself  with  the  movement  of  the  other, 

599,  The  three  corporals  of  the  color-guard,  now  in  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion, 
will  march  well  aligned,  clbnv  to  elbow,  heads  direct  to  the  front,  and  without  derang- 
ing the  line  of  their  shoulders  ;  the  centre  one  will  follow  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
color-bearer,  and  maintain  the  same  step,  without  lengthening  or  shortening  it, 

n  an  intimation  from  the  colonel  or  lieutenant  colonel,  although  he  should  find 
himself  more  or  less  than  six  paces  from  the  color-rank. 

The  covering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank  between  the  color-company  and  tot- 
next  on  the  left,  will  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  on  the  same  line,  with  the  three  COT 
porals  in  the  centre,  his  head  well  to  the  front. 

001.   The  captains  of  the  color-company,  and  the  company  next  to  the  left,  will  con 
■titute.  with  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  the  basis  of  aligumuu' 
for  both  wings  of  the  battalion  ;   they  will    march    in   th>-  game   step   with   the  col™ 
r,  and  exert  themaelres  to  maintain  their  shoulders  exactly  in  the  square  with 
the  direction.     To  this  end,  they  will  keep  their  heads  direct  to  the  front,  only  I 
Bionallj   easting  an  eye  on  the  three  centre  corporals,  with  the  slight'    t  po-.-ib!  I  turn 
of  the  neck,  and  if  they  perceive  them.-'  Ires  in  advance,  or  in  rear  of  these  corporal.-, 
the  captain,  or  two  captain- ,  will  almost  insensibly  shorten  or  long)  hen  the  step,  I 
at  the  end   of  several   paces,   to  regain    the  true   alignment,    without  giving  sudden 
checks  or  Impulsions  to  the  wings  beyond  them  respectively. 

602.  The  lieutenant  col  >nel,  plac-d  twelve  or  fifteen  paces  on  the  right  of  the  captain 
of  the  color-company,  w  ill   maintain   this  captain   and  the   next    one  beyond,  ale 
the  three  centre  corporals  ;  to  this  end.  lie  will  caution  either  to  lengthen  or  to  shorten 
the  step  as  may  be  necessary,  which  the  captain,  Or  two  captains,  will  execute  U  ha. 
just  been  explained. 

003.  All  the  other  captains    will  maintain  themselves  on   the  prolongation  of  this 
basis-  and,  to  this  end,  they  will  cast  their  eyes  towards   the  centre,  taking  ca 
turn  the  neck  slightly,  and  not  to  derange  the  direction  of  their  shouldera, 

004.  The  captains  will  observe  the  march  of  their  companies,  and  prevent  the  bjm 
from  getting  in  advance  of  the  line  o!  captains;  they  i\ill  not  lengthen  or  shorten 
«tep  except  when  evidently  necessary  ;  because,  to  correct,  with  too  scrupulous  at  ten 

small  faults,  is  apt  to  cause  th<  production  of  greater— loss  of  cslmnoss,  si! 

and  equality  of  step,  each  of  which  it  is  so  important  to  maintain. 

CO.'..  The  men  will  occasionally  keep  their  heads  well  directed  to  the  front,  feel  light 
|«  the  elbow  towards  the  centre,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  Bank,  give  the  great - 
t^t  attention  to  to  the  squareness  of  shoulders,  and  hold  themselves  always  very 
-lightly  behind  the  line  of  the  captains,  in  order  to  never  shut  out  from  the  view  o 
the  latter  the  basis  of  alignment  ;  they  will,  from  time  to  time,  cast  an  eye  on  the 
color-rank,  or  on  the  general  guide  ol  the  wing,  in  order  to  march  constantly  in  thj 
•  ame  stop  with  those  advanced  persons. 

006.  Pending  the  march,  the  line  determined  by  the  two  marker*  (h  and  d)  will  bi 
prolonged  bv  placing,  in  proportion  as  the  battalion  advances,  a  third  marker  (»)  ia 


iOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION — r.XRT  V.  117 

the  rear  of  the  first  (a),  then  the  Barker  (a*)  will  qnit  his  place  tod  go  •  lika  distance 
:.n  reu  «f  (») ;  the  marker  (A )  will,  in  bia  turn,  do  t >» - •  like  in  reaped  to  <  d).  and  so 
on,  in  sue  battalion  continues  to  advance;   each  marker,  on 

shifting  position,  taking  care  to  face  to  the  rear,  and  to  csrei  accurately  the  two 
markers  already  established  on  the  direction.  A  staff  officer,  01  the  quartermaster 
sergeant,  designs!  -d  for  the  purpoav.  and  who  will  hold  himself  constantly  fifteen  or 
twenty  paces  facing  the  marker  ft  'tnest  from  tba  battalion,  will  caution  each  marker 
when  to  shift  place,  ami  assure  him  on  tin1  direction  hi  hind  the  other  two. 

C07.  The  colonel  will  habitually  hold  lumself  about  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  eentre 
of  his  battalion,  taking  care  ri< > «  to  put  himsel  on  the  lineof  markers,  if,  for  example, 
by  the  slanting  of  the  battalion,  or  the  indications  which  will  be  given,  N".  C,]~  and 
following,  be  find  that  tin-  march  of  the  color-bearer  is  not,  perpendicular,  h  will 
promptly  command  : 

Point  of  direction  tn  Ms  ri'jkt  (or  left.) 

COS.    At  thi-  command,  the  major  will  hasten  thirty  or  forty  paceR  in  advance  of  the 
rank,  halt,  face  to  to  the  colonel,  and  place  himself  on  the  direction  which  the 
latter  will  indicate  by  signal  of  th"  sword;  the  corporal  in  the  centre  of  the  battalh  n 
will  I  II  upon  th<   major,  on  a  caution  from  the  colonel,  advancing,  to 

that  end.  the  opposite  shoulder;  the  corporals  on  his  right  and  left  w  ill  conform  them- 
selves to  his  direction. 

■.  Theeoloi  -bearer  will  also  direct  himself  upon  the  major,  advancing  the  opposite 
shoulder,  the  major  causing  him,  at  the  same  time,  to  incline  to  the  right  or  lett,  until 

il  of  his  file  ;  the  color-hearer  will  then  take  ; 
ea  the  ground  in  this  new  direction. 
f.lO.  Hie  two  general  guides  will  conform  themselves  to  the  new  direction  of  the 

.ink. 
fill,  'i  be  officer  charged  with  observing  the  roooetsive  replacing  of  the  mark' 
the  rear  of  the  centre,  will  establish  thetn  promptly  on  the  new  direction,  taking  fbr 
lor-bearer  and  the  corporal  of  his  file  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  :  the 
colonel  will  verify  the  new  direction  of  the  markers. 

€12.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  from  the  position  given,  No.  C02,  will  see  that  the  two 

■  entre  companies,  arid  j  all  the  cither,  conform  themselves  to  the  new  i 

lion  of  the  |  without  precipitancy  or  disordei  ;  he  will  then  endeavor  to 

maintain  that  basis  ol  alignment  for  the  battalion,  perpendicularly  to  the  direction 

lor  bearer. 

CI.'..  II'  srch  of  the  two  wiags :  and,  if  he  <  it  the 

i  of  alignment,  he  will  recall  their 
'  ommand — cnptnxn  of  met)     eoaa- 

■it  lint — without,  howet  rreotamall 

fault-. 

CI  4.   The  major  on  the  fUnk  of  the  color-rank  will,  during  the  march,  place  himself, 

from  time  •  front  of  that  rank,  lace  to  the  rear,  and  place  him- 

..longHtion   of  the  mail  behind    the    centre,  in 

(hat   line  ;    he  w  ill  ret  t  ify,  if 
S  bo  will  immediately  take  two  Dl  m  } 
'  and  the  major. 

•  advance  in  line,  are  the  «n- 
ia  for  the  rfi  talion  ;  bnt  when  the  battalion  under  Instruct 

I  bel     i 

in  Hue.  <>f  battle. 

'     .n.  the  oil 
been   well  eonfii  mi  d 
«•  II  «•  in  th"  l<  ■  gth  hi 

rnlsrlv    fore  u   an 

'■  'in  ■'-•  in  on,    »  ii  r    at.  ,  n  llin 


CIS.    It  II 

rwara,  and  tint  tbe  basse  o! 
ncalar  to  thr  line  pursued  bj  him. 


A      .In   *  ,   .    f.. 


118  SCHOOL   OF   TIIK   BATTALION — rART   V. 

619.  If  opening'  be  form?d,  if  thi  61m  crowd  each  other,  if,  in  short,  disorder  «><u\ 
th~  m  •  l>  ought  to  b  •  applied  a-  promptly  jh  possible,  but  calmly,  with  few  word", 
and  as  little  noise  as  practirabl ■•. 

C20.   Th  ■  ebjeot  of  the  gen  »ral  irui  1  •-   in  the  march  in  line  of  battle  is,  to  in<l > 
to  the  DoapsuUM  near  the  Banks  the  st-p  at  th  •  centra  of  the  battalion,  and  to  aTord 
m  ii    facility  in  establishing  th  •  \\  bags  <<n  the  direction  of  th  •  centre  if  ih  »i  ihoal 
too  much  in  the  rear ;  hence  th  •  oeo  issity  that  th  a  •  paid  •-  ib  told  maintain  the  samo 

-o,  with  the  color  rank,  which  it  will  be  easy 
for  them  to  do  by  OUtlng  from  time  to  time  an  ere  on  that  rank. 

611.   It  tl»-  battalion  happen  to  la  .,  the  colonel  will  recall  i','  attention  by 

the)  rumwunil.  to  th-  — Srar;  captains  ami  their  companies  will  immediately  cast  an 
eye  on  the  color-rank,  or  one  of  the  general  guides,  and  promptly  conform  thcmsclvot 
to  the  step. 

611.  Finally,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  the  attainment  of  regularity  in  the 
march  in  line  of  buttle,  to  habitual:-  th  •  battalion  U)  U  »CUte  ^v  i I li  U  much  on!  t  ■  • 
promptness  the  moTomonti  pre^c.-ibid  rfo  CO"  an  1  following,  for  rectifying  the  dir»c 
tion  ;  it  is  not  less  owdntial  that  commanders  of  battalions  should  exen  ise  th  >msetren, 
with  th  •  greatest  care,  in  forming  their  own  '•oup  il'ir.i',  in  order  !  »bc  able  toj 
with  precision  the  direction  to  be  given  to  their  battalions. 

Akticli:  Skcono. 

Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

623.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  caiwc 
it  to  oblique,  lie  will  command  : 

1.   Bight  (or  «s/f)  ohlique.     2.  March  (or  rfoii.Vr  ,/Hi'<£— Mau>  ii. 

C24.  At  the  lirst  command,  the  major  will  place  himself  in  front  of,  and  faced  to  the 
color-b' 

835.  At  the  command  march,  the  whole  battalion  will  take  the  obliqne step*  Th« 
companies  and  captains  will  strictly  observe  the  principles  established  in  the  school  ol 

the  company. 

816.  The  major  in  front  of  the  color-bearer  ought  to  maintain  the  latter  in  a  line 
with  the  centre  corporal.  BO  that  the  color-barer  may  oblique  neither  more  nor  IsjBJ 
than  that  corporal.      He  will  carefully  observe  also  that  thc\  follow  parallel  direction* 

and  preoervi  the  tame  length  of  step. 

(J'.!".   The  lien  tenant  colonel  will  take  care  that  the  captains  and  the  three  con 
in  the  centre  keep  exactly  on  a  line  and  follow  parallel  directions. 

0'.'^.  The  ooloni  I  will  see  that  th-'  battalion  preserves  its  parallelism:  hi»  will  exert 
himself  to  prevent  the  hies  from  opening  or  crow  i"^.  [f  he  perceive  the  latter  fault, 
he  will  cau.-e  the  Blei  on  the  Hank,  to  which  the  battalion  obliques,  to  open  out. 

619.   The  colonel,  wishing  the  direct  march  to  be  resumed,  will  command  : 
1.    Forward.     2.   Ma  urn. 

630.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  resume  the  direct  march.  The  major 
will  place  himself  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the   color  barer,  anil   \';tvo    to   the   colonei, 

who  will  establish  bici,  by  a  signal  of  the  sword,  on  the  direction  which  the  color 

I  Ottght  to  pursue.     The  latter  will    immediately  take   two  points  OB  the  ground 
between  himself  and  the  major. 

631.  In  resuming  the  direct  march,  care  will  be  takn  thf.t  L 1 » ■  -  men  do  not  close  the 

intervals  which  mav  exist  between  the  Bias  at  oboe ;  It  should  be  dooealnost  insensibly 

Remarki  on  the  oblique  march. 

BS1.  The  object  of  the  oblique  step  is  to  gain  ground  to  the  right  or  left,  preserving 
all  the  while  the  primitive  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  ;  sj  thos,  for  example  :  the 
battalion,  departing  from  the  line  (►*,)  arrives  on  the  line  (a*)  parallel  to  (*s.) 

<;::::.  It  i<  then  essential  that  the  corporals  in  th-  centre  of  the  battalion,  and  the 
captains  of  companies,  should  follow  parallel  directions,  and  maintain  themselves  al 
the  same  height  j   without  which  they  will  give  a  false  direction  to  the  battalion. 

864  Thecolond  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  exert  themselves  to  prevent  the  filci 
from  crowding;  for,  without  such  precaution,  the  oblique  inarch  cannot  be  executed 
with  facilitv. 


SCHOOL   01'   TIIE  BATTALION — PART   V.  119 

Autici.b  Third. 
To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it. 

G3.ri.  The  h.ittalien.  marching  in   the  line  of  battle,  when  the  colonel  (shall  wish  to 
halt  it,  he  will  command: 

1.   Battalion.    ?.  Hat.t. 
GK.  At  the  second  m Minium!,  the  battalion  trill  halt  ;  the  color-rank  and  the  general 
guides  will  remain  in  front  ;    hut  if  the  colonel  should  not  wish  immediately  to  resit  uic 
the  advance  in  line,  nor  to  give  ■  general  alignment,  he  will  command: 
Color  (iiiri  general  guidt*  —  I'OSTS. 
C37.   At  thi«  command,  the  color-rank  and  general  guides  will  retake  their  places  in 
line  of  battle,  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  \\  ill  shift  to  the  i  ight  of  their  companies 

If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary  to  rectify  the  alignment,  he  will 
command  : 

Captain*,  rtetify  the  alignment. 

The  captain?  will  immediately  east  an  eye  towards  the  centre,  align  themselves 
accurately,  on  the  basis  of  the  alignment,  which  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  tee  well 
directed,  and  then  promptly  drew  their  respective  companies.  The  lieutenant  colonel 
will  admoni-h  such  captains  as  may  not  be  accurately  on  the  alignment  by  the  command  : 
Onptuim  of  (each  or   eaptQin*  q/"(such)  comprint'™,  move   up  or  full  hoik. 

•  i'K   l!utv>lun  the  colonel  shall  wish   to  give  the  battalion  a  general  alignment, 
either  parallel  or  oblique,  instead  of  rectifying  it  as  above,  he  will  i  paces 

outside  of  one  of  the  general  guides  i  the  right  will  bet  e  be  supposi  d  |  and  caution  the 
right  g(  neral  guide  and  the  coloi  b<  11  rf  to  lace  him,  and  then  establish  them  bj 

•  the  SWord,  on  the  direction  nliich  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  battalion.  As 
soon  as  they  shall  be  correctli  established,  the  left  general  guide  will  place  himself  on 
their  direction,  and  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  major.  Thecoloi  bearer  will 
Carry  the  coloi  lance  perpendicularly  between  his  eyes,  and  the  two  corporals  of  hi.i 
rank  will  return  to  t  licit  place*  in  the  front  rank  the  moment  he  shall  face  to  the  colonel. 
This  disposition  being  made,  the  Colonel  will  command: 

1 .  '• 

C42.  At  this  command,  the  right  guide  of  each  company  in  the  right  wing,  and  the 

side  of  <afh  company  in  the  left,  will  each  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 

mioi  tirai  et  and  the  two  general  guides,  face  to  th"  color-bearer,  place  biinseii  in  rear 

of  the  guide  who  i-  to  \t  bt  fore  him  at  a   list  a  nee  equal   to   the  front  of  his  companv  , 

and  align  himself  upon  the  coloi  beam  sad  the  general  gs 

^4  It.  The  captains  in  the  riplit  wins  u  ill  shirt  to  the  left  of  their  com  pat 
the  captain  of  th  pany.  who  will  remain  on  its  right,  but  step  into  th< 

rank;  taV  captains  fas  tb<  left  wtag  will  shift  to  the  right  oi  their  oompanli 

(H4.  The  h enter, ant  colonel  v.  ill  promptly  rectify,  if  n<  tinnsof  the 

gnio  jrht  wing,  and  the  majoi  ^Id'h  being 

«ill  <  ommai 

2.  Oh  tie  rrntrr—  I>BESB. 

mmaod,  the  companies  will  movi  np  in  quick  time  against  tl 

II  align  his 
the  lieutenant  colonel  a  color-company. 

C4<i.    If  I  aptairisnil]    tak 

pani  th    Hm  . 

rhe  battal  I  n  ill  command  : 

«itl  uko  tt  hne  of  bat) 

'  Kip. 

impanie- 

■ 


uortu 


«  jrneral   1 
general  guide*  at  he  will  cause  th 


120  school  of  Tin:  battalion  —  part  v. 

1  .    Color  and  general  guide*— Oy  THK  Line. 

L  At  this  command,  tho  color-bearer  and  the  general  guides  will  place  thcm- 
on  the  line,  conforming  to  what  i«  preset  ibed,  No.  040. 

ArtIci.k.    POOTB. 

Change  "/'  direction  in  marckimg  in  line  of  battle. 

dioa  marching  in  lineof  battle,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  it  tochange 
;1k.'  rip-tit.  he  will  command  : 
1.    I'huijr  .lir.rtinn  to  the  right.      L    If  .Mint  (©T  double  quirk— MaUOK.) 

.liininnd  march,  the  movement  will  commence;  the  color-rank  will 

nhorten  the  step  to  fourteen  or  seventeen  tnohee,  and  direct  itself  circularly  to  the 

right,  taking  care  to  advance  the  left  ih  raider,  bat  only  Inseneiblj  \  the  major  will 

plao  Pore  the  color  bearer,  facing  him,  and  .so  direct  his  march  that  be  may 

ibe  an  arc  of  a  circle  neither  too  large  nor  too  amall ;  he  will  alao  aee  that  the 

I  olor-bear.r  take-  ft  pa,  ol   fourteen  or  seventeen  in.  Hag  tO  1 1  >  ■  gait. 

•'.el.  The  right  gi  oeral  guide  will  wheel  en  the  right  captain  of  the  battalion  M  bis 
pi  vol ;  the  left  general  guide  » ill  circularly  march  in  the  atop  of  twenty-eight  in  hes 
or  thirty-three  inch  -.  aooordins  to  the  gait,  and  will  align  himself  upon  the  oolor- 

and  the  right  general  guide. 

i.   The  corporal  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  will  t  ik  I  steps  of  fourteen 

rentecn  laches,  and  w ill  wheel  to  the  right  by  adrancing  insensibly  th  i  lefl  shoul- 

the  battalion  will  oonform  itself  to  the  movement  of  th  •  centre;  to  this  end,  the 

captain  of  th-  color-company,  and  th<*  captain  of  th wt  to  the  I  -ft.  will  attentively 

regulate  their  march,  as  well  as  the  direction  of  their  shoulders,  on  the  three  centre 
corporals.  All  the  other  captains  will  regulate  the  direction  of  their  shoulders  and 
the  length  of  their  step  on  this  basis. 

.   The  men  will  redouble  their  attention  in  order  not  to  pass  the  line  of  captains. 

.".  In  the  [eft  wing,  the  pace  will  be  lengthened  in  proportion  as  the  file  is  diat  int 

from  the  centre:  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  who  doses  the  lefl  Bank  of  the 

battalion  will  take  steps  of  twenty-eight  or  thirty -three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 
B58.    In  the  right  wine  the  pace  will  be  shortened  in  proportion  as  the  file  is  distant 

from  the  centre ;  the  captaip  who  closes  the  right  Hank  will  only  slowly  tarn  In  hi* 

person,  obei  rving  to  j  icld  ground  a  little  If  pushed. 

I.   The  colonel  will  take  great  care   to   prevent  the  centre  of  the  battalion  from 
ribing  an  arc  of  a  circle,  either  too  great  or  too  small,  in  order  that  the  wings 

conform    thctns'-lvcs    to   its    movem.  nr.      lb-  v.  ,11  see    also    that  the  captains  keep 

ih  ir  companies  constantly  aligned  upon  the  centre,  so  that  there  maj  be  no  opening 

and  no  crowding  of  tiles.      He  will  endeavor  to  prevent  faults,  and,  should  they  occur, 
;   lie  m  without  uoi-i . 
CCO.  The  lieutenant  coloi.cl,  placed  before   the  battalion,  will  give  his  attention  to 
th'-  same  object. 

ML   Wh«n  the  colour  1  shall  wish  the  direct  march  to  be  resumed,  he  will  command  : 

!.  Forward.    2.  Makch. 
GC2.   At  the  command  m<ir>h.  th"  color  rank,  the  general    guides,  ami  the  battalion 
v  ill    resume    th-   direct    march;    the   major  will    Immediately  place  himself  thirty  or 
fortl  pace-  in  front,  (ace  to  the  colonel    placed  in  rear  of  the  centre,  who  «  ill  establish 

him  by  signal  of  the  sword  on  the  perpendicular  direction  which  tic  corporal  in  the 

centre  of  the  battalion  ought  to  pin  sue;  the  major  will  immediately  cause  the  color- 
bearer,  if  necessary,  to  incline  to  ihe    right  01  Ij   Opposite  to  his 

the  o. .lor  hearer  wiU  then  take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  liima-lf  and 
i  he  major. 

:.  The  lieutenant  colon-  1  u  ill  endeavor  to  give  to  the  color-company  and  the  next 
en  the  bit  a  direction  perpendicular  to  that  pursued  by  the  centre  corporal  ;  and  all 
the  Other  Companies,  without  precipitancy,  will  conform  themselves  to  that  basis. 

Auticlk  Fifth. 

To  march  in  retreat,  in  line  of  batiie. 

CC4.  The  battalion  b;ing  halted,  if  it  be  ths  wish  of  the  c  >lon  |  to  march 

in  retreat,  he  will  command: 

1.  /'ore  to  (he  rear.     2.   Battalion,  n'mul— F.'.cl. 


SCHOOL    OF    Til!-    BATTALION — PART    V.  121 

Mi,   At  the  second  comnand,  the  battalion  will  fa~c  about;  the  color-rank,  and  the 

Id  line  :  the  solor-beare?  will  pas? 
into  the  rear  rank,  now  !••  iding  ;  th  i  a  >:-por.al  of  hi--  til-  will  itep  b<  hind  the  corporal 
next  on  his  own  right,  to  I  -t  the  eolor-boarer  pi-,  and  then  step  into  tin'  front  rank, 
now  rear,  t>i  reform  th'-  color-file;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  behind  the  front 
rank,  become  tin'  rear  ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  place  themselves  before 
tin'  rear  rank,  BOH  leei 

M6.  The  onload  will  take  post  forty  pae^s  behind  the  color-til",  in  order  to  assure 
the  lieutenant  Oolonel  on  the  perpendicular,  who  will   place   himself  at  a  like  di  • 
in  front,  a*  prescribed  for  th"  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

M7.  If  th"  battalion  be  the  one  charred  with  th  •  direction,  the  colonel  will  oi-tah- 
li-h  markeri  in  tl  Indicated,  No.  589,  except  that  they  will  face  to  the  bet- 

talion.  and  that  th"  fir-!  will  be  placed  twenty-Are  paces  from  the  li  •nt-nant  colonel. 
If  the  ma;  I  idy  established,  the  officer  charged  with  replacing  them  in  sac- 

•Ti  will  oaasetfa  m  to  face  about,  th-  m  imeot  that  th-  battalion  executes  this 
sjoeetnsjnt,  and  then  the  marker  nearest  to  the  battalion  will  hasten  to  the  rear  of  the 
fliers. 
668.  These  dispositions  being  mad-,  th  ■  oolonel  will  command  : 
3.  Battalion, fori 
■    At  tin-  SOOmuod,  th>  color-bearer  will  advance  six  pares  beyond  tin  rank  of 
apanied  by  the  two  corporals  ol  his  guard  of  thai  rank,  the  centre 
beppingback  to  lei  the  color-bearer  pass ;  th'  two  lib'  do  'this 

cntre  corporal  will  unit"  on  him  behind   the  color-guard  isis  of  align- 

f,)r  th"  lin  iral  guides  will  place  th  >,mt  (Ires  abreast 

with  the  color  rank,  the  corering  sergeants  will  place  themselves  in  th"  line  of  file 
-.  and  the  captains  in  th"  r^ar  rank,  now  leading!  th"  captains  in  (h  ■  left  wing, 
now  right,  will   if  not  already  there,  shift  to  the  l(  R  01  their  companies  now  bi 
-lit. 
CTO.  Tl,  •  colonel  will  then  command  : 

t.    March  (  or  double  oniric— March.  ) 
§71.  The  battalion  wi'l  march   in   retreat  on  th"  fame  principles  which  govern  the 
advance  in  Use :  th l  centre  corporal  behind  the  color-bearer  will  march  exactly  in  hi» 

If  it  be   the  directing  battalion,   the  color-bearer  will  direct  himself  on 
markers,  who  will,  of  their  own  a  cord,  each  place  himself  in  behind  tin 

mail  d  being  approached  by  the  battalion :  theoffieei  charged  with 

the  markers,  will  carefully  ;>-  direction. 

■  inat"  battalion,  the  Color-bearer  will    maintain   himself 
on  ih  ins  of  point*  taken  on  the  ground. 

074.  Th"  colonel,  I  lea  tenant  colon  -I,  and  maj  >r  will  each  discharge  the  samr>  func- 
ttssM  a«  id  th"  advance  |sj 

nant  colonel,  plaoed  on  th"  ontside  of  the  fil*  closers  of  the  color 
;  my.  will  al-o  maintain  the  tB  alignment  in  a  square 

tic  of  directi  her  file  closers  will  keep  themselves  aligned  on  this 

ksjssss. 

Article  Sixth. 

To  halt  the  i  tke 


r 


f<mt . 


1   having   halted   the   battalion,  and  wi-hing   to  fa 
will  command  : 

1.    ftsss  !••  the  front. 

ommand,  thf  color -rank,  general  g 
snf«.  will  •■  ir  habitaa. 

will  r")>«««  in)  rank. 

•  'ion  marrhing  in  lins  of  bal 
shall  wish  to  march  it  tl  «  ill  command  : 

1.     /  I      M*»T?. 

•79.   At  thp  f'iniiniir 
goit  by  th" 
be  carefnlly  observed. 


122  SCHOOL  OP  THE  BARALIQfl      i'AKT   v. 

If  the  colonel  *>hould  wi.-h  the  battalion  to  march  again  by  the  front,  he  will 
giro  the  same  now BU Will 

At.:  th. 

Change  of  direction,  in  marcJUng  in  retreat. 

88L    A  battalion  retiring  in  line  will  change  die  rto>n  by  the  command?  and  m 
indicated  No.  662  and  following  ;  the  th  1 1,  nnited  I"  bind  the  color-rank, 

will  oonfttrm  themsslei  -  to  the  movement  of  tliis  rank,  and  wheel  like  it ;  the  centre 
file  closer  of  the  three  n ill  take  steps  ol  fonrteen  or  k  renteea  inches,  accoi  <l i n^r  to  1 1 » »• 
and  keep  himeell  steadily  at  the  tame  distance  from  the  odor-bearers  the  line 
of  file  closers  will  conform  tbi  QtofiU  centre,  and  the  lieutenant 

OuloaeJ  will  maiiituiii  it  on  that  bai 

Aktici.e  Eighth. 

Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  rrtreati. 

f>s2.  The  battalion  sdrancing  in  lino  will  be  supposed  to  enconnter  an  obstacle  v*  hi.  h 

cover?  oho  or  mora  companies :  the  colonel  n  ill  caose  them  to  plos  into  column  at  full 

ee,  in  rear  of  the  next  company  to  waul?  the  color,  which  will  be  executed  in  ibe 

following  manner.    It  will  bo  rapposed  that  the  obstade  only  core* s  ths  third eom 

puny,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Third  company,  obstacle. 

'•.  At  this  command,  tlto  captain  of  the  third  company  will  place  himself  in  it.« 
front,  turn  to  it,  and  command,  1.  Third  eomoanw,  by  the  Uft  flank,  to  the  rear  mm 
eolmwuu  2.  Double  <j uirk.  8.  Ma&ch.  He  will  then  hasten  to  the  leu  of  hjscompasy. 
6%4.  At  the  command  norca,  the  coin]. any  will  lace  to  the  left  in  marehing;  the 
two  left  lih-s  will  promptly  disengage  to  the  rear  in  doable  quick  time  :  the  left  guide, 
•_•  himself  at  the  load  of  the  front  rank,  will  conduit  it  behind  the  fourth  com- 
pany, directing  himself  parallelty  with  this  company]  the  captain  of  the  third  will 
himself  ball  opposite  to  th  •  captain  of  the  fourth,  and  sse  bis  company  Bis  past ;  when 
its  right  file  shall  be  nearlj  np  with  him,  he  will  command,  1.  Third  company.  '-'.  />'.» 
the  rtght  jlniik.  :t.  MaaCB.  i.  Quid*  right,  and  place  himself  before  the  oentre  of  his 
compan] . 

■    '       mmand  march,  the  oompaay  will  face  to  the  right,  preserving  the 
gait,  but  the  moment  it  shall  be  at  the  prescribed  dlstsnce,  its  captain  will 
command : 

1.    Qiiivl:  (MBS.      2.    M Alien. 
8.   This  company  will    thus  follow  in  column  that  behind  which  it  finds  itself]  and 

at  wheeling  distance,  it.^  right  guide  marcbjjng  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  cap  tela  of 
that  company. 

i*.  A?  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  bars  raced  to  the  left,  the  left  guide  of  the 

i-.  cond  u  ill  plaee  bin  self  on  the  left  of  the  front   rank  of  his   Company,  and   maintain 

between  bimself  and  the  righted'  the  fourth  the  space  necessary  for  the  return  into 

■he  thil  d. 

.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will  command: 
Third  oowpant/f/orvard,  into  line. 
'.    At  this  command,  the  captain  turning  to  his  company,  will  add: 
1.  l!y  company,  right  half  uhrr'.    2.  Do obto  quick.    3.  Maim  n. 
COO.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the  double  quick  step,  and 
cuii- a  half  wheel;  its  captain  will  then  command,  I.  forward.    2.  Mahtii.    8.  Quid* 
U/t,    The  second  command  will  be  given  when  the  company  shall  bare  sudicieutlj 

led. 

U  At  the  command  saarcA,  the  company  will  direct  itself" straight  forward, to 
wards  the  line  of  battle,  and  retake  its  position  in  it  according  to  the  prineiples  pre- 
scribed for  the  formation  forward  into  line  of  battle, 

■•posed  that  ti bstacl  I  cover.?  several  contiguous  Companies  (the 

three  companies  on  the  right  for    example,)  the  colonel  will  command  : 
1.    Three   right    comj>anit*,    obstacle.      1.    J!j/  the  left  flank,   to  the   rear,   into  column. 
3.    Double  quick—  BUBOH. 

C93    At  th?  first  comniRud,    the  captains   of  the   design ited  companies   will   cacb 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   V.  123 

himself  bcWo  the  centre  of  his  company,  anil   caution   it  as  to   the  movement 
about  to  be  execut>  1. 

694.  At  the  command  march,  the  detonated  companies  will  face  to  the  left  in 
marching,  and  immediately  take  the  doable  quick  Step:  each  captain  will  cause  the 
head  of  his  compaoj  to  disengage  itself  to  the  rea-,  and  the  left  guide  "ill  place  him 
self  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank  ;  the  captain  of  the  third  company  will  conform 
himself  to  what  ie  prcecribed,  Wo.  684  and  following ;  the  captains  of  the  othsr  com 
paoiea  will  conduct  them  by  the  flank  in  rear  of  the  third,  inclining  towards  the  head 
Of  the  column  ;  and,  as  the  head  of  each  company  an  ives  opposite  to  the  right  of  ihc 
one  next  before  it  in  column,  its  captain  will  himself  halt,  see  bis  company  file 
and  conform  himself  far  facing  it  to  the  front,  in  marching,  to  what  is  pr<  scribed  No. 
0ei4,  and  following-. 

C95.   When  the  last    OOapOBJ  in  column  shall  have  passed  the  obstacle,  the  colonel 
will  command  : 

.T.     Thrrr  right  companies,  forvnrij,  into  line. 
.   At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  these  three  companies  will  command, 
Z?y  company,  right  half  vitrei.      The  colonel  will  then  add: 
1.    Pnnhlc  f  nick.      2.    M 

CO".  At  this,  briaklj  repeated  by  the  captains  of  the  three  companies,  each  company 
will  conform  itsell  to  what  u  prescribed  No.  690  and  f.  Mowing, 

Med,  in  the  foregoing  examples,  that  the  companies  belonged  to  the 
right  wing;  il  they  make  part  Of  the  other,  they  will  execute  the  passage  of  an  ob- 
f-tuclc  according  to  tho  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  flank  compaoiei  are  broken  off  to  pass  an  obstacle,  the  general  guide  on 
that  flank  «i!l  place  himself  six  paces  in  front  of  the  outer  file  ol  the  ■  pany 

to  hirn  remaining  in  line. 

■_' movements,    it   has   1  posed    that    the  battalion    wan 

marching  in  quick  time,  !>ut  if  it  be  marching    in   double  qvick  time,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  t  ral  contiguous  compantei  to  break  to  the  rear,  he  will  Ural 

italion  to  march    in  quick  time;    the  companies  will  break  as  indicsi 
"01.   When  the  movement  is  completed,  the  colonel  will  order  the  double  qui<  h 

id  n  ill  also  cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  quick  time  when  be  lb  all 
wish  to  In  ine  into  ln  tl  companies  which  are  to  the  rear  la  column ;  the 

movement  will  beexecated  as  p.  rioo  ly  indicated;  and  when  the  Isi  -hall 

batl   nearly  ooaapletcd  its  movement,  tbe  colonel  will  cause  the  double  qu: 
■ 

.   In  the  rnovrment  of  a  single  company,  or  of  several  companies  not  contiguous 
li  othei ,  the  battalias  will  continue  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  but  in  I 
cases  the  companies  which  aie  to  ploy  into  column.  the  line,  will  increase 

In  th<*  march  in  retreat,  these  several  movements  will  be  executed  on  the  same 
tslioa  marched  by  the  froatrasJb 

Iva&dng  in  line   of  battle,  >hall    be  oblig.  •  the 

right  sboat  .it.  if  there  b  in  column,  behind  the  rear  rank. 

i     march,    at    the 
'on,  and    will    tl  it   in  the  retreat ;   they  will 

■  und 
:ta\     ) 

ttalion  be  mai  rhing  in  retreat  in  double  quirk  time,  and  many  co 
rank   of  the  battalion, 

■    • 
an  oh 
to  tl 

comj 

ha  Hal  ion.  who  v 

sured   on  il  the    groui,  J    b   ' 

himself  and  | 


124  BOOL   01    IBE   BATTALION  —  PART    V. 

It  is  prescribed,  as  a  e  t  the  companies  of  the  right  wing  ouijht 

tne  ni'iv  -in  i.v  th    I  (ft  Bank,  .ml    the  reverse  Tor 

:  the  > » 1 1 1  ir  iriag  :  but  If  the 
■  osntre,  each  will  file  into  column  behind  that,  still  in  line,   and  of  the  i 
.  which  mr.v  !>•  the  neareel  to  it. 

Article  Ninth. 

To  pom  a  defile,  in  r<  tread,  by  th  right  or  left  flank. 

700.   Wli  -n  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  'hall  encounter  n  defile  which  it  must  rH^> 
•  I  l  '.v  ill  ball  the  battalion,  and  faoe  it  t.>  the  front 

710.  It  a ill  t.  ■  that  the  defile  i;  in  th  •  n  ar  of  the  left  lank,  and  that  its 
w idth  it  sutficieul  to  a  column  by  platoon;  the  colonel  will  place  ■ 
marker  lit"  en  or  twenty  paces  in  the  rear  "l  th  ■  lit  >.  olos  r   al  the  point  around  which 

will  hire  to  change  direotioo  in  Order  to  enter  the  defile  -,  he  will 
then  command : 

To  thr  rear,  en  the  right  flank,  pen*  tkt  ■ 

711.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  immediately  command: 

1.    First  company,  right —  Fa'T..      2.    Makch    (or  double  quick— March. 

712.  Ai  the  coinrnanil  march,  the  Brst  company  will  commence  the   movement;  the 
91c  will  wheel  to   the  right,  march  to  the  rear  till   it  shall  have    passed  (our 

beyond  the  Ble  closers,  when  it  n  ill  wheel  again  to  the  right,  and  then  direct  itself 
Ftraighl  forward  towards  the  left  flank.  All  th  •  other  files  oTthis  oompany  will  eosse 
tu  wh  •(  1  in  nooession  ai  the  msae  place  v.  here  the  Brat  had  wh 

713.  The  second  company  will  ezecnte,  in  its  turn,  the  same  movement,  by  th  i  • 

tain,  who  will  give  die  command  Minos,  so  thai  th  •  first  fileof  hit 
my  may  immediately  follow  the  last  of  the  lir.^i.  without  constraint,  however, 
*i  to  taking  the  step  of  the  firs! ;  th  •  first  file  of  the  second  company  will  wheel  to  the 
r-ijrht.  on  its  ground  :  all  the  other  files  of  this  company  will  come  in  saceossioD  to 
wheel  :u  the  same  siaea,  The  following  companies  will  ezecnte,  each  in  its  turn,  what 
basjasl  been  prescribed  for  the  second, 

714.  When  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall  hi-  on  the  same  direction  with 
the  first,  the  captain  of  the  first  will  oanse  it  to  form,  by  platoons  into  line,  and  tan 
moment  thai  it  is  in  column,  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  direct  himself  on  the 
marker  around  whom  he  baa  to  change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile. 

715.  The  second  oompany  will  continue  to  inarch  by  the  flank,  directing  itself  p 

I  -My-  with  the  line  of  battle  :  and  it.  in  it.-!  turn,  will  form  by  platoon  into  line,  when 
the  third  company  shall  be  wholly  on  the  same  direction  with  il 

716.  Tli'.'  following  cnmpanlos  will  successively  execute  whal  has  just  been  prescribed 

for  the  second,  and  each  will  form  by  platoon  into  line,  when  the   next  company  shall 

be  on  th  •  nun  •  direction  a  ith  itself! 

717.  The  lir-t  platoon  «f  the  leading  company  having  arrived  opposite  to  the  mar- 
ker placed  al  the  entrance  of  the  defile,  will  turn  to  the  left,  and  the  fallowing  platoons 
will  all  execute  this  movement  at  the  same  point.  As  the  last  companies  will  no!  be 
able  to  farm  platoon-  before  reaching  the  defile,  they  will  m>  direct  themselves,  la  en- 
tering It,  BS  to  1   m',  e  room  to  the  left  for  this  movement. 

71k.  The  battalion  will  thus  ps  -  the  defile  by  platoon  :  and.  as  the  two  platoon?  of 
each  company  shall  clear  it.  companies  will  be  successively   formed  by  the 

d,  school  oi  the  company,  ho,  273,  and  following. 

719.  The  bead  of  the  column  having  cleared  the  defile,  and  having  reached  the 
distance  at  which  the  colonel  wi-l  n  line  faced  to  the  defile,  be  may  oanse 
the  leading  company  to  turn  to  the  left,  to  prolong  the  Column  in  that  direction,  and 
then  form  it  to  the  left  into  liu  I  u€  battle  :  or  he  may  halt  the  column,  and  form  it 
into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the  rear. 

720.  If  the  d  file  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right  flank,  it  will  be  passed  by  the  left  ;  the 
movement  will  be  i  cecuted  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inver.se  moans. 

721.  If  the  d  file    b  ■  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front  of  a    platoon,  it  will  be  p  I 

by    the    tl  ink.      Captains    and     fill  rill    be    watchful   that    the    files  do    not 

■   their  distances    in    marching.       Companies   or  platoons    will    be    formed    into 
width    ofthedcfllo  may  permit,  or    as  the   companies   ghall   successively 
<  tear  it. 


fCUOOL   OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    V.  12.". 

AtiTici.r.  TlXTX. 

To  march  by  the  flunk. 

722.   The  colonel,  wishing  the  battalion  to  march  by  the  flunk,  will  command  : 

1.    Battalion,      2.  llujht  (or  left)  —  PACK.     3.  Forward.     4.  Jf ahi'ii       ur  double  r/u, 

Maim  n.  ; 

I'll.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  ami   covering  sergeants  will  place  111 

i,  Niis.   1S6  aurl  141,  school  of  the  company. 

714.   The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the    battalion  will  place  himself  to    the  left  and  by 
the  side  of  the  last  file  of  hi?  company,  covering  the  captain!  in  lile. 

.  The  battalion  having  to  face  by  tin'  left  Hank,  tli  •  captains,  at  the  SftOoad  er.ru 
mand.  will  shift  rapidly  to  the  hit  of  their  companies,  and  each  place  himself  by  th  • 
side  of  them  .;.  ant  of  'the  company  preceding  hit  own.  except  the  captain  ■•! 

the  left  company,  who  w  ill  place  himself  by  the  aide  oj  the  sergeant  on  the  lett  of  tli  • 
battalion.  The  ©OTering  sergeant  of  the  right  company  will  place  himself  br  the 
right  side  of  the  front  lank  man  of  the  rearmost  file  of  hi.s  eompanv,  covering  the 
captains  in  lile. 

72(1.    At  the  command  nuirrh,  the  battalion  will   step    off  with    life;   the  sergeant, 
placed  before  the  leading   file  [right  or  left,  in  front.)  will  be  careful  to  pn 
ai-tly  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  to  direct  himself  straight  forward 

this  end,    he  will    take  points  on  the  ground. 

727.   Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right  OT  left  flank,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
••.ill  place  himsell  abreast  with  the  leading  file,  and  the   major  abreast  with  the  coloi 
Ma,  i  >"th  on  the  one  side  of  the  front  rank,  and  afaoat  sit  pace*  from  Lt. 

The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieutenant-colonel   tnd  the  front  rank,   will 
march  in  tl.  p  with  the  head  ol  the  battalion,    and  the  sergeant  major,  placed 

n  the  major  and  the  color-bearer,  will  march    in    I  tep    with  tl. 

jntant. 

The  captains  and  Hie  closets  will  carefully  see  that    the  files  neither  open   out. 
nor  close  too  much,  and  that  they  regain  insensibly  their  distances,  II   last, 
i    wishing  the  battalion  to  wheel  by  file,  will  command  : 
4.    l!y JiU   riyht  (OT  l>/'.)     2.    Makch. 

TSL  The  flies  will  wheel  in  saccession,  and  all   at  the  place  where  the  first  had 

wheeled,  in  conforming  to  the  print  i  bed  in  the  school  of  thi 

732.   The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  what)  the  cob-nil  shall  w  i-h  it  to  halt.  Ii  ■ 
will  command  : 

1.  BaMmliom.     2.    lUi.r.     3.    PaoWT, 

■maads  will  bed  in  the  school  of  the  corn- 

s'...  146. 

ttallon  be  marching  by  the  flirik  and  the  colon.  1  should  w  i-h  to  raiue 
narch  in  lis  M  t»i  the  tear,   the  morementl  will   I 

by  the  comr    .  1  the  school  ol  thecompanr. 

Art 

form  the  battalion  on  ihc  right  or  Ift.  by  ,</>,  i 

bat 

rbe  battaliaa   marchlag  b»  the  right  flank,    when  | 
form  it  <.n  th    right  by  hie,  he  will  determine  the  line  of  battle,   and  the   lient 
colonel  will  plan  two  mark  :(,  w  bat  \% 

I  ' 

ad  of  the  battalion    bcinjr    nearly  np  w-.T 
will  command  : 


If  tarn. 


At   'he  orr.i.  ai  ■!  win    rA     tkfl  IBSM  r   •  SSI 


I.  br 

lent 


i   n  will 
le,  anc 


12G  HOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PARI   V. 

.   The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  the  leading  nnp,  will  place  himself  on 
•he  direction  of  the  mat  kers,  and  ■>;  -  osite  t"  the  I'M  file  oh  his  campaaj  .  at  the  i. 
tbat  tha  front  rank  man  of   tliis  file   arrives  on  th«  lino. 

The  formation  osing  ended,  the  colonel  will   command: 
Qmiim — 1'osts. 
740.  Tli"  colonel  will  superintend  the  successive  formation  of  the  battalion,  moving 
along  the  front  of  the  line  of  battle. 

711.   The  lieutenant  colonel  Will,  in    N  -lire    tin-  direction  of  the   guides, 

ar.d  pee  tint  the  men  of  the  front   rank,   in  placing  themselves  on    the  line,   do  not 
l>*.y<  it. 

742.  If  the  battalion  march  by  the  left  flank,  flu-  movement  will  be  executed  acrord 
Lng  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  pMWMi 

ABTieLK    TWKLKTH. 

Changes  (/front. 
Change  of  front  perpendicularly  foricard. 

743.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is  supposed  to  be  the  ui-ho  the  col- 
onel to  CUM  a  change  of  front  forward  on  the  right  company,  and  tn.it  the  angle 
formed  bv  the  old  and  new  position!  be  a  right  angle,  or  a  few  degrees  more  or  lew 
than  one  :  he  will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction, before  the  po- 
sition to  be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  order  its  captain  to  establish  it  against 
the  markers. 

714.  The  capiain  of  the  right  company  will  immediately  direct  it  upon  the  markers 
by  a  wheel  to  the  right  on  the  fixed  pirot;  and  after  having  halted  it,  be  will  align  it 
by  the  right. 
745.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.    Change  from  forirard  onfimt  company.      2.    lty  company,  ru/hi  half  uheel. 
3.  March  (or  double  fuicic— Maiuii.) 
74G.  At  the  second  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his 
company. 

747.  At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pirot  ;  the  1  I 
gnide  of  each  will  place  himself  OB  its  left  as  soon  hs  he  shall  b«  able  to  pas*,  j  and 
when  ih^  colonel  shall  judge  that  the  companies  hive  sufficiently  wheeled,  be  will 
command  : 

4.    Foricard.      5.    M  Alien.    <">.    (iuide  rt'y'if. 

71>-.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  ceasing  to  wheel  will  inarch  straight  for- 
ward;  at  the  sixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 

749.  The  right  gnide  of  thesecond  company  will  inarch  straight  forward  until  this 
company  shall  an  ive  at  the  point  where  it  should  turn  to  the  right  :  each  succeeding 
right  guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately  before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel, 
and  will  march  in  the  trace  of  this  file  until  this  company  shall  torn  to  the  right  to 
move  upon  the  line;   this  guide  will  then  march  straight  I'm  ward. 

750.  The  second  company  having  attired  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its 
captain  will  cause  it  to  turn  to  the  right :  thu  right  guide  will  direct  himself  so  an  to 
arrive  squarely  upon  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  he  thai]  be  at  three  paces  from  tbat 
line,  the  captain  nil  I  command  : 

1.  Stamd  company.     2.  Halt. 

751.  At  thesecond  commnnd,  the  company  will  halt  ;  the  files  not  rat  in  line  with 
the  guide  will  come  into  it  promptly,  the  left  gnide  will  place  himself  on  the  line  ol 
battle,  and.  as  soon  as  h  •  [|  assured!  in  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the 
captain    will  align  the  company  by  the  right. 

752.  Kach  following  company  will  conform  to  what  has  juit  been  prescribed  for  the 
second. 

753.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guide* — 1'OSTS. 

754.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  change  front  for- 
ward on  the  first  company,  and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new  positions  be 
a  right  angle,  he  will  cause  two  markers  to  oe  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the 
position  to  be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  will  command  : 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION — PAKT   V.  127 

1.  t'hangr front  forward    on  fir  at  rompnny.      2.    By  company,    right    kaJf  whrrl.      :'. 

Ma'<ch   [or  douhlc  quick — Maiicii. 
75.1.   At  the  first  command,  t  Ii «-  captains  will  move  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  their 
respective  companies :  Um captain  oi  the  Brat  company  trill  command:  1.  Right  i»r»  .• 

2.  <Ju;ck  time  ;   the  captains  of  the  other  companies*  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the 
right 

756.   At  tho  command  march,  the  first  company  will  turn  to  the  right  according  to 
the  principles  pi  escribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  405  :  iti  captain  will  halt  it 
three  par--  from  the  markers,  and  the  lilcs  in  rear  will  promptly  come  into  lite. 
captain  will  align  the  company  by  the  rieht. 

.    Bach  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  rijrht  on  a  fixed  pivot  ;   the  left 
iraides  «ill  place  themselves  on  the  left  of  their  respective  companies,  and  when  the 
■  I    ii.l  shall  judge  they  have  wheeled  .-ulliciontly,  he  Will  command  : 
4.   Forward.     5.   March.     0.    Quid*  right. 
These  commands  will  be  executed  as  indicated  No.  740  and  following. 

759.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion    to   change    front  forward   on  the  eighth 
company  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

Chang''  of  front  perpendicularly  (o  the  rear. 

1    The  colonel  wishing  to  change  front  to   the  rear  on   the   right  company,  will 
impart  his  parpose  to  the  captain  of  this  company.     The  latter  will  immediately  fact! 

•  his  company  about,  wheel  it   to  the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot,  and  halt  it  when  it  shall 
be  in  the  direction  indicated  to  him  bj    the  colonel:  the  captain    will   the!   f.ie«.-   his 

iri\  to  the  front,  and  alien  it  by  the  right  ssratosl   the  two  markers,  wrh*>m  the 
colonel  will  can-  to  be  established  before  the  right  and  left  hie*. 

761.   These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    t'kanqr  front  to  thr  rear,    on   frit   company.      2.    Battalion    ahaut — FaCS.      3.    /.' / 
company,  I'Jt  half  vhccl.      4.    March      or    double  i/nick — AlARCll.) 

\t  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except   the  light,  will  face  a'1 
7C3.   At  the  third,  the  captains,  whose  companies  have  faced  about,  will  each  i ilfl  ■ 
himself  behind   the  centre  of  his  company,  two   paoce  from  the  front  rank,  now    t!.c 
rear. 

At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  wheel  to  the  lc!t  on  the  fixed  pivot  by   the 
rear  rank  :  the  left  jraide  of  each  will,  u  place  bimi 

the  left  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  Company,  now  become  the  right  ;  and  srhon  the  colon*  1 
••hall  judge  thai  the  companies  have  safliciently  wheeled,  he  will  command: 

S.    Forrard.      ft.    Mar*  h.      7.    iinidr  left. 

At  the  sixth  command,   th'  to  wheel,  march  straigl.' 

w  ard  •  i   tattle,  an  I  •  nth.  take  the  touch  of  th    • 

•..waid-  the    I.  it. 

The  jrnide  of  each  companv  on    it.*  right  flank,  become  left,  will  conform  hiir- 

•  ell  to  the  pri  I,  No.  74-. 

'  company,  from  the  right,  havlBS  airive.l  opposite  to  the  left 
>  ill    turn  to  the  |  fit  j  the  puide  «  ill  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive  paraMelll 
the  lin 

|  aer>  bsjjroM  'ain  will  command  :    1.  ijmmj  ;    2,   H\Lr. 

•nd  command,  the  company  will  halt  :   the    file,  whtoh  rr 
be  in  line  with  tl 

about,  and  then  align  it  by  Ihs  right. 

769.  All  other  companies  will  execute  what  has  jasl  d  for  the  we* 

left  of  th*-  ■        ••        thai  precedi  • 

770.  The  formation  \«  ing  end  d.  mil    command: 

•  STS. 

771     The  colonel  will  cans*  a  change  of  front  on  the  lrft  company    of  the  battalion 

i  the  r'»',   aceoiding  to  the  same  ,,r  m<  ipl<-»  and  by  inverse  mean*. 

772.  In  changes  of  front,  general  saperinteadei 

aent. 


128  BOOL  09   r:is  BATTALION — PART  v. 

773.  The  lioud  naiit  eoloMl  will  a*sure  the  direction  of  the  guides  a*   they  new- 
•iv<  Iv  move  out  on  the  line  of  battle,  conforming  himself  to  what  hat  been  prea 

Remorka  on  changes  of  front. 

774.  When  a  new  direction  it  liar,  <t  nearly  to,  to  that  of  the  battalion. 
Ibe  (  to  make  about  a  half  uhrrl  (the  eighth  of  acin  march- 
ing straight  forward ;  bat  when  those  two  lis  [uetoeacfa  other,  the  smal- 
ler tbe  aaaie  which  they  form,  the  less  ought  tha  companies  to  wheel.  It  \<  for  the 
colonei  to  judge,  according  to  the  angle,  the  precise  time  when  be  ought  to  give  the 
command  .  the  caution  forward*  and  if  he  cannot  catch  the  exact  moment, 
the  word  of  execution  should  rather  be  given  a  little  ton  sunn,  than  an  insta: 
late. 

775.  Win  n  the  old  end  new  lines  form  an  angle  of  forty-fire  oi  I 

one)  will  find  it  neceatan  to  an  est  the  wheel  oftha  companies  w  hen  the  marching  Banks 
■hall  have  taken  bat  ■  few  paces,  or,  itmaj  be,  liave  but  disengaged,  rospectirelr, 
from  the  fixed  pivots  of  the  next  companies;  and  in  all  such  cases,  the  com] 
will  arrive  >>o  nearly  parallel  to  the  new  line,  as  to  be  able  to  align  themselves  upon 
it  without  the  intermediate  turn  to  the  right  or  left :  to  execute  the  movement  un- 
der either  circumstance  supposed,  the  ''oloncl  will  command: 

Oblique  t-hanye   of  front,  forward,    (or  to  the  rear,)  OS    [luci  /•omjiany.) 

Aiinci.B  TimiTr.KNTii. 

To  ]>!(>}/  the  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  iJic  ventre. 

778.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying  the  corresponding  companies  of  the  right 
and  left  wings  into  column  at  company  distance,  or  closed  In  mass,  in  rear  of  the  two 
centre  companies,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed,  Article  Third,  Part  Second, 
of  this  School. 

777.  The  colonel,  w  Miing  to  form  the  double  column  at  company  distance,  (the 
battalion  being  in  line  of  buttle,)  will   command: 

1.  Double  column,   at  half  distance,     '1.   Battalion,  inward* — Tack.     3.  M  mich  (or 

double    ijtiicl;      Mahch.  ) 

77Q.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  place  themselves  two  paces  In  front  of 
their  respective  companies;  tho  captains  of  the  two  centre  companies  will  caution 
them  to  stand  fast,  and  the  other  captains  will  caution  their  no mps. trim  to  hue  to  the 
left  and  right,  respectively.    The  covering  sergeants  will  step  bato  the  front  rank. 

77:».  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies  will  stand  fast  ;  tho 

Others  of  the  right  wing  M  ill  I. ice  to  the  I  "ft.  and   the  others  of  the  left  wing  a  ill  face 

to  the  right;  each  captain  whose  enmpani  lias  fac  id,  will  Ins  ten  to  break  to  the  rear 
the  two  files  .it  the  head  of  bis  company;  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company,  and 
the  right  guide  of  each  left  Company,  will  each  place  himself  at  the  head  of  its  front 
i ank,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  bis  guide. 
7K0.  At  the  command  marek,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  which  arc  to  form  the 
division,  will  stand  fast ;  tho  scni  »r  captain  of  the  two  will  plant  himself  before 

the  centre  of  the  division,  and  command  :  (hilde  riyht  ;  the  junior  captain  w  ill  place 
himself  in  the  Interval  between  the  two  companies,  and  the  lefl  guide  of  the  left  com 
nany  will  place  himscll  in  the  front  rank  on  the  left  of  the  division,  as  .soon  as  he  shall 
1 1  •  able  to  pass. 

781.  Al!  the  other  companies,  conducted  by  their  captains,  will  step  off  with  life  to 
arrange  themselves  in  column  al  oompaaj  distance,  each  company  behind  the  preceding 
one  in  the  column  of  the  same  wing,  so  that,  in  the  right  wing,  the  third  may  b- 
next  b  hind  the  fourth,  the  second  ni  xt  to  the  third,  and  so  <  n  to  the  right  c  impanv  ; 
and,  in  the  left  winjr,  the  sixth  mav  be  next  behind  the  fifth,  the  seventh  next  to  the 
sixth,  and  10  on  to  the  left  company  Of  the  battalion. 

7K'2.  The  corresponding  companies  ofthe  two  wings  will  unite  into  divisions  in 
arranging  themselves  in  column ;  an  instant  before  the  union,  at  the  centre  of  this 
column,  the  left  guides  of  right  companies  will  pass  Into  the  line  at  file  closers,  and 
each  captain  will  command  :  1.  Surh  company  ,•  2.  Unit:  3.  FaoNT. 

7*3.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  of  union,  each  eon  " 
r-any  will  halt  :  at  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front.  The  leaior  captain  in  each 
division  will  place  himself  on  its  right,  and  command,  ffig&f— Deivs,  and  thejnaior 
captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  tiro  companies.  The  division 
being  aligned,  its  chief  will  command  Frost,  and  take  his  position  two  paces  before 
its  centre. 


SCHOOL   OF   THR   BATTALION — PART   V.  129 

784.  The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  dirMOM  will  tike  the  respective  denomina- 
tions offirtt,  itcond,  third,  Ac,  according  to  position  in  the  column,  beginning  at  tht 
front. 

785.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  who,  at  the  second  command  given  by  the  colonel,  will 
have  placed  himself  at  a  little  more  than  company  distance  in  rear  of  the  right  guide 
•f  the  firBt  division,  will  assure  the  right  guides  on  the  direction  as  thay  succeadivuly 
arrive,  bv  placing  himself  in  their  rear. 

78G.  The  music  will  paRS  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

7H7.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the  double  column  at  company  distance 
without  halting  the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.    Double  column  at  half  dietance.      2.    Battalion,  t y  tht  right  and  left  flankt. 
3.    March  (or  double  fwtdfe— if  arch.  ) 

788.  At  the  first  command  each  captain  will  more  briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
his  company  ;  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will  caution  their  companies  to 
march  straight  forward  ;  the  other  captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the 
right  and  left. 

789.  At  the  command  march,  th«  fourth  and  fifth  companies  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  ;  the  senior  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  division 
and  command,  (ruxde  right  ;  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  be- 
tween the  two  companies.  The  left  (Juide  of  tha  fifth  company  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  t*> 
the  right.  The  color  and  general  guides  will  retake  their  places.  The  three  right 
companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  three  left  companies  will  face  to  the  rij/ht. 
Kach  captain  will  break  to  the  rear  two  files  at  the  head  of  his  company  ;  the  left 
guides  of  the  right  companies,  and  the  right  guides  of  the  left  companies,  will  each 
place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and  the  captain  bv  the 
aide  of  his  guide. 

790.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the  column  and  direct  th»n:s"lve« 
TiaralMlr  to  the  first  division.  Kach  of  the  other  companies  will,  in  like  manner,  place 
ito-lf  behind  the  company  of  thr  wing  to  which  it  belongs,  and  will  be  careful  to  gain 
as  much  ground  as  possible  towards  the  bead  of  the  column. 

791.  The  corresponding  cempsniea  of  each  wing  will  nnite  into  divisions  on  taking 
their  positions  in  column,  and  each  captain,  th<*  instant  tbe  head  of  his  company  ar- 
rives at  the  centre  of  the  column,  will  command,  1.  Such  company  by  the  right  (or  left ) 
flank.     1.   March.     The  senior  captain  of  the  two  companies  will  place  himsel.  in  front 

of  the  centre  of  his  division,  and  command,  Guide  right  ;  the  junior  captain  will  |  lac« 
himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies.  The  two  companies  thus  hirmed 
Wit<>  a  division  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right,  and  when  each  division  haa 
gained  iu  proper  distance,  its  chief  wdl  cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

792.  When  the  battalion  presents  an  odd  number  of  companies,  the  formation  will 
be  made  in  like  manner,  and  the  company  on  either  flank  which  shall  find  itself  witk- 
•ot  a  corresponding  one,  will  place  itseif  at  company  distance  behind  tha  wing  to 
which  it  belwnes. 

793.  The  double  column,  closed  in  mav,  will  be  formed  according  to  the  saw  prirv 
eiplcs  and  bv  the  same  command?,  substituting  the  indication,  cloud  tm  nan,  foi  that 
Ot   at  half  aftanct 

794.  The  double  rolnnsn  never  b»ing  formed  when  two  or  more  battalion*  are  to  be 
In  one  general  column,  it  will  habilnally  take  the  guide  bo  tha  right,  sometimes  to  the 
V*ft,  or  in  the  centre  of  the  column  ;  in  th<  U«t  rn»,  the  roinrnand  v»  ill  be.  jr«i  i»  '*ntr». 
the  column  will  march  and  change  direction  according  to  the  principle  i,  re#<- 1  irwsi 
(or  a  simpl*  column  bv  rlivinon. 

796.  Tba  double  column  at  company  distance  will  be  closed  in  mass,  or.  if  in  nun, 
will  take  half  distance,  by  the  •emmaods  and  means  indicated  for  a  simple  column  by 
division. 

I  deployment  of  tht   douiAe   column,   faced  t<>   the  front 

7*6.   Tht  colonel,  wishing  to  deploy  th»  d  .  -e  a,  mark<u  re»i.«o- 

tivelv  before  the  right  and  left  ties  M  U  -  • 

•f  the  i  ight  fcuifiisi,  mm  division ;  a  «».•>..■«.     t-.         -,, 

gajdes  to  spring  ont  on  tb-.  alignment  of  lb*,    marktrs   a   little  W*vond    ll  - 
which  tba  r**p»otiv*  danks  nf  tb*  battalion  oaght 


to  ratt  ,    he  vili  than  r-uimar  ! 


130  SCHOOL   OF    THE   BATTALION — PART    V. 

1.    Deploy  column.     1.    Ratlalion  out>rarfi*—Vxrr..     3.    March  (or  double  quick- 
Ms  i. 

7:'7.  The  column  will  deploy  it««*ir  on  the  two  companies  at  its  hoa<l.  aeeording  tn 
the  principle!  preterit*  <1  (or  1 1» •  •  deployment  of  oolnmni  in  mass.    Tin-  captains  of  these 
oompenies  will  each,  el  the  command  mmreh,  place  himself  on  the  right  of  li  • 
eon  pan/,  end  align  it  by  the  right :  tin-  enptsin  of  the  fourth  will  then  place  himself 
In  the  rear  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  in  the  rank  of  file  i  he  moment 

the  pepteln  of  the  third  ihall  come  to  its  left  to  align  it. 

T:is.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  aoloaeJ  will  command  : 
Onidee    P 

70!).  Ifit  be  tho  wish  of  the  colonel  to  canee  the  fire  to  commence  pending  the  deploy- 
ment, he  «ill  give  an  order  to  thai  effect  to  the  captaina  of  the  fourth  ami  fifth  com- 
panies, and  tli'  tire  will  he  executed  according  t<>  the  principles  prescribed  No.  I 

800.  The  battalion  being  in  double  column  and  in  march,  if  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  deploy  it  without  belting  the  colnmn,  be  will  cause  three  mat  ken  to  ' 

the  line  of  battle,  and   when    the   head   of  the  column  shall  arrive  near  the  markers, 
he  will  command  : 

1.    Deploy  column.      2.    Battalion,  l:/  the  ri'iht   ami  left  flanks.      3.    Maucii  (or  Jnuhle  • 

</iii  ck— March.) 

801.  The  column  will  deploy  on  the  two  leading  companies,  according  to  the  princi- 
pteapreseribed for  she  deployment  of  a  close  column,  Mo.  5SS  and  following ;  at  the 

command  march,    the   chief  of  the   first   division   will   ball    it,  and  tin- captain*  of  the 
fourth  and  fifth  companies  will  align  their  companies  by  the  right. 

802.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  deploy  the  col- 
umn and  to  continue  to  march  in  the  order  of  battle,  he  will  not  cause  markers  to  be 
established  at  the  head  of  the  column.  The  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  indicated  No.  800,  observing  what  follow-.  At  the  first  command, 
the  chief  of  the  first  division  .vill  command.  Quick  time.  At  the  command  nia'reft,  the 
first  division  will  continue  to  march  in  quick  time  ;  the  colonel  will  command.  Guide 
centre.  The  captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  the  color,  and  the  men,  "ill 
immediately  conform  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  of  battle.  The  companies 
will  take  the  quick  step  by  the  command  of  their  captain-,  as  they  suooossively  arrive 
in  line.  The  movement  Completed,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  inarch  in 
double  quick  time. 

To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  bottle,  faced  to  the  right 

or  left. 

803.  The  double  column,  being  at  company  distance  and  at  a  halt,  may  be  formed 
into  lineof  battle  faced  to  the  right  or  left;  when  the  colonel  shall  n  i.-h  to  form  it 
faced  to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Right  into  line  icheel,  left  companies  <ai  the  right  into  line.      2.    Battalion,  guide  right. 
3.    Mauch  (or  double  quid: —  Maucii.  | 

804.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his 
company  ;  the  right  companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will  have  to  wheel  to  the 
tight  into  line,  the  left  companies  that  they  will  have  to  march  straight  forward. 

805.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  of  the  fourth  company  will  place  himself 
briskly  on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the  Column,  face  to  them,  and  opposite 
to  one  of  the  three  last  hie*  of  his  company  when  in  line  of  battle;  the  lieutenant 
eolonel  will  assure  him  in  that  position. 

800.  At  the  c  immand  march,  briskly  repeated  by  all  the  captains,  the  right  com- 
panies will  form  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  the  left  companies  will  put  themselves 

in  march  in  order  to  form  on  the  right  Into  line  of  battle  ;  these  formations  will  be 

executed  by  the  means  indicated  No.  Idl  and  following,  and  No.  410.  and  following  ;  the 

lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  guides  of  the  left  wing  on  the  Use  of  battle  as  they 

Successively  come  upon  it. 

807.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.    Right  into  line  wheel.      2.    Left  companies,  on  the  right  into  line.      3.    Battalion  guide 
right.      4.    March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

808.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  promptly  before  the  centre 
of  his  company  ;  the  right  companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will  have  to  wheel 
to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies  that  they  will  have  to  form  on  the  right  into  line. 


PCTJOOL    OF    TUE   BATTALION PAHS   V.  131 

S09.  At  the  command  mar.-/*,  briskly  repeated,  the  right  companies  will  form  to  the 
right  into  line,  aad  the  left companies  on  the  right  into  line.  These  formation?  will 
be  ezeontod  as  prescribed  Nos.  402,  417,  an<l  fallowing, 

Pio.  If  the  ooloael  shonld  Wish  to  mere  the  battalion  forward,  at  the  moment  the 
right  compaaiei  have  completed  the  w  ieel,  he  will  command: 

nrnn/.      6.    Mdnii  (or  dotMe  S/tnesV-   March.) 

Kll.  At  the  command  forward,  the  captain!  of  the  right  companies  will  command. 
Quick  time  At  the  command  march,  the  right  companies  will  cease  to  wheel  ami 
march  straight  forward.     The  colonel  will  then  add: 

7.  Guirlf  centre, 

812.  The  movements  of  the  left  companies  will  he  executed  in  double  quick  time  as 
prescribed  above,  and  as  they  arrive  on  the  line  each  captain  will  cause  hii  company 
to  march  in  quick  time. 

813  The  column  may  be  formed  faced  to  the  left  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

H4.   If  the  column  be  closed  in   mass  instead   of  at  company  distance,  these  n 

•  uted  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  Nop.  417,  502,  and  510. 

Remarks  on  the  deployment  of  the  double  column. 

815.  The  depth  of  the  double  column,  at  company  distance,  being  inconsiderable 
etolhag  it  in  mass,  if  at  a  halt,  in  order  to  deploy  it,  may  be  dispensed  with;  but  if  it 
be  in  march,  it  will  be  preferable  to  cause  it  so  to  close,  in  halting,  before  deploying. 

?lfi.  The  double  column  will  be  deployed  habitually  on  the  centre  companies,  but  the 
colonel  may  sometimes  deploy  it  on  any  interior  company,  or  on  the  first  or  eighth 
•ompany. 

Article  Fourteenth. 

Diepo&Uions  against  Cavalry, 

ill.   A  battalion  being  in  column  by   company,  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  and 
•t  a  halt,  when  the  oolonel  shall   wish   to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first  cause  divi- 
formed  ;   which  being  done,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Tofomtommn,     2.    To  half  di'tan'-e  clone  column.     3.   March  (or  double  quick~- 

M  1MB.) 
-.   At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close  to  company  distance,  the  second 

tal      _    itl  from  th<-  rear  rank  of  the  fust  division. 

•     At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth  division,  the  fil*  eh  .   },  company 

of  which  it  hi  composed,  nesting  by  the  outer  flank  of  thi  .  them- 

whe»  two  mk  opposite  to  theii   n  -  f  bat- 

tle, and  face  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 

Tninenccnvnt    of  the  movement,   the    major  will  r>lacc  hinj«o|f  on  the 
right  oi  the  column  abreast  with  the  first  division ;  thi 

will  place  themselves  at  platOOS   di«tanee.   behind   the  inner   .  .   coast 

-  on. 

821.  These  dis]  ng  made,  the   colonel  may,  according  to  circ-ro.uBeen, 

j  nt  the  column  in  march,  or  ran-"   it    to  form   sqas  latter,  ha 

will  command  : 

1.     Fnrmf/unrr        2.     Mifk$  eWSSt  Isjft  «tW  U*4    fKtti. 

>■??.   At  th"  first  command,  th«  lieutenant  color,.  'i  guides,  aad  the 

re sjor,  fannj:  t  t,  will  align 

■  he  fourth  r'  ■  w ill  «uri'' 

right  gaides,  in  placing  themselves  on  i 

•   f-xart  dista: 

it  I  the  first  div 

tr-rvtnd  and  third  divisions  will    placo  themsetre*  before 
them  tt.si  tbev  will  ba 
right,  snd  the  l< 

Lattle. 

rlootrs.  spy— i1t  tt  bftpiatw 

in  line  of  battle,  and  will  be  replaced  \ 


132  ACIIOOL   OP   TUB   BATTALION— PART   V. 

rank,  the  corporal  of  the  same  file  who  is  in  the  rank  of  fite  closers  will  step  inte  the 
rem   rank. 

8i5.  The  chief  of  thr  fourth  division  will  command  :  1.  Fourth  dirition,  forward  ; 
J.    timid*  Itft,  and  plac<<  himself  at  the  same  time  two  paces  outside  of  its  left  flank. 

826.  These  dispositions  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Mahch  (or  double  quick  —  sfaaOTk) 

827.  At  this  command,  bri.-kly  repeated,  the  first  division  will  stand  fast  ;  but  its 
rijfht  file  will  face  to  th*  right,  aid  its  left  file,   to  the  bit. 

828.  The  companies  of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will  wheel  to  the  right  and  left 
Into  line,  and  the  bnglcrs  will  advance  a  space  equal  U)  the  fror.t  of  a  company. 

82'J.  The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the  square,  and  when  it  shall  have 
closed,  it><  chief  will  halt  it,  face  it  about,  and  alipn  it  by  the  rear  rank  upon  the  guides 
of  the  division,  who  will,  for  this  purpose,  remain  hOM  to  th"  front.  Th-  junior  cap- 
tain will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  beejOBM  the  I'-int,  and  the  covering  s-rgvant  of 
the  k-ft  company  will  place  himsel!  behind  him  in  the  front  rank,  become  rear.  The 
file  closer*  will,  at  the  same  time,  close  up  a  pace  on  the  front  lank,  and  the  outsr  file 
on  each  flank  of  the  division  will  face  outward". 

830.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guidet — Posrs. 

831.  At  this  oomwiand.  the  chief*  of  the  first  and  fourth  divisions,  as  well  as  the 
guides,  will  enter  the  square. 

832.  Th  captains  whose  companies  have  formed  to  the  right  l»to  line,  will  remain 
on  the  lefl  of  their  OOtnpailiea;  the  left  guide  of  each  of  those  companies  will,  in  the, 
rear  tank,  cover  lits  captain,  and  the  covering  sergraut  of  eaeh  will  place  himself  as  a 
file  closer  behind  the  right  tile  of  his  company. 

833.  The  field  and  alaff  will  enter  the  square,  the  li  -utrnant  colonel  placing  himself 
behind  the  left,  and  tho  major  behind  the  right  of  the  first  diviiion. 

834.  If  the  battalion  present  ten.  instead  of  eight  compani es,  the  fourth  division  will 
make  the  same  movements  preset  it »••(!  shore  for  the  I  rood  and  third  divisions,  and  tho 
fifth.  I  he  movement*  prescribed  for  the  fourth  division. 

BS5.  A  battalion  ought  never  to  present,  near  th  l  ■  Dcmj'l  cavalry,  an  odd  company. 
Th"  odd  company,  under  that  circumstance,  ought,  wh-n  the  battalion  is  under  aims, 
to  be  consolidated,  for  the  time,  with  the  other  companies. 

B36.  The  fronts  of  the  square  will  be  designated  as  follows:  the  first  division  nill 
eJwava  be  theyfrst/Vastf  ;  the  hut  division,  the  fourth  /root ;  the  right  companies  of 
th-  other  divisions'  will  form  the  sseotul  front  f  and  the  left  companies  of  the  sa;no 
divi   .  IBS  the  third  front. 

KJ7.  At  battalion  bring  in  column  by  company,  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  and 
in  march,  a/hea  the  colonel  shall  «ish  to  form  square,  he  will  cause  this  moTemeat  t<* 
be  eJteCBfd  by  the  commands  and  means  indicated.  \o.  «17. 

838.   A  the  command  mnroh,  the  column  will   close   to  company  distance,  as  is  pre- 
scribed.  No.  27H.       Wlin  the  obi  if  of  the  fourth  divhri  »0  shall  eOmOMUld  Quick  murek, 
the  tile  closers  of  this  division  will  place  themselves  be. ore  th-  front  rank. 
BS9.   The  major  and  th.-  buglers  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  820. 
840.    If  the  OOlonol  vtiall  wish  to  I'm  m  square,  he  will  command  : 

1.   FWaa.afSwrs,     2.    Bigkt  m»d loft  into  lint,  vko$L     3.  Muicu. 
Ml.   At  the  first  Domaajutd,  she  chief  ol  the  Brat  dii  i  i  •>,  will  caution  it  to  halt ;  all 
th-  .-attains  of  the  second  and  third  divisions  n  ill  I  a]  idly  olac-   th   nuetvea  b.  forn  the 
centres  of  their  reapeotiee  companies,  and  caution  them1  tliHi  the*  will  have  to  wh-el, 
the    igbt  onmpanlea  to  the  right    and  the  left  ini      to  the  left  lito  line.    The 

ohi  ■■  oi   the  fourth  division  will  CMttlon  it  to  contloi     i  ircb   and  will  hasten  to  its 

left  flnuk.      At  the  third  cominmi  I,  briskly  repeal.il    tb  I  eillefof  th  !  first  division  will 
h  ill     ■■  dirbi  >n  anrf  align  it  to  th  ■  left,  aiid   tb  I       trill  face  to  the  right  and 

lef       he  net  of  the  movement  wiir be  executed  ■  >  *28  and  following. 

Che  lieutenant  onload  and  ■    •  major,  at  imai  d  ware*,  will  conform  so 

wh         irejeribed,  No.  nri. 

|fth<  battalion,  before  tbe  rormad,  b-  la  deubla  aeiumu,  the  tern 

Is  rompanLenUi  form  ;b        ■•  '  -ont,  the  two  rear  eempaniet  the  fourth  j  the 

•  iipaaieaol  tho  right  bait  battalion  will  torn  the  skoou,  and  those  of  th*  left 

U  iiiou  tli  i  third 


8CII00L  OP   TIIR   BATTALION — PAUT   V.  133 

844    Th»  first  and  fourth  fronts  will    be  commanded    by   the  chiefs  of  the  first  an 
fo.irth  divisions;  each  of  the  other  two  by  its  Huior  captain. 

844.  The  commander  of  each  front  will  plane  himself  four  pare*  behind  its  present 
rear  rank,  and  will  be  replaced  momentarily  in  the  command  of  his  company  by  the 
next  in  rank  therein. 

Mfi.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  as  has  been  supposed,  the  square  will  be  formecf 
ir.  the  manner  prescribed.  If o.  M7  or  r.'is,  and  following;  and  the  dispositions  indi- 
cated, Nos.  819  and  820.  will  be  executed  at  the  command  f»rm  'quart. 

847.  If  the  column  by  division,  whether  double  or  simple,  be  in  mass,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first  cause  it  to  take  company  distance  ;  to 
this  effect,  he  will  command  : 

1.    To  form  'quart.      1.    By  the  head  of  column,  tak*  half  dittance. 

848.  The  divisions  will  take  halfdistance  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  324,  atd  fol- 
lowing. What  is  prescribed,  No.  820,  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and  second  divisions 
are  put  in  motion. 

84I>.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  the  moment  the  third  division  shall  hare  it* 
distance.  As  soon  as  the  column  is  halted,  the  dispositions  indicated,  No.  B19,  will  be 
executed,  and  when  these  are  completed,  the  colonel  may  proceed  to  form  square. 

850.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  also,  in  the  first  place,  cause  company  dia- 
taDCe  to  be  taken,  and,  fc.r  this  pur  pose,  will  command  : 

1.    Toformiquare.      2.  By  the.  head  of  column  take  half  dittanc*.      3.  March  (or  duubU 

quick— M Ai.ru.  ) 

B&L  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  330,  and  following.  What 
is  prescribed,  No.  820,  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and  second  divisions  are  put  in 
motion. 

852.  The  colonel  will  proceed  to  form  square  the  moment  the  third  division  shall 
have  its  distsnre  ;  at  the  command  form  tquarc.  the  dispositions  indicated.  No.  B19, 
will  be  executed.  If  it  be  intended  merely  tor//  po*e  ''he  tmnmnfor  tquare,  the  colonel 
will  not  halt  the  column  until  the  last  division  has  its  distance. 

In  a  simple  colnrnn,  left  in  fiont.  these  several  movements  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means;  but  the  fronts  of  the  square  will 
have  the  same  designations  as  if  the  ripht  of  the  column  were  in  front,  that  is,  tl. 
di  visit  n  will  constitute  the  first  front,  and  thus  of  the  other  subdivisions. 

8M.   The  battalion  being:  formed  into  square,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it 
to  advance  a  distance  leas  than  thirty  pwcue,  b*  will  command  : 
1.    By  (such  )  front,  fnrvard.      2.    Ihtru. 

If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  b?  made  by  the  first  front,  the  chief  of  tbia 
front  will  command  : 

1.     fit  it  diii'ion.  forward.       2.     ti  uide  centre. 

•M.   The  ehi-fof  th-  ■  e  ,,i  I  front  will  face  hit  front  to  th  •  I  -ft.     Theeaptains  of  !„<• 
t  •        .me  a  composing  this  front  v\  i  i  I  place  themselves  outside,  and  OB  the  right  of  their 
;id»s,  who  will  replace  th-m  in  the  Ir  ,.nt   i  ank  ;    th*-  chief  of  the  third  fi.mt  w  ill 
{»< '  bis  f'  imt  to  th"  r  ii.-ht.  and  the  captains  in  this  front  trill  place  (h>'ins<  Ivi  •  onteide, 
and  on  the  left  i  '  tb<  roa  th  front  will  f.i 

front  about,  and  command  :  "    I    I    Q  mid*  centre,    Th    ca 

who  is  la  the  centre  of  the  firat  front,  wi  d  with  the  < 

and  •  ill  repulati   hires,  li  b\  thr  im  am  iieln  at.-d  n.  ■  l  ihe  company,  No.  89. 

857.    At  the  ro-ntiiand  mat  ■  ire   will    put  itself  in  motion  ;    th"  cornj  - 

snar   '  Sank  will  be  earefal    i  ancea.     The  chief  of  the 

bnrtb  division  will  caasc  hit  divii  ly  doted  on  the  flasks  o(  the 

an Oond  and  third  front*. 

6M.    This  :■ 

nant  colonel  will  ;  e  file  of 

1  |  -i  i  r  h. 

•450.   If  the  colr.nrl  should  wish  U  ire,  bl  "ill  eommaad  I 

1.     /,'allniir.n.       2.    II  *  t  T. 

Ml.   AC  the  i  alt ;  rtl   '■■    I  srl      a      a^out 

-     I    without  .  • 

•'!«•  f*  a*  in  aqu 


134  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART    V. 

862.  In  moving  the  square  forward  bv  the  second,  third,  or  fourth  fronts,  the  *»iu  • 

red. 

863.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  equal  .-.  w  hen  the  eolOM]  i-hall  wish  to  cause  it 
to  advance  a  greater  distance  than  thirtj  paces,  he  will  command  ( 

1.     Form  riAumn. 

864.  The  chief  i.f  the  first  front  will  command  : 

1.  Fir tt HivUion forward.     'J.   Quid*  l< 

.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  eautionit  to  stand  fast :  the  commander 

ol  the  second  front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  left,  and  then  commai  .  nay. 

1  he  eommaader  of  the  third  fronl  w ill  canse  il  to  Face  to  the  right,  and 

immand,  /.'•,  company,  by  JUt  right.     At  the  moment  the  second  and  third  fronts 

: .'  •'  '"  the  left  and  right,  cadi  captain  n  ill  canse  to  break  to  the  i  ear  the  two  leading 

■  hii  Dompanr. 

-itions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command: 
8,  Mvkcii  (or.  double  quick-    M\ 

867.  At  this  command,  the  Brat  front  will  march  forward  j  Its  chief  will  halt  It  when 
it  shall  hare  advanced  a  space  equal  to  half  its  front,  and  align  it  by  the  left 

868.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  second  and  third  fronta  will  wheel  by  We 
to  the  left  and  right,  and  inarch  to  meet  each  other  behind  the  <•.  nti  e  ol  toe  fit  it  drvl 
sion,  and  the  moment  they  unite,  the  captain  of  eachcompanj  will  halt  hi-  compani 
and  lace  it  to  the  front.    The  division  tx  tng  re-formed,  Its  chief  will  align  it  bv  the  left 

869.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  canse  it  to  face  about :  it-  file  closers  will 
remain  before  the  front  rank. 

870.  The  column  being  thus  re  formed,  the  colonel  ma>  put  it  in  march  1>\  thecoma 
ssaads  and  means  prescribed,  No.  164,  and  following;  the  right  guides  will  pret 
company  distance  exactly  as  the  directing  guides. 

•s7l.  When  tin- colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  square. he  will  rive  the  commands  in 
dicated,  No.  840. 

872.  To  eause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat  a  distance  greater  than  thirty  ] 

the  colonel  will  first  cause  column  to  be  formed  as  indicated  No.  863;  and  when  formed, 
he  will  cause  it  to  face  bv  the  n  ar  rank  ;    to  this  end.  he  will  command  : 

1.    To  mitrrh  in  retreat.     2.    Fact  by  the  rear  rank,     '.',.   Battalion,  about   -Fads. 

873.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the  Interior  divisions  will  place 
themselves,  passing  l>\  the  outei  Banks  ol  tfa  tit  i  •  tpective  companies,  behind  the  A  ont 
rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line  ol  battii  ;  the  file  olosers  of  the  other  divi 

will  .-land  fast. 

874.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face  about;  each  chiel  of  division 
will  place  hi ni self  before  its  rest  rank,  become  front,  passing  through  the  interval  be- 
tween it-  two  companies;  the  guides  will  Btep  Into  the  rear  rank,  now  front. 

B75.  The  column  being  thus  disposi  d,  the  colon.  1  may  put  it  In  march,  or  cause  !t 
to  lorm  square  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the  front  rank.  The  square  being  foi  mad,  its  fronts 
will  presort  b  the  same  designations  the.v  had  when  faced  bj  the  front  rank. 

876.  The  battalion  being  in  square  b>  the  rear  rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
march  it  in  retreat  or  in  advance,  r  distance  less  than  tlm  t ;  paces,  he  will  conform  to 
what  i-  prescribed  No.  864  and  following.  :  otherwise,  he  ^\  >  1  i  re-form  the  column ao 
oording  to  the  principles  preset  lb  d,  No.  868,  by  marching  forward  the  fonrth  front 

s"7.  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  ttui  front  a  distance  greater  than  thirty  pan  ,, 
the  colonel  will  fare  tin'  column  bj  the  front  rank  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command  . 

1.    To  march  in  advance.     2.   Face  by  the  front  rank.     3.  Battalion,  about     I 

B78,  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  *73  and  following. 

878.  if  the  column  be  marching  in  advance,  snd  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it 
in  ret  i  oat,  be  w  ill  command  \ 
1.  To  mar  ck  in  retreat.    1.  Battalion  right  about.    3.  Maiicii  (or  double  quick  •Maiuii.) 

I     \t  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will 
rapidly  before  the  front   rank  of  their  respective  divisions.     At  the 
command  noreA,  the  column  will  face  about   and  move  off  to  the  reai  ;  the  chit  fa  of 
division! and  the  guides  will  ■•.inform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  s7t. 

881.  If  the  Column  !>'■  marching  in  ret:  at,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  ia 
advance,  he  will  command  : 


i  1IO0L   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   V.  135 

1.    To  march  in  advance.     1.   Battalion    right  about.     3.    KABCU    'or  double  quick— 

March.) 
882.   At  tli"  second  command,  the  file  doers  of  the  second  and  third  divisions  Will 
place  then  the  rear  rank  of  their  respective  divisions;  at  the  third,  the 

column  will  face  by  the  front  rank. 

Zb  reduce  the  &quare. 

The  colonel,  wishing  to  break  the  square,  will  command  : 

1.    Red  KM  "f/uitrr.      2.    MaBOR  («  double  quirk—  M.«ltni.) 
984,   This  moveiiif  nt  will  be  executed  in  the  manner  indicated.  \o.  MS  and  follow- 
in-  ;  bnl  th"  Bleclosers  ot  the  fourth  front  will  pines  tl,  m*  Ivi  -  behind  the  rear  rank 
the  til  ni'  nt  it  faci  -  about ;  the  field  and  Btaff,  the  color-bearer  and  buglers  will,  at 
the  same  time,  return  to  their  placet  in  column. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  bdttU  . 

A  battalion  deplored  may  be  formed  into  square  in  a  direction  either  parallel 
or  p<"i"  ndicular  to  the  line  of  battle. 

In  the  first  case,  the  colonel  w  ill  cause  the  battalion  to  break  by  division  to  the 

it  or  left,  and  then  close  the  column  to  half  distance,  U  indit  %U  d.  No 
frlT.  and  folio 

ml  ease)  be  will  ploy  the  oattalion  into  simple  column  by  division  at 

hall  distance  in  rear  of  the  right  or  left  division,  or  into  column  doubled  on  the  i  '-ntre. 
To  plov  the  battalion  into  column  upon  one  of  the  flank  divisions,  th*-  eolof  1 
will  command  : 

1.    To  fori*  'n«nrc.      1.  Column  at  half  distance  by  division.      .1.   On  the  fir*t  (or  fourth  | 
i.    liattalion   right  (or  U/t) — Fml      5.    If  .wirii  (or  double  quid — \\s 

This  moveaeat  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  pn  119 

and  following. 

I:  ■-,,■  I  .'■  i     marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  te 

,nare  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.    y,  ihnti 

by  the  right  I  or  /'/'     lloul..      4.    Mamh  (OT  double  qui,l; 

v.<\.  This  movement  will  1  j  to  tb"  prit  I   for 

■In inn  by  division  at  half  distance,  No.  160.     Thechiei  of  the  fir  t  di 
will  halt  his  division  at  the  command  voir,  I,. 

To  |  toy  tin  battalion  into  doable  column,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    To  form  tqunrr.      2.    Double  column  nt  half  dittat  tfa/iotl  inirard* — Facr. 

4.  M  w  i  e  fuick     Mai 

This  movement  will  bt  I  following. 

battalion  bt  ing  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into  double  column  to  form  square,  the 
and: 

1.    T"  _/•■    SI  '  r,m.      ?,.   Jlattnlion  by  the  right  and  left  ,■' ■ 

4.    XI  AM  M    '  '.r  doubt. 

The  clii<  f  of  th. 
ing  division  will  halt  hii  division  at  the  command  mnreh. 

in  the,  formation  <f  tquartt  in  two  rornJu. 

w   .  , 

r  ■    i  of   the  inr 

ill,  in  this   ' 

■ 

equal  I 

- 

will  sarr, 

In  tlsjsj  <"»-    • 
wing  mam 


136  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART   V. 

• 
899  If  the  rolumn  be  at  full  distance,  when  it  shall  close  at  the  command  to  form 
Kfimrt,  t..  half  distance  the  chief  of  the  third  division  will  cause  four  files  to  break 
to  tin-  rear  from  the  right and  left  of  his  division  ;  the  guides  will  doM  upon  the  outer 
files  remaining  in  line,  and  the  l»ft  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  tils 
iiiiin  ediatelv  in  fiont  of  him.  This  division  will  then  close  in'm  ass  on  the  second  divi- 
sion ;  and  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  close  to  half  distance  on  the  tame  division. 
900.  At  the  command  form  touar*.  the  chief  of  the  reserve  division  will  command, 
1.  Thtrd  dirxtion.forirard.  '1.  liuidt  centre  :  at  this  command,  the  guides  on  tho 
flanks  will  tall  into  the  line  of  tile  closers.  At  the  command  march,  the  reserve  will 
move  forward  the  distance  of  a  company  front.  When  halted,  its  chief  will  cause  tho 
platoons  to  be  doubled,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command  : 

1.  On  th*  centre  Houblt  platoont.  2.  Maech. 
Ml.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  place  themselves  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  their  respective  platoons  ;  the  chief  of  -ach  outer  platoon  will  face  his 
platoon  towards  the  centre,  and  cause  to  break  to  the  rear  two  tiles  from  the  left  or 
right  At  the  command  march,  the  outer  platoons  will  direct  their  march  so  as  to 
double  on  the  centre  platoon  at  the  distance  of  four  paces;  their  chiefs  will  align 
these  outer  platoons  on  the  centre,  and  the  filea  previously  broken  to  the  rear  will 
•  one  into  line. 

P"2.  If  the  column  be  at  half,  instead  of  full  distance,  the  colonel  before  forming 
square  w  ill  order  the  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  to  move  forward  their 
divisions  as  prescribed  No.  899. 

90.1.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  at  the  command  to  form  square,  the  chief  of 
the  third  division  will  break  four  files  to  the  rear  from  each  of  the  flanks  as  prescribed 
No.  899. 

904.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  as  soon  as  the  second  division  shall  have  gained 
its  distance. 

90.r».  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  column  to  continue  marching  at  the  command,  by 
the  head  •/  column  take  half  dintance,  the  chief  of  the  reserve  division  will  give  hia 
cautionary  commands  in  sufficient  time  to  place  Ins  division  in  motion  simultaneously 
with  the  one  which  precedes  it.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  give  the  com- 
mand march  at  the  instant  there  is  company  distance  between  his  division  and  tho 
second. 

90(5.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  reform  the  column,  at  the  coramand/orm  column, 
the  chief  of  the  third  division  will  command,  form  tlipuion;  at  this  conunaud,  the 
chiefs  of  the  outer  platoons  which  have  doubled  in  rear  of  the  centre  platoons,  will 
giv,  the  commands  and  make  the'  preparatory  movements  for  deploying  on  the  centre 
platoons,  which  will  be  executed  at  the  command  aiareft,  given  by  the  colonel  and 
briskly  repeated  by  the  chief  of  this  division.  The  division  being  re-formed,  the 
ehiefa  of  the  outer  platoons  will  retake  their  places  in  column,  and  the  chief  of  this 
division  will  again  cause  lour  files  from  each  of  its  flanks  to  break  to  the  rear. 

'J<>7.  If  before  the  formation  of  the  square,  the  column  had  been  left  in  front,  it 
would  be  formed  by  t lie  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  principles.  Tho 
aceond  division,  in  this  case,  would  form  the  reserve. 

908.  The  column  being  formed,  if  the  colonel  should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat  he- 
will  Atee  it  by  the  rear  rank.  The  files  of  the  third  division  broken  ofl'  to  the  rear, 
will  face  about  with  the  battalion,  and  when  the  column  is  put  in  motion  will  march 
in  front  of  the  rear  rank.  Hut  should  the  colonel  w  ish  to  re-form  the  square,  he  will 
cause  the  battalion  to  lace  by  the  front  rank. 

909.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line,  instead  of  in  column,  the  chief  of  the  reserve  divi- 
sion will  bring  it  into  column  in  such  manner  that  there  nuiy  be  a  distance  of  only 
four  paces  between  this  division  and  the  one  W  Inch. is  to  be  inmieili.it eh  in  front  of  it ; 
and  when  this  division  il  halted  and  aligned,  its  chief  will  cause  the  usual  number  of 
files  to  be  broken  to  the  rear.  The  Chief  of  the  division  w  Inch  should  OOCUpy  in  column 
a  position  immediately  in  rear  of  the  reserve  division  will,  on  entering  the  column, 
tak-  u  distance  of  twelve  pares  between  it  and  the  division  established  immediately 
in  front  of  the  reserve  division. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

910.  If  the  square  formed  in  two  ranks,  according  to  the  preceding  rules,  should 
not  be  deemed  suilieieutly  strong,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  square  to  be  formed  in 
four  ranks. 


6OI00L    OF   THE    BATTALION* — PART   V.  137 

911.  The  battalion  Mug  in  eolMM  by  company  at  Cull  distance,  right  in  front,  and 
at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  ,-hnll  wish  to  form  square  in  four  ranks,  he  will  first  causa 
divisions  to  be  formed,  uhich  being  executed,  be  will  command  : 

1.    To/orm  t  quart  in/our  raid*.      1.    To  ha\f  dittanrr,  r]o>t  column.      3.   MtRCM   (or 
double  quirk  —  MakCII.  ) 

912.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  Irtt  division  will  caution  the  right  com- 
pany to  face  to  the  left,  and  the  left  company  to  face  to  the  right.  The  duel's  of  the 
other  divisions  will  caution  their  divisions  to  mote  foi  ward. 

913.  At  the  command  marrh.  the  right  company  of  the  first  division  will  form  into 
four  ranks  on  its  left  file,  and  the  left  company  into  four  ranks  on  its  right  file.  The 
formation  ended,  the  chief  of  this  division  will  align  it  by  the  left. 

914.  The  other  divisions  will  more  forward  and  double  their  files,  marching ;  the 
right  company  of  each  division  will  double  on  its  left  tile,  and  the  left  company  on  it* 
right  file.  The  formation  completed,  each  chief  of  division  will  command,  Guide  \eft. 
Ea(  h  chief  will  halt  his  division  when  it  shall  have  the  distance  of  a  company  fwmt 
in  four  rank*  from  the  preceding  one,  counting  from  its  rear  rank,  and  will  align  his 
division  by  the  left.  At  the  instant  the  fourth  division  is  halted,  the  file  closers  will 
move  rapidly  before  its  front  rank. 

915.  The  colonel  will  form  square,  re-form  column,  and  reduce  square  in  four  ranks, 
by  the  Fame  commands  and  means  as  prescribed  for  a  battalion  in  two  ranks. 

?!<>.  If  the  square  formed  in  four  ranks  be  reduced  and  at  a  halt,  and  the  colonel 
•hall  wish  to  form  the  battalion  into  two  ranks,  be  will  command  : 

1.    /*  tiro  rank>,  undaublt  file*.      1.    ItaltaMan  nutirnrdi  —  Y ACK.      3.    Mu.cil. 

917.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  step  before  the  centres  of  their  respec- 
tive companies,  and  those  on  their  right  will  caution  thcrn  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the  left. 

918.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right  and  left. 

919.  At  the  command  marrh,  each  company  will  undouble  its  files  and  reform  into 
two  tanks  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  376  and  following.  F.aeh 
Captain  will  halt  his  company  and  face  it  to  the  front.  The  formation  completed,  each 
ehief  of  division  will  align  his  division  by  the  I  'ft. 

920.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  with  divisions  formed  in  four  ranks,  and  the  colonel 
shall  w  ii  h  to  re  form  then,  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.     ffmitlt  rrntre.       2.     In  firo  rank*,  undnnhlr  /il<-».       3.    M  MICH. 

921.  The  cap  tain,  placed  in  the  centre  of  each  division,  will  continue  to  march 
straight  to  the  front,  as  will  also  the  left  file  of  the  i  i^lit  company,  and  the  right  fil« 
•  f  the  left  company.      Bach  company  will  then  be  rc-foi  ined  in  two  ranks,  as  preen 

in  the  school  of  the  company. 

922.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  two  ranks,  the  colonel  will  command 

U/1     or  rxght.  ) 

923.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the  flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.     T<>  form  tqtt  are,  in  four  rank'.      2.    Cnlumn  at  half  diilanrr,  by  dtr\'ion.      3.     Onih* 

Jh+t  (or fomr\k)  eh'eWsm.     4.  Hatta\\<>n,  rtgi  ■  (or  doul\* 

yu!<*         I  ■ 

9'^4.  At  tho  seeond  command,  each  chief  of  division  will  place  himself  before  the 
•CDtrc  of   his  divi«ion,  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  tight. 

92.Y  At  the  fourth  command,  the  rirjit  guide  *.f  th  ■  first  division  will  remain  faced 
to  the  front,  the  battalion  *  ill  face  U>  the  r i jr Ii " . 

.     .  .  .    ., 

to  Ike  front  reneioiog  doubled.      All  the  other  Die*  of  'our  ne-n  will  I 
and     ach  in  succession  will  close  u|  iig  it.  and 

fact  to  the  front,  remaining  donl  the  last  hie  shall  I 

.  - 

'.<7~     The  Other  divisions  will  j  >ime  mann'T  as  with  a  I  . 

In  two  rar  I  f  what  foil..'  .      .fallowing' 

rliti'inrji  to  file  past  tt 

each  t  division,  its  chief 

will  halt  the  right  | 

snrn  will  a  - 

d  clueed,  be  -        r 


138  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

doubled.     All  the  other  file.-'  will  execul  ly  what.  has  ju>t  been  prescribed 

for  the  second.    When  the  hurt  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  com- 
mand, Left  I ' 

I  nJion  I"'  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command: 

l.   To  form  equetre,  in  four  ranlu.     '2.  On  thefiritdivieion,  form  column.    3.  Jtattalion, 
Of  tie  right  flank.     I.    "  double  quick     M 

nd  command,  each  chief  of  division  w ill  step  in  front  of  the  oaatre 
of  his  division  and  caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank.  The  chief  of  the  first  division 
will  caation  hi.-  covering  sergeant  to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the  front 

A  t  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  rigbl  ;  the  covering  ser- 
'  division  will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  I  the  first  division 

will  then  forn   ii  to  Ibur  ranks  as  heretofore  preset  Ibi  d.     The  other  divisions  v.  ill  ploj 
!"""<  ■  •>  tie  r  as  it  the  movement  bad  taken  place  fro  a  :i  halt. 

Ii  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  perpendicular  square  in  four  rank*,  by 
column,  he  will  command  : 

ottr  rmnkm,     2.   Double  column,  at  half  dittone*.     B. 
or  double  q*  a.) 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  companies  will  pis 
the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and  caation  those  on  the  i  ight  to  face  to  the 
left,  and  those  on  the  lefl  to  face  to  the  right    The  captain  of  the  fifth  oasnpaai  will 
caution  his  covet  ing  -  i  geant  to  stand  fast 

033.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  tare  to  the  left  and  right]  at  the 
eoinmand  marcA,  the  left  file  of  the  fourth,  and  the  righl  file  of  the  fifth  company, 
will  fac  •  to  the  trout,  remaining  doubled.  The  fourth  company  "ill  close  succ<  ssiTelj 
by  hie  of  tours  on  the  left  file,  and  the  fifth  company,  in  like  manner,  on  the  right  file; 
the  files  will  lace  to  the  front  mm aining  doubled.  The  formation  completed,  the 
cbiel  of  division  will  command,  Right  drew.  The  junior  captain  will  place  bin 
in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies. 

'•'■'•  i-  "  I ther  companies  will  close  as  prescribed  for  the  double  column  in  two  ranks, 

ul>-  rving  wLal  follows:  each  captain  will  halt  the  leading  guide  oi  his  com]  anj  the 

•it  th  •  bead  of  bis  company  arrives  on  a  line  with  the  centre  of  the  col  un'n.     In 

the  right  companies,  the  left  guides  will  Btep  into  the  line  of  file  clovers,  and  the 

tile  <ii  tour  men  n  ill  face  immediately  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled,  and  by  the  side 

righl  guide  of  the  left  company.     The  companies  will  each  form  into  tour  i  anka, 

1  ii"  'i   So.  826,  th"  i  ighl  companies  on  the  left  file,  and  the  left  companii  I  on 

the  right  file.     Th  iformati  >n  completed,  the  |uni  ■.  captain  will  place  hlmsi  If  between 

the  two  eompanit  a,  and  the  senior  n  ill  ( mand,  Right  eft  i 

936.  Ii  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  « ill  command  : 

1.    To  f»r,  In  four  rank*.     2.   Form  double  column.     :>.   Battalion   ly  the 

rtglu  and  left flank*,     llanos   [or  double  quick     " 
936,  At  th<  second  command,  the  captains  will  place  themselves  before  the  centres 
of  their  respective  companies,  and  those  on  the  righl  will  caution  them  to  face  by  the 
left  Bank,  an  i  those  on  th  ■  lefl  to  face  bj    the  righl  flank  :  the  captain  of  the  fifth 
..  v.  ill  caution  hit  eovei  ing  sergeant  <o  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the  front. 
M  the  command   mareh,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies   will  halt.    The  bat- 
tali. m  will  face  to  the  Ii  it  and  righl  :  the  covering  sergeant   of  the  fifth  company  will 
ball  and  remain  fac  d  to  the  front,  the  movement  will  then  be  oxeonted  as  if  i'"1  l):it- 

talioii  was  Bt  a  hall. 

Oblique  squares. 

The  battalion  being  In  line  ef  battle,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the 
oblique  square,  be  will  oommand: 

1.  To  form  oblique  §quare.  2.  On  the  fir  it  divition  form  column. 
tl  ..nd  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  trace  the  alignment  of  the 
division  in  the  following  maimer :  he  will  place  bimteH  before  nd  near  the  right 
file  of  this  division,  race  to  the  left,  march  twelve  paces  along  the  front  rank,  halt, 
face  to  the  right,  march  t  *  i  Ive  paces  perpendicularly  to  the  front  bait  again,  face  to 
the  right,  and  immediate!}  place  a  marker  at  this  point.  Th*  covering  sergeantof 
the  right  company  will  step,  at  th  !    file,   face  to  the  left, 

and  conform  toe  line  of  his  shoulders  to  that  of  the  shoulder-  of  th  ■  marker  established 
bj  the  lieutenant  colonel.    These  two  □  arkersbi  ing  established,  the  lieutenant  colonel 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — FART    V.  139 

will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  same  alignment,  at  the  point  whore  the  left  of  tli  •  di- 
vision will  lialt. 

940.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  place  themselves  in  front  of  th*  centres  oi   their  di- 
vision* ;  the  chief  of  tli>'  first  ilu  islon  will  immediately  establish  it  by  a  whet  1  to  the 
ri<;ht  on  a  Axed  pivot,  against  the  markers,  and  align  it  by  thi  loft.     The  chiefs  of  tie- 
other  divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  to  tin   right.     The  colonel  will  then  apm 
■land  : 

:;.   Battalion  right. — Fack.     4.  Muini  (or  devils   quick —  Mmuh. 

Ml.  The  three  rear  divisions  will  direct  their  march  so  as  to  place  themselves  a* 
half  diseases  from  each  other,  and  in  the  rear  of  the  first  iously  indi- 

cated, iihsai  viug  what  follows: 

942.  The  did  f  of  the  w  cond  division,  Instead  of  breaking  the  henduiost  files  to  Up- 
roar, will  break  tbem  to  tic  front,  and  at  the  command  march,  will  conduct  his  di 
vision  towards  the  point  of  entrance  into  the  column.  Arrived  at  Litis  point,  he  will 
halt  in  bis  own  person,  cause  his  division  to  wh<  >  1  bv  file  to  the  i  i Lr  1  > ' .  instructing  tic 
right  guide  to  direct  hi  nisei  1  parallclly  to  tic  first  division ;  ai  d  the  left  file 

.  its  chit  1  will  halt  tic  division,  and  align  it  by  tic  hit.  Tic  other  divisions 
will  break  to  the  rear,  hut  slight!1!  :  each  will  enter  tic  column  as  prescribed  for  the 
second,  and  the  moment  tie  battalion  is  ployed  into  column,  the  colonel  will  cause  it 
to   form  .square. 

94.'f.  The  formation  of  a  battalion  into  oblique  square  on  the  left  division,  will  be  ex- 
ecuted according  to  the  same  principles  aid  6y  inverse  means. 

944.  Should  tie  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it  t  >  halt. 

94f>.  In  tic  preceding  example,  the  battalion  was  snnposed  to  1..-  deployed  ;  hut  if  it 
be  already  formed  in  column,  the  desired  obliquity  will  b  _  it  to 

change  direction  by  the  flank  ;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  command : 

I.     To  form  ohlique  i-qunrr.      2.    Chtl  fhi  (or  left)  flank. 

940.  At  the  set  ind,  the  li  ati  nant  colonel  will  trace  the  new  direction  in 

the  following  manner;  he  will  plaoc  befor    the  right  and 

■  ,  two  markers,  ami  s  third  on  the  prolongation  of  the  first  two,  on  the  tide  ot  the 
change  of  direction,  and  at  twelve  paces  from  the  Hank  of  the  column.  He  will  then 
place  hi  mi        I  b   twelve   ps  tdicularly    to  the 

'ialt,  and  finish  tra<  ingthe  new  direction  in  the  manner  indicated,  No. 
947.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 

m  righl(or  left ) — Face.     4.  Mabcb  (or  double  quick —  M.v 

Tbechaage  of  direction  having  be  the  colonel  will  aare 

to  be  formed. 

Should  lie  column  be  in  inarch,  the  rolottei  will  first  cause  it  to  halt. 

in  four  rank?,  will  be  etl  CUted  h\   the  tame  menu-,  and  B4 

the  prin<  ;  the  formation  of  squares  in  (bur  i 

mple  or  double  oolum  alar 

,  the 

Side  ,. 

'"   '"    "  W  In  all    f. .r- 

m  tquart,   and   n 

•' 

]'t< 

into 

square,  will   I 

-odd   nh    lh  ,!,„ 

lh« 

»*  if  t 
rank 


140  scnooL  or  the  battalion — part  r. 

9.r.4.  V  battalion  in  column  at  fuU  fii  tance.  having  to  form  square,  will  always  clone 
on  the  leading  sub  dh  isbm  ;  and  a  column  rioted  in  mats,  will  always,  for  tin- same 
purpose,  take  distances  by  the  head.  In  either  case,  the  second  subdivision  should  be 
careful,  in  taking  its  distance,  to  reckon  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  subdivision  in 
front  of  it. 

!V'r>.  If  a  column  by  company  should  be  required  to  form  square,  in  four  ranks,  the 
doubling  of  files  will  always  take  place  on  the  file  next  to  the  guide. 

956.  When  a  column,  disposed  to  form  square,  shall  be  in  march,  it  will  change 
■direction  as  a  column  at  half  distance  ;  thus,  having:  to  execute  this  movement,  the 
column  will  tak''  the  guide  on  the  side  apposite  to  thnt  which  the  change  of  direction 
is  to  be  made,  if  that  he  not  already  the  side  of  the  guide. 

957.  A  column  doubled  on  the  centre  at  company  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  maj 
be  formed  into  square  according  to  the  same  principles  as  a  simple  column. 

958.  When  a  battalion  is  ployed,  with  ■  view  to  the  square,  it  will  always  be  in  rear 
ff  the  right  or  left  division,  in  order  that  it  may  be  able  to  commence  firing,  pmding 
the  execution  of  the  movement.  The  double  column,  also,  affords  this  advantage, 
and  b«'ing  more  promptly  formed  than  any  other,  it  will  habitually  be  employed,  UQ- 
len  particular  circumstances  cau.se  a  different  formation  to  be  preferred. 

959.  A  battalion  in  square,  will  n«*ver  use  any  other  than  the  fire  bv  file  and  by 
rank  ;  the  color  b-ing  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  its  guard  will  not  fall  back  as  pre- 
scribed So.  41  ;   it  will  tire  like   the  men  of   the  company  of  which   it  forms  a  part. 

960.  If  the  square  be  formed  in  four  ranks,  the  first  two  ranks  will  alone  execute 
the  filings  prescribed  above  ;  the  other  two  ranks  will  remain  either  at  shoulder  or 
support  aruii. 

9C1.  The  formation  of  the  square  being  often  necessary  in  war,  and  being  the  most 
complicated  of  the  manoeuvres,  it  will  be  as  frequently  repeated  as  the  supposed  ne- 
cessity may  require,  in  order  to  render  its  mechanism  familiar  to  both  officers  and 
men. 

96'i.  In  the  execution  of  this  manoeuvre,  the  colonel  will  carefully  observe  that  the 
divers  movements  which  it  involves  succeed  each  other  without  loss  of  time,  but  also 
without  confusion  ;  for ,  if  the  rapidity  of  cavalry  movements  requires  the  greatest 
promptitude  in  the  formation  of  squares,  so,  on  the  other  ban  !,  precipitancy  always 
results  in  disorder,  and  in  no  circumstance  is  disorder  more  to   be  avoided. 

963.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cover  by  skirmishers  the  movements  of  a  col- 
umn preparing  to  form  square,  he  will  detach  for  this  parpOM  one  or  two  inner 
platoons  of  one  of  the  interior  divisions  of  the  column.  In  this  case,  the  exterior 
platoons  of  this  division  and  the  following  subdivisions,  will,  according  to  circum- 
stances, close  on  the  preceding  subdivision,  in  such  manner,  that  there  may  be  be- 
tween then  only  the  distance  necessary  for  forming  into  line. 

964.  When  the  colonel  shall  be  ready  to  form  square,  he  will,  in  o-der  to  recall  the 
skirmishers,  cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounded.  If  on  the  return  of  the  skirmishers, 
there  be  not  room  for  them  to  'orm  into  line  of  battle,  they  will  double  on  the  outer 
plateons  of  their  respective  companies. 

Column  against  cavalry. 

905.  Whfn  a  column  closed  in  mass  has  to  form  square,  it  will  begin  by  taking 
company  distance;  but  if  so  suddenly  threatened  by  cavalry  as  not  to  allow  time  for 
this  disposition,  it  will  be  formed  in  the  following   manner  ; 

066.   The  colonel  will    command  : 

1.    Column  againut  cutodry.     2.    Math. 

9C7.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  caution  it  to  stand 
fast  and  pass  behind  the  rear  rank  ;  in  the  interior  divisions  each  captain  will  prompt- 
ly designate  the  number  of  files  necessary  to  close  the  interval  between  his  company 
•ad  the  one  In  front  of  it.  The  captains  of  the  divisions  next  to  the  one  in  rear,  in 
addition  to  closing  the  interval  in  front,  will  also  close  up  th  ■  interval  which  separates 
this  division  from  the  last;  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  lace  about 
and  its  file  closers  will  parss  briskly  before  the  front  rank. 

968.  At  the  command  march,  the  guides  of  each  division  will  plasje  themselves  rapid  y 
in  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  first  division  u  ill  stand  fast,  the  fou.  .n  a  ill  fV.ce  about,  the 
outer  lile  of  each  of  these  divisions  will  then  face  outwards  ;  in  the  other  divisions 
the  files  d  signated  for  closing  the  intervals  will  form  to  the  right  and  lift  into  line, 
but  in  the  division  next  to  the  rearmost  one,  the  Brat  files  that  come  into  line  will 
close  to  the  right  or  left  until  they  join  the  rear  division.     The    files  of  each  company 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — TART   V.  141 

which  remain  in  column  will  close  on  their  outer  files,  formed    into  line-,    in  order   lo 
oreato  a  racant  space  in  the  middle  of  the  column. 

969.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  column  aynirHl  cavalry  will  bo  formed  bv  the 
same  commands  and  means.  At  the  command  march,  the  hmt  and  fourth  division* 
will  halt  and  the  latter  division  will  face  about;  the  interior  divisions  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  above. 

970  The  battalion  teing  no  longer  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.    form  column.      1     Mabch. 

971.  At  the  command  march,  the  Met  in  column  will  close  fo  the  left  and  riebt  t» 
make  room  for  shop*  in  line  who  will  retake  th'-ir  plsce*  in  column  bv  stepping  bark- 
w.inls,  except  tho^c  rinsing  the  interval  between  the  two  rear  division*,  who  will  uke 
their  places  in  column  by  a  flank  movement.  The  fourth  division  will  face  about 
the  guides  will  resume  their    places. 

972.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  pressed  as  not  to  have  time  to  order  bavonets  to  be- 
fixed,  the  men  will  fix  them,  without  command  or  signal,  at  the  cautionary  command 
eo.'nmri  againtt  cara  ry. 

973.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war,  and  with  decided  advantage,  th*  colonel 
will   frequently  cause  it   to  be  executed  in  order  to  render  it  familiar. 

AlTICLI   FirTMSTH. 

To  rally. 

974.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  sometimes  cause  fie  dii- 
pT"  to  be  sounded,  at  which  signal,  the  battalion  will  break  and  disperse. 

975.  When  thecolonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  battalion,  be  will  cause  fo  tkt  co\er  to 
be  sounded,  and  at  the  same  time  place  two  markers  and  the  color-bearer  in  tho  di- 
rection he  may  wish  to  give  the  battalion. 

976.  Kach  captain  will  rally  bis  company  about  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  place  it  m 
to  occupy  in   line  battle. 

977.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  color  company  to  be  promptly  established  against 
the  markers,  and  each  company  by  the  command  of  its  captain  will  be  aligned  on  the 
color-company  according   to  the  principles  heretofore  proscribed. 

978.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  battalion  in  column,  he  will  cause  i*> 
mtrmbly  to  be  sounded,  and  place  two  markers  before  the  position  to  be  ocaupic-d  bv 
thr  first  company,  the  captain  of  this  companv  will  rally  hi-,  coinpanv  in  rear  of  the 
two  maikers.  and  each  ot  the  other  captains  will  rail  J  hie  company  at  platoon  distance, 
behind  tho  one  which    should  precede  it  in  the  order  in  co.umn. 

AlTICLI  SlXTBfXTH. 

Ilnhs  for  mtUKBWVrdng  f>y  thr    rear    rank. 

9T9.    It  may  ortm  be  necessary  to  cause  a  battalion  to  manoeuvre  bv  the  rear  rsai 
when  the  case   presrnts  iUelf,  the  following  rules  will  be  obaer  v<  .1 

9x0.  The  battalion  beinjj  by  the  front  rank,  whru  the  colonel  sbaJI  wish  to  man  on 
▼  re  by  th*  rear  rank,  ho  will  command  : 

1.     Fart    by  ihf    rtnr     rani'.       1    Ua'tahnn.       3.     About      F«>-«. 

f>l.    If  thr  battalion  b»  deplored,  tins  movement  will   be  executed    as   has  be*-n   u»- 

dn  ated  foi  the   fire  In   the    rear  rank. 

«""?  If  Um  battalion  be  in  rolotnn  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  rifht  »r  Ufl  id  |  >i 
the  chiefs    of  subdivision,  U<  lake  their  new    j    .      .  'iron,    will  eocft    pa«s  h*    in* 

left  fist  k  of   his    subdivision,  and  tbe  file  closers  by  ibe    right    flank  ,    th«    ruide*   w«U 
plaee  th-  mi»l».-«    in  thr  rear  rank. 

983.  Ifths  eolumn  be  formr-d  bv  division,  ihe  rhiefi  nf  division  will  each  s»aas  hf 
the  interval  in  the  centre  of  his  division,  and  the  hje  elo»»ii  hr  tbe  outer  flanks  of 
tbnr  r»sf 'rtivs  comiai.i'S  ,    the  junior  captain  id  each  a  r  .     ►    .  to  tbe    n, 

rank,  and  be  cover*!  in  tl>e  front  lank    by  the  mveiiejr  eerjj ,-ai.t  ssf  tbe  |eO  m»    , 

|4     Th'  iifutrnant  c.  :  ,nel  will  place  himself  abreo.il  with  lb*  leading   sabd  v  ».    • 
and  tbr  major  abreast  with  lb*  rearmost  one. 

9M.  Tbr  battalion  bring  faned  by  the  rear  'ini,  ooflBpanioa,  diTieinno.  nod  •na£*w 
wi.l  recsor  tkeir  prior  eVaenjuaalioos  reepet.irei. .  ^^ 


142  ilOOL   OF   THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

Thf  marn-ir  I    :ir  rank  will  bo  •  the  same  commands  and 

<n  theaame  principles  u  If  the  battalion  ihoed  by  the  front  rank:  but  in  such  man- 
net  that  when  the  battalion  ihall  be  br<  ught  to  its  proper  front,  all  the  subdivisions 
tind  tl  their  regular  order  from  right  to  left. 

P87.  According  to  this  principle!  w  hen  a  column  faced  by  the  rear  rankjis  deployed, 

ibdh  iaioni  n  bich.  In  line  of  battle  by  the  front  rank,  ought  to  And  themselves  on 

the  i  ight  of  the  mbdii  Won  on  which  the  deployment  ia  made,  will  face  to  the  left : 

,-Uid  those  which  ought  to  be  placed  on  its  left,  Will    face  to  the  right. 

988.  When  a  battalion  In  line  of  battle,  faced  by  the  n  ar  rank,  is  to  be  ployed  into 

column,  the  colonel  n  ill  announce,  in  the  commands,  left  <>r  right  in/ronigjuscording  as 

it  may  be  intended  that  the  Bret  or  last  rabdiviaioo  shall  I  e  a(  the  load  of  the  column, 

because  the  first  subdivision  ia  on  the  left,  and  the  last  «>n  the  right  of  the  battalion 

by  the  rear  rank.     The  column  by  the  raer  rank  will  take  the  guide  to  the  right 

list  inbdivison  be  In  front,  and  to  the  left  In  the  reTerae  case. 

'.  A  column,  heed  by  the  rear  tank,  will  be  brought  to  its  proper  front  by  the 
means  heretofore  prescribed.  If  the  column  be  formed  by  company,  or  by  platoon, 
the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  in  order  to  take  their  new  places  in  column,  will  pass  by  the 

:   subdivisions,  now  right,  and    the  file  closers  by  the  right,  now  left. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION, 

ARRANGED   INTO   LBSS0N8. 


Lesson  First. 
Article  /.—Open  ranks,  No.  23. 
Article  II. — Close  ranks,  No.  29. 

Article.  ///.—Manual  of  arms.  No.  30.     Loading  at  will,  No.  31. 
Article  IV.— Different  fires,  by  the  front  rank,  No.  39,  and  by  the  rear  rank,  No.  iA. 

Lksson  Skcono. 
Article  /.  —  lireak  by  Company  to  the  right,  No.  69  or  to  the  left,  No.  74. 
Article  //.—March  in  column  at  the  cadenced  step,  a  considerable  distance,  No.  K.t. 

Change  of  direction,  No.  'I'M.     Diminish   and  increase  front  in  marching,  No.  190. 

March  in  retreat.  No.  170. 
Article   III.  —Halt  the  column.  No.  239.     Form  it  to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, No.  S90.     Execute  this  formation,  the  column  inarching,  No.  102. 
Article  IV. —  Execute  the  countermarch,  and  repeat  the  same  morements,  No.  361. 
Article    V.— Form  column  into  line  of  battle,  to  the  right  or  left,  by  inversion,  No. 

407. 

LSSSOU  Titian* 
Article  /.— nrcak  by  company  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left,  the  battalion  being  at 

a  halt,  No.  *7.  or  marching',  No.  \H. 
Article  II. — March  in  the  route  step,  No.  198.     Cause  to  be  executed,  at  this  gait  and 

in  double  quick  time,  the  divers  movements  incident  to  the  column  in  route,  ai.d 

cause  the  cad  need  step  to  be  resumed. 
Article  III.-  Form  the  column  forward  into  line  of  battle.  Nos.  440,  452,  faced  to  the 

i  ear  into  line  of  battle,  Nos.   466,  480,  the    battalion   being  at  a  halt,  or  marching. 

Form  the  column  forward  into  line,  and  continue  the  march  in  this  order,  No.  iio'. 
Artrilc  IV.— Form  the  column  on  the  right,  No.  41C,  or  the  left,  No.  432,  into  line  of 

battle. 
Article    l'.  — March  by  the  Hank,  No.  722,  and  form  companies  into  line,  marching. 
Article   V'/.— The  column   supposed  to  arriva»  before,   No.  175,  or  behind  the  line  of 

battle.  No.  Is4,  to  prolong  it  on  that  line. 
Article    17/.— Change  front  forward.  No.  743,  or  in  retr,  No.  7C0,  on  the  right  or  left 

of  companies,  in  directions  pcrpundicular  or  oblique. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION — IN   1,1  M3 

ArtiaU    Vlll. — March  by  the  rio-lit  flank.   No.  722,  or  by  the  l.-ft  flank,    No 
Change  direction  by  lilr.  No.  730.     Form  the  battalii>n  into  line  of  battle,  on  the 
right  or  loft,  by  BJ 

Artie\«  IX.     Pass  the  defile  in  retr<  at  bj    the  right,  N  left  fiar ) 

Wo.  MO. 

'-   Fourth. 
ArtiAr  /.—  Break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  the  battalion  being  at 
a  halt  or  marching,  No.  102. 

ArticU   //.  — March  in  column  by  division,   No.  101.     Diminish  and  in' roas-e  front  by 
company.  No.  196. 

Anir\r  II!  ■   column    to  hsif  distance  on  the  headmost  or  the  real 

division.  No.  278. 

ArtiAt  IV.—  March  in  column   at  half  distance,  No.  2S1,  and  change  direction.  No 

nr. 

ArtiA<    V.     Th'  column  being  at  half  distance,  to  form  square  at  a  bait,  No. 
marching,  No.  - 

ArtirU    VI.—  The  battalion  being  in  square  to  march  to  the  frorit.  No.  !*.r>4.     Halt  the 
square.  No.  860.     Form  column  to  march  to  the  front.  No.  863,  or  in  ntrt.it 
fc72.     He-form  the  square,  No.  B76. 

Article  TIL— Reduce  the aoaai 

.ir/irlr    I"///.— Close  the  column  in  nw  on  the  headmost  or  rearmost  division.  No 
279.  '  ' 

ArtiAr   IX.  —  March  in  column   c]o?ed  in   max,   and  chat  ■   f,\  t),(.  fr,,rit  of 

subdivisi'  i 

Article  A".— Form  the  column  against  cavalry,  No.  ' 

i  XI.  —  Take  distanros  by  the  head.  No.  32.'!  and  330,  or  on  rear  of  the  column. 
No.  333,  the  column  being  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

ArtiA*  XII.— The  column    being   by   company,  cause   to  be  executed  the  movement' 
indicated  in  Nos.  3,  4.  8,  C.  7.  S.  ft.  in  and  11  of  this   lo^on.     The  ng  at 

half  distance,  or  dosed  i i .  in  to  the  left  or  right,   into  In 

r-  ar  of  the  column,  No.  4</'J. 

AriiAr  XIII.— The  c'limn  being  by  company,  form  divisions  from  a  halt.  No.  3f,4. 
or  in  march,  No 

ArliAe  XIV.  —  The  column  b'ing  by  division,   to  form   it  to  th"  left  or  right  into  line 
of  battle  at  a  halt,  No.  401,  or  ia  march,  No.  402. 

Lesson-  Fifth. 

ArtiA<  I.  -The  battalion  b'ing  in  line  of  battle,  and  .it  a  halt,  to  ploy  it  by  dit 
into  column  closed,  in  mass  on  the  right  division,  No.  119,  "i  on  ii.<-  bft  dit 
No.  141.  or  on  in  interior  division,   No.   143,  the  rlghi   orl.lt  '  ,oT  the 

lion  marching  in  line  of  battle  on  the  right  or  left  <!  149, 

ArtiAr   il  '\c  countermarch,  No.  352. 

ArtiAr   ///.  —  Chang  ■  direction  to  th'- r  7,  to  the  loft,  Xe.  313.  bv  thr  flanV 

■f  the  c.dumn. 

Art\A'   #t  the  column   on  the  right   dh 

tl,  or  on  anv  inWior  <:  2  at  a  ball 

'    V. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  column  bv  division  at  half  distance  marchinir 

AntA'  VI. — Ploy  the  baUal  r-losed  in  mi 

t  fall 

A-tiAr    VII.      I'lov   the   battalion    into   i  :«nn.   at  ball 

closed  in  m»»,  K 

Vlll     March  in  this  order,  and  char, 

.4""!'  1%  the  column  i  '<  ■   M>0.  and   ■ 

out  suspending  the  roarr}. 

double  column  bcinf  'sure,  form  it  into  line  of  > 


141  BCIIOOL   OK   THE    BATTALION — REMARKS. 

faced  to  the  right  or  left,  No.   803,   the   column   beinij  in  mtrch,  No.  807.      Kxccate 

the  same  movement  without  suspending  the  march,  No.  810. 
Artir\t  XL-  -I'erpcndicular  or   parallel  squares,  the  battalion  being  deployed.  Rot. 
895.      Oblique  squares,  the  battalion  being   in  line  of  battle,  No.  933,  or  in  col- 

urun.  No.  946.     Squares  in  four  rank*.  No.  911. 
Lksso*   Sixth. 
Arf\c\e  /.  —  March  in  line  of  battle,    No.  5*7.      Halt  the  battalion,  No.  635,  and  align 

it.  No.  C40. 
Art\r\e   //.  —  Chance  direction  in  line  of  battle,  advancing,  No.  652,  or  in  retreat,  No. 

Ml.     Kxecute  passage  of  obstacles,  No.  883. 
_Arf»r|«   ///.  —  Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle,  No.  4>23. 
ArUrU   IV.—  Disperse  and  rally  the  battalion  in  line  of  battlo,  No    974,  and  rallj  the 

battalion  in  column  by  company,  No.  U78. 


REMARKS 

ON    TUB   SCHOOL    OF   THW    BATTALION. 

In  evcrv  course  of  instruction,  the  first  lesson  will  be  executed  several  times  ia 
the  older  in  which  it  is  arranged;  I  ut  as  soon  as  the  battalion  shall  be  confirmed  in 
th«  prin«iple»  of  the  lesson,  the  fires  will  be  executed  after  the  advance  in  linn,  and 
after  the  various  formations  into  line  of  battle,  and  into  square.  Particular  attontion 
will  be  given  to  the  lire  by  file,  which  is  that  principally  used  in  war. 

Kveiv  h-sKon  of  this  school  will  be  executed  with  the  utmost  precision  ;  but  the  sec- 
ond, which  comprehend?  the  march  in  column,  and  the  match  in  line  of  battle,  being 
of  the  most  importance,  will  be  the  oftonott  repeated,  especially  in  the  beginning. 

Great  attention  ought,  also,  to  be  given  to  the  fourth  lesson,  whi  h  comprehends 
the  mai  ch  in  column  bv  division,  and  the  dispositions  against  cavalry. 

The  successive  formations  will  sometimes  by  executed  bv  inversion. 

In  the  beginning,  the  inarch  in  column,  the  march  in  line  af  battle,  and  the  march 
hv  thr  Da  ik.  will  be  executed  only  in  quick  time,  and  will  be  continued  until  the  baf- 
tklion  idiall  have  become  well  established  in  the  cadence  of  this  step. 

The  non-endenced  step  will  be  employed  in  this  school  only  in  the  repetition  of  the 
movement*  incident  to  a  column  in   route,  or  when  great  celerity  may  be  required. 

When  it  mav  be  desired  to  give  the  men  relief,  arms  may  be  supported,  if  at  a  halt, 
ar  lnatihing  by  the  flank. 

In  marching  bv  the  front,  arms  may  be  shifted  to  the  right  shoulder  ;  but  not  in  the 
anarch  in  line  of  battle  until  the  battalions  shall  be  well  instructed. 

After  arms  have  beun  carried  for  some  time  on  the  right  shoulder,  they  may  be 
shifted,  in  like  manner,  to  the  left  shoulder. 

Wh  a  a  battalioa  is  manoeuvring,  iU  movement*!  will  bo  covered  by  skirmishers. 

All  thk  companies  will  be  exaruiaixl,  successively,  in  this  service. 

Wy-n  a  battalion,  instructed  in  this  drill,  shall  be  required  to  manoeuvre  in  the. 
evolutions  of  the  liue,  its  BOretnanta  will  be  regulated  by  the  instructions  contained 
in  the  third  v„]Uu>e  of  the  Tactic*,  for  heavy  Iulajitry,  approvod  by  the  War  Depart- 
ment, April  10th,  1835. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


' 


TITLE    FIRST. 


I 

- 
'■ 

■ 
ic  and  band,  - 
|  uard, 


- 


talion, 

.    - 
4 


TITLE  SECOND— SCHOOL  OF  TlliC  SOL: 


pap.  - 

- 
I 


■ 


20 


. 


. 


•  »        ....»,_  .,. 


11 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 


Article  1.— To  load  in  four  times, 
and  at  will,  No.  44.  -    35 

ARTICLE  II.— To  tire  bv  company  No. 
48, :         -     36 

Article  III.— To  In  K  tile  No. 
Article  IV.— To  fire  by  rank.  No. 
Articlk  V.— To  Are  by  then  ar  rank, 
No.  68,    .-.'---    3fl 

N     I  HI  HI). 

Artiii  i  L— To  advance  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, No.  84, 37 

Article  II.— To  bait  the  company, 
marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to 
align  it.  No.  :»!»,  -    38 

Article  III. — Oblique  march  in  line 
•f  battle.  No.  101,  -        -        -        -    38 

Article  IV.  -To  mark  time,  to  march 
in  double  quick  time,  and  the  back 
step,  No.  M,         -       -       ■  59 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  No. 
119, 39 

LB880S    I  "i  B  ill. 

A    nil. i.  I.— To  march  bv  the  flank. 

No.  186,  -  -  -  "-  -  -  40 
Article  II.— To  change  direction  by 

file,  No.  142, 41 

Article  III.— To  halt  the  company, 

marching  bv  the  Bank,  and  to  face 

it  to  the  front.  No.  146,  -        -    41 

I  V.     The  company  being  in 

march    by    the  Hank,  to  form  it  OH 

the  right  or  left,  by  file,  into  line 
of  battle.  No.  148,  -    41 

Article  V. — The  company  marching 
by  the  Hank,  to  form  it  by  company 


or  |  LatOOfl  Into  line,  aud  cause  it  to 
face  to  the  right  and  left  in  march- 
ing, No.  153, 4  J 

LESSON    IlKTH. 

Aiiimm  1.  To  break  into  column  by 
platoon,  either  at  a  halt,  or  march- 
ing, No,  171. 43 

Article  IL— To  march  in  column, 
No.  196, 45 

Article  Hi.— To  change  direction, 
No.  ill, -     46 

ARTICLE  IV.— To  halt  the  column  No. 
SSI,  -        -  -    47 

Abticu  V. — Being  in  column  bv  pla- 
toon, to  form  to  the  right  or  left  into 
line  of  buttle,  either  at  a  halt,  or 
marching,  No.  236,  -        -        -  48 


> .   Mxru. 

Article  I. — To  break  the  company 
into  platoons,  and  tu  it  form  the 
cempani .  No.  260,  - 

Article  1 1 . — 'Ti>  break  files  to  the  reai . 
and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  into 
line,  No.  289 

Articlk  II L— To  mar  eh  in  polamn  in 

route,    and    to    execute    the    move- 
ments incident  thereto,  No.  ZVC,    - 
Article  IV. — Countennarch,No.3S4, 

Ait  HOLE  V.— Being  in  column  by  pla- 
toon, to  farm  on  the  right  of  left 
into  line  of  battle,  No.  :i i::. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two 
rankl  into  single  rank,  and  redpi  o 
cally,  No.  359,        - 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two 
rank-  into  lour  and  reciprocally. 
at  a  halt,  snd  marching.  No.  \i'\. 


64 


INSTRUCTION   FOR  SKIRMISHER! 


t .  eneral  pi  Inciples  and  division  of  the 
Instruction, 

4.RTK  LB    FIRST. 

Deployments,  No.  l">.  Deploy  for- 
ward. No.  22.  Deploj  i>\  the  flank, 
No.  ::?.  Extend  interval-.  No.  51. 
CUsc  intervals,  NO.  69.  Kellers 
> ki i  misbers,  No.  66, 

ai;i  LCLE  SECOND. 

March  to  the  front.  No.  71.  March 
In  retreat,  No.  79.  Change  direc- 
tion, No.  SO.  March  bv  toe  Hank. 
So.  96,  -        -      '- 

\  ii  i  ii  IK   i  bird. 

Firings,  No.  106.  1  ire  at  a  halt.  No. 
107.  Fire  marching,  No.  111.  Ob- 
lervations,  No.  l-'o. 


LRTICLB    I  ol  It  IH. 

68 

Rally,  No.  127.    Uallv  by  ski  ion-, 

No.    131     Uallj   by  platoons.  No. 

137.     bally  on  the  i  escrve,  .No.  I  :'■'•. 

Form  column,  No.    143.     Rally  on 

i      the  battalion,   No.   161.     Assemble 

on  the  reeen  e,  No.  i ,'  i .    Assemble 

on  the  centre.  So.  174,  - 

59 

All  I  II  I.L    III  I  II. 

Deploi  the  battalion  a<  iklrmiab 
No'.  17x.     Ubsei  rations,    No.    194, 
RaHy,  197, 

G.'i     Manual  of  the  sabrs  fut  officers, 

Salute  of  the  color.     - 

Manual  for  relieving sentinels, 
[nsti  notion  for  parade  i  ,--t, 
Instruction  for  chief  bugler,  arc, 

66 


70 

72 
7'-' 
7  J 
7:'. 
rs 


TABLE   OF    CONTEXTS. 


IF! 


TITLE  I'OUtTH     SCHOOL  OF  Till'  i:\TTH.IOX. 


Paoi  . 


Formation  of  the  battalion,  No.  I, 
Composition  and  march  of  the  color- 

rt,  No,  4.  - 
Honors  paid  to  the  color.  No.  11. 
General   rules    and  division  of  the 
school  of  the  battalion,  So.  14, 

FIBST. 


::, 


A mic m:  I.  -'I'ii  open  and  close  rank*, 
Ifa  22, -    7.". 

A  i:  i  M  if  H. — Manual  of  arms,  No,  SO.     7»; 

\  III.     Loading  at   will,  and 

the  in  ings,  No.  •'•! .  -        -  70 


PAH  f    SKI 

Amu  M   I. — To  break  bv  company  to 

the  right,  \ii.  89.     Break  by  < i- 

panyta  the  left,  No.  74.  Break  by 
iii\  ision,  Nil.  T.'>.  To  break  bj  com- 
pany, marching,  No.  *4,  7* 

I I.  —Break  to  the  rem  by  t lie 
right  or  left  uf  companies,  So.  v7. 
Bi  i  ;ik  tn  the  rear  bj  1 1 » - •  right  or  left 
of  companies,  marching,  So,   !*4. 

Advance  or  retire  by  1 1 j «  i  ight  orle  t 
of  com|  '  D5.     Ail\  ancc 

nr  i  •  tare  by  the  right  or  left  of  com- 
panies, marching,  No.  110,  Advan- 
cing or  retiring,  by  the  right  or  left 
of  companies,  to  form  line  to  the 

!.  No.  113.-  -        -  80 

I I I.  -  Ploy  the  battalion  into 
column  on  the  first  •  1  i  ^  ision, 

.\...  I):'.  Ploy  the  battalion  intn 
■olamn  on  the  f  lurth  di\  ision, 

n.i.  Ul.     Ploi   the  battalion  Into 

dose  column  on  any  interior  divi- 
So.  143.     Battalion  being  in 

mai  ch,  to  ploy  it  int  i  column  on  the 

first  division,  So.  14''. 

foii  rman. 

Abti  Ii  in  eoluma  at  lull 

distance,  So.  164.    Column  being  in 

the  al^  • 
17o.    <  '.iliimn  am  I  of  the 

linn  o( 

line,  S  I     'umn  an  i\  ii 

Inn. I  the  line  "i  battle,  to  pi 
it  on  this  In.' ,  No.  1S4.     ' 

irijj  a  line 

• 

I. — Chang  in 

lain  at  full  ■ 

1  V.      Halt   |l 

n  tn  hall 

- 


I 
the  column  on  the  eighth  company  . 
So.  287.     Execute  this  movement, 
marching .  So.  27S, 

\  I.  March  In  column  at  half 
distance,  or  closed  In  ma  -.  So.  281     '.' I 

>  i  i  '  rage  direction  in 
column  at  half  distance,  So.  '.'s7.  -    '.<i 

\  1 1 1.  <  ')t;i7  ge  dirvctioa  of 
a  column  closed  in  ma--,  marching, 
No.  288.  Change  direction  of  a 
column,  closed  In  mass,  from  a  halt, 
So.  308, 94 

Ai:ii'-ik  IX. — Take  distances  by  th>- 
head  ")'  column,  No.  :;:':!.  Take  dis- 
tances by  the  reai  of  tin"  column, 
I,  Take  ■  I i- 1 w n<-  •son  the  head 
of  the  column,  So,  341t 

Aim  h  ii.  X.  Countermarch  of  a  col- 
umn at  full  or  lialf  distance,  So, 
361,  Countermarch  ol  a  columu 
closed  in  •  .',  - 

Am  i  hi-  XI.  -Being  in  column  l.\ 
company,  closed  in  mass,  to  form 
dtvisia  t.     To  form  t-li v  i- 

sions,  marching,  So.  370, 

run   i  hi  ::i  n. 

Ar.nri.i:  I. — Mannei   •■■   determining 

the  lino  o(  battle,  No.  101 

AbTicli  II.  To  Conn  a  column,  at  full 
distanoe,  to  the  lot t  iuto  line  nl  bal 
tie,  So.  390.  To  toi  in  ■  column  to 
id  ■  i  ight  into  line  of  battle,  N'o, 
\  column  In  inu  in  march,  to 
foi  iii  it  into  line  of  battle,  Vo,  4oj. 
To  form  a  column  into  line  ol  battle, 

and    to   mm  e    it    fol  «  aid.  Si 

By  Ini  ersioo  t..  the  right  oi  left  into 
liii<-  of  battle,  So,  4ii7.  ( 'oluum  st 
full  distance,  to  form  it  on  the  right 
or  left  into  line  of  battle,  No.  414. 
' '  .1  n ii. n  at  full  distance,  forward 
into  line  ol  battle,  So.  (40, 
ward  into  line  of  battle,  marching, 
Column  at  lull  dists 

attle, 

So.  4'  ■■ 
ma'.  -         -  |§] 

1  111       Pot  is  lion    in   i 

hatth  by  two  n  1u- 

| 

I 

1 

- 


Pace. 
- 
ing,  on  :in  in 


110 


-  115 

- 

-  119 

in 

I  in 
lint'  ;.   -        -        -  120 

battalion, 

it 
to  !'.  ■       -  121 

ion, 

-  122 

k, 

. 

ne 

•  128 

■ 


■ 

il   i 

■ 

iimn,  march 

■ 
column 

■ 

-  231 

- 


